design

Piping Design Graphics (PD_Design) Reference Guide Document Number Version Date Pages DPDS3-PB-200028A PDS 7.1 April 2002 1-650 DPDS3-PB-200028B PDS 7.2 February 2003 651-670 DPDS3-PB-200028C PDS 7.3 October 2004 671-707 DPDS3-PB-200028D PDS 8.0 SE November 2005 708-728

Copyright Copyright © 1984-2005 Intergraph Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

Including software, file formats, and audiovisual displays; may be used pursuant to applicable software license agreement; contains confidential and proprietary information of Intergraph and/or third parties which is protected by copyright law, trade secret law, and international treaty, and may not be provided or otherwise made available without proper authorization.

Restricted Rights Legend Use, duplication, or disclosure by the Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph (c) of the Contractor Rights in Technical Data clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, subparagraph (b) of the Rights in Computer Software or Computer Software Documentation clause at DFARS 252.227-7014, subparagraphs (b)(1) and (2) of the License clause at DFARS 252.227-7015, or subparagraphs (c) (1) and (2) of Commercial Computer Software---Restricted Rights at 48 CFR 52.227-19, as applicable.

Unpublished---rights reserved under the copyright laws of the United States.

Intergraph Corporation

Huntsville, Alabama 35894-0001

Warranties and Liabilities All warranties given by Intergraph Corporation about equipment or software are set forth in your purchase contract, and nothing stated in, or implied by, this document or its contents shall be considered or deemed a modification or amendment of such warranties. Intergraph believes the information in this publication is accurate as of its publication date.

The information and the software discussed in this document are subject to change without notice and are subject to applicable technical product descriptions. Intergraph Corporation is not responsible for any error that may appear in this document.

The software discussed in this document is furnished under a license and may be used or copied only in accordance with the terms of this license.

No responsibility is assumed by Intergraph for the use or reliability of software on equipment that is not supplied by Intergraph or its affiliated companies. THE USER OF THE SOFTWARE IS EXPECTED TO MAKE THE FINAL EVALUATION AS TO THE USEFULNESS OF THE SOFTWARE IN HIS OWN ENVIRONMENT.

Trademarks Intergraph, the Intergraph logo, SmartSketch, FrameWorks, SmartPlant, INtools, MARIAN, and PDS are registered trademarks of Intergraph Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. MicroStation is a registered trademark of Bentley Systems, Inc. ISOGEN is a registered trademark of Alias Limited. Other brands and product names are trademarks of their respective owners.

If You Need Assistance________________

If You Need Assistance

Intergraph Online

Our web site brings you fast, convenient, up-to-the-minute information about Intergraph’sproducts, services, and direction. Our web address is: http://www.intergraph.com.

Support

For the lasest Support Services information, use a World Wide Web browser to connect tohttp://www.intergraph.com/ppo/services/support.asp.

If you are outside of the United States, please call your local Intergraph office. The most up-to-date list of international offices and distributors is available on the web athttp://www.intergraph.com.

Intergraph Directory

The following numbers are only valid in the United States unless otherwise indicated. If youare outside the United States, please call your local Intergraph office.

Intergraph General Information

All countries — 1-256-730-2000

Training Registration

1-800-766-7701 (U.S. Only)

1-256-730-5400 (Outside the U.S.)

Mailing Address

Intergraph Process, Power & Offshore300 Intergraph WayMadison, Alabama 35758U.S.A.

You can also reach us by electronic mail at [email protected].

3

________________

Documentation Contacts

We are constantly working on updates and improvements to the documents and othereducational media. If you have any suggestions on where we can improve the documentationor where you think more information is needed, let us know. You can reach us by:

Mail Intergraph Process, Power & OffshoreDocumentation Manager300 Intergraph WayMadison, AL 35758

4

Table of Contents________________

Table of Contents

If You Need Assistance ........................................................................................................ 3Intergraph Directory ............................................................................................................. 3

Preface ................................................................................................................................................. 15

Document Purpose ................................................................................................................ 15Document Prerequisites / Audience ...................................................................................... 15Related Documents/Products ................................................................................................ 15About this Document ............................................................................................................ 16Additional Information ......................................................................................................... 17

General Conventions .................................................................................................................... 19

Keyboard Conventions ......................................................................................................... 20Terminology ......................................................................................................................... 21

1. Welcome to PD_Design ............................................................................................................... 23

Piping Design Overview .............................................................................................................. 25

Project Organization ............................................................................................................. 27Piping Designer Setup .......................................................................................................... 28Piping Design Graphics Environment .................................................................................. 29

2. PDS Environment ........................................................................................................................ 31

2.1 PD Shell .............................................................................................................................. 32

2.1.1 PD_Shell Form Conventions .................................................................................. 35Common Tools on the Forms .............................................................................................. 352.1.2 Batch Processes ....................................................................................................... 38

2.2 PD_Design Graphics ........................................................................................................... 39

2.2.1 Piping Segments ...................................................................................................... 402.2.2 Active Placement Point ........................................................................................... 412.2.3 Coordinate System Indicator, Orientation Tee, Connect Point ............................... 422.2.4 Reference Data ........................................................................................................ 45

2.3 Defining Segment Vertices ................................................................................................. 46

2.3.1 Coordinate Systems ................................................................................................. 492.3.2 Active Segment Data ............................................................................................... 50

5

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________

2.4 Precision Input and Group Operations ................................................................................ 56

2.4.1 Using the Precision Input and Group Operation Commands .................................. 572.4.2 Connect to Design ................................................................................................... 58

2.4.2.1 Point on Segment ..................................................................................... 602.4.2.2 Point on Pipe ............................................................................................ 612.4.2.3 Move Along Flow Centerline ................................................................... 622.4.2.4 Move from Reference Point ..................................................................... 632.4.2.5 Move to Coordinate Axis ......................................................................... 642.4.2.6 Bend to Tee-Type Branch ........................................................................ 65

2.4.3 Point in Space .......................................................................................................... 66

2.4.3.1 Start with Piping ....................................................................................... 67

2.4.4 Construct Point by Vessel OD ................................................................................ 682.4.5 Construct Point ........................................................................................................ 702.4.6 Distance and Direction ............................................................................................ 71

2.4.6.1 Compute Distance .................................................................................... 732.4.6.2 1/2 Piping Outside Diameter .................................................................... 752.4.6.3 1/2 Flange Outside Diameter ................................................................... 762.4.6.4 Insulation Thickness ................................................................................. 772.4.6.5 Measurement ............................................................................................ 782.4.6.6 Trigonometric Calculator ......................................................................... 79

2.4.7 Midpoint .................................................................................................................. 802.4.8 Active Group ........................................................................................................... 81

2.4.8.1 Search Criteria Segment Data .................................................................. 852.4.8.2 Search Criteria Component Data ............................................................. 87

3. Piping Commands ........................................................................................................................ 89

3.1 Placement Commands ......................................................................................................... 91

3.1.1 Using the Placement Commands ............................................................................ 933.1.2 Place Component .................................................................................................... 95

3.1.2.1 Connect to Design - Place Component .................................................... 1083.1.2.2 Point in Space - Place Component ........................................................... 1103.1.2.3 Place Pipe ................................................................................................. 1113.1.2.4 Piping Specialty ....................................................................................... 1143.1.2.5 Piping Specialty Data from Reference Database ..................................... 1153.1.2.6 Piping Specialty Data from User .............................................................. 1173.1.2.7 Piping Specialty Symbol Options ............................................................ 120

3.1.2.7.1 Valve Operators ..................................................................... 122

6


3.1.2.8 Instrument Placement ............................................................................... 1383.1.2.9 Instrument Data from RDB ...................................................................... 1393.1.2.10 Instrument Data from User ..................................................................... 1413.1.2.11 Instrument Symbol Options ................................................................... 1443.1.2.12 Instrument .............................................................................................. 1463.1.2.13 Commodity Option ................................................................................ 1483.1.2.14 Piping Assembly .................................................................................... 150

3.1.2.14.1 Valve with Flanges ............................................................. 1513.1.2.14.2 Flow Instrument Connections ............................................ 1523.1.2.14.3 Level Instrument Connections ........................................... 1533.1.2.14.4 Temperature Instrument Connections ................................ 1543.1.2.14.5 Pressure Instrument Connections ....................................... 1553.1.2.14.6 Hydrostatic Vents and Drains ............................................ 1563.1.2.14.7 Operational Vents and Drains ............................................ 157

3.1.2.15 Commodity Override ............................................................................. 1583.1.2.16 Place Component Errors ........................................................................ 1603.1.2.17 Place Component Error Data ................................................................. 1613.1.2.18 Piping Commodity Error Data ............................................................... 1623.1.2.19 Service Limits Error Data ...................................................................... 1633.1.2.20 Design Check Status Error ..................................................................... 165

3.1.3 Sketch ...................................................................................................................... 166

3.1.3.1 Accept and Start Segment ........................................................................ 1713.1.3.2 Accept and Place Component .................................................................. 1733.1.3.3 Slope On/Off ............................................................................................ 1743.1.3.4 Active Slope ............................................................................................. 1753.1.3.5 Branch on Pipe Run ................................................................................. 1763.1.3.6 Create Bypass ........................................................................................... 1783.1.3.7 Extend or Shorten Pipe Run ..................................................................... 1803.1.3.8 Intersect Underground Piping .................................................................. 1823.1.3.9 Intersect to Branch ................................................................................... 1843.1.3.10 Skewed Intersection ............................................................................... 1863.1.3.11 Intersect Sloped Pipe Run ...................................................................... 1883.1.3.12 Intersect by Angles ................................................................................. 1893.1.3.13 Intersect Plane ........................................................................................ 1903.1.3.14 Create Piping Segment ........................................................................... 191

3.1.4 Fire and Safety ........................................................................................................ 1923.1.5 Bio-pharm ............................................................................................................... 1943.1.6 Automated Placement ............................................................................................. 1953.1.7 Add Chain Wheel .................................................................................................... 2013.1.8 Add to Valve ........................................................................................................... 2033.1.9 Tap Component ....................................................................................................... 2053.1.10 Place Physical Support .......................................................................................... 2083.1.11 Place Logical Support ........................................................................................... 2153.1.12 Copy Pipe Support ................................................................................................ 2173.1.13 Copy Piping ........................................................................................................... 220

7


3.1.14 Copy and Mirror Piping ........................................................................................ 2233.1.15 Copy and Rotate Piping ........................................................................................ 2263.1.16 Place Construction Graphics ................................................................................. 229

3.2 Revise Component Commands ........................................................................................... 231

3.2.1 Reconstruct Component .......................................................................................... 2323.2.2 Revise Pipe .............................................................................................................. 242

3.2.2.1 Re-Connect Pipe End ............................................................................... 2433.2.2.2 Reconstruct Pipe ....................................................................................... 2443.2.2.3 Re-Connect End and Reconstruct ............................................................ 245

3.2.3 Delete Component ................................................................................................... 2463.2.4 Rotate Component ................................................................................................... 2483.2.5 Revise Tap ............................................................................................................... 2503.2.6 Move Pipe Support .................................................................................................. 254

3.3 Revise Segment Commands ................................................................................................ 256

3.3.1 Move Piping Segment Vertex ................................................................................. 2573.3.2 Insert Piping Segment Vertex ................................................................................. 2593.3.3 Delete Piping Segment Vertex ................................................................................ 260

3.4 Revise Group Commands ................................................................................................... 261

3.4.1 Move Piping ............................................................................................................ 2633.4.2 Move Pipe Run ........................................................................................................ 2653.4.3 Move Pipeline End .................................................................................................. 2683.4.4 Move Piping Assembly ........................................................................................... 2703.4.5 Delete Piping ........................................................................................................... 2733.4.6 Delete Piping Assembly .......................................................................................... 2743.4.7 Mirror Piping ........................................................................................................... 2763.4.8 Rotate Piping ........................................................................................................... 2783.4.9 Reconstruct Piping .................................................................................................. 280

3.4.9.1 Define Active Group ................................................................................ 2813.4.9.2 Verification .............................................................................................. 2823.4.9.3 Mechanics ................................................................................................ 2853.4.9.4 Piping Commodity ................................................................................... 2883.4.9.5 Branch Components ................................................................................. 2903.4.9.6 Valves ....................................................................................................... 2913.4.9.7 Weld Types .............................................................................................. 2923.4.9.8 Flanges ..................................................................................................... 2933.4.9.9 Pipe Supports ........................................................................................... 2943.4.9.10 Generic Entry ......................................................................................... 2953.4.9.11 Commodity Overrides ............................................................................ 2963.4.9.12 Instruments and Piping Specialities ....................................................... 297

8


3.4.10 Replace Piping ...................................................................................................... 300

3.5 Revise Data Commands ...................................................................................................... 302

3.5.1 Revise Attribute ...................................................................................................... 3043.5.2 Attribute Break ........................................................................................................ 3103.5.3 Connect Segments ................................................................................................... 3133.5.4 Revise Component Data .......................................................................................... 3143.5.5 Revise Gasket Option .............................................................................................. 3163.5.6 Revise Bolt Option .................................................................................................. 3183.5.7 Revise Weld Type ................................................................................................... 3203.5.8 Iso Drawing Limit ................................................................................................... 3243.5.9 Component Group ................................................................................................... 3263.5.10 Revise Segment Data ............................................................................................ 3283.5.11 Update Segment from P&ID ................................................................................. 3313.5.12 Re-Compute Thickness ......................................................................................... 3323.5.13 Update from RDB ................................................................................................. 3343.5.14 Load Weld Numbers ............................................................................................. 3373.5.15 Revise Inspection Keys ......................................................................................... 3393.5.16 Approve Piping ..................................................................................................... 342

3.6 Review Data Commands ..................................................................................................... 343

3.6.1 Review Attributes .................................................................................................... 3443.6.2 Review Nozzle Data ................................................................................................ 3463.6.3 Review Report ......................................................................................................... 3473.6.4 Temporary Symbology ............................................................................................ 350

3.6.4.1 Active Color ............................................................................................. 3523.6.4.2 Active Weight .......................................................................................... 3533.6.4.3 Active Line Style ...................................................................................... 3543.6.4.4 Display Only Labels ................................................................................. 3553.6.4.5 Restore Permanent Symbology ................................................................ 356

3.7 Analyze Data Commands .................................................................................................... 357

3.7.1 Design Review ........................................................................................................ 3583.7.2 Piping Clash Review ............................................................................................... 3613.7.3 Piping Clash Check ................................................................................................. 3643.7.4 Design Check Review ............................................................................................. 3663.7.5 P&ID Comparison Review ..................................................................................... 3673.7.6 Review RDB Report ............................................................................................... 3703.7.7 Review Isometric Drawing ..................................................................................... 373

4. Construction Commands .............................................................................................................. 377

4.1 Construction Place Commands ........................................................................................... 3784.2 Construction Copy Commands ........................................................................................... 3794.3 Construction Revise Commands ......................................................................................... 380

9

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 5. View Modification Commands .................................................................................................... 383

5.1 View Commands ................................................................................................................. 387

5.1.1 Move and Center View ........................................................................................... 389

5.1.1.1 Construct Point ......................................................................................... 3915.1.1.2 Distance and Direction ............................................................................. 393

5.1.2 Window Volume ..................................................................................................... 395Viewing Options ................................................................................................................. 395

5.1.2.1 Set View Orientation ............................................................................................ 3975.1.2.2 Update Window ................................................................................................... 3985.1.2.3 Rotate About View ............................................................................................... 3995.1.2.4 Match Planar Element Command ........................................................................ 4005.1.2.5 Rotation 3 Points .................................................................................................. 4015.1.2.6 Dialog View Rotation .......................................................................................... 4025.1.2.7 Color Shading ...................................................................................................... 403

5.1.3 Render Options ........................................................................................................ 404

5.1.3.1 Camera View ............................................................................................ 4065.1.3.2 Views ........................................................................................................ 4085.1.3.3 Level Symbology On ............................................................................... 4095.1.3.4 Level Symbology Off ............................................................................... 4105.1.3.5 Form Left/Right Screen ............................................................................ 4115.1.3.6 Set/Do Not Set Display Depth for Review Commands ........................... 4125.1.3.7 Review Category ...................................................................................... 413

5.1.3.7.1 Review/Revise Model Categories .......................................... 4145.1.3.7.2 Add Category ......................................................................... 4155.1.3.7.3 Remove Category ................................................................... 416

5.1.3.8 View Equipment ....................................................................................... 4175.1.3.9 Window to Named Item ........................................................................... 4185.1.3.10 Saved Model View ................................................................................. 420

5.2 View, More Commands ...................................................................................................... 4215.3 Viewing Direction ............................................................................................................... 4235.4 View Depth ......................................................................................................................... 425

6. File Manipulation Commands ...................................................................................................... 427

6.1 File Commands ................................................................................................................... 428

6.1.1 Plot Model ............................................................................................................... 4296.1.2 File Design .............................................................................................................. 4316.1.3 Exit .......................................................................................................................... 4326.1.4 Active Options ........................................................................................................ 433

10


6.1.5 Data Verification and Diagnostics .......................................................................... 437

6.1.5.1 Measure Distance ..................................................................................... 4396.1.5.2 Measure Angle ......................................................................................... 4406.1.5.3 Highlight Piping on Segment ................................................................... 4416.1.5.4 Repair Associativity to Segment .............................................................. 4426.1.5.5 Repair Associativity with Nozzle ............................................................. 4436.1.5.6 Review Attribute Linkage ........................................................................ 4446.1.5.7 Repair Graphics Linkage to Database ...................................................... 4456.1.5.8 Find Segment or Component by Linkage ................................................ 4466.1.5.9 Verify Data Integrity of Model ................................................................ 4476.1.5.10 Verify Data Integrity of Model Example ............................................... 4506.1.5.11 Verify Nozzle at Pipeline End ................................................................ 4526.1.5.12 P&ID Data Comparison Options ........................................................... 4536.1.5.13 Re-Associate Model with P&ID Database ............................................. 4556.1.5.14 Compare Segment Data .......................................................................... 4566.1.5.15 Review Coordinates (IGDS) .................................................................. 4576.1.5.16 Review Piping Job Specification ........................................................... 4586.1.5.17 Piping Materials Class Data ................................................................... 4606.1.5.18 Piping Commodity Data ......................................................................... 4616.1.5.19 Tap Properties ........................................................................................ 4626.1.5.20 Piping Job Spec Tables .......................................................................... 4636.1.5.21 Piping Materials Class List .................................................................... 4646.1.5.22 Piping Specialty Data ............................................................................. 4656.1.5.23 Instrument Data ...................................................................................... 4666.1.5.24 Review Component Placement .............................................................. 4676.1.5.25 Table List ............................................................................................... 4686.1.5.26 Component Data ..................................................................................... 4706.1.5.27 Review Component Placement Example ............................................... 4716.1.5.28 Review RDB Management Data ............................................................ 4746.1.5.29 Review COG and Weights ..................................................................... 4766.1.5.30 Verify Branch Reinforcement ................................................................ 4776.1.5.31 Verify Wall Thickness Calculations ...................................................... 479

6.2 Reference Models ................................................................................................................ 480

6.2.1 Attach Model ........................................................................................................... 4826.2.2 Automatic Attach & Verify ..................................................................................... 4836.2.3 Detach Model .......................................................................................................... 4846.2.4 Reference Model Category ...................................................................................... 4856.2.5 Reload Reference Model ......................................................................................... 4866.2.6 Reference Symbology by User ................................................................................ 4876.2.7 Reference Symbology by System ........................................................................... 488

6.3 Switch to Equipment ........................................................................................................... 489

7. Element Commands ..................................................................................................................... 491

7.1 Analyze ............................................................................................................................... 491

11

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 8. Setting Commands ....................................................................................................................... 493

9. User Commands ........................................................................................................................... 495

10. Piping Design Data Management ............................................................................................... 497

10.1 Design Checker ............................................................................................................... 499

10.1.1 Post Placement Design Checks Theory ............................................................. 50110.1.2 Sample Design Checker Report ........................................................................ 506

10.2 P&ID Comparison Report Manager ................................................................................ 512

10.2.1 Segment Data Comparison Report .................................................................... 51310.2.2 Segment Data Comparison Report Plus Update Model .................................... 51710.2.3 Update Model .................................................................................................... 52010.2.4 Named Component Existence Report ............................................................... 522

10.3 Approval Control Manager ............................................................................................. 527

10.3.1 Segment Search Criteria .................................................................................... 529

10.4 Approval Control Manager - Line ID ............................................................................. 53110.5 Database Verification Manager ....................................................................................... 53310.6 Component I/Forms Customization ................................................................................ 53410.7 Segment Data I/Forms Customization ............................................................................ 538

10.7.1 Piping Commodity Name Neutral File ............................................................. 54110.7.2 Pipe Support Model Codes Neutral File ........................................................... 54510.7.3 Segment Data Neutral File ................................................................................ 54610.7.4 Form Builder Guidelines ................................................................................... 549

10.8 Inspection Iso Data Manager ........................................................................................... 550

10.8.1 Inspection Key Loader ...................................................................................... 552

10.9 Weld Numbering ............................................................................................................. 554

10.9.1 Revise Weld Numbering Settings ..................................................................... 55710.9.2 Load Weld IDs on Segments ............................................................................. 55910.9.3 Load Weld Numbers ......................................................................................... 56110.9.4 Delete Weld Numbers ....................................................................................... 563

11. P&ID Data Transfer ................................................................................................................... 565

11.1 PDS P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer ...................................................................................... 567

11.1.1 Database Requirements ..................................................................................... 56711.1.2 P&ID Correlation Table .................................................................................... 56811.1.3 P&ID Graphical Data Transfer Setup ............................................................... 576

12


11.1.4 Load Active Data from P&ID MDB ................................................................. 58011.1.5 P&ID node numbers .......................................................................................... 58311.1.6 Update Segment Data from P&ID .................................................................... 584

11.1.6.1 Update by Node Number ................................................................. 585

11.1.7 Transfer by Equipment Number and Nozzle Number ...................................... 58511.1.8 Update From Active P&I Drawing ................................................................... 58611.1.9 P&ID Data ......................................................................................................... 58711.1.10 Name From P&ID ........................................................................................... 58811.1.11 P&ID Data Comparison Options .................................................................... 589

11.2 SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer ............................................................................ 592

11.2.1 SmartPlant Attribute Mapper ............................................................................ 594

11.2.1.1 Define Mapped Attribute as Unmapped ........................................... 59511.2.1.2 Define Unmapped Attribute as Ignored ........................................... 59511.2.1.3 Map Undefined Attribute to a SmartPlant Attribute ........................ 59611.2.1.4 Map Undefined Attribute for Partial Transfer .................................. 59611.2.1.5 Map Undefined Attribute for Default Transfer ................................ 597

11.3 SmartPlant Attribute Mapper Interface ........................................................................... 598

11.3.1 Tree View .......................................................................................................... 59811.3.2 List View ........................................................................................................... 60011.3.3 Attribute Map .................................................................................................... 60211.3.4 File Menu .......................................................................................................... 604

Appendix A: Error Messages .......................................................................................................... 605

Appendix B: AABBCC Code Listing .............................................................................................. 607

Component Sort by AABBCC Code ......................................................................................... 607Component Sort by Model Code ............................................................................................... 611Component Sort by Description ................................................................................................. 615

Appendix C: Piping Designer Forms ............................................................................................... 621

Fire and Safety ................................................................................................................ 621Instruments ...................................................................................................................... 621Piping Assemblies ........................................................................................................... 623Piping Commodities ........................................................................................................ 624Piping Specialties ............................................................................................................ 624Pipe Supports .................................................................................................................. 626Valve Operators .............................................................................................................. 626

Glossary ............................................................................................................................................... 629

13

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Index .................................................................................................................................................... 637

14

Preface________________

Preface

Document Purpose

This document is a reference guide for the Piping Designer and Piping Model Buildermodules of the PDS 3D products. PDS 3D uses interactive graphics and databasemanagement techniques to integrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plantdesign.

The Piping Designer module supports the creation and revision of 3D models which definethe design of the piping and in-line instrumentation within a plant. The Piping ModelBuilder supports the creation of piping models from a non-graphic environment using thealphanumeric piping language.

This document is designed as a reference; it is organized around the structure of the productrather than presenting a typical work flow. Use this guide when you need to look up aspecific Piping Designer or Piping Model Builder function.

Document Prerequisites / Audience

This document is intended for designers and engineers who have working knowledge of 3Dgraphics and who are familiar with the database structure. You should also be familiar with atext editor, such as vi, EMACS, PFE, or Notepad.

Related Documents/Products

MicroStation 32 software is required to operate the PDS 3D Modules. Information aboutMicroStation 32 capabilities can be found in the following documents:

MicroStation 32 Reference Guide

MicroStation 32 User’s Guide

Intergraph Corporation’s Relational Interface System (RIS)TM is required to operate PDS 3D,along with a relational database management system (RDBMS) supported by RIS. Currently,these include Informix, Oracle, and Ingres. Information about RIS capabilities can befound in the following documents:

Relational Interface System (RIS) Reference Manual

Relational Interface System (RIS) Operator Training Guide

For more information on related aspects of the PDS 3D products, consult the followingdocuments:

15

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Project Administrator Reference Guide

Reference Data Manager Reference Guide

PDS 3D VAX to Workstation Translation Reference Guide

Report Manager Reference Guide

Drawing Manager Reference Guide

Equipment Modeling Reference Guide

About this Document

This document contains front matter, numbered sections, appendices, a glossary, and an index.Much of this document is devoted to a description of the graphic commands and environmentform options.

Section 1 Provides an general information concerning all the PDS products and the PipingDesigner and Piping Model Builder modules.

Section 2 Describes the product environment. This includes information on accessing theproduct and common conventions for working in the PDS 3D modules.

Section 3 Describes the Bar Menu commands.

Sections 4-7 Describe the commands which make up the Piping Designer including operatingsteps for each command.

Section 8 Describes the transfer of data from the P&ID database to a piping model.

Section 9 Describes the Piping Model Builder and the alphanumeric piping language used toperform modeling from a non-graphics environment.

Section 10 Describes the Piping Design Data Management commands used to verify theintegrity of the model from a non-graphics environment.

Section 11 Describes the conventions that apply to the loading, updating and comparison ofpiping segment data between the P&ID Database and the piping model.

Appendices Provide additional information related to the Piping Designer and Piping ModelBuilder.

16

Preface________________

Additional Information

The following informational files are delivered with the Piping Design Graphics software inthe win32app\ingr\pddesign\ directory.

File Name Contents

README Describes changes and additions to the product since the last version. For afixes release, the fixes are appended to the top of the initial file to provide ahistory of all changes to the product. Includes Comments and Trouble Reportnumbers which describe what problems have been fixed. Provides specialnotices to the customer. Lists any exceptions made to the certification.

17


18

Preface________________

General Conventions

This document contains many visual cues to help you understand the meaning of certainwords or phrases. The use of different fonts for different types of information allows you toscan the document for key concepts or commands. Symbols help abbreviate and identifycommonly used words, phrases, or groups of related information.

Typefaces

Italic Indicates a system response, which is an explanation of what the software isdoing. For example,

The text is placed in the viewing plane.

Bold Indicates a command name, parameter name, or dialog box title. Commandpaths are shown using an arrow between command names. For example,

Choose File > Open to load a new file.

Sans serif Indicates a system prompt or message, which requires an action be taken bythe user. For example,

Select first segment of alignment

Bold TypewriterIndicates what you should literally type in. For example,

Key in original.dat to load the ASCII file.

Normal TypewriterIndicates an actual file or directory name. For example,

The ASCII report is stored in the layout.rpt file.

19


Symbols

This document uses the following symbols to represent mouse buttons and to identify specialinformation:

<C> Command button<D> Data button (usually the left mouse button)<R> Reset/reject button (usually the right mouse button)<T> Tentative button (usually the center mouse button)

Note — Important supplemental information.

Warning — Critical information that could cause the loss of data if not followed.

Technical tip or information — provides information on what the software isdoing or how it processes information.

Map or path — shows you how to get to a specific command or form.

More information — indicates there is additional or related information.

Need a hint — used with activities and labs, provides a tip or hint for doing theexercises.

Keyboard Conventions

The following list outlines the abbreviations this document uses for keyboard keys anddescribes how to use them in combination. You can make some menu selections through theuse of keyboard accelerators, which map menu selections to key combinations.

ALT Alternate keyCTRL Control keyDEL Delete keyENTER Enter keyESC Escape key

CTRL+z To hold down the Control key and press Z.ESC,k To press the Escape key, then K.

20

Preface________________

Terminology

Click To use a mouse or key combination to pick an item that begins anaction. For example,

Click Apply to save the changes.

Select To mark an item by highlighting it with key combinations or by pickingit with your cursor. Selecting does not initiate an action. Afterselecting an item, you click the action you want to affect the item. Forexample,

Select the file original.dat from the list box, then click Delete toremove it from the directory.

In addition, you would select items to define parameters, such asselecting toggle buttons. This also applies to selecting graphicelements from the design file. For example,

Select the line string to define the graphic template.

Tentative-select To place a tentative point on an existing graphic element in a designfile. If you are using the CLIX operating system, you tentative-selectby double-clicking with a mouse or pressing <T> on a hand-heldcursor. If you are using the Windows NT operating system, youtentative-select by pressing a left-button, right-button chord.

Double-click To select and execute a command by clicking the mouse or hand-heldcursor button twice in rapid succession. This term implies that you areclicking the data button (<D>) as part of a menu or dialog box action.For example,

Double-click on the file original.dat to load it into the new surface.

Drag To press and hold the data button (<D>) while moving the mouse orhand-held cursor.

Type To key a character string into a text box.

Key in To type in data and press ENTER to enter the data and execute thedefault action.

In a dialog box, pressing TAB after keying in data willenter the data and move the cursor to the next field.

21


22

1.Overview

Welcome to PD_Design________________

1. Welcome to PD_Design

PD_Design allows designers to create a 3D model of the piping and in-line instrumentsdefined in the P&ID by routing the pipelines through space.

About this reference guide

The Piping Design Reference Guide is organized by the commands in the PD_Designcommand window and the commands available on the PD_Shell. It is divided into severalchapters.

Chapter 1 - Overview, provides a technical overview of the software and how itintegrates with other PDS and Intergraph software products.

Chapter 2, Understanding PD_Design, gives a brief overview of the productenvironment. This includes information on accessing the product, common conventionsand commands used in the 3D graphics environment.

Chapter 3, Piping Commands, explains the commands used to sketch, place pipingcomponents, pipe supports, and instrument components, and review, revise, and analyzethe model data stored in the Design Database and Project Control Database.

Chapter 4, Construction Commands, explains the commands which provideconstruction aid. They explain how to place and revise graphics being created in thePDS category for non-PDS graphics.

Chapter 5, View Commands, explains the commonly used MicroStation viewcommands. These commands only manipulate the view of the model but do notmanipulate the actual model.

Chapter 6, File Commands, explains the commands used to plot and diagnoseproblems in design files.

Chapter 7, Element Commands, explains the MicroStation Analyze command.

Chapter 8, Settings Commands, explains the commands used to modify the rendering,fonts and colors used during a graphics session.

Chapter 9, User Commands, explains the commands used to specify user preferencesand button assignments on your system.

23

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Chapter 10, Piping Design Data Management, explains the commands used to verifythe integrity of the Piping model. You can perform post placement design checks,approve piping, examine database linkages, and compare the active model data againstthe posted P&ID data.

Chapter 11, P&ID Data Transfer, explains the conventions that apply to loading,updating, and comparison of piping segment data between the P&ID Database and thepiping model.

Appendix A, Error Messages, contains common message files contained in thewin32app\ingr\pdshell\msg directory.

Appendix B, AABBCC Code Listing, contains all of the AABBCC Code Listingsprovided by PDS.

Appendix C, Piping Designer Forms, contains a list of the forms used to placecomponents, piping specialties, instruments, and pipe supports.

24

1.Overview

Piping Design Overview________________

Piping Design Overview

The PDS 3D products use interactive graphics and database management techniques tointegrate the engineering and design/drafting execution of plant design.

The Piping Designer (PD_Design) is one module of PDS 3D products. It is specificallyintended for the creation and revision of 3D models in the design of the piping and in-lineinstrumentation within the plant.

This module is used to create accurate 3D piping models. Using other PDS 3D products,interferences can be checked and drawings and bills of materials can be extracted.

The maximum number of models allowed in PD_EQP is 8192.

The following illustration shows a typical piping model. The piping model contains fullydimensioned graphics for piping, piping components, instruments, piping specialties, and pipesupports.

Piping Model Graphics

You can attach other PDS 3D models to the piping model as reference files. You can accesscoordinate points from the reference models and review database attributes.

25


Piping Model With Attached Reference Models

26

1.Overview

Project Organization________________

Project Organization

Since a process plant such as a refinery can be extremely large, PDS uses the followingorganization to break the plant into smaller pieces that can be handled more easily.

A project is a convenient grouping of either all or part of the items that constitute a plant. Theproject is the fundamental structure for working in PDS. Each project contains all theinformation required to work in a PDS task.

The Project Administrator controls the creation and modification of PDS 3D projects. Eachproject consists of a project control database, project design database, piping and equipmentmodels, reference models (structural, HVAC, and electrical raceway), a set of drawings, and acollection of reference data. The reference data may be specific to one project or shared bymore than one project.

A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administratorbefore you can use any of the other PDS 3D modules.

The data associated with each model is collectively referred to as the Task Database. TheTDB is a working copy of the design data for a project which corresponds to a design volumewithin the plant. The Piping TDB includes the design file for the piping model, the databasepartitions for these models, the design files for the scaled drawings, and the design files forthe isometric drawings.

Each component in a piping model is linked to a database record which contains non-graphicinformation about the component. When a component or segment is placed in the model, thesystem creates a row in the appropriate database table(s). A row represents one instance orrecord in the database.

This graphic represents a graphics and its associated database attributes.

27


Piping Designer Setup

Project Setup

A project and all of its accompanying files must be defined with the Project Administratorbefore you can use the Piping Designer. Refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guidefor information on

Loading PDS 3D products.

Editing the control script to identify the location of the project data.

Setting up a project and creating the associated database schemas.

Accessing the PDS 3D products remotely using NFS.

Reference Data Setup

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for information on defining thereference data for a project. This data must be defined before you can work in a model. Alsorefer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator Reference Guide forinformation on selecting whether to use the approved or unapproved version of the referencedata for a model file.

Model Files

The Project Environment Manager is used to create, revise, or delete model files. Refer tothe Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on creating a piping model anddatabase files.

You can attach reference models defined in the other PDS 3D disciplines while working in apiping model. Refer to the following documents for information on creating and manipulatingmodels for the other PDS 3D disciplines.

PDS Equipment Modeling Reference Guide

FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide

PE HVAC Modeling Reference Guide

EE Raceway Modeling Reference Guide

28

1.Overview

Piping Design Graphics Environment________________

Piping Design Graphics Environment

This section provides basic information about the graphics environment for Piping Design anddescribes the conventions which are common to all the graphic commands.

Piping Design Command Menu

The command menu provides access to the PDS Piping Design commands and controls thedesign session.

Command Types

The commands on the Piping Design Command menu are classified into three basic types:

Independent Commands

Independent commands are selected independently from other commandson the menu. Selecting an independent command interrupts theactive command.

Example: PLACE COMPONENT

Dependent Commands

Dependent commands can be selected during the operation of anindependent command to provide a specific type of data to theactive independent command.

Example: CONSTRUCT POINT is a dependent command which providesinput to an independent command such as POINT IN SPACE.

Immediate Commands

Immediate commands can be selected at any point withoutinterrupting the active command. For commands with multiple inputssuch as ZOOM IN you should press <R> to terminate the command andreturn control to the active independent command.

Example: ZOOM IN

29


30

2.Gen

eral

PDS Environment________________

2. PDS Environment

The PDS 3D software supports a variety of applications. All the supported applications use acommon interface that is controlled by the PD Shell program. This ensures consistencyacross applications and minimizes the amount of time required to learn the product.

The PDS 3D modules provide a simple user interface through extensive use of forms. Themodules also provide an on-line Help capability for easy access to information while workingin the product.

The PDS 3D software uses available nucleus tools such as MicroStation and FORMS. Itsupports standard software such as NFS, NQS, and RIS required to set up data across anetwork. This design facilitates the use of non-PDS tools such as relational databases andthird party software.

The PD_Shell Environment and all batch jobs in the PDS 3D products interface toIntergraph’s Network Licensing System.

31


2.1 PD Shell

The PD Shell program provides access to the various functions that are associated with thePDS 3D Modules. You can access the Plant Design System Environment form by

Double-clicking the PD_Shell icon.

Clicking Start > Programs > PD_Shell > PD_Shell.

This executes a control script that defines all of the environment variables that are needed torun the product, and it identifies the location of the product files. These files can be locatedon the workstation or a server on the network. See pds.cmd in the Project AdministratorReference Guide for more information on this file. The script also activates the Plant DesignSystem Environment form.

This form identifies the active project(s) and provides access to all the PDS functions.

Options

Schematics Environment — Provides access to the PDS 2D modules that are used tocreate and modify piping and instrumentation diagrams, process flow diagrams, andinstrumentation database records.

Equipment Modeling — Provides access to the Equipment Modeling module, whichprovides an interactive graphics environment that is used to create and revise equipmentmodel graphics and database information.

32

2.Gen

eral

PD Shell________________ FrameWorks Environment — Provides access to the FrameWorks module, whichprovides an environment that is used to create and revise structural models, create andrevise structural drawings, and propagate structural models.

Piping Designer — Activates an interactive command environment that is used tocreate piping and in-line instrumentation in the model; revise existing model graphicsand database information; and verify the integrity of the data in the model.

Electrical Raceway Environment — Provides access to the Electrical Racewaymodule, which provides an interactive environment that is used to create and reviseraceway models and access raceway utilities.

Piping Design Data Manager — Provides access to a set of options that are used toverify the integrity of the graphic and database information that is associated with amodel.

Piping Model Builder — Enables you to create piping graphics from a nongraphicsenvironment. This module is used with PD_Design to create an accurate 3D model ofthe piping network.

Pipe Stress Analysis — Activates a set of forms that are used to extract informationfrom piping models for input to third-party pipe stress analysis products.

Interference Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to check forinterferences among project models and to control approved interferences.

Isometric Drawing Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to extractisometric drawings from piping models and to review or plot the created isometricdrawings.

Drawing Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to create and manipulatedrawings and drawing views; provide access to the interactive graphics environment fordrawings; and provide access to a plot manager and vector hidden line manager.

DesignReview Integrator — Activates a set of forms that are used to extractinformation to form label files for use in DesignReview and to review data from aDesignReview session.

Report Manager — Activates a set of forms that are used to create and revise reportformat files and report on information in a project including Material Take-Off reports.

Project Administrator — Provides access to a set of forms that are used to create aproject, create and revise project files, define project seed data, and control the project.

Reference Data Manager — Provides access to a set of forms that are used to controlthe reference data for a project including Piping Job Specification data, GraphicCommodity Data, Alphanumeric Commodity Data, Standard Note Library, LabelDescription Library, and Piping Assembly Library.

33


Other Fields

User ID — Used for access control. This field also sets the Review User ID for use inthe Interference Manager module.

If access control has been defined, you must type a valid user ID as defined by yoursystem manager to gain access to the projects. Refer to the Access Control Manger inthe Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide, for more information onusing access control.

If access control has not been defined, no entry is required for this field.

Password — Key in the password for the specified user ID.

Project List Field — Displays the defined projects for the network and allows you toselect the active project. The system lists all the defined PDS projects (2D-only, 3D-only, and 2D & 3D). An error is displayed if you select an option that is incompatiblewith the active project. For example, if the active project is a 2D-only project, youcannot access the Interference Manager module.

If access control has been defined, only those projects for which you have some level ofaccess are displayed.

Message Area — Displays prompts and messages that are associated with the activeprocess. Error messages are displayed in red.

34

2.Gen

eral

PD_Shell Form Conventions________________

2.1.1 PD_Shell Form Conventions

The following Conventions describe how to respond to the various buttons, lists, and promptsthat make up the environments. The display size of forms and dialog boxes in the non-Microstation graphics environment are independent of the size of the workstation’s displaysystem. Most forms contain the same basic features: buttons, fields, text, and other gadgets.In general, anything you find on a form is called a gadget.

Selecting Options

You move through the forms by selecting function buttons or other gadgets from the form.Select means to place the screen cursor (which appears as an arrow) on top of a screen gadgetand press <D>.

For most of the forms with scrolling lists, you can double-click on a row to select and acceptthe data in that row. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) andthen selecting the Accept button.

You use the select action to select functions, access other forms, activate data fields, togglebuttons, select from lists, scroll through data displayed on the screen, and so on.

The following summarizes other basic actions you use in the environments:

Enter — When keying in any data in a key-in field, press the <ENTER> or <Tab> keyfor the data to be entered into the system. You can also press <ENTER> or <Tab> tomove through a set of key-in fields.

Delete — If you make a mistake while keying in text, press the <Delete> key to erasecharacter(s) to the left of the cursor.

Common Tools on the Forms

There are many gadgets in the environments that are common to most or all of the forms. Thefollowing describes these tools.

Standard Commands

The forms have a set of standard buttons in the upper right corner of most of the formwindows. The available commands vary from form to form depending on the type ofoperation.

The Help button activates on-line Help for the active form. Help remains active until youdelete the Help window.

35


The Shell button exits the active form and returns control to the base manager that isassociated with the active form. For most forms this returns to the Plant Design SystemEnvironment form.

The Top button exits the active form and returns control to the top form of the active branch.

The Cancel button cancels or exits from the active form. Control returns to the immediatelypreceding form in the hierarchy.

The Accept button accepts a selection or operation. Depending on the active form or option,the active form remains active so that you can repeat a similar operation or control returns tothe preceding form.

The Restart button clears any key-in fields on the form that have values you can modify.

Scrolling List

Some screen menus have a scrolling list of projects or applications. You need to scroll a listonly if more options are available than can be displayed in the window. To scroll a list, selectthe arrow buttons on the side of the list. The list scrolls up or down depending on whicharrow you select.

The scrolling list has an arrow pointing up and an arrow pointing down. Thesearrows scroll lists line by line. There is a button that slides between these twoarrows to indicate your position on the list. To page through the list, select thespace above or below the sliding button. The list pages up or downaccordingly.

You can also select the slider and, while pressing <D>, slide the button up or down the bar.The items scroll through the window as you move the button. The size and position of thebutton on the scroll bar is an indication of the number of lines and the relative position withinthe list.

All commands that display a list of design areas or models order the list alphanumerically bythe design area number or model number in ascending order.

In some forms with scrolling lists, you can double-click on a row to select and accept the datain that row. This performs the same action as selecting a row (which highlights) and thenselecting the Accept button.

36

2.Gen

eral

PD_Shell Form Conventions________________ Key-in Fields

Screens that accept keyboard input have key-in fields. These fields are box-shaped and dark gray. You can select a key-in field and key in a new value. Abar cursor appears in the active key-in field. Key in your input, and press<Return>. To change a field, reselect the field and key in the new information.Key-in fields have a maximum number of characters depending on the item thatis being defined.

If you select a key-in field for a code-listed attribute, the system activates a form that lists thecode list values for the selected field.

MicroStation requires lowercase characters for the file specification and path name of alldesign files. Therefore, the system automatically converts any input for the file specificationand path name of a design file (such as a model or drawing) to lowercase before loading intothe Project Control Database.

Display-List Boxes

A display-list box is located at the end of some key-in fields. It lets you selectdata from a list instead of keying in information. For example, there is adisplay list associated with the Authorization key-in field shown. At the end ofthe field, there is a small box with horizontal dashes. When you select thisdisplay list box with the screen cursor, an associated list of valid input valuesdisplays. Select an item from the list to enter its value into the field.

Shift Left and Shift Right buttons

At the bottom of some key-in and display fields, there are two buttons marked witharrows. These buttons are called shift left and shift right buttons.

Often, you can key in more characters than a field display shows. Shift Left moves the textdisplay to the front of the field; Shift Right moves the text display to the end of the field.

Toggle

A toggle field on a screen menu enables you to select one of two possible choices, one ofwhich is always displayed. Place a data point on the toggle field to toggle between the twochoices.

Roll-Through List

A roll-through list shows one choice at a time of a list that can be several items long.Place a data point on the roll-through list to scroll through the available options. Theoption displayed is active.

37

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Standard Window Icons

When using this software in the CLIX environment, you can press <D> along the edge of aform or any area not occupied by a button, key-in field, or other gadget, to display a box oficons. You can manipulate form windows just like any other workstation window.

The following list defines the available window icons.

Collapse/RestoreRepaint

Pop-to-bottomModify/Resize

Pop-to-topRestore Size

2.1.2 Batch Processes

When you install the PDS 3D applications, the system creates the necessary batch queues forthat application. Refer to Loading PDS Products in the Project Administrator ReferenceGuide for a listing of the batch queues.

PDS 3D uses these batch queues to allow you to continue working in the environment whilethe system processes a request. Many of the batch processes can be delayed for submission ata specified time.

When you submit a batch process the system sends an electronic mail message to the mailpath of the default login reporting the jobs completion status. The mail message also includesany error log information.

38

2.Gen

eral

PD_Design Graphics________________

2.2 PD_Design Graphics

The screen working area is used to display and manipulate graphic information. Thisinformation is managed by MicroStation. Refer to the MicroStation 32 User’s Guide fordetails.

Refresh graphics are graphics which are temporarily drawn on the screen. Piping Designeruses refresh graphics to display placement aids such as the orientation tee and coordinatesystem indicator.

Graphics are frequently highlighted to provide visual feedback pertaining to the active input.Highlighting is normally followed by an Accept/Reject step allowing you to accept thehighlighted graphics as the desired input or to reject the highlighted graphics and selectanother graphic.

This section describes general concepts and terms which are common to the Piping Designeroperations. Refer to the individual command descriptions for information on the actualplacement/revision process.

39


2.2.1 Piping Segments

The centerline routing within a model is represented by geographically connected pipingsegments. A piping segment defines the geometry of the pipeline and contains the non-graphical data associated with that pipeline. A single piping segment can define changes ofdirection, but an additional segment is created at a branch point or an attribute break, such as asize change or a spec break.

The following illustrates the terminology associated with a piping segment.

The piping segment shown above in made up of the following:

one line route or pipeline - A-G, including F

four segments - A-C, C-E, E-G, E-F

six pipe runs - A-B, B-C, C-D, D-E, E-F, E-G

two embedded vertices - B and D

one attribute break - C

one branch point - E

three end-point vertices - A, F, and G

Segments are defined by a change in the active segment data or by a branch.

Attribute breaks are defined when any attribute changes.

40

2.Gen

eral

Active Placement Point________________

2.2.2 Active Placement Point

In this document, the term active placement point refers to the coordinate location used by thePlace Component command. It defines the point at which piping and instrumentation areplaced. You can use Connect to Design to place a piping or instrument component at anexisting, intelligent location in the model, such as a pressurized piping or instrumentationconnection (connect point), a nozzle, or a piping segment.

The system uses the orientation tee to indicate the location of the Active Placement Point.

Alternate orientations of the orientation tee can be displayed by pressing <R>.

41


2.2.3 Coordinate System Indicator, OrientationTee, Connect Point

Coordinate System Indicator

The coordinate system indicator is a temporary display symbol which represents the sixorthogonal directions (North, South, East, West, Up, and Down) of the coordinate system.

Piping Designer uses the coordinate system indicator to indicate the active coordinatelocation when

defining or manipulating a piping segment

identifying a point on a piping segment

identifying a component center or connect point

tracing a pipeline.

Orientation Tee

The orientation tee is a temporary display symbol which orients a component beforeplacement. The orientation tee is composed of two lines:

a primary axis representing the flow centerline

a secondary axis used to orient components which are not symmetrical about the flowcenterline (for example, a valve with an operator).

42

2.Gen

eral

Coordinate System Indicator, Orientation Tee, Connect Point________________

To assist you in placing piping and components, the primary axis is thickerthan the secondary axis.

When the Place Component command is active, the system displays the orientation tee at theActive Placement Point and displays related information in the screen message fields.

P **S-OUT

The stars (**) indicate the active axis of rotation (the secondary in the above message). Wheneither axis is rotated such that its orientation is in the plane of the view, the suffix IN or OUTis displayed next to P (primary) or S (secondary) indicating whether that axis is pointing in orout of that view. For example, when the secondary axis is perpendicular to the screen andoriented toward the designer, the message P S-OUT is displayed.

When placing a component with the orientation tee, you can adjust the orientation by pressing<R> or by selecting one of the Orientation Control commands. This rotates the active axisthrough the six possible orientations. When either the primary or the secondary axis ispointing out of the screen, you can rotate the orientation tee by typing the angle of rotation,measured counterclockwise around the piping segment.

Pressing the Invert button will rotate the active axis 180° from its present orientation. Forexample, an active primary axis pointing North would be rotated to point South.

Pressing the Swap button will swap the primary and secondary axis orientations. Forexample:

43


Piping Connect Points

Each component has a center and at least one connect point or pressurized end. The followingrules (in order of priority) are used to determine the assignment of connect point numbers:

1. Connect Point 1 is always at the larger end (NPD).

2. If the ends have the same NPD, but different end preparations, then Connect Point 1 isassigned an end preparation in the following precedence: Bolted, Male, Female.

The figure below shows the relationship between the component’s connect points, theorientation tee, and the component’s orientation.

Refer Appendix C to the PDS Piping Component Data Reference Guide for a detailedexplanation of connect point assignments.

44

2.Gen

eral

Reference Data________________

2.2.4 Reference Data

The Piping Designer is a specification-driven task. The Piping Job Specification is accessedduring the placement of each component or pipe. The system reads the spec and retrieves thenecessary data required to access the Graphic Commodity Library and Physical Data Libraryand to completely define the component.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for a detailed description of the PipingJob Specification and Graphic Commodity Library. Refer to the PDS EDEN InterfaceReference Guide for information on adding new symbols to the Graphic Commodity Library.

45


2.3 Defining Segment Vertices

Identify the Active Segment Point

When a segment command is active the system displays the indicator at the active segmentpoint and displays its coordinates at the top of the Sketch Piping Segment form. You canselect Confirm to use the displayed location as the first end point for the current Sketchsession.

If the accepted start point is at the end of an existing segment, that segment is extended. If thepoint is not on a segment, a new segment is created.

Identify a Segment End Point or Vertex

You can start sketching by snapping to the end point of an existing piping segment. (If yousnap to a segment vertex you will create a branch at the specified point.) When snapping to apiping segment is the only valid snap input, the system filters the graphics to only find linestring (MicroStation Type 4) elements.

When you identify a segment end point, you can extend the existing segment. The systemretrieves the active segment data from the identified segment.

If you change the active segment data after routing the first pipe run and beforeselecting Confirm, the system will create a new segment starting at thespecified point.

If you end the last pipe run of a piping segment at another colinear pipe run bysnapping to the piping segment end point or by placing a data point on acomponent at that piping segment end point, the system will compare thesegment data. If the segment data is the same, the two piping segments will beconnected automatically.

Identify an Equipment Nozzle

To start at an equipment nozzle, type the equipment name/nozzle ID (such as 105C/N1), orsnap to the nozzle datum point, and the system moves the indicator to the nozzle datum point.The system then moves the active point to the specified nozzle and updates the segmentparameters to match those of the nozzle. The form displays the equipment name/nozzle ID.

Or, place a data point over the nozzle, and the system locates the nearest nozzle. Once anozzle has been found, the system displays the equipment name/nozzle ID. You can thenaccept or reject the nozzle. If you reject the nozzle, the system locates the next nozzle in thesame vicinity.

46

2.Gen

eral

Defining Segment Vertices________________ The toggles on the Reference Model Attachment form must be set to Locate On and SnapOn in order for the system to locate equipment nozzles.

The system offsets the first pipe run by the gasket separation and extends the segment to thenext vertex you identify. The Gasket Separation attribute defines the compressed gasketthickness for all flanged components. The actual uncompressed gasket thickness is definedelsewhere in the Piping Job Specification.

Identify a Component Connect Point

You can set a segment vertex by placing a data point over a component - do not snap to thecomponent. The system moves the indicator to the component connect point.

If the Active Option is set to All Connect Points, the system locates the connect pointsby priority (CP1, CP2, ... ). You can press <R> to move to the successive connectpoints. Then press <D> to accept the location.

If the Active Option is set to Nearest Connect Point, the system locates the connectpoint closest to the cursor position when you pressed <D>.

Because each component has a piping segment, this method has essentially the same results assnapping to a segment end point. The system locates the active point at the componentconnect point and extends the existing segment to the next vertex you identify.

Identify a Point in Free Space

You can use the movement commands on the Sketch Piping Segment form (Move, Move to,and Construct Point) to start sketching at a specified point in free space (an unconnectedpoint).

Construct Point specifies a series of movement options before accepting the displayedlocation. For example, you can use this option to specify all three absolute coordinates(easting, northing, and elevation). In the Construct Point mode, you can use the Sketch /Create Branch form to move the active point in the following ways.

Select any Move option (Move East, Move North, ...) in the form and type thedistance.

Select any Move to option (Move to Easting, ...) in the form and type the absolutecoordinate.

Select the Move to Point option to snap to any element to retrieve its correspondingcoordinate. Snapping can only be used to retrieve a coordinate, not a distance.

Use a combination of the two methods described above.

The vertex is placed only when you select Confirm to indicate that you have finished theconstruction (definition) of the point. After Confirm, the Construct Point mode isdeactivated. You must reselect Construct Point if you want to define the next vertex by a

47

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ constructed point. Otherwise, select any of the Move to or Move options (without ConstructPoint mode) to place a vertex in an orthogonal direction from the previous vertex.

48

2.Gen

eral

Coordinate Systems________________

2.3.1 Coordinate Systems

Plant Coordinate System

The Plant Coordinate System (PCS) is defined in terms of a Plant Monument (PM). The PMdefines the Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates to be assigned to the center of thedesign volume of the plant.

You can select from two orientations to define the plan view of the design volume through theProject Data Manager.

EAST = MicroStation X axis (North is at the top of the screen).

NORTH = MicroStation X axis (North is to the right of the screen).

Design Volume Coordinate System

The Design Volume Coordinate System (DVCS) is defined in terms of a Design VolumeMonument (DVM). The DVM defines the Easting, Northing, and Elevation coordinates to beassigned to the center of the design volume of the model.

The system uses the global coordinate system to maintain the relationship among the variousreference models attached to the working model.

49


2.3.2 Active Segment Data

The message area of the Sketch Piping Segment form (and the Place Component forms)reviews and revises the Active Segment Data. The form displays the following basic data sothat they can be reviewed without changing forms.

Line 1: Line Number Label

Line 2: Insulation Purpose and Thickness, Heat Tracing Media, and Approval Status

Line 3: Operating Pressure and Temperature, and Design Pressure and Temperature

The Line Number Label is a composite of six parameters as follows:

The Line Number Label is updated automatically as you revise any of the parameters whichmake up the label (such as Nominal Piping Diameter or Piping Materials Class).

The Line Number Label format can be redefined (in the Label Description Library) to be acomposite of other parameters than the ones described above.

If you change the insulation purpose to N (none) or blank (undefined), theinsulation thickness and insulation density are automatically set to undefined.

When you revise the fluid codes using this command, the system provides a list of appropriatefluid codes on the basis of the piping materials class, from the Fluid Code Table within thePiping Job Specification Table Library. Any fluid code selected will be valid for theapplicable piping materials class.

50

2.Gen

eral

Active Segment Data________________ This command verifies that you have at least one of the sets of pressures and temperaturesdefined completely. For instance the pressure value, the system of units for the pressure value,the temperature value, and the system of units for the temperature value must all be definedfor one of the following conditions:

normal operating alternate operating

normal design

alternate design.

You can check the Normal Operating and Normal Design Temperatures and Pressures byusing the Temperature and Pressure Data toggle on the Piping Data Control form of theProject Data Manager and setting the toggle to Minimum. By setting the toggle to NoMinimum you will be checking the Normal and Alternate Operating and Normal andAlternate Design Temperatures and Pressures.

This toggle is not valid for piping and components that require wall thicknesscalculations, because these calculations use temperature ratings to read spectables. To preclude the entry of any pressures or temperatures for a segment,you must set the default pressure and temperature as undefined on the DefaultSegment Data form. Please refer to the Project Administrator ReferenceGuide for more information on this form.

When you revise the schedule/thickness override using this command, the system provides alist of schedule/thickness values derived from the override schedule/thickness standard notetype 332 in the projects’ Standard Note Library. This will help to prevent errors generatedfrom entering the schedule/thickness in the wrong format.

Numbers in the range of 1-499 are reserved for the English system of units, while numbers inthe range of 500-999 are reserved for the Metric system of units. Only those values applicableto the active NPD system of units is displayed, although both sets of values may have beendefined in the Reference Database.

Although the override schedule/thickness value is selected from a list as a standard note type,the alphanumeric description is loaded into the relational database.

You must ensure that the format in the Standard Note Library is consistent with theremainder of the Reference Database.

The list is not displayed if the standard note 332 has not been defined, and you must continueto type the schedule/thickness override.

51


Setting and revising the active segment data can be accomplished by the following, dependingon conditions:

Before identifying a first end point, you can set the active segment data. This is doneby placing a data point in the Active Segment Data readout field on the Sketch or PlaceComponent forms. This is advisable for use only when your first end point is a point inspace.

After identifying an equipment nozzle, the system updates the size and spec only. Youmust confirm that the other active segment data is correct and revise the incorrect data.

After you identify a piping segment or component, the system updates all activesegment data to match the piping segment or component to which you have connected.

After a piping segment or component has been placed, you must revise the activesegment data through the Revise Segment Data and Revise Attributes commands.

Commands

Brief Active Data List / Complete Active Data List — Defines the format in which todisplay the Active Segment Data. The brief list format is shown above.

Active Flow Direction — Toggles the setting for flow direction: Flow: Undefined,Flow: Bi-directional, Flow: None, Flow: Active Point is Upstream, Flow: ActivePoint is Downstream

Piping Materials Class List — Activates the Piping Material Classes form whichdisplays all the PMCs defined in the attached Specification/Material ReferenceDatabase.

52

2.Gen

eral

Active Segment Data________________

The active PMC is highlighted. To select a new PMC, place a data point over the entryand select Confirm.

Update from Existing Segment — Sets the Active Segment Parameters to match anexisting segment. Snap to a segment or place a data point over a component connectpoint. The system reads the data for the selected segment and updates the activesegment parameters.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Piping Materials Class by placing a data point over the segment datadisplayed in the lower right message area.

If you select a code-listed attribute, the system activates the Review StandardNotes form which select an entry from the associated code-list set.

If you move the cursor to a code-listed attribute by pressing <RETURN>(rather than placing a data point), the system will not activate the ReviewStandard Notes form. You can type the code-list text (such as MMA for fluidcode) or type an index number (such as 444).

Complete Active Data List Display

53


54

2.Gen

eral

Active Segment Data________________

55


2.4 Precision Input and GroupOperations

This section contains commands which are used on multiple forms throughout the product.These commands are displayed on active forms when appropriate and provide input to othercommands. There are two types of commands:

Precision Input commands provide precision input for use in placing and movingelements in the model.

Group Operations define the items to be processed for a group manipulation.

Commands

Connect to Design — Sets the active place point at an existing segment point orcomponent connect point. It moves the orientation tee and updates the segmentparameters to match those of the selected element.

Point in Space — Sets the active place point to a defined precision point. The itemplaced at the defined place point will not be connected to existing piping.

Construct Point by Vessel OD — Constructs a new active place point using the ODof a vessel. It activates the Construct Point by Vessel PD form.

Construct Point — Defines a coordinate point using multiple inputs. It activates theConstruct Point form used to define absolute or delta coordinate values. Each inputmoves the coordinate indicator until you confirm the displayed location.

Distance and Direction — Moves a coordinate point by distance or direction, and byangle.

Midpoint — Positions a coordinate point at the midpoint between two specifiedpoints, or the midpoint of a segment pipe run.

Active Group — Defines a group of components which can be manipulated by theactive command. It activates the Define Active Group form used to define thecollection of components and/or segments to make up the group.

56

2.Gen

eral

Using the Precision Input and Group Operation Commands________________

2.4.1 Using the Precision Input and GroupOperation Commands

When to Use These Commands

These commands are displayed on multiple forms throughout the design process. These aredependent commands; they are activated only when appropriate and provide input to theactive command.

Before Using These Commands

As dependent commands, these commands can only be selected from a form. Therefore, youmust select a Placement, Revision or Data command to access any of these commands.

Group Workflow

You can use these commands to provide input to the active command. For example, for aRevision command, you can use Active Group to define the elements to be revised with afence.

Operating Information

Options which do not apply to the active command are disabled (not displayed) and cannot beselected. For example, some of the group options will be disabled depending on the activecommand.

57


2.4.2 Connect to Design

This option sets the active place point at an existing segment point or component connectpoint. It moves the orientation tee and updates the segment parameters to match those of theselected element.

The following options are displayed on the form when this option is selected.

Commands

Point on Segment — Defines the active placement point at a point along a pipingsegment. See Point on Segment, page 60 for more information.

Point on Pipe — Defines and changes the active placement data on piping. See Pointon Pipe, page 61 for more information.

Move Along Flow Centerline — Moves the active place point a specified distancealong the active flow centerline. See the Move Along Flow Centerline, page 62 sectionfor more information.

Move from Reference Point — Moves the active place point a specified distance froman identified reference point in a specified direction. See the Move from ReferencePoint, page 63 section for more information.

Move to Coordinate Axis — Determines the active placement point as the intersectionof a specified pipe run with a coordinate axis and a corresponding coordinate value.See Move to Coordinate Axis, page 64 for more information.

Bend to Tee-Type Branch Connects to the vertex (not an end point) of a pipingsegment for the placement of a full-size tee-type branch. See Bend to Tee-Type Branch,page 65 for more information.

About this command

If the Active Option is set to All Connect Points, the system locates the connect points insequence (CP1, CP2, ... ). You can press <R> to move to the connect point. Then press <D>to accept the location.

If the Active Option is set to Nearest Connect Point, the system locates the connect pointclosest to the cursor position when you pressed <D>.

58

2.Gen

eral

Connect to Design________________ (Refer to the Connect Point lock under Active Options for additional information on locatingdata points.)

Following a successful component placement, the system automatically movesthe active place point along the flow centerline to the downstream connectpoint of the placed component. This places sequential (fitting to fitting)components without redefining the place point.

Operating Sequence

1. Define Active Placement Point by placing a data point over a component and acceptthe desired connect point, snap to the vertex or end point of an existing piping segment.You can also select one of the Define Precision Point Commands to define a pointalong an existing piping segment.

59


2.4.2.1 Point on Segment

This command defines the active place point at a point along a piping segment.

Before using this command

Select a command such as Connect To Design which allows the active place point to bemoved or a command such as Create Branch which define the active segment point.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Segment Pipe Run by snapping (tentative point <T>) to an endpoint of apiping segment or snap to a pipe run near the vertex to move from.

2. Specify Distance from End Point or Accept Mid Point on Pipe Run by typing thedistance to move from the selected point in working units or select Confirm to acceptthe mid point.

60

2.Gen

eral

Point on Pipe________________

2.4.2.2 Point on Pipe

This command allows you to define and change the active placement data on piping.



Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipe End by placing a data point to locate the connect point (or center) of acomponent.

2. Specify Distance from Pipe End or Accept Mid Point on Pipe by typing thedistance to move from the selected point in working units or select Confirm to selectthe midpoint of the pipe.

61


2.4.2.3 Move Along Flow Centerline

This command moves the active place point a specified distance along the active flowcenterline.


Select a command such as Connect To Design which allows the active place point to bemoved.

Operating Sequence

1. Specify Distance by typing the distance to move along the active flow centerline inworking units. For sloped pipe runs, you can specify a horizontal distance or anabsolute distance. Sloped pipe runs are determined on the basis of the angle asmeasured from the pipe run to the horizontal plane being in the range of 0.001 degreesto 25.0 degrees.

2. Accept or Re-specify Distance by selecting Accept or type in another distance.

62

2.Gen

eral

Move from Reference Point________________

2.4.2.4 Move from Reference Point

This command moves the active place point a specified distance from an identified referencepoint in a specified direction.

This option can be used to have the system determine the Active Placement Point as a pointalong a pipe run which is a user-specified distance from a connect point (or center) of acomponent or a vertex of a piping segment.



Operating Sequence

1. Identify Reference Point by snapping to a vertex of a piping segment or place a datapoint to locate a component center or a connect point to define the reference point.

2. Identify Point for Direction by snapping to a vertex of a piping segment or place a datapoint to locate a component center or a connect point to define the direction to movefrom the reference point.

3. Specify Distance by typing the distance to move from the reference point in workingunits. For sloped pipe runs, you can specify a horizontal distance or an absolutedistance. Sloped pipe runs are determined on the basis of the angle as measured fromthe pipe run to the horizontal plane being in the range of 0.001 degrees to 25.0 degrees.You can also select one of the Define Offset commands to define the distance.

4. Accept or Re-specify Distance by selecting Confirm or type another distance.

63


2.4.2.5 Move to Coordinate Axis

This option allows the system to determine the Active Placement Point as the intersection of aspecified pipe run with a coordinate axis and a corresponding coordinate value.



Operating Sequence

1. Identify Segment Pipe Run by snapping to a pipe run of a piping segment or place adata point to locate a component center or connect point.

2. Select Coordinate System Axis by selecting the coordinate axis easting, northing,or elevation from the form. Then snap to the appropriate graphics in the active model(or a reference model) or type a coordinate value.

3. Select Confirm to accept the specified point.

64

2.Gen

eral

Bend to Tee-Type Branch________________

2.4.2.6 Bend to Tee-Type Branch

This option connects to the vertex (not an end point) of a piping segment for the placement ofa full-size tee-type branch.



Operating Sequence

1. Identify Piping Segment Vertex by snapping to the vertex of a piping segment forwhich the adjacent pipe runs form a 90 degree bend (with the same angular tolerancethat is used for the placement of branches at the intersection of three piping segments).

You can use the Invert button to re-orient the orientation tee.

This option results in the following actions for use in placing the tee-type branch.

The Place Component automatically selects the branch component from the MaterialReference Database on the basis of the active segment data derived from the selectedpiping segment.

The run of the tee component is on the pipe run that corresponds to the active primaryorientation. The branch of the tee component is on the pipe run that corresponds to theactive secondary orientation.

You can use the orientation controls to determine the relative orientations of the run andbranch of the tee or invert the locations of connect point one and connect point two onthe run.

Placement of the tee-type branch automatically breaks the piping segment at the centerof the component and creates a new piping segment corresponding to the other runconnect point.

You cannot change the active second size or select a different component type prior toplacement of the tee component. An attempt to place any component other than onewhose Eden module has defined the connect point geometry type as a tee-type branchwill result in the placement failing and an error message being displayed.

65


2.4.3 Point in Space

This command sets the active place point to a defined precision point. The item placed at thedefined place point will not be connected to existing piping. You should use the Connect ToDesign option in the Place Component command to set the place point when pipingcomponents are to be connected to existing piping.

Commands

Start with Piping — Updates the active segment data and establishes an initialreference point.

Construct Point — Defines the place point using multiple inputs.

Construct Point by Vessel OD — Defines the place point using user-specified inputand data related to a user-selected vessel.

Distance and Direction — Moves the active place point by distance or direction, andby angle.

Midpoint — Defines the place point as the midpoint between two specified points orthe midpoint of a segment pipe run.

Move Along Flow Centerline — Moves the active place point a specified distancealong the active flow centerline.

66

2.Gen

eral

Start with Piping________________

2.4.3.1 Start with Piping

This command updates the active segment data and establishes an initial reference point.

Operating Sequence

1. Specify Active Placement Point by selecting an active placement point on the pipingsegment.

2. Accept/Reject by pressing <D> to accept the point or <R> to reject.

67


2.4.4 Construct Point by Vessel OD

This command constructs a new active place point using the OD of a vessel. It activates theConstruct Point by Vessel PD form.

This option is provided since lines around vertical vessels are typically routed differently thanany other lines in the plant. These lines are usually at odd angles with reference to the PlantCoordinate System, and they are located from different reference points, radially about thevessel’s centerline.

The lines that are routed down the side of a tower are always based on the clearance betweenthe outside of the vessel and the outside of the piping. So the centerline of the piping is to bedetermined on the basis of a user-specified clearance from the outside diameter of the vessel(plus the vessel insulation) to the outside diameter of the pipe (plus the pipe insulation).

You will have the option of accepting or modifying the active elevation and the activedirection so that you can connect to a nozzle on the top of a tower in the Place Component orplace a flange and orient the active secondary axis using the Construct Orientation option.You can also place an elbow using the switch to the Sketch option.

While this option is active, a tentative point finds only cylinder elements (Type23).

Field Descriptions

Angle — Allows you to specify an angle in the horizontal plane of the ActiveCoordinate System and on the basis of the active angular input option. This angle willdetermine the radial centerline to be used.

68

2.Gen

eral

Construct Point by Vessel OD________________ Top of Vessel — Displays the coordinates for the top of the selected vessel.

Bottom of Vessel — Displays the coordinates for the bottom of the selected vessel.

Equipment Number — Displays the equipment number of the selected vessel.

Equipment Description — Displays the equipment description of the selected vessel.

Vessel Data for Outside Diameter — Displays the outside diameter as derived fromthe selected vertical cylinder in the equipment model.

Vessel Data for Insulation — Displays the vessel insulation belonging to the selectedvertical cylinder.

Piping Data for Outside Diameter — Displays the piping diameter as specified in theactive segment data. You can update the active segment data.

Piping Data for Insulation — Displays the piping insulation as specified in the activesegment data. You can update the active segment data.

Clearance by User — Allows you to specify between the vessel’s outside diameter andthe piping outside diameter exclusive of the insulation of the equipment and the piping.The total clearance will be the sum of the clearance you specify, the equipmentinsulation, and the piping insulation.

Construct Point — The system generates this point by on the radial centerline of thevessel with consideration to the user-defined elevation, the user-defined angle fromPlant North, and at the user-defined clearance between the vessel’s outside diameter andthe pipe outside diameter which includes the insulation for each.

69


2.4.5 Construct Point

This command constructs a new active place point using multiple inputs. It allows you tocompute an offset distance or define absolute or delta coordinate values. Each input movesthe coordinate indicator until you select Confirm to accept the displayed location and sendthe coordinate location to the active independent command. See Compute Distance, page 73for more information.

Commands

Distance and Direction — Specifies the exact distance the point will be moved and inwhat general direction. This option can be used in conjunction with the ConstructPoint command. Refer to Distance and Direction, page 71 formore information.

Compute Offset — Allows you to compute an offset.


Select a command which allows the active place point to be moved.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Next Vertex by using the available options to construct a point.

2. Select Confirm to accept when the coordinates are correct.

70

2.Gen

eral

Distance and Direction________________

2.4.6 Distance and Direction

This command moves the active place point a specified or calculated distance in a specifieddirection or along a defined angle.

Settings in the model’s type 63 data determine the form display for horizontal and verticalangles. For the horizontal angle, the system will display either CCW from East or CW fromNorth. For the vertical angle, the system will display either CCW from Plan or CW fromPlan.

You can use the Project Data Manager to define the horizontal angle in one of two ways:

The angle can be measured as a clockwise offset (looking at a plan view) from North(North=0). (This is the default setting in the delivered seed data.)

The angle can be measured as a counterclockwise offset (looking at a plan view) from East(East=0).

Commands

Move to — (absolute move) - These options define the absolute coordinate for the pointin the direction to be defined. Select the direction and type the absolute coordinate orsnap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate.

Move — (delta move) - These options define the change in the selected coordinate forthe point in the direction to be entered. Select only one of the directions.

Horizontal Angle / Vertical Angle — Type the angles in decimal degrees or select oneof the standard angles from the bottom of the form. Negative values are acceptable forboth options. The vertical angle is positive for a point above the active point andnegative for a point below the active point.

71

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ For Vertical Angle you can also type a Percent Slope rather than a value in decimaldegrees. To enter a Percent Slope, use the format x %. The format xxx.x is stillread in degrees. As with degree measurements, you can use a negative sign (-) in frontof the slope value in order to have a downward slope.

Active Direction — The direction is defined by the segment pipe run at the activesegment point.

Up from Slope — The active direction is defined as perpendicular to the slopeddirection and in a generally upward direction. In other words, the vertical angle isincreased by 90 degrees.

Down from Slope — The active direction is defined as perpendicular to the slopeddirection and in a generally downward direction. In other words, the vertical angle isdecreased by 90 degrees.

Invert — The direction is defined by rotating the horizontal and/or vertical anglesabout the active flow centerline.

The Up from Slope and Down from Slope options specify a point thatrepresents the end of a pipe run normal to a sloped pipe run. These options areintended for use when the previous point is a branch point on a sloped piperun.

72

2.Gen

eral

Compute Distance________________

2.4.6.1 Compute Distance

This command defines a precision offset. All commands on this form are dependentcommands and can only be selected during the operation of a command which requires adistance input. They can be used in conjunction with the Define Precision Point commandsto move the active place point by a known offset. The defined offset is stored in User Data.If an attribute such as NPD is revised, an offset by 1/2 Pipe OD will be recalculated whenreconstructing the line.

Commands

1/2 Piping Outside Diameter — Defines an offset equal to one half of the outsidediameter of the specified pipe. This offset can be used as input to the Define PrecisionPoint commands.

1/2 Flange Outside Diameter — Defines an offset equal to one half the outsidediameter of the specified flange. The offset can be used as input to the DefinePrecision Point commands.

Insulation Thickness — Defines an offset equal to the insulation thickness of thespecified item. The offset can be used as input to Define Precision Point commands.

Measurement — Measures the active distance between two points and allows you tochange the active distance by adding or subtracting distances.

Trigonometric Calculator — Defines an offset equal to any side of a right triangle.Define two inputs for the calculator, and the system displays the calculations for theremaining data.

Select Direction — Identifies the direction to move from the flange when computingdistance.

73


Operating Sequence

1. Specify Distance by selecting any of the four options from the menu.

2. Identify Component or Pipe or Accept Active Data

3. Select Confirm to accept.

The system calculates and displays the Active Distance.

4. Select Confirm to accept or Re-specify Distance.

74

2.Gen

eral

1/2 Piping Outside Diameter________________

2.4.6.2 1/2 Piping Outside Diameter

This command defines an offset equal to one half of the outside diameter of the specified pipe.This offset can be used as input to the Define Precision Point commands. For example, itcan be used with Construct Point to move the constructed point a distance of 1/2 pipe OD inthe direction specified by the active Move field in the Construct Point form.


Select a command such as Construct Point which may use an offset for input.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Component or Pipe or Accept Active Data by selecting Accept to use theactive segment outside diameter or place a data point to locate a component connectpoint or pipe to use the outside diameter of the selected item.

2. Accept or Re-specify Distance by selecting Accept or select another option from theform.

75


2.4.6.3 1/2 Flange Outside Diameter

This command defines an offset equal to one half the outside diameter of the specified flange.The offset can be used as input to the Define Precision Point commands. For example, it canbe used with Construct Point to move the constructed point a distance of 1/2 flange OD inthe direction specified by the active Move field in the Construct Point form.



Operating Sequence

1. Identify Component or Pipe or Accept Active Data by selecting Accept the activesegment flange diameter or place a data point to locate a component connect point touse the flange diameter of the selected item.

2. Accept or Re-specify Distance by selecting Accept or select another option from theform.

76

2.Gen

eral

Insulation Thickness________________

2.4.6.4 Insulation Thickness

This command defines an offset equal to the insulation thickness of the specified item. Theoffset can be used as input to the Define Precision Point commands. For example, it can beused with Construct Point to move the constructed point a distance of the insulationthickness in the direction specified by the active Move field in the Construct Point form.



Operating Sequence

1. Identify Component, Pipe, or Segment or Accept Active Data by selecting Acceptto use the active segment insulation thickness or place a data point to locate acomponent connect point or pipe to use the insulation thickness of the selected item.You can also snap to a piping segment to use the insulation thickness of the selectedsegment.

2. Accept or Re-specify distance by selecting Accept or select another option from theform.

77


2.4.6.5 Measurement

This command measures the active distance between two points and allows you to change theactive distance by adding or subtracting distances.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify First Point by select an initial measuring point.

2. Identify Second Point by selecting another point to end the measurement process.Four new options and a Plus/Minus toggle appear on the form.

3. Accept Measured Distance by selecting Accept to use the measured distance as theactive distance or select any of the four choices displayed on the screen (Minimum,Easting, Northing, Elevation) to change the active distance. You can also select thePlus/Minus toggle to add or subtract distance from the active distance.

4. Accept or Re-specify Distance by selecting Accept to save the active distance.

78

2.Gen

eral

Trigonometric Calculator________________

2.4.6.6 Trigonometric Calculator

This command defines an offset equal to any side of a right triangle. You define two inputsfor the calculator, and the system displays the calculations for the remaining data.

Select one of the boxes next to one of the lengths and select Confirm, and the system uses itto define the active distance.

79


2.4.7 Midpoint

This command positions the active place point at the midpoint between two specified points,or the midpoint of a segment pipe run.



Operating Sequence

1. Identify First Point by snapping to the vertex of a piping segment or place a data pointto locate a component connect point or pipe end.

2. Accept/Reject by pressing <D> to accept the identified point or press <R> to reject thepoint and identify another point.

3. Identify Second Point by snapping to the vertex of a piping segment or place a datapoint to locate a component connect point or pipe end.

4. Accept/Reject by pressing <D> to accept the identified point or press <R> to reject thepoint and identify another point.

5. Accept Mid Point by selecting Accept.

80

2.Gen

eral

Active Group________________

2.4.8 Active Group

This command is used to define a group of components which can be manipulated by anothercommand. It activates the Define Active Group form used to define the group as a collectionof all the components and segments

on the same pipeline,

within the entire model,

within a specific design volume,

within a rectangular fence volume,

within a screen view volume,

on a portion of a pipeline as defined by limit points,

in a specified component list.

You can also specify search criteria to restrict the elements in the group based on databaseattribute values.

You can use the resulting group as input to the active command such as Copy Piping. Theresulting group may also be used by subsequent commands during the current design session.

81


Commands

Pipeline — Identifies all the components and segments on a pipeline. Snap to asegment or place a data point to locate a component on the desired pipeline. This pointalso defines the reference point for the group.

Limit Components — This command works differently depending on the commandfrom which it was activated. For all copy commands the system works as follows:

Identifies a set of components on a portion of pipeline. When you select the LimitComponents command, you are prompted to identify the first and second limitcomponent. Once you have specified at least two components and defined a referencepoint (a point somewhere within the range of the two boundaries of the limited portionof the pipeline), the system highlights the portion of pipe including the two componentsselected to identify the limit points.

You can place a data point to locate a component center on the pipeline, or you canidentify piping or tubing provided that the piping or tubing does not include a branchcomponent to define limit points.

Care must be used to obtain the desired results when using the LimitComponents option. The resulting group must meet the restrictions ofthe command which processes the active group. For example, the CopyPiping option only works on complete segments inside the group; youcannot process a partial segment.

For the commands listed below, the system follows a different procedure. The itemsthat are limited become a separate network that must be reconnected.

Revise Segment DataApprove PipingRe-Compute ThicknessUpdate from Reference DatabaseRevise Component Data

When you select the Limit Components command, you are prompted to identify thefirst and second limit component. Once you have specified at least two components anddefined a reference point (a point somewhere within the range of the two boundaries ofthe limited network), the system highlights the network of components, including thetwo components selected to identify the network.

The limited network becomes a separate entity from the remainder of the pipingnetwork enabling you to independently reconstruct the components within the networkwithout effecting the rest of the model. Breaks are automatically created in the pipingsegments at the boundaries of the limited network.

You can use a number commands after defining a network. For example, the user mayfirst use the Mirror Piping command, then the Revise Segment Data command, andfinally use the Reconstruct Piping command on the same limited network.

82

2.Gen

eral

Active Group________________ When reconstruction has taken place, the system displays a dialog box that allows youto Accept to Re-Connect Limited Network. This option re-connects any pair of pipingsegments at the boundaries of the limited network to the remainder of the pipeline. Ifthere is a discrepancy in the requirement to reconstruct, the system does not performthe re-connection.

Re-Connect Limited Network — Re-connects any pair of piping segments at theboundaries of a limited network to the remainder of the pipeline. This option onlyappears when a limited network has been defined using the Limited Componentscommand.

Model — Defines the group as all the elements in the active model.

When using the model active group with a revision command, the system will notautomatically highlight the entire model as it does with the other group options.Instead, the system displays the message Warning: Model has been selected.

Component List — Select this option to manually identify a set of components. Youcan append components to an existing component list created during the currentcommand. You can snap or place a data point to identify the component to be includedin the group.

Active — Sets the group definition as the most recently defined group for the currentdesign session.

Volume — Select this option to identify all the components and segments within aspecified design volume. Key in the desired Easting, Northing, and Elevationcoordinates.

Rectangular Fence — Select this option to identify all the components and segmentswithin a rectangular fence volume. Place two data points to define the diagonal of arectangular fence.

This Fence is based on view coordinates, not PDS coordinates. If you modify the viewscale in which the fence was defined (as with Zoom Out or Window Area), you willchange the fence definition.

The rectangular fence option can be used for many operations in the pipingenvironment. When selecting objects with a fence, pay close attention to theobjects that are highlighted during selection, as the selection process variesaccording to the operation being performed.

View — Identifies all the components and segments within the design volumerepresented by a specified screen view. You must use an orthogonal view to define avalid group. Using an isometric view or other skewed view may not produce theexpected results.

Search Criteria Component Data These options define a set of search criteria whichlimits the effected elements within a volume based on database attributes. You candefine search criteria for any combination of attribute values.

83

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Highlight Active Group/No Highlighting — This option allows you to specifywhether or not an active group is highlighted after it is selected. The default HighlightActive Group is reset after each active group is defined.

See Search Criteria Segment Data, page 85 and Search Criteria Component Data, page 87for more information about these options.


This command can only be selected during the operation of a group manipulation command.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by selecting the Active Group option fromthe active form.

2. Select Active Group Option by selecting the option to define the active group. (Seethe form options below.) If search criteria is required, define the search criteria first andthen define the group.

3. Identify Reference Point by snapping or place a data point to locate a component andidentify the reference point for the group. This point should be a point within thedefined boundaries (model, view, fence, or pipeline).

For the Limit Components option, the reference point must be acomponent WITHIN the defined limit points. The reference pointverifies which portion of the pipeline will be included in the activegroup. The reference point cannot be one of the limit points.

4. Accept or Select Other Option by selecting another option to redefine the group orselect Confirm to accept the group definition.

84

2.Gen

eral

Search Criteria Segment Data________________

2.4.8.1 Search Criteria Segment Data

You can define search criteria to restrict the elements to be processed based on databaseattributes. The default is no search criteria. This option define search criteria for the segmentattributes.

The database information for each element within the volume is validated against thespecified attribute, operators (such as greater than and less than), and attribute values. If anelement’s database information meets the restrictions established by the search criteria and iswithin the volume defined, the element will be effected by the group manipulation command.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Attribute by selecting the attribute to be restricted or select Other and select theattribute from the display window.

The system displays the selected attribute and displays a list of operators.

85


2. Select Operator by selecting the required operator to define the search criteria.

3. Specify Attribute Value by typing the attribute value. For a sub-string search, type astring to appear anywhere within the attribute value (do not use wild cards). If theattribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the standard notelibrary. Select the value and select Confirm.

4. Accept or Select And/Or Operator by selecting AND to specify an additionalcondition or select OR to specify an alternative condition or select Confirm to acceptthe defined search criteria.

86

2.Gen

eral

Search Criteria Component Data________________

2.4.8.2 Search Criteria Component Data

You can define search criteria to restrict the elements to be processed based on databaseattributes. The default is no search criteria. This option define search criteria for componentattributes.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Attribute by selecting the attribute to be restricted or select Other and select theentity from the display list.

2. Select the attribute from the display window.

The system displays the selected attribute and displays a list of operators.

87


3. Select Operator by selecting the required operator to define the search criteria.

4. Specify Attribute Value by typing the attribute value. For a sub-string search, type astring to appear anywhere within the attribute value (do not use wild cards). If theattribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the standard notelibrary. Select the value and select confirm. The system validates the input anddisplays the defined search criteria.

5. Accept or Select And/Or Operator by selecting And to specify an additionalcondition or select Or to specify an alternative condition, or select Confirm to acceptthe defined search criteria.

88

3.Pip

ing

Piping Commands________________

3. Piping Commands

The Placement commands enable you to place pipe, piping components, pipe supports, andinstrument components. You can also place assemblies (predefined sets of components).

The Revision commands enable you to move, delete, and rotate existing piping. You canrevise individual components, piping segments, or all of the elements on a pipeline or definedby a group operation.

These commands enable you to review or revise the model data stored in the Design Databaseand Project Control Database. The data associated with each model is collectively referred toas the Task Database. The Task Database is a working copy of the design data for a projectwhich corresponds to a design volume within the plant.

Each component in a piping model is linked to a database record which contains non-graphicinformation about the component. When a component or segment is placed in the model, thesystem creates a row in the appropriate database table.

The Review Revise and Analyze commands enable you to review or revise the model datastored in the Design Database and Project Control Database. The data associated with eachmodel is collectively referred to as the Task Database. The Task Database is a working copyof the design data for a project which corresponds to a design volume within the plant.

Each component in a piping model is linked to a database record which contains non-graphicinformation about the component. When a component or segment is placed in the model, thesystem creates a row in the appropriate database table.

Command Groups

Placement Commands Places pipe, piping components, pipe supports, and instrumentcomponents. You can also place assemblies (predefined sets of components).

Revise Component Commands Revises/appends different positional and/or taskdatabase information on PDS piping components. Any rotation, addition, orreconstruction of PDS piping components must be done through these commands andnot through MicroStation manipulations due to the interdependence of graphic anddatabase information.

Revise Segment Commands Revises piping segments in the active model. Thecommands perform both graphical and task database revisions. You cannot useMicroStation commands to change piping segments as they will not update the userdata associated with the piping segment.

Revise Group Commands Moves, deletes, rotates, and reconstructs existing piping.You can revise a pipeline of those elements defined by an active group.

89

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Revise Data Commands Revises information in the Design Database and definesadditional information for components. You can only revise information for items inthe active model.

Review Data Commands Reviews information in the Design Database or reviewsexisting report files. You can only view the information you cannot make any changes.

Analyze Data Commands Reviews information related to the model analysisoperations. You can also check for interferences within the active model file.

90

3.Pip

ing

Placement Commands________________

3.1 Placement Commands

These commands enable you to place pipe, piping components, pipe supports, and instrumentcomponents. You can also place assemblies (predefined sets of components).

A combination of Sketch, Place Component, Automated Placement, Place Pipe Support,and the Copy Commands is normally used to model a complete pipeline.

Commands

Using the Placement Commands — Outlines the prerequisites, group workflow, and basicinstructions for using the Placement commands.

Place Component — Manually places components (such as valves or fittings),piping, instruments, or assemblies.

Sketch — Defines the centerline geometry for a pipeline and define the attributes ofthe piping segment.

Automated Placement — Places items such as pipes, elbows, reducers, branchcomponents, and flanges on the piping segment according to the attributes and thegeometry of the segment.

Add Chain Wheel — Modifies the operator on an existing valve component.

Add to Valve — Modifies the operator on an existing valve component.

Tap Component — Adds a tap to an existing component.

Place Pipe Support — Places physical pipe supports.

91

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Place Logical Support — Places logical pipe supports.

Copy Pipe Support — Copies existing pipe supports.

Copy Piping — Creates graphics by copying existing components in the model.

Copy and Mirror Piping — Creates graphics by copying and mirroring existingcomponents.

Copy and Rotate Piping — Creates graphics by copying and rotating existingcomponents.

Construct — Places non-intelligent graphics in the model for use as construction aids.

92

3.Pip

ing

Using the Placement Commands________________

3.1.1 Using the Placement Commands

When to Use These Commands

These commands can be used at any time in the design process. In the process of creating apiping model you will use a combination of these commands depending on the desired result.

Before Using These Commands

Placement operations are specification-driven. The system accesses the Piping JobSpecification during the placement of each component or pipe. The system reads the spec andretrieves the necessary data required to access the Graphic Commodity Library and PhysicalData Library and to completely define the component.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for a detailed description of the PipingJob Specification and Graphic Commodity Library. Refer to the PDS EDEN InterfaceReference Guide for information on adding new symbols to the Graphic Commodity Library.

Group Workflow

You can use these commands in any order depending on the elements to be placed and theexisting model graphics. A typical approach is to use

Sketch to route the layout of a pipeline and define the attribute data for the pipeline.The attribute data can be defined manually, copied from another segment, or updatedfrom information in the P&ID database.

Place Component to place components such as valves, instruments, or commodityoverrides along the segment pipeline.

Automated Placement to populate the pipeline with fittings and pipe.

Mechanics

The Copy Piping, Copy and Mirror Piping, and Copy and Rotate Piping commandsautomatically change the approval status of piping segments and piping components to notapproved during the copy operation.

You cannot make any of the following changes to approved piping.

Create a new piping segment in the Sketch command by connecting to previouslyplaced, approved piping.

93

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Place new piping components, instrument components, piping, or tubing in the PlaceComponent command by connecting to previously placed, approved piping.

Place new pipe supports in the Place Pipe Support command by connecting topreviously placed, approved piping.

Place new pipe supports in the Place Logical Support command by connecting topreviously placed, approved piping.

94

3.Pip

ing

Place Component________________

3.1.2 Place Component

This command places components in the active model design file. You can place onecomponent at a time and control the characteristics for the specified component (such as endpreparation and rating). You can place connecting components one after another, for fitting-to-fitting layout or move to a point in the model, place other components and then place pipeconnecting the two ends.

The placement of a piping commodity will respect the option for geometric industry standardspecified in the Project Data Manager. You can specify the geometric industry standardrange to be used for the company practice Physical Data Library. Refer to the ProjectAdministrator Reference Guide for more information on defining the geometric industrystandard range to be used. Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide forinformation on defining a company practice Physical Data Library.

First, use the Connect to Design - Place Component or Point in Space commands toredefine the active place point. Second, select the desired component from the form or activateone of the other component placement forms (Valves, Bends, Branches, Fittings andFlanges), or select Name from P&ID to select the piping or instrument component to beplaced by identifying a component in the P&I drawing. The system determines the commodityitem name or component number to be used in reading from the Reference Database.

Once the component is defined, use the orientation controls to manipulate the orientation teeand define the desired component orientation.

The system places the component at the active place point using the defined orientation, andwrites the associated nongraphic data into the database.

95

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ This form changes depending on the component being placed. The figure below shows thebasic form layout.

Commands

Load from P&ID — Uses data defined in the P&ID Task to define the activeparameters. See Load Active Data from P&ID MDB, page 580.

Name from P&ID — Selects piping or instrument components by identifying acomponent in the P&ID. The system determines the commodity item name orcomponent number when reading from the Reference Database. No other componentdata is read from the P&ID database.

The system checks the piping job specification to make sure the active parametersmatch a component in the spec. If the component is found the system displays the itemname and new item name of the selected component. For example,

Commodity: 6Q1C01 - GAT

If the component is not found the system displays the message Commodity Item Not inSpec and activates the Piping Commodity Error Data form.

Equivalent NPD — Allows you to connect metric piping with English piping. It readsthe Nominal Piping Diameter table from the Piping Job Specification Tables andretrieves the equivalent value for the active nominal piping diameter, if provided. Ifthere is an equivalent value for the active nominal piping diameter, the equivalent valuebecomes the active nominal piping diameter and the current nominal piping diameterunits are changed to the equivalent nominal piping diameter units. The active first sizeand second size are updated automatically to the active nominal piping diameter. Referto the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for more information on the NPDtable.

96

3.Pip

ing

Place Component________________ Orientation controls — Alters the orientation of the component being placed.

East/West/North/South/Up/Down — Defines the orientation of the active axis. Selectthe appropriate orientation command from the form by placing a data point over thedesired orientation. The system will then update the orientation tee to the selecteddirection and displays the updated orientation tee on the screen.

Cursor and Keyboard Controls - You can press <R> to orient the active axis in 90degree increments.

- When the secondary is active, the axis rotates 90 degrees clockwise around theprimary looking from the origin towards the other end (right- hand rule).

- When the primary is active, the axis rotates to orthogonal directions that cyclefollowing the order shown below.

You can type an angle to rotate the active axis by a specified angle.

You can snap to a graphic element (such as a nozzle) to orient the axis toward theidentified point.

Construct — Allows you to construct the orientation of the active axis of theorientation tee, when required to place a fitting-to-fitting change-of-directioncomponent or a branch component at a non-orthogonal orientation. This option displaysthe Construct Point form which allows you to construct a point on the basis of theActive Placement Point. After you have defined the point, the active axis of theorientation is formed as a vector from the Active Placement Point to the constructionpoint you have specified. The active bend angle is computed on the basis of theresulting active orientation.

See Construct Point, page 70 for more information.

Secondary / Primary Axis Toggle — Displays the active orientation axis. You canplace a data point over the displayed axis to switch between changing the orientation ofthe secondary axis and the orientation of the primary axis. It performs the samefunction as pressing <D> in a view other than the form view.

The active axis is also indicated by stars (**) in the screen message fields. (Forexample, P **S-OUT indicates the secondary axis is active.)

97

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ You cannot select the Primary axis when the component is being placed on an existingsegment or is being connected to another component.

The system displays the opposite axis description if possible. If you cannot change theactive axis, the system displays the message: Flow Centerline cannot be Revised.

When the primary axis is active, the message Warning: Active Flow C/L BeingRotated is displayed on the form.

Invert — Inverts the active axis. This option will not work if connected at a bend.

Swap — Swaps the active primary and secondary orientations. It is only valid whenthe placement is NOT connected to another component.

The system swaps the primary and secondary orientations and displays an updatedorientation tee on the screen. The message Component Orientation cannot berevised is displayed if the component is being placed on an existing segment which isnot at a bend or is being connected to another component.

You can use SWAP when connected to a segment vertex to select the alternate flowdirection, or when connected to a segment end or branch point to select the placementdirection.

Segment / Component — Displays either the active segment data or the componentdata for the connected component. For instance, the nominal piping diameter, endpreparation, pressure rating, schedule/thickness, and table suffix are displayed whereappropriate.

Placement Mode Options — Select the placement connect point number. The connectpoint placement options are: center, connect point 1, connect point 2, connect point 3,and face of flange.

A connect point is usually an end of a piping component to which another componentor pipe (with compatible properties) is connected. The connect point stores thedescription of the component at that end. It indicates the flow centerline orientation,and properties such as diameter, end preparation (flanged, welded,...), and rating.

98

3.Pip

ing


You can specify the connect point placement mode at any time before selecting thecomponent to be placed. This is necessary, as the connect point mode determines greenand red properties for use in accessing the PJS. For a more complete listing ofcomponent’s and their connect points, see Coordinate System Indicator, OrientationTee, Connect Point, page 42 section for more information.

The Face of Flange (FF) option is associated with the active placement mode.Therefore, you must define the active placement mode (if other than the default) beforeselecting the face of flange option. During component placement, the system adjuststhe placement point automatically by one-half gasket separation such that it is notnecessary to revise EDEN modules to account for this offset. The system stores themethod of placement by face of flange in the user data of the component.

Sketch — Activates the Sketch form which allows you to define the centerline of apipeline prior to the actual placement of the piping items. See Sketch, page 166 formore information.

Fire and Safety — Activates the Fire and Safety form which allows you to place firehydrants and other safety components. See Fire and Safety, page 192 for moreinformation.

Bio-pharm — Activates the Bio-pharm form which allows you to place bio-pharmaceutical components. See Bio-pharm, page 194 for more information.

Integral Gasket — Sets the gasket gap to designate a built-in gasket for the selectedcomponent.

Gasket Option — Displays the gaskets choices available for the selected component.

Pre-Define Data — Used to change attributes of a selected component before it isplaced.

Connect to Design — Sets the active place point at an existing segment point orcomponent connect point. See Connect to Design - Place Component, page 108 formore information on this option.

Point in Space — Sets the active place point to a defined precision point. See Point inSpace - Place Component, page 110 for more information on this option.

99

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Place Pipe — Places a specified length of pipe/tube/hose. See Place Pipe, page 111for more information on this option.

Piping Specialty — Places a specialty item. See Piping Specialty, page 114 formore information on this option.

Instrument — Places an instrument. See Instrument Placement, page 138 for moreinformation on this option.

Commodity Option — Places a component or pipe with options defined in the spec(such as end preparation or rating) other than the default option. See CommodityOption, page 148 for more information on this option.

Piping Assembly — Places a predefined set of components. See Piping Assembly,page 150 for more information on this option.

Commodity Override — Places a component out of spec. See Commodity Override,page 158 for more information.

Field Descriptions

Piping Class — Changes the active piping materials class. Type the new pipingmaterials class. The system validates the new piping materials class against the pipingjob spec. If an error occurs, the system displays the message Error in finding:pmc_name.

First Size / Second Size — Changes the active first and/or second size of thecomponent to be placed without changing the segment nominal piping diameter. Youcan select either of the size fields to modify the displayed value. Type the desireddiameter in NPD units (inches or millimeters). The system validates the NPD for thecurrent piping materials class. If you enter an invalid key-in the system displays themessage Invalid Nominal Piping Diameter. If the diameter is not within the currentpiping materials class range, the message Not Valid for pmc_name is displayed.

The second size applies to the reduced end of a component; therefore, second size isalways smaller or equal to the First Size. If you type a second size diameter which islarger than the first size, the system displays the message Second Size is greaterthan First.

The actual connect point associated with the second size will vary depending on thecomponent. For a reducer, the CP2 diameter is the second size. For a reducing tee, theCP3 diameter is defined by the second size, and the CP1 and CP2 diameters are equal tothe active NPD.

Bend Angle — Specifies the bend angle to be used in placement if the componentbeing placed is at the end of the segment. This field is only valid when placingbranches or bends. Type the desired bend angle to be used for placement.

100

3.Pip

ing

Place Component________________ Component Number — Defines the tag prior to placement of the component in thedesign file. The tag is limited to 20 characters and is optional for components andpipes, but is required for piping specialties and instruments.

Coordinate Location Area — Identifies the location coordinates of the active segmentpoint, shown in the model by the coordinate system indicator, on the basis of theplant/design volume coordinate system.

Valve Operator Display Field toggle — Controls the display of operators during valveplacement. This option is valid only in the Primary and Valve components. Select thisfield to toggle the field among the following settings:

Valve Operator Display from RDB — Uses the value of the modifier attribute in thePJS to determine the valve operator display (ON or OFF). The modifier is expressed asa code list number from CL550 (operator/actuator type). If the value is a positivenumber (such as 3) the operator is placed with the valve. If the value is a negativenumber (such as -3) the operator is not placed with the valve.

Valve Operator Display On — Places the graphics for the operator with the valve,regardless of the default setting in the spec.

Valve Operator Display Off — Does not place the operator graphics with the valve,regardless of the default setting in the spec.

Message Area — Contains message fields on the left which identify the activecommodity item. See Active Options, page 433 for a description of the toggles thataffect the way information is displayed in this field. Additional lines on the right sideof the form define the Placement mode and Connectivity.

Active Data The right side of the message area which contains a summary of the activeparameters as described in the section for the Sketch command.

The left side of the display area enables you to set the Piping Materials Class, the FirstSize, and the Second Size, independently of the active segment parameters.

You can select Data from P&ID to use data defined in the P&ID Task to define theactive parameters. See Load Active Data from P&ID MDB, page 580 .

101


Mechanics

Connect Point for Piping Commodities

The following piping commodities are designated with an asterisk preceding the commodityname as 2-cp reducing components. The placement mode automatically places them on thebasis of the active NPD at the Active Placement Point.

6Q2C27 concentric reducer6Q2C28 eccentric reducer6Q2C32 reducing coupling6Q2C35 concentric swage6Q2C36 eccentric swage6Q2C44 bushing6Q2C46 reducing insert6Q2C84 90 degree reducing elbow6Q2C91 90 degree reducing street elbow

Flanges

You can place an orifice flange with two taps, where the taps are oriented 90 or 180 degreesapart depending on the Reference Database definition.

You must define the number of taps for the orifice flange in the PipingCommodity Specification Data Table, PDtable_202, of the Material ReferenceDatabase as follows. By default, the orifice taps are oriented 180 degrees aparton the outside diameter of the flange, when the modifier column is 2. If yourequire an orifice flange with taps oriented 90 degrees apart, specify the -2 inthe modifier column.

When two taps are being placed 90 degrees apart, the first tap is oriented 45 degreesclockwise from the active secondary axis for the orifice flange. The second tap is oriented 45degrees counter-clockwise from the secondary axis (by the right hand rule on the basis of theactive primary axis and the active secondary axis). The interactive design checker works thatsame way as the Design Checker command does for checking pressure ratings for thru-boltedcomponents. See the Post Placement Design Checks Theory, page 501 for information.

For flanges when the Default Commodity Selection/Automated Commodity Optionstoggle is set to Automated Commodity Options, the system displays a list of the optionaland default components.

– If the flange being selected is to be connected to a thru-bolted end (without bolt holes), ifanother component does not exist at the other end of the thru-bolted component.

– The flange is not being placed by the bolted end or the flange is not being connected topreviously placed piping, the list of flange options is presently displayed.

102

3.Pip

ing


General

When you are connected to previously placed piping or a nozzle, the Place Componentoption automatically determines the placement mode for piping, piping commodities,commodity options, piping specialties, and instruments in the following situations.

For components where the green end preparation differs from the red end preparation, theplacement mode is determined on the basis of the active design checks data and the endpreparation of the component being placed. For example, in placing a branch nipple withMTE x PE ends on a branch component with an SWE end, the branch nipple automatically isplaced such that its PE end matches the existing SWE end of the branch component.

The placement mode is set to by CP 1 if the green end preparation in the Material ReferenceDatabase for the piping commodity, piping specialty, or instrument is compatible (in terms ofDesign Checks) with the previously placed piping at the Active Placement Point. Otherwise,the placement mode is set to by CP 2, when the red end preparation is compatible.

This procedure does not apply to setting the placement mode for branch components,reducers, or flanges.

You can override the placement mode at any time.

Handwheel Operators

When you place a handwheel operator, dimension_c is loaded into the database for the pipingvalve or the instrument valve if the applicable Piping Eden modules for handwheel operatorshave been revised accordingly.

This dimension addition provides the handwheel diameter for the applicable valve for theAdd Chain Wheel option.

Once the Piping Eden modules for the applicable valve operators have been updated in theproject’s Graphic Commodity Library, the handwheel diameter is loaded into the database forvalves when you use the Reconstruct Component or Reconstruct Piping option toreconstruct them.

Nozzles

When connecting to a nozzle, the system uses the piping material class specifications definedon the Nozzle Data Transfer form in the Reference Data Manager module.

When the piping materials class is undefined (blank) for the nozzle but the transfer hasbeen enabled for the piping materials class, you are prompted that the material class isundefined. You have the option to accept the active materials class or type a differentvalue. This option is intended for nozzle that did not have the piping materials classdefined in the equipment model.

103

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ When the data transfer for the piping materials class has been disabled, you are notwarned that the nozzle’s piping materials class is undefined, and the active pipingmaterials class is used automatically.

For any previously created piping model, the data transfer is enabled for pipingmaterials class by default, you are warned that the nozzle’s piping materials class isundefined.

NPD

If you break a piping segment to insert a reducer or swage (concentric only), the systemchanges the NPD of all downstream piping segments that have the same size as the new NPDand are connected to the end of the existing piping segment, where the size change takesplace. You cannot place an eccentric reducer on existing piping segments.

Olet-type Branch

You can place an olet-type branch such that the centerline of the branch piping does notintersect the centerline of the header pipe. You can place a reinforcing pad, a reinforcingweld, or a weldolet as a non-radial branch depending on how the commodity name is defined.

The commodity name for a non-radial reinforcing pad must be preceded by ’(’.The default piping commodity name for a non-radial reinforcing pad is6Q3C81.

The commodity name for a non-radial reinforcing weld must be preceded by’)’. The default piping commodity name for a non-radial reinforcing weld is’6Q3C83’.

The commodity name for any other non-radial olet-type branch must bepreceded by ’#’. The default piping commodity name for any other non-radialbranch will be ’6Q3C85’.

You specify the offset from the branch point (the location on the centerline of theheader pipe).

The non-radial branch is not always tangential to the header pipe. However, you mayaccept the tangential option without knowledge of the required dimension for the non-radial branch to be tangential with respect to the header pipe.

For purposes of reconstruction, the non-radial branch offset is loaded into the relationaldatabase as dimension_b. Likewise, the branch component’s user data records yourmethod of selection of the offset as either tangential or by user.

When the non-radial branch is tangential, the branch pipe will protrude into the headerpipe by 0.5 the header pipe’s piping outside diameter. Otherwise, the branch pipe willprotrude into the header pipe by 0.375 the header pipe’s piping outside diameter.

104

3.Pip

ing

Place Component________________ You are prompted for the direction of the branch’s offset from the header since theprimary axis of the orientation tee represents the orientation of the header andsecondary axis represents the branch orientation.

Wall thickness calculations do not apply unless you have specified it in the pipingcommodity specification data.

Branch reinforcement calculations do not apply for reinforcing pads and reinforcingwelds.

You are prompted for pad thickness, pad width, and weld size for a reinforcing pad.

The connect point geometry type in the branch component’s user data will indicate thatthe component represents a non-radial branch. The user must specify the branchcomponent’s ’connect point geometry type’ as NON_RADIAL_BRANCH.

Reinforcing pads

When you place a reinforcing pad, dimension_c is loaded into the database for the length ofpipe that will be purchased to fabricate the reinforcing pad.

The sum of the piping outside diameter and two times the reinforcing pad width is thecalculation used to define dimension_c. This data will be available for inclusion in a MTOreport or on an isometric drawing’s bill-of-materials.

Tee-type Branches

You can orient a tee-type branch being placed at the end of a previously created pipingsegment such that the center of the tee-type branch is at the end of the piping segment and thebranch leg of the tee-type branch (CP 3) lies along that piping segment using the SwapOrientation or Center option on the Place Component form.

The following procedure is used to orient a tee-type branch in this manner.

Use the Connect to Design option to connect to the end of the previously placed pipingsegment and accept the default extend piping segment mode.

Rotate the secondary axis of the Active Orientation Tee to reflect the desired orientationof the tee-type branch’s header. The secondary axis of the Active Orientation Teeshould reflect a vector from the branch’s center to CP 2 of the branch component to beplaced.

Select the Swap orientation option. This will changes the primary axis of the ActiveOrientation Tee to reflect a vector from the branch’s center to CP 1. Likewise, thesecondary axis will be changed to reflect a vector from the branch’s center to CP 3(along the previously placed piping segment).

105

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Select the Center option, select the tee-type branch component, and accept forplacement.

Welds

The system updates the applicable weld data when you place a piping component, a pipe, oran instrument component by its welded end to previously placed piping to form a weldedjoint.

If the previously placed weld type for the welded end was defined by system, the followinginformation applies to the welded end of the component being placed that is coincident withthe Active Placement Point.

The weld type of the welded end of the component being placed is automaticallydefined as a weld type by system on the basis of the project’s Weld Type Table.

If the Weld Type Table is loaded, the system defines the weld type using the Weld TypeTable on the basis of the fabrication category. A Weld Type Table is delivered inwin32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data called weld.tbl. A sample of the data that it containsis shown below.

Table_Data_Definition ’Weld_Type_Table’

No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1Units= INT, INT, INT

! Fab Cat Fab Cat Weld Type

1 1 11 5 211 7 211 15 211 16 211 17 211 25 211 27 21

If a Weld Type Table has not been defined for the project, the weld type is revised tothe default weld type value, ’shop weld’ (11).

If the weld type of the previously placed component differs from that determined by theproject’s Weld Type Table, the weld type of the applicable end of that previouslyplaced component is updated to the same weld type as the component being placed onthe basis of the Weld Type Table.

The weld number at the welded joint is automatically determined on the basis of thetwo welded fittings. If the previous weld number was formed on the basis of acomponent that was deleted, the weld number will be determined on the basis of thetwo weld fittings. The weld number is formed from the entity number, the occurrencenumber (including the partition number), and the connect point number from one of thecomponents at the welded joint.

If the previously placed weld type for the welded end was defined by user, the followinginformation applies to the welded end of the component being placed that is coincident withthe Active Placement Point.

106

3.Pip

ing

Place Component________________ When a component is placed, the system automatically defines the weld type for the newcomponent as the same as the weld type of the component to which it is being connected.

The component that is being placed inherits the weld type from the applicable end ofthe previously placed component.

The applicable end of the component being placed inherits the weld number of theapplicable welded end of the component to which it is being connected. If the previousweld number had been formed on the basis of a component that has been deleted, theweld number will be re-formed on the basis of the other component.

The weld number is formed from the entity number, the occurrence number (includingthe partition number), and the connect point number from one of the components at thewelded joint.

The weld features provides the weld data in the situation where you insert a componentwith one or more welded ends in a previously placed pipe so that the pipe is shortenedand a second pipe is placed.

In this situation, the weld type is revised at both ends of the component being insertedand at the corresponding ends of the two adjacent pipes, if applicable. The weld type isnot revised unless the project’s Weld Type Table dictates a value other than the defaultshop weld.

The weld features provides the weld data in the situation where you insert a pipingassembly with one or more welded ends in a previously placed pipe using the PipingAssembly such that the pipe is shortened and a second pipe is placed.

In this situation, the weld type is revised at both ends of the piping assembly beinginserted and at the corresponding ends of the two adjacent pipes, if applicable.Likewise, the weld type will be revised, if required, for any intermediate weld withinthe piping assembly. The weld type is not revised unless the project’s Weld Type Tabledictates a value other than the default shop weld.

The weld features provides the weld data in the situation where you insert a componentin a previously placed pipe such that the pipe is shortened, where the component endconnected to the pipe is welded.

In this situation, the weld type is revised at the end of the component being inserted thatis adjacent to the pipe that is being shortened and at the corresponding end of that pipe,if applicable. The weld type is not revised unless the project’s Weld Type Table dictatesa value other than the default shop weld.

107


3.1.2.1 Connect to Design - Place Component

This option sets the active place point at an existing segment point or component connectpoint. It moves the orientation tee and updates the segment parameters to match those of theselected element.

The current connect-to-design status is displayed in the center of the lower portion of theform. The status options are

Placement Connected to Piping

Placement Connected to Centerline Routing

NOT Connected to Piping.

Following a successful component placement, the system automatically movesthe active place point along the flow centerline to the downstream connectpoint of the placed component. This enables you to place sequential (fitting tofitting) components without redefining the place point.

About this command

If the Active Option is set to All Connect Points, the system locates the connect points insequence (CP1, CP2, ... ). You can press <R> to move to the connect point. Then press <D>to accept the location.

If the Active Option is set to Nearest Connect Point, the system locates the connect pointclosest to the cursor position when you pressed <D>.

(Refer to the Connect Point lock under Active Options, page 433 , for additional informationon locating data points.)

Operating Sequence

1. Specify Active Placement Point by placing a data point over a component and acceptthe desired connect point.

2. Snap to the vertex or end point of an existing piping segment, or place a data point overthe datum point of an equipment nozzle in an attached reference file. You can alsoselect one of the Define Precision Point Commands to define a point along an existingpiping segment.

The system updates the active segment data to match those of the identifiedsegment, moves the active placement point to the specified location, andretrieves the active flow direction.

108

3.Pip

ing

Connect to Design - Place Component________________ Connecting to a component connect point or nozzle also updates the activeprimary and secondary axis of the orientation tee to those defined at theconnect point.

109


3.1.2.2 Point in Space - Place Component

This option sets the active place point to a defined precision point. The item placed at thedefined place point will not be connected to existing piping. You should use the Connect toDesign option to set the place point when piping components are to be connected to existingpiping.

Since the placement point is not connected to an existing pipe, the system displays themessage Warning: NOT Connected to Piping.

If the selected point is in the vicinity of an existing piping component, the system displays themessage Point in Vicinity of Existing Component. If a component is placed at this locationit may result in an interference or otherwise invalid model. See Point in Space, page 66 fordetailed descriptions of the options available on this form.

110

3.Pip

ing

Place Pipe________________

3.1.2.3 Place Pipe

This option enables you to place a pipe in the model. You can place a specified length of pipefrom the active placement point. The placed pipe can be of variable or fixed length. You canalso define commodity options using the Commodity Options command.

You can review the commodity options for a specific component or pipe. The applicablecommodity options are displayed in numerically ascending order by option code. You canselect the option to place that component. Commodity option 1 is not included in this list.

You must have optional pipe specified in you .pcd file with the correct option number per CL400 (701 - 717 for mixed end options) and add definition for the Red connect point of thepipe, following the standard rule that the Green connect point has a lower code listed value forend prep than the Red connect point to use the Commodity Options command for pipe. Thefollowing example is from a .pcd file:

PIPING 1 2 2 301 - S-STD 5 - - - - - - PAAAAAWAAA - PIPE 100 100 142 52 15 -

PIPING 706 2 2 301 - S-STD 5 2 2 391 - S-STD 5 PAAAAAPREP - PIPE 100 100 142 52 15 -

The sequence in which the commands are selected to display and select thecommodity options are different. For components, select the CommodityOptions command and then select the type of component from the form. Forpipe, select the Place Pipe command and then select the Commodity Optionscommand. The system lists the available selections for that particular item.

Refer to Commodity Option, page 148 for more information on the Commodity Optionscommand.

Placing pipe on a pipe run of an existing piping segment will automatically extend (ifrequired) that piping segment to the end of the pipe being placed. (The piping segment willnot be extended, if the pipe being placed extends beyond either a branch point or an attributebreak.)

Refer to Automated Placement, page 195 for more information on placing pipe on existingsegments.

The system uses the Pipe Length Threshold Table to determine the minimum allowable pipelength which can be placed for a given diameter. If the active Pipe Length Threshold Tabledoes not exist in the Piping Job Specification Table Library or if the specified length does notexceed the minimum length the pipe will not be placed.

The system verifies the temperature and pressure service limits when the placement of piperesults in the creation of a piping segment.

Purchased length pipe has its length defined in the pds_sort_code attribute of the PipingCommodity Specification Data Table of the Material Reference Database. Purchased lengthpipe can be placed or extended so that the remainder length of the last pipe does not exceedthe pipe length threshold, as specified in the active Pipe Length Threshold Table. Theprevious pipe and the last pipe are placed with equal pipe length. (The length equals one-halfof the sum of the purchased length from the specification data and the remainder length).

111


Commands

Move from Reference Point — Specifies the distance to the pipe’s end from areference point you define (other than the Active Placement Point) along the active flowcenterline.

Move to Coordinate Axis — Places a pipe along the active flow centerline to theintersection of a coordinate you define.

Variable Length/Fixed Length — Defines the length of the pipe being placed with thelength specified as a key-in. The default is variable length pipe.

The ability to extend pipe is limited to variable length pipe. In other words, ifyou select the fixed length option, two successive operations of the Place Pipecommand will result in two independent pipes of pre-determined length.

For data point placement, the pipe being placed is variable length regardless ofthe setting for the toggle.


Before selecting this command, make sure the active segment point and orientation aredefined so that you can route pipe along the active flow centerline.

This option will place piping, tubing, or hose depending on the active value of thePipe/Tube/Hose Indicator in the active segment data.

112

3.Pip

ing

Place Pipe________________

Operating Sequence

1. Place Pipe by typing the desired length of the pipe, or place a data point over acomponent connect point. Or you can select the Move from Reference Point option orthe Move to Coordinate Axis option.

2. Identify Reference Point Or Accept Active Reference Point by identifying thereference point.

3. Specify Distance by typing the distance to move from the reference point.

4. Select Coordinate System Axis by selecting the axis to intersect from the three axisbuttons that display.

5. Identify Point or Specify Coordinate by identifying the point along the chosen axisfor the pipe end.


113


3.1.2.4 Piping Specialty

This option places a Piping Specialty in the active model. Piping Specialties (also referred toas piping specialty items) can be defined in the Piping Job Specification (PJS), or definedinteractively at placement time.

Commands

Specific / Typical — Provides specific or typical piping from the PJS. These optionscan only be used if Piping Specialty data is pre-defined in the PJS.

Geometry and Spec Data / Geometry and Partial Spec Data — Activates a series offorms which enable you to enter the variable characteristics and dimensions for thePiping Specialty. No entry is required in the PJS; at placement a single occurrence ofthe item is placed in the Task Database. (Refer to the Reference Data ManagerReference Guide for information on defining a Piping Specialty in the PJS.)

Field Description

Component Number Type a component number in the Component Number field toselect the item for placement if you have piping specialty items defined in theReference Database.

114

3.Pip

ing

Piping Specialty Data from Reference Database________________

3.1.2.5 Piping Specialty Data from Reference Database

These options enable you to place Piping Specialty Data using information defined in thePiping Job Specification.

The display setting of the specialty material description for piping specialties is defined withthe Active Options command.

Specific Piping Specialties

The system activates the List of Specific Piping Specialties form which lists all the itemsdefined in the PJS which meet the nominal piping diameter criteria imposed by the active firstsize and the active second size. It lists the available piping specialties in alphanumericallyascending order by component number.

Commands

Display Data for Specialty — Displays the attribute values defined for the selecteditem.

Typical Piping Specialties

This option searches the PJS for all the specialty items that have blank tag numbers or optioncodes greater than 20,000.

The system activates the List of Typical Piping Specialties form which displays each pipingspecialty with a description from the RDB which meets the nominal piping diameter criteriaimposed by the active first size and the active second size. It lists the available pipingspecialties in alphanumerically ascending order by piping specialty model code andcomponent number.

115


If the specification data is defined in the Material Reference Database but thecomponent number is undefined (blank), the system prompts for thecomponent number prior to placement.

Once you specify the component number for the piping specialty, the materialdescription is re-displayed on the basis of the component number (if such amaterial description is defined). Otherwise, the material description whichwas determined on the basis of the model code is displayed.

Commands

Display Data for Specialty — Displays the attribute values defined for the selecteditem.

116

3.Pip

ing

Piping Specialty Data from User________________

3.1.2.6 Piping Specialty Data from User

These options enable you to interactively define a Piping Specialty to be placed in the model.The system activates a series of forms used to define the variable characteristics anddimensions for the specialty item.

Geometry and Spec Data

The system activates the Piping Specialty Components form.

Commands

Placement Options — Returns the Piping Specialty Placement form.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Parametric Shape by selecting the desired parametric shape for placementfrom the form. The system displays the spec data retrieved for the selected parametricshape.

117


2. Specify Attribute Value by typing any modifications to the data.

3. Select Confirm when the modifications are complete. The system verifies anymodifications to the data and displays the form for the specific parametric shapeselected.

118

3.Pip

ing

Piping Specialty Data from User________________

Geometry and Partial Spec Data

The system activates the Piping Specialty Components form.

Commands


Operating Sequence

1. Select Parametric Shape by selecting the desired parametric shape from the form.The system displays the appropriate form for the parametric shape you selected.

119


3.1.2.7 Piping Specialty Symbol Options

You can select the following options when placing a specialty item.

Commands

B=A — Sets the dimension for B equal to the setting for A (for symmetricalcomponents). This option is only active when it is possible for the two dimensions tobe the same value.

Operator Menu — Activates the Valve Operators form which enables you to selectthe valve operator to be associated with the valve.

120

3.Pip

ing

Piping Specialty Symbol Options________________

Operating Sequence

1. Select Valve Operator Type by selecting the desired valve operator type from theform. The system displays the appropriate form for the selected valve operator type.

2. Specify Dimensions for Operator by entering the dimensions for the operator.

3. Select Confirm to accept. The system returns to the selected parametric shape form.

121


3.1.2.7.1 Valve Operators

This option enables you to place a valve operator in the active model.

Commands

Handwheel — Displays the Valve Operator - Handwheel form.

Inclined Handwheel — Displays the Valve Operator - Inclined Handwheel form.

Special Handwheel — Displays the Handwheel - Special Type form.

Lever — Displays the Valve Operator - Level form.

Lever Quick Action — Displays the Valve Operator - Lever Quick Action form.

Top Mount Gear — Displays the Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel form.

Special Wrench — Displays the Valve Operator - Special Wrench form.

Short Wrench — Displays the Valve Operator - Short Wrench form.

Long Wrench — Displays the Valve Operator - Long Wrench form.

Short T-Handle — Displays the Valve Operator - Short T-Handle form.

Long T-Handle — Displays the Valve Operator - Long T-Handle form.

Inclined Top Mount Gear — Displays the Gear Top Mounted Inclined Handwheelform.

122

3.Pip

ing

Valve Operators________________ Inclined Side Mount Gear — Displays the Gear Side Mounted Inclined HandWheel form.

Side Mount Gear Type A — Displays the Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel-Type Aform.

Side Mount Gear Type B — Displays the Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel-Type Bform.

Side Mount Gar Type C — Displays the Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel C form.

Diaphragm Type 4 — Displays the Valve Operator - Type 4 form.

Diaphragm Type 6 — Displays the Valve Operator - Type 6 form.

Valve Operator - Handwheel

The Valve Operator - Handwheel option is used to specify the dimensions for a handwheel.

Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the width of the handwheel.

B — Indicate the length of the handwheel.

Operator Weight — Indicate the maximum operator weight for the handwheel.

123


Valve Operator - Inclined Handwheel

The Valve Operator - Inclined Handwheel option is used to specify the dimensions for aninclined handwheel.

Field Descriptions



Angle — Indicate the angle for the inclined handwheel.

Operator Weight - Indicate the maximum weight for the handwheel.

Special Handwheel

The Handwheel - Special Type option is used to identify the width, length and operatorweight for a unique handwheel.

124

3.Pip

ing

Valve Operators________________

Field Descriptions



Operator Weight - Indicate the maximum weight for the handwheel.

Lever

The Lever option is used to identify the dimensions of a lever valve operator.

125


Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the length of the lever.

B — Indicate the length of the right portion of the lever handle.

C — Indicate the length of the left portion of the lever handle.

Operator Weight - Indicate the maximum weight for the lever.

Lever Quick Action

The Valve Operator - Lever Quick Action option is used to identify the dimensions of aquick action lever.

Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the height of the lever.

B — Indicate the height of the B portion of the lever handle.

C — Indicate the length of the C portion of the lever handle.


126

3.Pip

ing


Top Mount Gear

The Top Mount Gear option displays the Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel form to specifythe dimensions of the Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel.

Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the length of the A portion of the handwheel.

B — Indicate the length of the B portion of the handwheel.

C — Indicate the length of the C portion of the handwheel.

D — Indicate the length of the D portion of the handwheel.

E — Indicate the length of the E portion of the handwheel.

F — Indicate the length of the F portion of the handwheel.


Special Wrench

The Special Wrench option is used to specify the dimensions of a non-standard wrench.

127


Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the length of the A portion of the wrench.

B — Indicate the length of the B portion of the wrench.

Operator Weight - Indicate the maximum weight for the wrench.

Short Wrench

The Short Wrench option is used to specify the dimensions of a Valve Operator - ShortWrench.

128

3.Pip

ing


Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the length of the A portion of the short wrench.

B — Indicate the length of the B portion of the short wrench.

C — Indicate the length of the C portion of the short wrench. This value may be zero.


Long Wrench

The Long Wrench option is used to specify the dimensions of a Valve Operator - LongWrench.

Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the length of the A portion of the long wrench.

B — Indicate the length of the B portion of the long wrench.

C — Indicate the length of the C portion of the long wrench. This value may be zero.


129


Short T-Handle

The Short T-Handle option option is used to specify the dimensions of a Valve Operator -Short T-Handle.

Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the length of the A portion of the short T-handle.

B — Indicate the length of the B portion of the short T-handle.

C — Indicate the length of the C portion of the short T-handle. This value may be zero.

Operator Weight - Indicate the maximum weight for the short T-handle.

Long T-Handle

The Long T-Handle option option is used to specify the dimensions of a Valve Operator -Long T-Handle.

130

3.Pip

ing


Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the length of the A portion of the long T-handle.

B — Indicate the length of the B portion of the long T-handle.

C — Indicate the length of the C portion of the long T-handle. This value may be zero.

Operator Weight - Indicate the maximum weight for the long T-handle.

Inclined Top Mount Gear

The Inclined Top Mount Gear option displays the Gear Top Mounted Inclined HandWheel form to specify the dimensions of the Gear Top Mounted Inclined Hand Wheel.

131


Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the length of the A portion of the gear.

B — Indicate the length of the B portion of the gear.

C — Indicate the length of the C portion of the gear.

D — Indicate the length of the D portion of the gear.

E — Indicate the length of the E portion of the gear.

F — Indicate the length of the F portion of the gear.

Operator Weight - Indicate the maximum weight for the gear.

Inclined Side Mount Gear

The Inclined Side Mount Gear option displays the Gear Side Mounted Inclined HandWheel form to specify the dimensions of the Gear Side Mounted Inclined Hand Wheel.

Field Descriptions

Default/Alternate Gear Orientation — Indicate the Gear Orientation. Default GearOrientation specifies the F portion of the gear. Alternate Gear Orientation specifies theE portion of the gear.



132

3.Pip

ing

Valve Operators________________ C — Indicate the length of the C portion of the gear.


E — Indicate the length of the E portion of the gear.




Side Mount Gear - Type A

The Side Mount Gear option displays the Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel-Type A formto specify the dimensions.

Field Descriptions

Default/Alternate Gear Orientation — Indicate the Gear Orientation. Default GearOrientation specifies the F portion of the gear. Alternate Gear Orientation specifies theE portion of the gear.



C — Indicate the length of the C portion of the gear.


133

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ E — Indicate the length of the E portion of the gear.




Side Mount Gear Type B

The Side Mount Gear option displays the Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel-Type B formto specify the dimensions.

Field Descriptions

Default/Alternate Gear Orientation — Indicate the Gear Orientation. Default GearOrientation specifies the F portion of the gear. Alternate Gear Orientation specifies theH portion of the gear.







134

3.Pip

ing

Valve Operators________________ G — Indicate the length of the G portion of the handwheel.

H — Indicate the length of the H portion of the handwheel.



Side Mount Gear Type C

The Side Mount Gear option displays the Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel-Type C formto specify the dimensions.

Field Descriptions

Default/Alternate Gear Orientation — Indicate the Gear Orientation. Default GearOrientation specifies the E portion of the gear. Alternate Gear Orientation specifies theF portion of the gear.







135

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ G — Indicate the length of the G portion of the handwheel.



Diaphragm Type 4

The Diaphragm Type 4 option displays the Valve Operator - Type 4 form to specify thedimensions.

Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the length of the A portion of the valve.

B — Indicate the length of the B portion of the valve.

Operator Weight - Indicate the maximum weight for the valve.

Diaphragm Type 6

The Diaphragm Type 6 option displays the Valve Operator - Type 6 form to specify thedimensions.

136

3.Pip

ing


Field Descriptions

A — Indicate the length of the A portion of the valve.

B — Indicate the length of the B portion of the valve.

Operator Weight - Indicate the maximum weight for the valve.

137


3.1.2.8 Instrument Placement

This option enables you to place an instrument in the active model. Instruments can bedefined in the Piping Job Specification (PJS), or defined interactively at placement time.

An instrument is placed with respect to the active bend angle. Once the instrument is placed,the bend angle is added to the Instrument Component Data Table.

Commands

Specific / Typical — Provides specific or typical piping from the PJS. These optionscan only be used if Piping Specialty data is pre-defined in the PJS.

Geometry and Spec Data / Geometry and Partial Spec Data — Activates a series offorms which enable you to enter the variable characteristics and dimensions for thePiping Specialty. No entry is required in the PJS; at placement a single occurrence ofthe item is placed in the Task Database. (Refer to the Reference Data ManagerReference Guide for information on defining a Piping Specialty in the PJS.)

Field Description

Component Number — Type a component number in the Component Number fieldto select the item for placement if you have piping specialty items defined in theReference Database.

138

3.Pip

ing

Instrument Data from RDB________________

3.1.2.9 Instrument Data from RDB

These options enable you to place an instrument using information defined in the InstrumentComponent Specification Data of the Material Reference Database.

The display setting of the specialty material description for piping specialties is defined withthe Active Options command.

Specific Instruments

The system activates the List of Specific Instruments form which lists all the instrumentsdefined in the PJS which meet the nominal piping diameter criteria imposed by the active firstsize and the active second size. It lists the instruments in alphanumerically ascending orderby tag number.

Typical Instruments

This option searches the PJS for all the instruments that have blank tag numbers or optioncodes greater than 20,000 (typical instrument loaded from the IN task).

The system activates the List of Typical Instruments form which displays each instrumentwith a description from the RDB which meets the nominal piping diameter criteria imposedby the active first size and the active second size. It lists the available instruments inalphanumerically ascending order by instrument model code and component number.

Display Data for Specialty Displays the attribute values defined for the selected item.

If the specification data is defined in the Material Reference Database but thecomponent number is undefined (blank), the system prompts for thecomponent number prior to placement.

139

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Once you specify the component number for the instrument, the materialdescription is re-displayed on the basis of the component number (if such amaterial description is defined). Otherwise, the material description whichwas determined on the basis of the model code is displayed.

140

3.Pip

ing

Instrument Data from User________________

3.1.2.10 Instrument Data from User

These options interactively defines an instrument to be placed in the model. The systemactivates a series of forms used to define the variable characteristics and dimensions for theinstruments.

Geometry and Spec Data

When Geometry and Spec Data is selected, the system activates the Instrument Componentsform.

Commands


Operating Sequence

1. Select Parametric Shape by selecting Placement Options to return to the InstrumentPlacement form.

— OR —

Select the desired parametric shape for placement from the form. The system displaysthe instrument spec data retrieved for the selected parametric shape.

141


2. Specify Attribute Value by typing any modifications to the instrument data.

3. Select confirm when the modifications are complete. The system verifies anymodifications to the instrument data and displays the form for the specific parametricshape selected.

Geometry and Partial Spec Data

The system activates the Instrument Components form.

142

3.Pip

ing

Instrument Data from User________________

Commands


Operating Sequence

1. Select Parametric Shape by selecting the desired parametric shape from the form.The system displays the appropriate form for the parametric shape you selected.

143


3.1.2.11 Instrument Symbol Options

You can select the following options when placing an instrument.

Commands



144

3.Pip

ing

Instrument Symbol Options________________ Select Valve Operator Type — Select the desired valve operator type from the form.

Specify Dimensions for Operator — Enter the dimensions for the operator.

Specify Dimensions for Parametric Shape — Enter the dimensions for theparametric shape.

Operating Sequence

1. B=A Set the dimension for B equal to the setting for A (for symmetrical components).This option is only active when it is possible for the two dimensions to be the samevalue.

2. Operator Menu by activating the Valve Operators form which enables you to selectthe valve operator to be associated with the valve.

3. Select Valve Operator Type by selecting the desired valve operator type from theform. The system displays the appropriate form for the selected valve operator type.

4. Specify Dimensions for Operator by entering the dimensions for the operator andselect Confirm. The system returns to the selected instrument shape form.

145


3.1.2.12 Instrument

You can select the following options when placing an instrument.

Commands




Tag Number — Enter the tag number for the instrument.

NPD — Enter the NPD for the First Size and the Second Size.

Rating — Enter the rating for the First Size and the Second Size.

Schedule — Enter the Schedule for the First Size and the Second Size.

Dry Weight — Enter the dry weight for the instrument.

Wet Weight — Enter the wet weight for the instrtument.

Surface Area — Enter the surface area measurement for the instrument.

146

3.Pip

ing

Instrument________________ A — Enter the measurement for the A portion of the instrument.

B — Enter the measurement for the B portion of the instrument.

Operating Sequence

1. Enter the tag number for the instrument.

2. Enter the NPD for the first size and the second size.

3. Enter the rating for the first size and the second size.

4. Enter the schedule for the first size and the second size.

5. Enter the dry weight for the instrument.

6. Enter the wet weight for the instrtument.

7. Enter the surface area measurement for the instrument.

8. Enter the measurement for the A portion of the instrument.

9. Enter the measurement for the B portion of the instrument.

10. Set the dimension for B equal to the setting for A (for symmetrical components). Thisoption is only active when it is possible for the two dimensions to be the same value.

11. Operator Menu by activating the Valve Operators form which enables you to selectthe valve operator to be associated with the instrument.

147


3.1.2.13 Commodity Option

This option enables you to change the commodity option used to search the spec for acomponent or pipe. The search criteria used to identify an item in the spec, consists of theitem name, first size, second size, and option code. The option code in this search criteriausually defaults to 1; however, you can use Commodity Options to select another value.

You can review the commodity options for a specific component or pipe. The applicablecommodity options are displayed in numerically ascending order by option code. You canselect the option to place that component. Commodity option 1 is not included in this list.

You must have optional pipe specified in you .pcd file with the correct option number per CL400 (701 - 717 for mixed end options) and add definition for the Red connect point of thepipe, following the standard rule that the Green connect point has a lower code listed value forend prep than the Red connect point to use the Commodity Options command for pipe. Thefollowing example is from a .pcd file:

PIPING 1 2 2 301 - S-STD 5 - - - - - - PAAAAAWAAA - PIPE 100 100 142 52 15 -

PIPING 706 2 2 301 - S-STD 5 2 2 391 - S-STD 5 PAAAAAPREP - PIPE 100 100 142 52 15 -

The sequence in which the commands are selected to display and select thecommodity options are different. For components, select the CommodityOptions command and then select the type of component from the form. Forpipe, select the Place Pipe command and then select the Commodity Optionscommand. The system lists the available selections for that particular item.

The system displays the commodity item name, model code, commodity option description,the end preparation and pressure rating for the green connect point from the Piping JobSpecification, and the material description from the Short Material Description Library in thelist of commodity options.

Pipe Bends

This command provides for the optional manual input of bend data for pipe bends. If acommodity option code with a value in the range of 4001 through 4010 is defined in theMaterial Reference Database and you select this commodity option, the system displays aform used to specify the bend radius and optionally the lengths of the straight sections of pipe.

You can specify the bend radius as a length in subunits or a function of nominal pipingdiameter. The Piping Eden module to support this option is required to expect the length ofthe straight section at connect point 1 as Dimension_1 and the length of the straight section atconnect point 2 as Dimension_2. You can specify that the two lengths are to be the same.

The default data displayed in the form will have the following values.

The pipe bend radius is computed from the default modifier value in the PipingCommodity Data for the selected pipe bend, the active nominal piping diameter, themodel system of units, and the npd system of units.

148

3.Pip

ing

Commodity Option________________ The length of the straight section at end 1 defaults to zero.

The length of the straight section at end 2 defaults to zero.

When this option is used for placement of a pipe bend, the lengths of the straight section arestored in the Piping Design Database. As a consequence, this data is remembered forreconstruction.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Piping Commodity by selecting the commodity item from the form. Ifcommodity options are defined for the selected commodity item the system activates theCommodity Option List form which lists all the available commodity options (excludingcommodity option 1) for the placement item. (The following represents the options fora Weld Neck Flange.)

149


3.1.2.14 Piping Assembly

This option activates the Place Piping Assembly form which enables you to place a pipingassembly in the model at the active placement point. A piping assembly is a set of predefinedcomponents such as a drain. You can place modules defined with the Piping AssemblyLanguage or the Alphanumeric Model Builder Language.

Commands

Piping Assembly/Model Builder — Places modules defined with the Piping AssemblyLanguage or the Alphanumeric Model Builder Language.

Connect to Design — Sets the active place point at an existing segment point orcomponent connect point. It moves the orientation tee and updates the segmentparameters to match those of the selected element. See the Connect to Design - PlaceComponent, page 108 for more information.

List of Piping Assemblies — Displays all of the piping assemblies available in a list.

Additional Selections — Displays more piping assemblies.

150

3.Pip

ing

Valve with Flanges________________

3.1.2.14.1 Valve with Flanges

The Valve with Flanges option allows you to place a valve with flanges by center or by end.

Valve with Flanges - Placement by Center

Gate Valve — Flanged Gate Valve placed by centerBall Valve — Flanged Ball Valve placed by centerGlobe Valve — Flanged Globe Valve placed by centerPlug Valve — Flanged Plug Valve placed by centerCheck Valve — Flanged Check Valve placed by center

Valve with Flanges - Placement by End

Gate Valve — Flanged Gate Valve placed by endBall Valve — Flanged Ball Valve placed by endGlobe Valve — Flanged Globe Valve placed by endPlug Valve — Flanged Plug Valve placed by endCheck Valve — Flanged Check Valve placed by center

151


3.1.2.14.2 Flow Instrument Connections

The Flow Instrument Connections option allows you to place a flow instrument based onconnection type.

Flow ’1A’ — Flow Instrument Connection - Nipple, I/R Valve

Flow ’1B’ — Flow Instrument Connection - Threadolet, Nipple, I/R Valve

Flow’2B’ — Flow Instrument Connection — Sockolet, Nipple, I/R Valve

152

3.Pip

ing

Level Instrument Connections________________

3.1.2.14.3 Level Instrument Connections

The Level Instrument Connections option allows you to place an instrument connectionbased on level.

Level ’1A’ — Level Instrument Connection - Branch per table, Nipple, I/R Valve

Level ’1B’ — Level Instrument Connection - Threaded Connection, Nipple, I/R Valve

Level’1C’ — Level Instrument Connection — Flange or Reducing Flange, Nipple, I/RValve

Level ’5A’ — Level Instrument Connection — Branch per Table, Nipple, I/R Valve.

153


3.1.2.14.4 Temperature Instrument Connections

The Temperature Instrument Connections option allows you to place an instrumentreducer connection based on temperature.

Temperature ’1A’ — Temperature Instrument Connection - Thredolet and OptionalReducers

Temperature ’1B’ — Temperature Instrument Connection - 90 Elbow, Elbolet, andOptional Reducers

Temperature ’3A’ — Temperature Instrument Connection — Equal Size Tee,Reducing Insert, Nipple, Flange

154

3.Pip

ing

Pressure Instrument Connections________________

3.1.2.14.5 Pressure Instrument Connections

The Pressure Instrument Connections option allows you to place an instrument connectionbased on pressure.

Pressure ’1A’ — Pressure Instrument Connection - Branch per Table, Nipple, I/RValve

Pressure ’1B’ — Pressure Instrument Connection - Equal Size Tee, Swage, I/R Valve

Pressure ’1C’ — Pressure Instrument Connection - Equal Size Tee, Nipple, Reducer,Nipple, I/R Valve

Pressure ’3A’ — Pressure Instrument Connection — Equal Size Tee, Reducing Insert,Nipple, I/R Valve

155


3.1.2.14.6 Hydrostatic Vents and Drains

The Hydrostatic Vents and Drains option allows you to place a vent or drain based onhydrostatic properties.

Vent/Drain ’1A’ — Hydrostatic Vent/Drain - Branch per Table, Nipple, Plug

Vent/Drain ’1B’ — Hydrostatic Vent/Drain - Equal Size Tee, Swage, Cap

Vent/Drain ’2A’ — Hydrostatic Vent/Drain - Branch per Table, Nipple, V/D Valve,Generic End

Vent/Drain ’2B’ — Hydrostatic Vent/Drain - Equal Size Tee, Swage, V/D Valve,Generic End

156

3.Pip

ing

Operational Vents and Drains________________

3.1.2.14.7 Operational Vents and Drains

The Operational Vents and Drains option allows you to place a vent or drain based onoperational properties.

1A with Generic End — Operational Vent/Drain - Branch, Nipple, V/D Valve,Generic End

1A without Generic End — Operational Vent/Drain - Branch, Nipple, V/D Valve

1B with Generic End — Operational Vent/Drain - Tee, Swage, V/D Valve, GenericEnd

1B without Generic End — Operational Vent/Drain - Tee, Swage, V/D Valve

1C with Generic End — Operational Vent/Drain - Tee, Nipple, Reducer, Nipple, V/DValve, Generic End

1C without Generic End — Operational Vent/Drain - Tee, Nipple, Reducer, Nipple,V/D Valve

157


3.1.2.15 Commodity Override

This option enables you to place components that are out of spec (not defined in the attachedPiping Job Specification database). It allows you to change attributes such as pressure rating,end prep, and schedule thickness, and place the component with the new attribute values. Forexample, this option can be used to place valves with a special operator by changing themodifier attribute.

The system displays the List of Piping Commodities form which lists all the givencommodities in the spec for the current Piping Materials Class. This list is sortedalphanumerically by model code. The following illustrates the form for a gate valve.

You can select the commodity item most similar to the type of spec item to be placed byplacing a data point on that line.

The system displays the attributes values for the selected commodity item. It displays themaximum temperature with the system of units defined by the Type 63 data for the activemodel.

158

3.Pip

ing

Commodity Override________________

You can then select the attribute(s) to be modified and type the override values. (You canchange any of the attributes displayed in the commodity override form, except NPD,commodity name, model code,pds sort code, and option code.)

159


3.1.2.16 Place Component Errors

During the execution of the Place Component menu command the following sets of formscan be activated to display errors in placement.

Place Component Error Data

Piping Commodity Error Data

Service Limits Error Data

Design Check Status

160

3.Pip

ing

Place Component Error Data________________

3.1.2.17 Place Component Error Data

This option describes errors that occurred in the graphic commodity data during placement.Refer to the description of Review Component Placement, page 467 , for a detaileddescription of this function.

161


3.1.2.18 Piping Commodity Error Data

This form displays an error in the search criteria used to find the item in the Piping JobSpecification (spec). If the system cannot find the item in the spec, this form is activated anddisplays the search criteria (item name, first size, second size, and option code) used to searchthe spec.)

162

3.Pip

ing

Service Limits Error Data________________

3.1.2.19 Service Limits Error Data

This form displays an error if the pressure and/or temperature values are not within thespecified range for the active Piping Materials Class.

This command verifies that you have at least one of the sets of pressures and temperaturesdefined completely. For instance the pressure value, the system of units for the pressure value,the temperature value, and the system of units for the temperature value must all be definedfor one of the following conditions:


normal design

alternate design.

You can disable this check by using the Temperature and Pressure Data toggle on thePiping Data Control form of the Project Data Manager. You can set the toggle to either NoVerification or Verify Complete Set.

163

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ You can select Review Service Limits to review the applicable Service Limits Table.

164

3.Pip

ing

Design Check Status Error________________

3.1.2.20 Design Check Status Error

This form displays a design check error which occurred during the actual placement of thecomponent. This form is activated if the system determines that the connecting componentand the placing component have an incompatibility. It displays the connecting componentdesign check values and the placing component design check values as well as a hard or softerror status. You can override soft design check warnings (with Confirm) and continueplacement. For hard errors, you must exit the form and correct the incompatibility.

The system displays additional data when a compatible flange does not exist in the PipingCommodity Specification Data Table due to an incompatibility of pressure rating. The systemdisplays the end preparation, pressure rating, and table suffix. It also displays the bolt dataused to compare bolted ends (the number of bolts, the bolt diameter, and the bolt circlediameter).

The system displays additional data when the design checks error is due to an incompatibilityof pressure rating. The system displays pressure rating, table suffix, nominal piping diameterand end preparation. It also displays the bolt data used to compare bolted ends (the number ofbolts, the bolt diameter, and the bolt circle diameter).

For interactive design checks, this data is read from the applicable STUD table and theapplicable BLT table. The number of bolts and the bolt diameter are read from outputcolumns one and two, respectively, of the applicable STUD table. The bolt circle diameter isextracted from the fourth output column of the BLT table.

165


3.1.3 Sketch

This command is used to define the centerline of a pipeline prior to the actual placement ofthe piping items. The centerline is represented by piping segments which define the databaseattributes (such as nominal piping diameter) for each segment of a pipeline. The createdpiping segments can be populated at a later time by the Place Component and AutomatedPlacement commands.

You can place a new piping segment or extend an existing segment. A piping segment isessentially a line string which carries database attributes. Placement is accomplished byidentifying the first end point and successive vertices until you terminate the segment withConfirm, the Accept and Start Segment option, or the Accept and Place Componentoption. After you have accepted the piping segment, the software will automatically connectto the end of that piping segment.

You can not extend a segment by less than the value in the pipe run thresholdtable. Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for moreinformation.

This command activates the Sketch Piping Segment form which provides several options fordefining piping segments. You can use different options depending on the required results.

Commands

Load from P&ID — Updates the active segment data based on information defined inthe P&ID Task.

Accept and Start Segment — Accepts the current segment being placed and starts anew segment.

166

3.Pip

ing

Sketch________________ Accept and Place Component — Accepts (creates) the piping segment that is beingdefined, connects to the end of that piping segment, and activates the PlaceComponent command.

Slope On / Off — Toggles the active slope to on or off.

Active Slope Applies a specified slope to a run of horizontal segment piping.

To toggle the defined slope from up to down or from down to up without usingthe Active Slope option toggle, place a data point in the slope message displayarea.

Branch On Pipe Run — Creates a branch along a segment pipe run.

Create Bypass — Places all the segments required to define a bypass on the mainpipe run or to create a bypass as three pipe runs.

Extend or Shorten Pipe Run — Defines an offset to be added/subtracted to thesegment run length.

Intersect Underground Piping — Sketches a segment joining a sloped branch pipingsegment with a sloping header piping segment.

Construct Point — Defines a segment end point or vertex using multiple parameters.

Construct Point by Vessel OD — Defines the place point using user-specified inputand data related to a user-selected vessel.

Distance And Direction — Defines a segment end point or vertex by moving aspecified distance and direction from the active segment point.

Intersect To Branch — Sketches a segment pipe run from the active segment point toa point of intersection with a specified segment pipe run.

Skewed Intersect — Sketches one or more segment pipe runs to connect the activesegment point to the end point of an existing segment.

Intersect Sloped Pipe Run — Intersects the piping segment being created orextended with an arbitrarily skewed pipe run of an existing piping segment that issloped in the vertical plane. The intersection with this sloped piping segment will be inthe vertical plane at a specified angle.

Intersect By Angles — Sketches a segment pipe run from the active segment point toa point of intersection with another segment using a user-define angle.

Intersect Plane — Sketches a segment pipe run from the active segment point to aplanar element in the design file or a reference file.

167


Field Descriptions

Coordinate Location Area — Identifies the location coordinates of the active segmentpoint, shown in the model by the coordinate system indicator, on the basis of theplant/design volume coordinate system.

Move to — Moves the coordinate system indicator to a specific coordinate location(easting, northing or elevation).

Move to Point — Specifies an absolute coordinate location by snapping to a graphicelement.

When Move to Point is selected, three coordinate axis buttons are displayed.Deactivating a button causes that coordinate axis value to be ignored in the Move toPoint operation.

Move — Places a vertex by moving a given distance (delta) from the active segmentpoint in the selected direction.

Create Piping Segment / Extend Piping Segment — Creates a new segment at aselected segment vertex or extends an existing segment. See Create Piping Segment,page 191 for more information on this toggle. If you connect to a nozzle, the systemdefaults to Create Piping Segment.

If you connect to an existing segment or component the system defaults to ExtendPiping Segment and you can continue to sketch the segment.

If you connect to an existing segment or component, you can toggle to Create PipingSegment and start a new segment.

168

3.Pip

ing

Sketch________________

Equivalent NPD — Reads the Nominal Piping Diameter table from the Piping JobSpecification Tables and retrieves the equivalent value for the active nominal pipingdiameter, if provided. If there is an equivalent value for the active nominal pipingdiameter, the equivalent value becomes the active nominal piping diameter and thecurrent nominal piping diameter units are changed to the equivalent nominal pipingdiameter units. The active first size and second size are updated automatically to theactive nominal piping diameter. This allows you to connect metric piping and Englishpiping. Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for more information onthe NPD table.

Message Area — Pipe Run Length - indicates the length of the segment pipe runbeing defined. Total Segment Length- gives the total length of the piping segmentbeing defined.

Active Data Area — Displays a subset of the active segment data including the linenumber label. You can place a data point over this area of the form to activate theActive Segment Data form which enables you to review or revise any of the segmentparameters. See Active Segment Data, page 50 for information on setting the activesegment data.

About this command

You MUST select Confirm to terminate the piping segment. Until Confirm is selected, thepiping segment is created only on the display; Confirm creates the piping segment in themodel design file. If you do not select Confirm, all your inputs in the current Sketch sessionare ignored and the piping segment is not created. The Reset option cancels the currentrouting and starts a new Sketch session.

169


Operating Sequence

1. Identify First End Point by using any of methods shown in the figure above to definethe first end point or you can select Construct Point to use multiple key-ins to definethe coordinate location. After all key-ins have been entered, select Confirm to acceptthe constructed point.

2. Identify Next Vertexby using any of the methods previously outlined to define asegment vertex. You can define up to 96 vertices. Press <R> to reject the last vertexdefined during the current Sketch session and erase the corresponding segment pipe runfrom the screen. Successive <R>’s reject only vertices defined in the current Sketchsession, up to the first end point.

170

3.Pip

ing

Accept and Start Segment________________

3.1.3.1 Accept and Start Segment

This option can be used while sketching a segment to create an attribute break in the pipelinebeing placed or to create a branch point at the active segment point. This option performsthree consecutive operations:

It accepts the active segment point to terminate the current piping segment

It initiates create segment mode

It accepts the active segment point as the branch point of the new branch segment.

Therefore, this option should be used instead of Confirm when a segment with a branch endpoint is desired.

Refer to Attribute Break, page 310 for more information on attribute breaks.

About this command

This option can be used only after one or more segment pipe runs have been routed in thecurrent Sketch session.

Attribute Break Example

Creating an attribute break.

1. Select the Place and Start New Segment option.

The system terminates the active segment and places an attribute break at the acceptedend point.

2. Place a data point in the Active Segment Data area to activate the Active Segment Dataform.

Any attribute on this form (including NPD) may be changed. The system automaticallyplaces the attribute break and segments placed thereafter will have the new attributes.

3. Select Confirm.

4. Identify the next vertex and continue routing the new segment.

171


Branch Segment Example

Creating a branch segment.

1. Select the Place and Start New Segment option from the Sketch Piping Segment form.

The system terminates the active segment and places a branch point at the accepted endpoint.

2. Identify Next Vertex

Check the Active Data Area and change the Active Segment Data for the branch, ifneeded.

Continue routing the new branch segment from the established break point. SelectConfirm when the branch in completed.

3. Select the branch point as the new first end point (the system will toggle to ExtendPiping Segment automatically) and continue routing the main pipe segment.

172

3.Pip

ing

Accept and Place Component________________

3.1.3.2 Accept and Place Component

This option can be used while sketching a segment to create (accept) the current pipelinebeing placed and activate the Place Component command. This option performs threeconsecutive operations:

1. It accepts the active segment point to terminate the current piping segment.

2. Automatically connects to the end of the piping segment.

3. Activates the Place Component form.

Therefore, this option can be used instead of:

Using Confirm on the piping segment.

Exiting the Sketch form with Cancel (X).

Selecting the Place Component command.

Using the Connect to Design command to connect to the end of the piping segment.

Refer to Place Component, page 95 for more information on the PlaceComponent command.

About this command

This option can be used only after one or more segment pipe runs have been routed in thecurrent Sketch session.

173


3.1.3.3 Slope On/Off

This option toggles the defined active slope to on or off. When on, the Active Slope isdisplayed on the form and is used in defining all subsequent piping segments. The sloperemains active until turned OFF by reselecting the option.

The slope is automatically added to your inputs only when those inputs yield a horizontal piperun; the slope is ignored when your input includes a vertical component.

The following options will now use the Active Slope in computing line route vertices:

delta move (such as, Move East )

absolute move (such as, Move to Easting )

Construct Point mode

Example

If the active slope is set to one inch per foot and directed DOWN, a pipe run sketched byselecting Move North and typing 10 (feet) is placed as a downward sloping pipe run with aNorth component of 10 feet and a Vertically downward component of 10 inches (true length =10’-5").


Use Active Slope to define the desired slope before setting the slope to ON.

174

3.Pip

ing

Active Slope________________

3.1.3.4 Active Slope

This option activates the Define Active Slope form which is used to define the active slope touse in sketching piping segments.

You can turn the slope on or off as required.

Commands

Slope Up/Down — Select this toggle to set the slope direction to up or down thenselect and type the vertical and the horizontal components of the slope (for instance, :1for vertical and 1 for horizontal for a one inch per foot slope). You can also toggle theslope direction (up or down) by placing a data point in the slope message display area.

Slope from Existing Pipe Run — Defines the slope by snapping to an existing piperun.

Vertical Component of Slope — Specifies that the slope of the vertical component beused.

Horizontal Component of Slope — Specifies that the slope of the horizontalcomponent be used.

175


3.1.3.5 Branch on Pipe Run

This option creates a branch along a segment pipe run (not at a vertex or end point).

Commands

Distance from Intersect — Defines the distance from the active vertex to the start ofthe branch point.

Coordinates — Defines the direction to measure the distance.

Move from Other Point — Defines a point and a distance from that point to start thebranch.

About this command

This option can only be used to establish a branch point on an existing piping segment. It isreplaced by the Create Bypass option when you begin sketching a piping segment. Also,only olet type branches may be placed on populated pipelines using this command.

This option is only available when you are not alreadyconnected.

See Create Bypass, page 178 for more information on the Create Bypassoption.

176

3.Pip

ing

Branch on Pipe Run________________

Operating Sequence

1. Create Branch on Pipe Run Identify Segment on Pipe Run orAccept Active Segment Point by snapping to a point on the segmentpipe run that is near the desired segment vertex.

2. Identify Segment Pipe Run by snapping on the segment pipe run youwant the branch on.

3. Create Branch on Pipe Run Specify Distance from Vertex, AcceptMid Point on Pipe Run, or Select Option by typing the distance fromthe vertex at which to create the branch or select Confirm to use the midpoint of the segment pipe run as the branch point. You can also selectthe Distance to Intersect or Move from Other Point options.

4. Identify Reference Point.

5. Specify Distance by typing the distance to move from the referencepoint, to where you want the branch to start.

177


3.1.3.6 Create Bypass

This option creates a bypass at the active segment point or at an existing segment end point.It places all the segments necessary to define the centerline of the bypass. This optionactivates the Create Bypass form which is used to create a bypass by defining specific points.

Once you have selected this option, the Create Bypass form displays the coordinate readoutof the active place point. The form also provides a diagram of a bypass which describes thenecessary inputs. The solid line represents the existing pipe run.

Commands

Bypass == Active => ’B’ => ’A’ — The bypass is created by three pipe runs off of astraight pipe run. You specify the NPD for the three new pipe runs. The branch point(the active point) and point A are the points on the main run where the bypass starts andends. The NPD from the active point to point A is not modified. Point B defines thefirst pipe run of the bypass from the branch point.

Bypass == Active => ’B’ => ’A’ — The bypass is created as part of a straight pipe run.You specify the NPD for the segment of the bypass section of the straight pipe. Thebranch point (the active point) and point B are the points on the straight pipe whichmake up the bypass.

Move to — (absolute move) - These options define the absolute coordinate for thepoint in the direction to be defined. Select the direction and type the absolutecoordinate or snap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate.


178

3.Pip

ing

Create Bypass________________ Construct Point — Constructs a new active point using multiple inputs. You canmove the point along absolute or delta coordinates. Each input moves the coordinateindicator until you select Confirm. Refer to Construct Point, page 70 for moreinformation.

Distance and Direction — Specifies the exact distance the point will be moved and inwhat general direction. This option can be used in conjunction with the ConstructPoint command. See the Distance and Direction, page 71 for more information.

About this command

You can use this option while sketching a piping segment, or select Sketch and snap to theend point of an existing segment.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Point A as shown on the form. You can use the Move or Move to fields tospecify a delta or absolute move, or select Construct Point or Distance and Directionto define the point.

2. Identify Point B (as shown on the form) by any of the options provided and specify aNPD for the bypass or accept the Active Nominal Piping Diameter.

179


3.1.3.7 Extend or Shorten Pipe Run

This option lengthens or shortens the next segment pipe run (to be defined) by a specifieddistance. You can type a distance or define the length with one of the Define Offset options.

The following example illustrates how Extend Pipe Run can be used to place a segment vertex⁄12 pipe outside diameter above a top-of-steel elevation (so that the bottom-of-pipe is at the

top-of-steel elevation).

Commands

Clear Active Offset — Allows you to clear the currently defined offset.

Extend/Shorten Pipe Run Option — Define whether to extend or shorten the pipe run.

1/2 Piping Outside Diameter — Defines an offset equal to one half of the outsidediameter of the specified pipe.

1/2 Flange Outside Diameter — Defines an offset equal to one half the outsidediameter of the specified flange.

180

3.Pip

ing

Extend or Shorten Pipe Run________________ 1/2 Piping Inside Diameter — Defines an offset equal to one half the inside diameterof the specified flange.

Insulation Thickness — Defines an offset equal to the insulation thickness of thespecified item.

Active Pipe Run Length — Defines the length to shorten a pipe run to be selected,using the current active pipe run length.


The first end point of the segment must be defined.

Operating Sequence

1. Specify Distance by typing the desired distance or select one of the Define Offsetoptions to define the distance.

2. Lengthen Next Run By: <value> by typing a value.

181


3.1.3.8 Intersect Underground Piping

This command joins a sloped branch piping segment with a sloped header piping segmentusing a connecting segment intersecting the branch at an angle close to 45 or 135 degrees andintersecting the header at exactly 45 or 135 degrees.

Field Descriptions

Angle — Displays the intersect angle.

User-input max angle tolerance — Defines the tolerance of the actual angle betweenthe branch segment and the connecting segment. The intersect angle is generally 45degrees between these segments, but this tolerance allows for some flexibility whenconnecting the branch and header segments. This value can be between 0 and 10degrees, which allows a tolerance of 35 to 55 degrees. Smaller values in this field resultin tighter connection angle tolerances.

Before Using This Command

The segments for the header pipe and branches need to be drawn first, with the branchextending nearer to the intersection point. These segments must exist in the activemodel file, and must be sloped in the vertical plane.

A component must exist in the piping job specification for the bend/branch angle.

There must not be any components or branches in the branch piping segment.

182

3.Pip

ing

Intersect Underground Piping________________

Operating Sequence

1. Select Branch Segment.

Select a branch segment to connect to the header segment.

2. Select Header Segment.

Select the header segment to which the branch segment should be attached.

3. Accept to continue.

Click Accept to place the selected connecting segment.

— OR —

<R> to display another placement option.

183


3.1.3.9 Intersect to Branch

This option extends the active segment to its intersection with a specified segment pipe run.

If the active segment point has zero or one coordinates in common with the pipe run tointersect, the system displays (in refresh mode) the possible routings from the end pointto the pipe run.

If the end point and the pipe run have two coordinates in common, the systemimmediately extends the pipe run containing the end point to its intersection with thesecond pipe run.

In either case, the system creates a branch point at the point of intersection, breaking thesegment to which the main pipe run belonged into two segments.

Do not use this command for intersecting to a sloped main pipe run. Refer to IntersectSloped Pipe Run, page 188 for more information on intersecting to a sloped main pipe run.

The illustration above shows the basic routing options for segments with less than twocoordinates in common. For sloped lines or lines with special geometry, the routing foroptions 1 and 2 is as follows.

1. Same direction as Line A then intersecting B at right angles.

2. Forming a right angle with A then running parallel with A to intersect B (notnecessarily at a right angle).

184

3.Pip

ing

Intersect to Branch________________

Operating Sequence

1. Intersect to Branch...Identify Segment Pipe Run by snapping to the segment piperun to be intersected.

2. Select Pipe Run(s)...Accept or Restart for another selection.

3. Press <D> or Confirm to accept the connecting pipe runs as shown, or press <R> orRestart to display an alternate run.

185


3.1.3.10 Skewed Intersection

This option connects the end points of two different piping segments. It displays alternativeroutings between the two existing segment pipe runs and enables you to select the desiredconfiguration.

When you identify the two segment ends, the system displays a sequence of possible segmentpipe runs joining the two vertices. You can accept or reject the system’s suggestions.

The system begins by suggesting one segment pipe run extending from the first end pointtowards the second end point.

If you accept the first segment pipe run by pressing <D>, the system displays all thepossible one and two segment pipe run routings from this point until you accept thecomplete routing.

If you reject the first segment pipe run (by pressing <R>), the system suggests anothersegment pipe run. This process continues until the two end points are connected.

The system can display many one, two, and three-segment pipe run routings between the twoend points if they differ in all three coordinates.


The two existing segments must exist in the active model file. Select one of the segment endsas the first end point.

186

3.Pip

ing

Skewed Intersection________________

Operating Sequence

1. Skewed Intersection Identify Second End Point by snapping to the end point of thesecond segment to be intersected.

2. Select Pipe Run(s) Accept/Reject by pressing <R> until the desired intersection isdisplayed.

3. Select <D> to accept the displayed intersection.

187


3.1.3.11 Intersect Sloped Pipe Run

This option intersects the piping segment being created or extended with an arbitrarily skewedpipe run of an existing piping segment that is sloped in the vertical plane. The intersectionwith this sloped piping segment will be in the vertical plane at a user- specified angle.

This option is not limited to sloped pipe runs; it can be used to calculate an intersection with ahorizontal pipe run. This option should be used when the angle of the slope is required todetermine the branch point on a sloped pipe run.


A component must exist in the piping job specification for the bend/branch angle youspecify.

You must be perpendicular to and in the same plane as the sloped main pipe run.

Operating Sequence

1. Intersect to Sloped Pipe Run Identify Segment Pipe Run by snapping to a pointon the pipe run to be intersected.

2. Specify Angle by typing the desired angle for the pipe run (such as 45).

If both of the possible intersection points lie along a previously placed slopedpipe run, the system displays the possible routings in terminal refresh (similarto Skewed Segment Intersection).

If only one of the intersection points lies along a previously placed sloped piperun, the system determines the routing automatically and creates a branchintersection.

If neither of the intersection points lies along the actual previously placedsloped pipe run but along the infinite extension of that pipe run, the systemdetermines the routing automatically for a change of direction that results in anacute angle.

188

3.Pip

ing

Intersect by Angles________________

3.1.3.12 Intersect by Angles

This option intersects two existing segment pipe runs at a specified angle. It is used to extendsegment A to segment B, given a user-defined angle. The end point of segment A ispreserved while segment B is telescoped (lengthened or shortened) to accommodate for angleA. The system also displays the resulting angle B in the form.


Identify the end point of an existing segment or sketch at least one pipe run of the segmentbeing placed. This will define segment A. The angles specified are the included angle asmeasured counterclockwise from the specified segment; not a directional angle.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Segment B by snapping to the desired run of piping segment B.

2. Enter Angle A by selecting the field labeled Angle A and type the desired angle (suchas 45).

3. Accept Intersection, Restart Angle A <value> Angle B <value>. Select Confirmto accept the displayed intersection or select Restart.

189


3.1.3.13 Intersect Plane

This option sketchs a segment pipe run to the point of intersection between the pipingsegment and a planar element in the design file or reference file.


After identifying the first end point or a vertex of a piping segment, the next vertex can beidentified by using Intersect Plane.

Commands

Horizontal Angle Vertical Angle — Type the angles in decimal degrees or select oneof the standard angles from the form. Negative values are acceptable for both options.The vertical angle is positive for a point above the active point and negative for a pointbelow the active point. Select the desired direction (angle) in which you want the activeplace point to move.

Active Direction — Define angle by the segment pipe run at the active segment point.

Operating Sequence

1. Specify Plane or Direction by selecting one of the Plane options from the form:Horizontal Plane, East-West Elevation, or North-South Elevation.

2. Type a coordinate value to specify the plane, or select the desired direction (angle) inwhich you want the active point to move.

190

3.Pip

ing

Create Piping Segment________________

3.1.3.14 Create Piping Segment

If you identify an existing segment end point set the toggle to Create Piping Segment, thesystem creates a branch point at the defined location on a piping segment.

The option is required when routing a piping segment which is a branch of a main run pipingsegment. A branch point separates piping segments (so that they can be assigned differentsegment parameters), and allows for placement of branch components.

Even if the parameters around the branch point are identical, the branch point defines the endpoints of distinct piping segments.

The branch segment is automatically assigned the same segment parameters as the main run(header) piping segment, unless you specifically modify the appropriate parameters after youidentify the branch point, and before you Confirm (to terminate) the branch segment.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify First End Point by identifying the branch point by snapping to a vertex (orend point) of an existing piping segment, typing an absolute or delta coordinate value toreposition the active placement point, or by using the Construct Point or Branch onPipe Run options.

2. Select Confirm to accept the displayed active place point.

3. Identify Next Vertex by using any of the previous methods identified to continuerouting the branch segment.

191


3.1.4 Fire and Safety

This command is used to display the Fire and Safety components for placement with piping.Although the button is displayed, a fire and safety component specification may not be loadedand available for use.

This command activates the Fire and Safety form for selection of fire and safety components.Selection of a fire and safety component displays the specification form for that component.

Commands

Fire Monitor — Places a fire monitor in the piping design.

Elev Fire Monitor — Places an elevated fire monitor in the piping design.

3/W Fire Hydrant — Places a three way fire hydrant in the piping design.

Hose Rack Station — Places a hose rack station in the piping design.

Spray Sprinkler — Places a spray sprinkler in the piping design.

Rem Fire Monitor — Places a removable fire monitor in the piping design.

Rem Foam Monitor — Places a removable foam monitor in the piping design.

Elev Foam Monitor — Places an elevated foam monitor in the piping design.

Foam Monitor — Places a foam monitor in the piping design.

192

3.Pip

ing

Fire and Safety________________ Fire Hydrant — Places a fire hydrant in the piping design.

Hydrant w/Nozzle — Places a hydrant with nozzle in the piping design.

Eye Wash — Places an eye wash station in the piping design.

Safety Shower — Places a safety shower in the piping design.

Shower and Eye Wash — Places a shower and eye wash station in the piping design.

Pre-Action Sprinkler — Places a pre-action sprinkler in the piping design.

Wet Sprinkler — Places a wet sprinkler in the piping design.

Foam Chamber — Places a Foam Chamber in the piping design.

Hose Reel — Places a hose reel in the piping design.

Siamese — Places a siamese hydrant in the piping design.

90ˆ Siamese — Places a 90ˆ siamese hydrant in the piping design.

193


3.1.5 Bio-pharm

This command is used to display the Bio-pharm components for placement with piping.Although the button is displayed, a bio-pharmaceutical specification may not be loaded andavailable for use.

This command activates the Bio-pharm form for selection of bio-pharmaceuticalcomponents. Selection of a bio-pharmaceutical component displays the specification form forthat component.

194

3.Pip

ing

Automated Placement________________

3.1.6 Automated Placement

This command automatically places piping commodity items on existing piping segments. Itrecognizes piping which already exists on the segments. The command uses the benddeflection and branch tables to select components at direction changes and branch points.

This command activates the Automated Placement form which enables you to control theextent of the model to be processed and the type of placement.

Components are limited to flanges, bends, branches, and pipe. Valves,instruments, and so forth must be placed manually.

Commands

Active Group — Specifies the portion of the model to be processed. Refer to thedescription of Active Group in group operations for more information.

195

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Review Markers — Displays information on the active markers in the model.

Select Placement Marker for Review - Select one of the view numbers (1 through 8)to define the screen view to display the markers. Then select the arrow (< >) options toscroll through the active markers.

Delete Markers — Deletes all the Automated Placement error markers which exist inthe active model file.

Component Selection for AutomatedPlacement

When you place components on an existing piping segment (with Place Component orAutomated Placement), the system determines what type of component should be placedbased on the configuration and attributes of the segment(s) at the active placement point.

The Spec Table Library contains a set of tables which are used to determine the type ofcomponent to place and basic information about the components. Refer to the Reference DataManager Reference Guide a listing of these tables and instructions on modifying the tables.

Commodity Item Name Table

The Piping Designer reads the Commodity Item Name table when placing a component at thevertex of an existing piping segment. This table lists the Item Names of the components to beused at different segment configurations (such as reduction, branching, or direction changes).It enables you to relate the component types hard-coded in the software with the applicablecommodity item codes (item names). As the system processes the segment for componentplacement, it uses the derived item name from the table to reference the Commodity Itementity of the PJS.

196

3.Pip

ing

Automated Placement________________ When placing change of direction components, this table is used in conjunction with the BendDeflection Table.

Bend Deflection Table

The bend deflection table is used when placing components at the vertex of an existing pipingsegment. The system uses the bend angle at the segment vertex to determine the type ofcomponent to be placed.

This table defines which full size and reducing size component types will be placed for aspecified angle range. The angle is defined as the smallest angle that the continuation of onepipe run makes with the other run. The component types are defined in the commodity itemname table.

Branch Insertion Tables

Each Piping Materials Class references a set of branch tables: one for 90 degree branches, onefor 45 degree branches, and one for 45-90 degree branches.

Branch tables define the reinforcement to be used at tee and lateral branches as a function ofthe acute angle of intersection and the nominal diameters (first and second size) for theintersecting lines.

The system accesses the branch table when placing a component at an intersection when nobranch component exists at that location.

The system uses the information in the table and the first and second size to provide the itemname of the component to be used at the intersection. Typically, the codes are from one of thefollowing types:

Reinforcing elements, such as reinforcing welds and pads.

Weld-on components reinforcing the intersection such as saddles and weldolets.

Weld-in components actually making the intersection such as laterals and tees.

Mechanics

Bend Deflections

It places the applicable change of direction component as specified in the Bend Deflectiontable and the Piping Material Class at segment vertices.

197


Branches

It places the branch component specified in the applicable branch table (according to thePMC, the angle between the segments, and the size combination) at the branch points wherethe segments meet.

It places during branch component placement, the comparison test of header segment dataincludes nominal piping diameter, override schedule/thickness and construction status.

A branch component is placed where three piping segments form a branch and the header pipewas previously placed in the model.

An error marker is placed where three piping segments form a branch, the two header pipingsegments have different nominal piping diameters, and an olet-type branch is placed.

An error is reported when a branch size exceeds the run size at any branch point.

Flanges

A flange is placed on any open end in a group of piping segments which is connected to abolted end in another piping model.

General

It places the default concentric reducing component where two co-linear segments havediffering sizes.

It places pipes between the components already on the segments. The system will placepiping, tubing, or hose depending on the item name indicated in User Data ’Segment Type’.

Nozzles

When connecting to a nozzle, the system uses the piping material class specifications definedon the Nozzle Data Transfer form in the Reference Data Manager module.

When the piping materials class is undefined (blank) for the nozzle but the transfer hasbeen enabled for the piping materials class, you are prompted that the material class isundefined. You have the option to accept the active materials class or type a differentvalue. This option is intended for nozzle that did not have the piping materials classdefined in the equipment model.

When the data transfer for the piping materials class has been disabled, you are notwarned that the nozzle’s piping materials class is undefined, and the active pipingmaterials class is used automatically.

198

3.Pip

ing

Automated Placement________________ For any previously created piping model, the data transfer is enabled for piping materials classby default, you are warned that the nozzle’s piping materials class is undefined.

It places default spec flanges at bolted connections (flanged components and intelligentflanged nozzles). When a flanged component was placed using commodity options, thesystem places the connecting flanges with the same option code.

The system selects the flange that matches the pressure rating and table suffix of the matingbolted end, as well as the active piping materials class, commodity name, first size, secondsize, and end preparation of the mating bolted end.

The system will first look for an exact match of piping materials class, commodity name, firstsize, second size, end preparation, pressure rating, and table suffix. If an exact match is notfound, the first flange that meets the criteria of piping materials class, commodity name, firstsize, and second size and is Design Checks compatible in terms of both end preparation andpressure rating (including table suffix) is selected. Otherwise, an error message is displayed.

Pipes

For the placement of pipes, where both ends are connected to welded fittings, weld data isdetermined from the applicable data at each end of the pipe.

Reinforcing Pad

When you place a reinforcing pad, dimension_c is loaded into the database for the length ofpipe that will be purchased to fabricate the reinforcing pad.

The sum of the piping outside diameter and two times the reinforcing pad width is thecalculation used to define dimension_c. This data will be available for inclusion in a MTOreport or on an isometric drawing’s bill-of-materials.


The segments to be processed must exist in the active model file. Make sure thesegment parameters (such as NPD) are defined properly for all the segments. Thesystem uses these parameters to access the spec and determine the components to beplaced.

Place all instruments, engineered items, and in-line fittings (other than concentricreducers). This also applies to any commodity items to be placed with selection criteriadifferent than that for automated component placement.

All components should be placed on the segments prior to using the Pipe Placementoption.

199


Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by placing a data point on a pipeline or usethe Active Group command to define the portion of the model to be processed.

2. You can also snap to a piping segment to identify the pipeline or place a data point overa component or pipe and accept the identified item.

200

3.Pip

ing

Add Chain Wheel________________

3.1.7 Add Chain Wheel

This command adds a chain wheel operator to an existing valve in the model. This commandmodifies the graphical representation of the valve to indicate a chain wheel operator andprompts you for the necessary data required for reporting the chain wheel operator.

Commands

Compute Chain Length — Calculates the chain length based on the operatingelevation and handwheel outside diameter.

Chain Operator Number — Select this option and type the number for the chainwheel being placed.

201


Operating Sequence

1. Identify Valve by placing a data point to identify the center of the valve to be modified.

2. Specify Chain Length by typing a value for the chain length in master units (for anEnglish model) or sub units (for a Metric model) or select the Compute Chain Lengthoption to calculate the chain length based on the operating elevation and handwheeloutside diameter (diameter + 2(vertical drop)).

202

3.Pip

ing

Add to Valve________________

3.1.8 Add to Valve

This command activates the Add Valve Appurtenance form which is used to define a FloorStand or Extension Stem for a specified valve. When you specify the option (Floor Stand orExtension Stem) and the dimensions, the system revises the valve with the additional graphicsand data. Extension stem will delete a chain wheel operator.

Example of Floor Stand

Example of Extension Stem

203


Operating Sequence

1. Identify Valve by placing a data point over the center of the valve to be revised andaccept the selection by pressing a <D>.

2. Select Valve Appurtenance by selecting the option to be added to the valve.

3. Accept or Select Valve Appurtenance by selecting Confirm to confirm the selectedoption.

4. Specify Dimensions for Floor Stand/Extension Stem by typing the dimensions forthe valve appurtenance as illustrated on the form.

204

3.Pip

ing

Tap Component________________

3.1.9 Tap Component

This command activates the Tap Component form which is used to place a tap on an existingpiping component.

When creating a tap for the automated placement of an elbolet, this command displays a list ofthe available elbolet options, including the default option, for the active piping materials classand the elbolet’s first size and second size, if more than one option has been specified in theMaterial Reference Database. If only one elbolet option is specified (the default one), theelbolet is placed without user intervention.

When creating a tap for the automated placement of a trunion, this command displays a list ofthe available trunion options, including the default option, for the trunion’s piping materialsclass and size, if more than one option has been specified in the Material Reference Database.If only one trunion option is specified (the default one), the trunion is placed without userintervention.

If one of the following errors occurs in the automated placement of either an elbolet or atrunion, the appropriate data is displayed in an error form.

The elbolet or trunion is not specified in the Material Reference Database for theapplicable piping materials class and size range.

The elbolet or trunion cannot be placed due to problems in either the GraphicCommodity Library or the Physical Data Library.

Pipe can not be tapped, you must use a olet type branch, reinforcing weld orpad.

Components can have a maximum of five connect points, including any taps.

Do not tap tees. Reconstruct Piping and ISOGEN will not recognize them.

205


Commands

Tap Table — Displays the tap table defined for the piping materials class associatedwith the identified component.

Tap Nominal Piping Diameter — Select this field and type the diameter for the tap.

Tap Option — Displays the active tap option. Selecting this field or selecting SelectTap Option activates the List of Tap Options form. This form displays the optionsfor the active Piping Materials Class and tap diameter sorted alphanumerically byoption code.

Select any of the listed options to change the end prep and select Confirm or selectCancel (X) to use the default option.

206

3.Pip

ing

Tap Component________________ Location For Tap — The tap location is initialized to the component center. You canuse the Move fields to construct an offset from the component center or reset thelocation by any of the following:

Component CenterConnect Point 1Connect Point 2Compute For ElboletCompute For TrunionCompute For Elbolet and Compute For Trunionprovide computational assistance in specifying the location of the tap.

The Compute For Trunion option computes the intersection with the piping outsidediameter of the elbow using a horizontal connect point and a specified trunioncenterline elevation. The end of the trunion will intrude into the elbow. However, thecenterline of the tap (representing the centerline of the end of the trunion) will be at thespecified centerline elevation.

You can use the Move fields to construct a precise offset relative to any of the aboveselections.

Source Of Tap Data — The tap data can be defined by any of the following:

Tap TableConnect Point 1Connect Point 2Connect Point 3

You can use Review Piping Job Specification command to review thecontents of the tap tables.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Component by placing a data point to locate the component to be tapped.

2. Accept / Reject Item name / New Item Name by pressing <D> to accept thehighlighted component or press <R> to reject the component and identify anothercomponent.

3. Accept or Specify Data for Tap by using the form fields to define the parameters(location, source of tap data, tap diameter) for the tap then select Confirm to beginprocessing the displayed data.

4. Specify Orientation for Tap by pressing <R> to rotate the primary axis to the desiredorientation or select the desired direction directly from the orientation controlsdisplayed on the form. Then, rotate the secondary axis using the same procedure.

The active point assumes the location of the new tap.

207


3.1.10 Place Physical Support

This command activates the Place Pipe Support form which is used to place physical pipesupports in the active model file. All the pipe supports that can be placed are represented onthis form.

The system determines the Physical Data Library to be used as the source of the pipesupport’s dimension tables on the basis of the geometric industry standard from the piping inthe Material Reference Database that is being used to compute the piping outside diameter forthe pipe support being placed.

Commands

Graphic Physical Supports — The first and second rows of options defines the physicalrepresentation of the support.

Functional Physical Supports — The third row of symbols represents the functionaltype of pipe support: Anchor, 1-Way Support, 2-Way Support, Spring Support, andDamping Support.

Both — By selecting from both rows you can place both a functional representation anda physical representation for the support. The exact physical representation varies bycolumn.

None — You can use the None option to place the physical representation of thesupport only.

Orientation controls — These commands enable you to alter the orientation of thecomponent being placed.

208

3.Pip

ing

Place Physical Support________________

Connect To Piping — With this option you can snap to a segment end or vertex, placea data point over a component center or pipe, or snap to a pipe end.


Point on Pipe — Defines and changes the active placement point on a pipe. SeePoint on Pipe, page 61 for more information.

Move from Reference Point — Moves the active placement point a specified distancefrom an identified reference point in a specified direction. SeeMove from Reference Point, page 63 for more information.


Intersect with Steel — Determines the projected intersection of a structural centerlinewhere steel crosses above or below pipe runs at some angle other than 90 degrees. Thestructural centerline, the piping centerline, or both may be non-orthogonal.

To use the Intersect with Steel command, select the pipe segment, thenselect the structural center-line. If the structure center-line and the pipesegement intersect, the support is placed at that point. If the pipesegment is parallel to the center-line, this intersection point cannot becomputed as the two line do not cross-over at any point.

Field Descriptions

Coordinate Readout — Displays the coordinate readout for the location of the ActivePlacement Point in the active coordinate system once you have connected to piping.

You can redefine the Place Pipe Support form to meet customer requirements.The PDS Eden Interface document explains the relationship between the PlacePipe Support form and the actual pipe support symbols.

This command respects the definition of groups of pipe supports in the component menuselection part of the form.

209



Ensure that a piping segment exists at the intended pipe support location. All pipe supportsare linked to piping segments.

Operating Sequence

1. Specify Active Placement Point by using the Connect to Pipe command. Thiscommand, which is activated by default, you can snap to a segment end or vertex, placea data point over a component center or pipe, or snap to a pipe end. You can also usethe Precision Input commands on the bottom of the form. See Precision Input andGroup Operations, page 56 .

2. Select Pipe Support by selecting the symbol(s) that represent the pipe support(s) to beplaced. The system activates the corresponding Symbol form. (The following formreflects a type 1 support.)

3. Accept to Place Pipe Support or Select Other Option by setting the primary andsecondary orientations of the pipe support using the orientation controls.

210

3.Pip

ing


Other Pipe Support Types

211


212

3.Pip

ing


213


214

3.Pip

ing

Place Logical Support________________

3.1.11 Place Logical Support

This command activates the Place Logical Support form used to place logical supports in theactive model file.

Commands

Point on Pipe — Defines and changes the active placement point on a pipe. SeePoint on Pipe, page 61 for more information.


Move from Reference Point — Moves the active placement point a specified distancefrom an identified reference point in a specified direction. See Move from ReferencePoint, page 63 for more information.



215



Ensure that a piping segment exists at the intended logical support location. All logicalsupports are linked to piping segments.

Operating Sequence

1. Define Active Placement Point by defining active placement point. Snap to asegment end or vertex, place a data point over a component center or pipe, or snap to apipe end. You can also use the Precision Input commands from the bottom of the form.

2. Accept or Revise Data for Support by typing any corrections to the specifiedcommodity data for the logical support or select Confirm to place the logical support.

216

3.Pip

ing

Copy Pipe Support________________

3.1.12 Copy Pipe Support

This command copies a single pipe support to a specified location in the model, or copyattribute data from one pipe support to another. It creates a new graphic element and a newdatabase record for the copy.

This command always copies a pipe support on the basis of the previous destination locationrather than the initial source location. For example, if you copy a pipe support once, thelocation for the next copy of that pipe support is defined relative to the previous copy.

Commands

Construct Point — Defines a coordinate point using multiple inputs. It activates theConstruct Point form used to define absolute or delta coordinate values. Each inputmoves the coordinate indicator until you confirm the displayed location. See ConstructPoint, page 70 for more information.

Point on Pipe — Defines and changes the active placement point on a pipe. See Pointon Pipe, page 61 for more information.


Move from Reference Point — Moves the active placement point a specified distancefrom an identified reference point in a specified direction. SeeMove from Reference Point, page 63 for more information.


217

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Distance From Source — Places the copied (new) pipe support a specified distancefrom the original support.




Repeat Last Copy — Places a series of incremental copies by repeating the previouscopy operation. It copies the previously identified pipe support and moves the samedistance and direction from the last copy point. Each time you select this option, thecopy is performed incrementally from the last copy point.

Specify Pipe Support Number/Do NOT Specify Pipe Support Number — SpecifyPipe Support Number allows you to type the destination support number in the fieldbelow the toggles. Do NOT Specify Pipe Support Number allows you to either definethe destination support number to be the same as the source support number or to usethe source support number but with two asterisks appended.

Append Prefix to Names/No Prefix for Names — Defines the destination supportnumber to be the same as the source support number or to use the source supportnumber with two asterisks appended.

Field Descriptions

Support Number - Source — Displays the pipe support number of the support you arecopying.

Support Number - Destination — Displays the pipe support number of the new pipesupport. Type the number in the field below the toggles if the toggle Specify PipeSupport is set. If it is set to Do NOT Specify Pipe Support Number and the secondtoggle is set to Append Prefix to Names, two asterisks are appended to the Sourcesupport name.

New Pipe Support Number — Type a pipe support number for the new pipe supportwhen prompted. What you type will display in the New Support Number field.


The pipe support to be copied must exist in the active model or in a reference file. Thecorresponding reference file snap and/or locate locks must be enabled for the referencefile. See Reference Models, page 480 for more information.

218

3.Pip

ing

Copy Pipe Support________________ The piping segment on which the new pipe support will be placed must exist in theactive model.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipe Support by placing a data point to locate the pipe support to be copied.Press <D> to accept the identified pipe support.

2. Enter New Pipe Support Number by typing a pipe support number for the newsupport in the New Pipe Support Number field.

3. Specify Support Location by snapping to a segment end or vertex or select any of thePrecision Input options to identify the location for the new pipe support. A segmentmust exist at the specified location.

219


3.1.13 Copy Piping

This command copies an existing pipeline or a group of components to a specified location inthe model. It activates the Copy Piping form which is used to control the placement of thecopied pipeline/group.

This command makes the following database-related changes based on the setting for Copy inthe Piping Data Control option of the Project Data Manager. Refer to the ProjectAdministrator Reference Guide for more information.

If the copy option is set to Append Prefix, the system will append ** as a prefix toname attributes to signify that the piping segment or component has been copied andthat the name attribute may require updating. The following attributes are considered asname attributes for this operation.

line number labelpiping component numberpipe tag numberinstrument component numberpipe support numberline id

If the copy option is set to No Prefix, the ** prefix will be removed when copying apiping segment or a component with a name attribute which includes the ** prefix froma previous copy operation.

Regardless of how this option is set, name attributes which are undefined (blank) willnot have the prefix added.

The copied piping will contain the same attribute values as the original piping(including line sequence number). You can use the Revise Attributes orRevise Pipeline Data commands to modify any of the attributes.

220

3.Pip

ing

Copy Piping________________

Commands

Copy P&ID Node Numbers / Blank P&ID Node Numbers — Allows you to eithercopy the node number from the P&ID for the copied pipe or leave it blank.

Append Prefix / No Prefix — Overrides the default Append Prefix or No Prefixsetting in the Project Data Manager. Note that this override effects only one copyoperation before automatically reverting back to the default setting. The system alsomakes the following additional database-related changes.

— For piping components, pipes, and instrument components, the weld numbers ateach welded end are set to undefined (blank). Presently, only the alphanumericdescription id of a piping segment is automatically blanked by a copy operation.

— For piping segments, the approval status is set to not approved.

This change in approval status also updates the symbology for copied pipingcomponents, pipes, instruments, and pipe supports accordingly.

Pipeline as Group — Defines that the entire pipeline is to be copied.

Branch Segment as Group — Defines that an olet-type or tee-type branch is the groupto be copied. You can select a tee-type branch at the center, either of the two connectpoints on the header pipe, or the branch connect point as the source location todetermine the destination location. When applicable, the header pipe is broken in orderto insert the tee-type branch.

Active Group — Defines the active group of elements to be copied instead of using apipeline. See Active Group, page 81 for more information.

221

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Restore to Existing Location — Select this option to return to the original location andbegin redefining the copy location.

Construct Point — Select this option to construct the destination point using multipleinputs. When the point has been completely defined, select Confirm to enter thelocation. See Construct Point, page 70 for more information.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by snapping to a segment or locate acomponent on the pipeline to be copied or select the Active Group option from theform to define the elements to be copied.

2. Identify Location of New Piping by defining the destination point for the copiedpiping using the Move to fields to specify an absolute coordinate change or use theMove fields to specify a delta coordinate change from the reference point. You can alsoselect the Construct Point option from the form to use multiple inputs to define thepoint.

222

3.Pip

ing

Copy and Mirror Piping________________

3.1.14 Copy and Mirror Piping

This command creates a mirrored copy of an existing pipeline or group of components. Itactivates the Copy and Mirror Piping form which enables you to define the location of thecopied elements. The type of mirroring (horizontal or vertical) is defined by the movementfrom the reference point to the destination point.

This command makes the following database-related changes based on the setting for Copy inthe Piping Data Control option of the Project Data Manager. See the ProjectAdministrator Reference Guide for more information.





223


Commands






Active Group — Activates the Define Active Group form which enable you to definethe elements to be copied. See Active Group, page 81 for more information.

Restore to Existing Location — Select this option to return to the original location andbegin redefining the copy and mirror location.

Construct Point — Select this option to construct the copy and mirror location usingmultiple inputs. When the point has been completely defined, select Confirm to enterthe location.

224

3.Pip

ing

Copy and Mirror Piping________________

Operating Sequence


2. Identify Location of New Piping by defining the destination point for the copiedpiping. Use the Move to fields to specify an absolute coordinate change or use theMove fields to specify a delta coordinate change from the reference point. You can alsoselect the Construct Point option from the form to use multiple inputs to define thepoint.

225


3.1.15 Copy and Rotate Piping

This command places a rotated copy of an existing pipeline or group of components. Itactivates the Copy and Rotate Piping form which enables you to specify the angle ofrotation for the piping and the destination of the rotated copy. The possible rotation optionsare

Plan view which will rotate about the z axis,

East elevation which will rotate about the x axis,

North elevation which will rotate about the y axis.

This command makes the following database-related changes based on the setting for Copy inthe Piping Data Control option of the Project Data Manager. See the ProjectAdministrator Reference Guide for more information.





226

3.Pip

ing

Copy and Rotate Piping________________

Commands






Active Group — Activates the Define Active Group form which defines the elementsto copied instead of using a pipeline. See Active Group, page 81 for more information.

Alternate Reference Point — Defines an alternate point (other than the one you usedto identify the pipeline) to be the rotation point. This command remains active once thepiping has been copied so that you can specify the angle for the next copy.

Restore to Existing Location — Select this option to return to the original location andbegin creating the copy and rotate location again from scratch.

Construct Point — Select this option to construct the copy and rotate location usingmultiple inputs. When the point has been completely defined, select Confirm to enterthe point.

227


Operating Sequence


2. Identify Location of New Piping by defining the destination point for the copiedpiping. Use the Move to fields to specify an absolute coordinate change or use theMove fields to specify a delta coordinate change from the reference point. You can alsoselect the Construct Point option from the form to use multiple inputs to define thepoint.

3. Specify Rotation or New Location. You can continue to define the new location forthe copied and rotated piping as previously described or select one of the rotationoptions from the upper right corner of the form to define the axis of rotation.

4. Specify Rotation Angle by typing the desired rotation angle for the selected rotationoption. You can type a negative value to indicate a counter clockwise rotation.

228

3.Pip

ing

Place Construction Graphics________________

3.1.16 Place Construction Graphics

This command places non-intelligent graphics in the model for use as construction aids. Itactivates the Place Construction Graphics form used to select the type of construction graphicsto be placed and define the placement location.

Commands

Active Weight — Place a data point along the slider to set the weight.

Active Style — Select the desired symbology option.

Delete Element — Identify the construction graphic element to be deleted and selectConfirm.

Delete All Construction Graphics — Select this option and select Confirm to deleteall the construction graphics in the active model.

229


Operating Sequence

1. Specify First Point by defining the starting point for the construction graphic. Use theMove to fields to specify an absolute coordinate location or use the Move fields tospecify a delta coordinate change from the displayed reference point. You can alsoselect the Construct Point option from the form to use multiple inputs to define thepoint.

2. Accept or Specify Next Point or Accept to Place Block. Define another point alongthe line string or shape or select Confirm to place the specified construction graphic.

230

3.Pip

ing

Revise Component Commands________________

3.2 Revise Component Commands

These commands enable you to revise/append different positional and/or task databaseinformation on PDS piping components. Any rotation, addition, or reconstruction of PDSpiping components must be done through these commands and not through MicroStationmanipulations due to the interdependence of graphic and database information.

Commands

Reconstruct Component/Replace Commodity — Reconstructs a component toreflect any new placement data (such as NPD or option code).

Revise Pipe — Re-connects, reconstructs, or re-connects and reconstructs selectedpiping.

Delete Component — Deletes a single component, pipe, or pipe support.

Rotate Component — Rotates a component around the piping segment that it wasplaced on.

Revise Tap — Revises some or all of the data associated with a tap, including theorientation. It can also be used to delete a tap.

Move Pipe Support — Moves a pipe support to a new location on a piping segment.

231


3.2.1 Reconstruct Component

This command activates the Reconstruct Component form which is used to reconstruct acomponent to reflect any new placement data (such as NPD or option code).

This command can also be used to replace a component (such as an instrument) with adifferent component. The command will access the same form you used at placement so youcan redefine the component. The system begins reconstructing the component as soon as youaccept the component to be updated.

When you select a replacement component, the component’s geometric characteristics arecompared with those of the component being replaced in order to determine if the replacementoperation is valid. The system verifies that your selection has the same number of connectpoints and the same basic geometry when piping is connected to each end of the componentbeing replaced. Piping segments are created or deleted as required when the number ofconnect points changes as a result of the component replacement.

After reconstructing RFTBE components because of a rating change, you must deleteand replace the flanges on both sides of the changed components. This is only true forRFTBE components. The pressure rating of RFTBE components is intentionally notused for reconstructing flanges to avoid a mismatch of ratings for flanges across theRFTBE component.

The Reconstruct Component command should not be used to reconstruct a RFTBEcomponent when its pressure rating has changed. You must first delete and replacethe flanges on both sides of the component to reflect the new rating of the RFTBEcomponent. This avoids a mismatch of flange ratings during reconstruction.

The Reconstruct Component command automatically

re-computes the location of any tap that was created for an elbolet or a trunion. Theelbolet and the trunion are moved to the new location as part of the component beingreconstructed.

232

3.Pip

ing

Reconstruct Component________________ breaks the pipe on the header when an olet-type branch is reconstructed as a tee-typebranch.

deletes one pipe and extends the length of the other pipe (and updates its associativity toa piping segment) on the header when a tee-type branch is reconstructed as an olet-typebranch.

This command reports any Design Checks errors at any end of the component beingreconstructed, when applicable. For example, if a valve with 150# bolted ends isreconstructed as 300# as a result of a change in the piping specs, warning messages will bereported that the 300# valve is now incompatible with the mating 150# flanges, after thereconstruction of the valve has been completed.

Design Checks is performed on the following data for each connect point of the componentthat is being reconstructed, where a mating component is found.

nominal piping diameter requiredpressure rating (and table suffix) requiredend preparation requiredschedule/thickness optionaloutside piping diameter optional

The system display a warning message when moving the adjacent piping as a result ofreconstructing a single component results in a gap or an overlap in the model. The ’dataintegrity’ option of the Diagnostics command can be used to locate the gaps and/or overlaps.

Examples of Component Reconstruction

As a result of changes in the design philosophy or detailing requirements, you are faced withsituations where replacing or reconstructing piping components is necessary.

Because the Reconstruction command is useful in a number of situations. A few step-by-stepexamples are given in this section.

Example 1

You have placed a socket welded end (SWE) or bevelled end (BE) gate valve on a pipe whichneeds to be replaced by an optional flanged valve available in the spec.

1. Select the Reconstruct Component command.

2. Identify the SWE valve by placing a data point.

3. Set the Reconstruct/Replace toggle to Replace.

4. Select Revise Commodity Option command on the Replace form.

233

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The system displays available commodity options.

5. Select, for instance, the 150 # RFFE flanged gate valve from the list and selectConfirm.

6. Select Confirm again for component placement.

The system performs the reconstruction.

–It replaces the SWE valve with the 150 # flanged valve.–Adds the 150 # RFFE flanges on both side of valve.–Telescopes the variable length pipe for the new configuration.

In a similar manner, when the flanged gate valve is replaced by SWE gate valve, theflanges are deleted and the pipe lengths are adjusted accordingly.

This command is very useful in cases where you want to replace the valves only at certainplaces.

When you need to replace all SWE gate valves by 150 # flanged gate valves, use the ReplacePiping command.

Use the Replace Piping command, define the Active Group using Model, View, Fence, etc.,and specify the search criteria.

The system finds all of the occurrences and replaces them in a single operation.

Example 2

You need to replace a gate valve with same size globe valve.


2. Identify the gate valve by placing a data point.


The system displays the commodities form.

4. Select the globe valve from the list and select Confirm.

5. Select Confirm again for component placement.

The system replaces the gate valve by globe valve and the flanges are moved and thevariable length pipe is telescoped accordingly.

234

3.Pip

ing

Reconstruct Component________________

Example 3

You want to replace an elbow with a tee.


2. Identify the elbow by placing a data point.


4. Select the Bend ==> Tee option.

5. Orient the orientation tee and select Confirm to replace the elbow with a tee. Thesystem replaces the elbow with a tee and telescopes the pipes accordingly.

Example 4

You want to replace an instrument which is available in the Instrument Spec database as aresult of a change to the tag number. For instance, you might have changed your instrumentvalve type from globe to ball, and you might also have new dimensional details.

Instrument control valves are often revised for the following reasons:

– type of valve change– change in the supplier– changes in design criteria.

The model must then be revised to take care of the following items:

– new tag number– revised dimensions.

Reconstruction for instrument components works slightly different from for pipingcomponents.

1. Using the Revise Attributes command from the Revise Data palette, change the tagnumber of the instrument being replaced.


3. Identify the instrument for which the tag number is being revised by press <D> toaccept.

The system checks the entry for the new tag number in the Instrument Spec database,once it has been found and you select Confirm , the tag number details are revised inthe Instrument Spec database.

The system also modifies the piping configuration accordingly.

235


Bends and Tee-type Branches

If you identify a bend component to be reconstructed, the Replace option provides a Bend toTee-Type Branch option. This option enables you to replace a 90 degree full-size bend with afull-size tee-type branch.

The following rules apply in reconstructing the tee-type branch.

The system automatically selects the branch component from the Material ReferenceDatabase on the basis of the active segment data derived from the piping segmentassociated with the identified bend component.

The Replace option displays the orientation tee at the center of the bend component.The run of the tee component will be on the pipe run that corresponds to the activeprimary orientation. The branch of the tee component will be on the pipe run thatcorresponds to the active secondary orientation. You can use the orientation controls todetermining the relative orientations of the run and branch of the tee or invert thelocations of connect point one and connect point two on the run.

Re-placement of the bend with the tee-type branch automatically breaks the pipingsegment at the center of the component and creates a new piping segmentcorresponding to the other run connect point.

You must identify a bend component for which the bend angle is 90 degrees (with thesame angular tolerance that is used for the placement of branches at the intersection ofthree piping segments).

You cannot select a different component type prior to reconstruction of the bendcomponent. An attempt to reconstruct any component other than one whose Edenmodule has defined the connect point geometry type as a tee-type branch will result inthe reconstruction failing and an error message being displayed.

If you identify a branch component to be reconstructed, the Replace option will respect theselection of either the branch table option or the variable angle branch table option. You canreplace a tee-type branch, a lateral-type branch, or an olet-type branch that had been placedwithout use of the branch table with the selection from the applicable branch table. Forexample, if you placed a weldolet by specifically selecting the weldolet’s commodity namerather than by selecting an entry from the appropriate branch table, this option will enable youto change the component data source of the branch component to piping commodity frombranch table. For future operations, that branch component will be reconstructedautomatically on the basis of the branch table.

Branches

The following rules apply in reconstructing the branch component.

The system automatically selects the branch component from the branch table in theReference Database on the basis of the active segment data being derived from thepiping segment associated with the identified branch component.

236

3.Pip

ing

Reconstruct Component________________ The branch component is replaced by center and by using the orientation from thecorresponding three piping segments in the model. The branch component’s placementmodel is permanently revised to placement by center.

For tee-type branches and olet-type branches, you must identify a branch component forwhich the branch angle is 90 degrees (with the same angular tolerance that is used forthe placement of branches at the intersection of three piping segments).

In this situation, you must identify a branch component for which the connect pointgeometry type is either a tee-type branch or an olet-type branch.

For lateral-type branches and latrolet-type branches, you must identify a branchcomponent for which the branch angle is greater than or equal to 45 degrees and lessthan 90 degrees (with the same angular tolerance that is used for the placement ofbranches at the intersection of three piping segments).

In this situation, you must identify a branch component for which the connect pointgeometry type is either a lateral-type branch or a latrolet-type branch.

Flanges

When reconstructing a flange that was initially placed by its bolted end, the system re-selectsthe flange from the Material Reference Database on the basis of the data for the matingcomponent at the bolted end of the flange, if applicable. For example, if a flange was initiallyconnected to a 150# valve, which was later changed to a 300# valve, reconstructing the flangeresults in the selection of a different flange from the Material Reference Database thatmatches the bolted end conditions of the valve. This functionality also applies to flangesconnected to nozzles.

After reconstructing RFTBE components because of a rating change, you must deleteand replace the flanges on both sides of the changed components. This is only true forRFTBE components. The pressure rating of RFTBE components is intentionally notused for reconstructing flanges to avoid a mismatch of ratings for flanges across theRFTBE component.

You can also replace default flanges with orifice flanges and orifice flanges with defaultflanges.

This command performs the following additional functions when an orifice flange is beingreconstructed that results in a change of the number of taps. The number of taps for an orificeflange is determined on the basis of the modifier column in the Piping CommoditySpecification Data Table of the Material Reference Database.

If the number of taps increases from one to two as a result of the reconstruction, thesystem creates a piping segment from the center of the orifice flange to the new tap(connect point four) and updates the component’s associativity to that piping segment.

If the number of taps decreases from two to one as a result of the reconstruction, thesystem deletes the piping segment associated with the orifice flange’s tap (connect pointfour) and updates the component’s associativity to that piping segment. Likewise, the

237

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ system deletes any piping, other than the orifice flange, associated with that pipingsegment. No warnings are displayed as the piping is deleted.

Nipple to a Pipe

When reconstructing either a branch nipple or an in-line nipple, the Replace Commodityform is displayed, allowing you to replace the nipple with either piping or tubing.

Non-Radial Branch

You can revise the data for a non-radial branch. The system displays the same menu or formthat was used to place it. The active options displayed are determined on the basis of how thenon-radial branch was previously placed. The following characteristics apply to thereconstruction of non-radial branches:

You specify the offset from the branch point (the location on the centerline of theheader pipe). The non-radial branch is not always tangential with respect to the headerpipe. However, you can accept the tangential option without knowledge of the requireddimension for the non-radial branch to be tangential with respect to the header pipe.

For purposes of reconstruction, the non-radial branch offset will be loaded into therelational database as dimension_b. Likewise, the branch component’s user datarecords the your method of selection of the offset as either tangential or by user inToggle_1.

When the non-radial branch is tangential, the branch pipe protrudes into the header pipeby 0.5 the header pipe’s piping outside diameter. Otherwise, the branch pipe protrudesinto the header pipe by 0.375 the header pipe’s piping outside diameter.

By definition, the non-radial branch will be non-symmetrical with respect to the headerpipe. Since the primary axis of the orientation tee represents the orientation of theheader, and the secondary axis represents the branch orientation, you are prompted forthe direction of the branches offset from the header by a toggle on the branchcomponent’s form, as with a non-symmetrical gear operator. The branch component’suser data records the user’s selection of the orientation of the non-radial branch inToggle_2.

Wall thickness calculations do not apply, unless the you have specified such in thepiping commodity specification data.

Branch reinforcement calculations do not apply for reinforcing pads and reinforcingwelds under any circumstances. However, for a reinforcing pad, you are prompted forthe pad thickness and the pad width. For a reinforcing weld, you are prompted for theweld size.

The connect point geometry type in the branch component’s user data will indicate thatthe component represents a non-radial branch. You must specify the branchcomponent’s connect point geometry type as NON_RADIAL_BRANCH.

238

3.Pip

ing


Pipe

When reconstructing pipe, the Reconstruct Component command functions in the same waythat the Reconstruct Pipe command works within the Revise Pipe command. This includesautomatically invoking the Design Checks comparisons at each end of the pipe beingreconstructed. Also, the weld data is reconstructed as in the following sections.

Pipe Supports

When reconstructing a pipe support, the system provides the option of replacing the pipesupport with a different pipe support by displaying the same menu or form that was used toplace it. The dimensional data is set back to zero automatically. It is your responsibility to setthe correct model code for the piping support.

Piping Specialties or Instruments

If the instrument or piping specialty has been defined in the Piping Job Specification at theinitial placement, reconstruction proceeds in the same manner as the initial placement of theinstrument or piping specialty. If the instrument or piping specialty has not been defined inthe Piping Job Specification (that is, you specified shapes and dimensions through the formsinterface), the system provides the form data used in the initial placement of the component.

You can manually revise both the alphanumeric data (normally derived from the Piping JobSpecification) and the physical data (normally derived from the Physical Data Library) duringthe reconstruction of the component. The only data that would be derived from the RDBduring the reconstruction of an instrument or piping specialty would be the genericdimensional data, such as piping outside diameter, thread depth, flange thickness, or flangeoutside diameter.

For instruments or piping specialty items you will have the option to add an operator to aninstrument or piping specialty previously placed without the operator.

The system also provides the option of replacing the piping specialty or instrument bydisplaying the same menu or form that was used to place the item. The dimensional data is setback to zero automatically. It is your responsibility to set the correct model code for thepiping specialty or instrument.

Weld Types

Weld types are updates at each welded end of any component being reconstructed, if requiredas a result of a change to the fabrication category from the Reference Database. For eachwelded end, where the weld type is by system the following applies:

If the Weld Type Table is loaded, the system defines the weld type using the Weld TypeTable. A Weld Type Table is delivered in win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data called weld.tbl.A sample of the data that it contains is shown below.

239

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Table_Data_Definition ’Weld_Type_Table’

No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1

Units= INT, INT, INT


1 1 1

1 5 21

1 7 21

1 15 21

1 16 21

1 17 21

1 25 21

1 27 21

If a Weld Type Table has not been defined for the project, the weld type is revised to thedefault weld type value, ’shop weld’ (11).

If you set the toggle on the Revise Weld Type form to Respect Weld Type by User, theweld type is not revised for either the welded end of the component or pipe beingreconstructed or updated or the corresponding welded end of the other component. Also, theweld type is not revised when the mating welded end is not in the active piping model, sinceyou do not have write access to reference models.

When the system defines the weld type, the following considerations are made:

The system uses the Weld Type Table to determine the weld type on the basis of thefabrication category for the component or pipe being reconstructed or updated and theother component at the welded joint.

If the weld type of the other component at the welded joint differs from the onedetermined by the project’s Weld Type Table, the weld type of the applicable end ofthat component is updated to the same weld type as that of the end of the component orpipe being reconstructed or updated on the basis of the Weld Type Table.


This command can be used following a change to any of the task database attributes for acomponent or its associated piping segment which affect the model symbology of thecomponent. For example, it can be used after a piping segment is updated to match changesto the P&ID.

Commands

Select Commodity Replacement — Replace the component with a differentcommodity name and/or commodity option. For example, this option could be used toreplace a gate valve with a globe valve. Set the toggle to Replace and select SelectCommodity Replacement. The system activates the Replace Commodity form.

240

3.Pip

ing


Operating Sequence

1. Identify Component by placing a data point to locate the piping component,instrument or pipe support to be reconstructed or replaced. The system activates theReplace Commodity form.

241


3.2.2 Revise Pipe

This command is used to re-connect, reconstruct, or re-connect and reconstruct piping.

When you identify the end of a pipe to specify the location of the pipe end to be revised, thetwo pipes will be connected when the following conditions are met:

— Both of the applicable pipes are variable length pipes.

— Neither of the applicable pipes is a purchased length pipe.

— The two pipes are compatible with respect to the Design Consistency Check rules.

242

3.Pip

ing

Re-Connect Pipe End________________

3.2.2.1 Re-Connect Pipe End

This option is used to re-connect an existing pipe to an existing component by relocating oneof the endpoints of the pipe.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipe End by selecting the pipe to be adjusted by identifying the endpoint ofthe pipe to be relocated.

2. Specify Distance by typing the distance of the added pipe length.

3. Accept or Re-specify Distance by typing another distance or select Confirm tocontinue.

4. Identify Connection for Pipe by selecting the new endpoint of the pipe by identifyingthe connect point of the component for the pipe connection.

5. Accept to Revise Pipe by selecting Confirm to confirm the revision.

243


3.2.2.2 Reconstruct Pipe

This option is used to reconstruct one pipe at a time. This option does not alter theconfiguration or segment of the pipe.


It is recommended to use the Data Integrity Validation option on the Diagnostics formbefore reconstructing any piping.

244

3.Pip

ing

Re-Connect End and Reconstruct________________

3.2.2.3 Re-Connect End and Reconstruct

This option is used to re-connect an existing pipe to an existing component by relocating oneof the endpoints of the pipe and also reconstructs a specified part of the model to update thegraphical representation and the alphanumeric data associated with that piping, based onchanges in the Piping Design RDB, the P&ID Database, or the piping segment data in themodel.

The Design Checks comparison is automatically run at each end of the pipe beingreconstructed. Also, weld data is re-generated when necessary. See the ReconstructComponent, page 232 for more information on what is performed by the Design Checkscomparison and weld data reconstruction processes.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipe End by selecting the pipe to be adjusted by identifying the endpoint ofthe pipe to be relocated. The system holds the other endpoint of the pipe fixed, andenables you to relocate the identified endpoint. The system will display on the form theendpoint of the pipe to be moved.

2. Specify Distance by typing a distance or place a data point to define the distance foran added pipe length.

3. Accept or Re-specify Distance by typing another distance or select Confirm tocontinue.

4. Identify Connection for Pipe by selecting the new endpoint of the pipe by identifyingthe connect point of the component for the pipe connection.

5. Accept to Revise Pipe by selecting Confirm to confirm the revision.

245


3.2.3 Delete Component

This command deletes a component, pipe, or pipe support. You can identify the component tobe deleted or allow the system to select the last component placed in the design file. If theselected component is at the end of a pipeline, the system modifies the segment end by thelength of the component. The system places the active point at the new end-of-pipeline andallows you to continue to delete from that component back.

The Delete Component option revises the pipes that are connected to the component orinstrument being deleted that are either linear, tee-type branch or lateral-type branch in thefollowing situations.

If both CP1 and CP2 of the component to be deleted are connected to variable lengthpipes and those two connect points are compatible with respect to nominal pipingdiameter, end preparation, and pressure rating, the two pipes are connected.

If CP1 of the component to be deleted is connected to a variable length pipe, CP2 is notconnected to a variable length pipe (but does not represent the end of a pipe run), andthose two connect points are compatible with respect to nominal piping diameter, endpreparation, and pressure rating, the pipe that is connected to connect point one isextended to the previous location of connect point two.

If CP2 of the component to be deleted is connected to a variable length pipe, CP1 is notconnected to a variable length pipe (but does not represent the end of a pipe run), andthose two connect points are compatible with respect to nominal piping diameter, endpreparation, and pressure rating, the pipe that is connected to CP2 is extended to theprevious location of CP1.

If you identify a tee-type branch component to be deleted and the branch pipingsegment ends at CP3 of the tee-type branch, the system deletes the branch pipingsegment and connects the two header piping segments. (The identified branchcomponent must lie along a segment pipe run; neither of the header segments can end ata connect point of the tee-type branch.)

246

3.Pip

ing

Delete Component________________

Commands

Revision of Piping Segments — Is active by default. If the selected component is atthe end of a pipeline, the system modifies the segment end by the length of thecomponent. If this option is not active, the segment will not be deleted or adjustedalong with the component.

Deletion of Pipe Supports — Is inactive by default. When active, it deletes any pipesupports which are linked to the component being deleted.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Component or Accept Last Component Placed by snapping to thecomponent to be deleted or place a data point over the component.

— OR —

Select Confirm to select the last component which was placed in the design file.

2. Accept/Reject by pressing a <D> to accept or <R> to reject.

3. Identify Limit Point for Piping at Tap or Accept to Continue. For any pipeconnected to any tap, this command allows you to limit the extent of deleting theconnect line. For example, if an elbow has been tapped for an elbolet, you can limit theextent of deleting the line that is connected to the elbolet. When you define a limitpoint, the elbolet and all components up to the limit point are deleted.

247


3.2.4 Rotate Component

This command is used to rotate a component around the piping segment on which it wasplaced. This command is most useful for positioning valve operators at odd angles that enablethem to be more easily used by an operator. It can also be used to rotate Branch and Bendtype end components at the end of a piping segment or to rotate component in free space. Fora component in space, the connect point used to select the component is used as the point torotate about.

The system displays the rotated component in refresh display to enable you to review the neworientation and make further revisions before accepting the orientation.

248

3.Pip

ing

Rotate Component________________

Commands

Rotation of Pipe Support — Enables or disable the rotation of any pipe supports thatmight be associated with the component being rotated. By default, the rotation isdisabled.

The associativity between a pipe support and the component being rotated is determinedon the basis of whether or not the attachment point of the pipe support is on thecenterline of the component being rotated.

Once this option has been enabled, it automatically returns to the default setting once acomponent has been rotated or the Rotate Component command has been re-selected.

You can rotate a tee-type branch by the branch connect point (CP 3), when neither ofthe header connect points (CP 1 and CP 2) are connected to any other piping.

Review Bolt Data — Displays all of the following data for each bolted end of a pipingcomponent, pipe, instrument component, or equipment nozzle so that you can determinewhat angle a valve operator may be rotated. This information is only available for acomponent with at least one bolted end.

the number of bolt holesthe bolt diameterthe bolt circle diameterthe acceptable rotation (360 degrees divided by the number of bolt holes

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Component by placing a data point over the piping component to be rotatedand press <D> to accept the component.

2. Accept of Specify Rotation by typing the desired angle of rotation (counterclockwisearound the piping segment axis) or press <R> to rotate the component in 90 degreeincrements. You can also select any of the orientation options on the RotateComponent form.

249


3.2.5 Revise Tap

This command activates the Revise Tap form which is used to revise some or all of the dataassociated with a tap, including the orientation. It can also be used to delete a tap.

Commands

Tap Table — Displays the tap table defined for the piping materials class associatedwith the identified component.

Tap Nominal Piping Diameter — Select this field and type the diameter for the tap.

Tap Option — Displays the active tap option. Selecting this field or selecting SelectTap Option activates the List of Tap Options form. This form displays the optionsfor the active Piping Materials Class and tap diameter sorted alphanumerically byoption code.

250

3.Pip

ing

Revise Tap________________

Select any of the listed options to change the end prep and select Confirm or selectCancel (X) to use the default option.

Location For Tap — The tap location is initialized to the component center. You canuse the Move fields to construct an offset from the component center or reset thelocation by any of the following:

Component Center Connect Point 1 Connect Point 2 Compute For ElboletCompute For Trunion

Compute For Elbolet and Compute For Trunion provide computational assistance inspecifying the location of the tap.

The Compute For Trunion option computes the intersection with the piping outsidediameter of the elbow using a horizontal connect point and a specified trunioncenterline elevation. The end of the trunion will intrude into the elbow. However, thecenterline of the tap (representing the centerline of the end of the trunion) will be at thespecified centerline elevation.

You can use the Move fields to construct a precise offset relative to any of the aboveselections.

Source Of Tap Data — The tap data can be defined by any of the following: TapTable Connect Point 1 Connect Point 2 Connect Point 3

Delete Tap — Deletes an existing tap. For any pipe connected to any tap, thiscommand allows you to limit the extent of deleting the connected line. For example, ifan elbow has been tapped for an elbolet, you can limit the extent of deleting the line thatis connected to the elbolet. The system asks you to Identify Limit Point for Piping atTap or Accept to Continue. When you define a limit point, the elbolet and allcomponents up to the limit point are deleted. When a tap is deleted, the two remainingpiping segments are joined together automatically if the piping segment data isconsistent. Otherwise, you will be warned that the piping segments were not connecteddue to piping segment data discrepancies.

251


Elbolets and Trunions

When creating a tap for the automated placement of an elbolet,

If more than one option is specified in the Material Reference Database, the systemdisplays a list of the available elbolet options for the active piping materials class andthe elbolet’s first size and second size.

If only one elbolet option is specified (the default), the elbolet is placed without userintervention.

When creating a tap for the automated placement of an trunion,

If more than one option is specified in the Material Reference Database the systemdisplays a list of the available trunion options for the trunion’s piping materials classand size.

If only one trunion option is specified (the default), the trunion is placed without userintervention.

If one of the following errors occurs in the automated placement of an elbolet or a trunion, thesystem displays the appropriate data in a form.

The elbolet or trunion is not specified in the Material Reference Database for theapplicable piping materials class and size range.

The elbolet or trunion cannot be placed due to problems in either the GraphicCommodity Library or the Physical Data Library.


The tap to be revised must exist in the active model file.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Tap by placing a data point to identify the component which contains the tapto be revised.

2. Accept/Reject Item name / New item name. You can press <R> to reject the connectpoint until the location of the tap is displayed. Then press <D> to accept the identifiedlocation.

3. Accept or Revise Data for Tap. You can revise any of the tap properties in any orderor select Delete Tap to delete the tap definition then select Confirm to process therevised data or accept the existing data and modify the orientation.

252

3.Pip

ing

Revise Tap________________

4. Specify Orientation for Tap Primary is Active Axis of Rotation. Press <R> torotate the primary axis or select the desired axis from the coordinate axes displayed onthe form. Press <D> to rotate the secondary axis.

5. Secondary is Active Axis of Rotation. You can set the secondary orientation usingthe methods previously described.

253


3.2.6 Move Pipe Support

This command moves a pipe support to a new location on a piping segment.

Commands



Construct Point — Constructs a new active point using multiple inputs. You canmove the point along absolute or delta coordinates. Each input moves the coordinateindicator until you select Confirm. Refer to Construct Point, page 70 for moreinformation.



Move from Reference Point — Moves the active placement point a specified distancefrom an identified reference point in a specified direction. See Move from ReferencePoint, page 63 for more information.


254

3.Pip

ing

Move Pipe Support________________ Distance From Source — Places the copied (new) pipe support a specified distancefrom the original support.

Compute Distance — Moves the active placement point by a known offset. SeeCompute Distance, page 73 for more information.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipe Support by snapping to the pipe support or place a data point to locatethe pipe support element to be moved.

2. Specify New Location by defining the new location for the selected pipe supportusing the Move To fields to specify an absolute coordinate change or use the Movefields to specify a delta coordinate change from the reference point. You can also selectthe Construct Point option from the form to use multiple inputs to define the point.You can also select the Compute Distance option.

3. Accept or Specify New Location. You can redefine the location of the pipe support.

255


3.3 Revise Segment Commands

These commands enable you to revise piping segments in the active model. The commandsperform both graphical and task database revisions. You cannot use MicroStation commandsto change piping segments as they will not update the user data associated with the pipingsegment.

Commands

Move Vertex — Moves an identified segment vertex to a new location. You canmove the vertex to any location by typing delta distances, absolute distances, or adistance and direction, or by relocating an end point connected to a nozzle to the currentnozzle location.

Insert Vertex – Inserts a vertex in a specified segment pipe run. The new vertex isinserted in the pipeline following the vertex used to identify the pipeline.

Delete Vertex — Deletes a vertex from a piping segment and redraws the pipingsegment to reflect the deleted vertex.

256

3.Pip

ing

Move Piping Segment Vertex________________

3.3.1 Move Piping Segment Vertex

This command moves an identified segment vertex to a new location. After selecting theMove Vertex command, the Move Piping Segment Vertex form is displayed.

You can use the form to move the desired vertex to any location by typing delta distances,absolute distances, or a distance and direction, or by relocating an end point connected to anozzle to the current nozzle location. The results of the move are displayed in refresh modeso that you can accept or reject the change.

This command will connect two piping segments when the following conditions are met.

The piping segment vertex that is being moved is one of the two end points of thatpiping segment.

Identify the destination location of that piping segment by snapping to one of the endpoints of a different piping segment or by searching with a data point for a componentend that represents one of the end points of a different piping segment.

The segment data for those two piping segments is equivalent.

This command adjusts segment vertices only. It does not adjust componentgraphics.

257


Operating Sequence

1. Identify Segment Vertex by snapping to the segment vertex to be moved.

2. Specify Location of Vertex by selecting one of the Move To fields (East, West,North, South, Elevation) to specify an absolute coordinate location. Select Move ToPoint to specify an absolute coordinate location by snapping to a graphic element, orselect one of the Move fields (East, West, North, South, Up, Down) to specify a deltacoordinate location from the current location. You can also select the Construct Point,Distance And Direction, Point on Segment, or Move End To Nozzle option.

3. Accept or Specify New Location. You can repeat any of the movement options untilthe desired vertex location has been defined.

258

3.Pip

ing

Insert Piping Segment Vertex________________

3.3.2 Insert Piping Segment Vertex

This command inserts a vertex in a specified segment pipe run. It activates the PrecisionInput form which defines the location of a new vertex using the specified segment vertex as astarting location. The new vertex is inserted in the pipeline following the vertex used toidentify the pipeline.

The system moves the coordinate system indicator to the specified location enabling youaccept or reject the location.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Segment Pipe Run by snapping to the segment pipe run to receive the newvertex.

2. Specify Location of Vertex by selecting one of the Move To fields (East, West,North, South, Elevation) to specify an absolute coordinate, select Move To Point tospecify an absolute coordinate location by snapping to a graphic element, or select oneof the Move fields (East,West,North,South, Up,Down)to specify a delta coordinatelocation from the current location. You can also select the Construct Point option.

259


3.3.3 Delete Piping Segment Vertex

This command deletes a vertex from a piping segment. The system redraws the pipingsegment to reflect the deleted vertex.

You can not delete a vertex on a segment with only two vertices. Use theDelete Piping command to delete segments with only two vertices.

This command deletes segment vertices only, it does not delete componentgraphics.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Segment Vertex by snapping to the segment vertex to be deleted and thenaccept the deletion with a <D>, or press <R> to reject the identified vertex and identifyanother vertex.

2. Accept Segment Vertex for Deletion by selecting Confirm to delete the vertex, orselect Restart to cancel the deletion.

3. Vertex has been Deleted. The system redraws the piping segment to reflect thedeleted vertex.

260

3.Pip

ing

Revise Group Commands________________

3.4 Revise Group Commands

These commands enable you to move, delete, rotate, and reconstruct existing piping. You canrevise a pipeline of those elements defined by an active group.

Commands

Move Piping — Moves an entire pipeline or the elements defined by the active groupto a specified location. It activates the Move Piping form which enables you to definethe destination point for the move.

Move Pipe Run — Moves a specified pipe run to a new location while maintainingthe connectivity to the connecting pipe runs in the piping segment. It activates theMove Pipe Run form used to specify the destination for the selected pipe run andcontrol the method used to accomplish the move.

Move Pipeline End — Moves a pipeline end point to a new location. This is the mostconvenient move option when connecting a pipeline to a nozzle or another pipeline.

Move Piping Assembly — Moves a piping assembly (set of connected pipingcomponents). It activates the Move Piping Assembly form which controls the differentmovement options. The piping which surrounds the assembly is adjusted automaticallyto maintain a connected pipeline.

Delete Piping — Deletes piping components and segments from the active model. Itactivates the Delete Piping form used to specify the type of elements to be deleted andthe extent of the deletion.

Delete Piping Assembly — Deletes a group of connected mating components or asingle component or pipe. It only deletes the component or pipe not the associatedpiping segment.

Mirror Piping — Mirrors existing piping to a specified location in the active model.It activates the Mirror Piping form used to define the piping to be mirrored (byidentifying a pipeline or by using the active group) and the new location for themirrored elements.

261

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Rotate Piping — Rotates a pipeline or the elements defined by the active group by aspecified angle of rotation. It activates the Rotate Piping form used to define therotation option.

Reconstruct Piping — Reconstructs a specified part of the model to update thegraphical representation and the alphanumeric data associated with that piping, basedon changes in the Piping Reference Data, the P&ID database, or the piping segmentdata in the model.

Replace Piping — Replaces all the piping commodities of a specific name within aworking group with a different commodity name and/or commodity option.

262

3.Pip

ing

Move Piping________________

3.4.1 Move Piping

This command moves an entire pipeline or moves the elements defined by the active group toa specified location. It activates the Move Piping form which enables you to define thedestination point for the move.

If you plan to use the Active Group option, you cannot use a group definedwith the Component List or Limit Point options as input to this command.

Commands



263

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Active Group — Defines a group of components which can be manipulated by theactive command. It activates the Define Active Group form used to define thecollection of components and/or segments to make up the group. Active Group, page81 for more information.

Move Branch Segment — Defines that a olet-type branch is the group to be moved.After you move a branch, the two remaining header piping segments at the branch pointare connected automatically if their piping segment data is consistent. Otherwise, youwill be warned that the piping segments were not connected due to piping segment datadiscrepancies.

Move Branch Segment will not telescope pipe when the branch is part of apiping loop.

Construct Point — Defines a coordinate point using multiple inputs. It activates theConstruct Point form used to define absolute or delta coordinate values. Each inputmoves the coordinate indicator until you confirm the displayed location. See ConstructPoint, page 70 for more information.

Compute Distance — Moves the active placement point by a known offset. SeeCompute Distance, page 73 for more information.

Move Piping to Nozzle — Moves selected piping to a nozzle.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by snapping to a piping segment on thepipeline or place a data point to locate a piping item on the pipeline or select the ActiveGroup option to move the elements defined by the active group.

2. Specify New Piping Location by defining the destination point for the highlightedelements using any of the options on the form.

3. Accept or Specify New Location by redefining the destination using any of themethod.

264

3.Pip

ing

Move Pipe Run________________

3.4.2 Move Pipe Run

This command moves a specified pipe run to a new location while maintaining theconnectivity to the connecting pipe runs in the piping segment. It activates the Move PipeRun form which is used to specify the destination for the selected pipe run and control themethod used to accomplish the move.

For performance reasons, this command does NOT check the approval status of thepipe being revised.

265


Commands

Concentric Eccentric Change — This option replaces an existing concentric reducerwith an eccentric reducer (or vice versa). The system moves the pipeline toaccommodate the new position of the line due to the reducer change.

Insert Eccentric Reducer — This option inserts an eccentric reducer into an existingpipeline. The system moves the pipeline to accommodate the new position of the linedue to the eccentric reducer.

Move Branch Segment — This option moves a branch to another location. You mustidentify an olet-type fitting as the branch component. The piping segment associatedwith connect point two of the olet-type fitting and all downstream piping will move tothe destination location. After you move a branch, the two remaining header pipingsegments at the branch point are connected automatically if their piping segment data isconsistent. Otherwise, you will be warned that the piping segments were not connecteddue to piping segment data discrepancies.

If you move the branch to a pipe with a different header size, it’s your responsibility toreconstruct that branch component.

The Move Pipe Run command will move a non-orthogonal pipe runand have the appropriate orthogonal pipe run telescope.

For example, moving a pipe run that lies along the 45 degree axis ofWest/up and East/down in the East/up direction results in one of thefollowing pipe runs telescoping.

— The first East/West pipe run that includes a variable length pipe of sufficient lengthfor telescoping.

— The first verticle pipe run that includes a variable length of pipe of sufficient length.

— The first pipe run that is parallel to the direction of the move and includes a variablelength pipe that can be telescoped.

Move Branch Segment will not telescope pipe when the branch is part of a pipingloop.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Segment Pipe Run or Select Reducer Option by snapping to the segmentpipe run to be moved or select a the Insert Eccentric Reducer or ConcentricEccentric Change option.

2. Specify Location of Pipe Run or Select Pipe Option. Define the destination for theselected pipe run or select the Insert Pipe to add pipe to the pipe run. Set the toggle tospecify whether the pipe being placed is to be considered as variable length or fixedlength. You can also select the Construct Point, Compute Distance, Distance andDirection option to specify the location with the Distance and Direction form.

266

3.Pip

ing

Move Pipe Run________________

3. Accept or Specify New Location. You can continue to change the pipe destination aspreviously described or select Confirm to accept the displayed segment location andbegin processing the move.

267


3.4.3 Move Pipeline End

This command moves a pipeline end point to a new location. This is the most convenientmove option when connecting a pipeline to a nozzle or another pipeline.

After you move a branch, the two remaining header piping segments at the branch point areconnected automatically if their piping segment data is consistent. Otherwise, you will bewarned that the piping segments were not connected due to piping segment datadiscrepancies.

When this option is used to move a pipeline to another pipeline such that a colinear pipe runresults, the piping segment data of the mating piping segments is compared in the samemanner as the Connect Segments command.

The following actions result on the basis of the data gathered by that comparison:

If the data of the two piping segments is identical, the piping segments and the pipes, ifapplicable, are merged.

If the data of the two piping segments differs, you are warned.

Likewise, if connecting the two pipelines results in one pipe adjacent to a second pipe,the two pipes are connected when the following conditions are met:

268

3.Pip

ing

Move Pipeline End________________

— Both of the applicable pipes are variable length pipes.

— Neither of the applicable pipes is a purchased length pipe.

— The two pipes are compatible with respect to the Design Consistency Check rules.

The system applies different rules for telescoping, when moving the end of apipeline in a non-orthogonal direction (the change of the end point is to bealong more than one coordinate axis). This enables you to move the end of apipeline in a non-orthogonal direction and have a non-orthogonal pipe run thatis parallel to the direction of move telescoped to adjust for the change.

In the previous release, moving the end of a pipeline in a non-orthogonaldirection results in all connected piping being moved by the absolute distanceof the move until a variable length pipe was encountered whose centerline liesalong one of the coordinate axes involved in the direction of move.

For performance reasons, this command does NOT check the approval status of thepipe being revised.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline End Point by snapping to the endpoint of the pipeline to specify thereference point for the move.

2. Specify Location of End Point by defining the destination point for the pipeline end.You can snap to the end of another segment or use any of the provided commands todefine a point.

3. Accept or Specify New Location — Redefine the destination point using any of themethods available.

269


3.4.4 Move Piping Assembly

This command moves a piping assembly (set of connected piping components). It activatesthe Move Piping Assembly form which provides information on the different movementoptions. The piping which surrounds the assembly is adjusted automatically to maintain aconnected pipeline.

270

3.Pip

ing

Move Piping Assembly________________

The following table and the graphics on the left explain how this option works.

Selection Highlights Allows Move Action

CP2 Left Flange Left Flange, Valve,Right Flange

Move by DeletingPipe (pipe to left willbe deleted), or Moveby Distance (key-in).

CP2 Left Flange Left Flange, Valve,Right Flange

Move by InsertingPipe (Pipe will beinserted between leftflange and elbow.Assembly movesright.)

CP2 Right Flange Right Flange, Valve,Left Flange

Move by DeletingPipe (Pipe to right willbe deleted. Assemblymove right.) OR Moveby Distance (Key-in.Assembly moves right.Pipe to right will beshortened accordingly.

Commands

Move by Distance — Moves the selected assembly a specified distance by telescopingpipe on both sides of the assembly.

Move by Correcting Gap — This option is only enabled when a gap exists at the endof the piping assembly identified. It moves the selected assembly to correct the gap.Place a data point on a piping component, pipe, or instrument to identify the newlocation. This option works similarly to Move by Distance, except the distance tomove is determined by the distance between the end of the piping assembly identifiedand the connect point location at the other end of the identified gap.

Move by Inserting Pipe — Moves the selected assembly a specified distance byinserting pipe from the reference point.

Set the toggle to specify whether the pipe being placed is to be considered as variablelength or fixed length. The default is variable length pipe.

This option automatically deletes the pipe which is to have its length revised insituations where the length specified for the pipe to be inserted is the same as the lengthof the pipe to be revised. In other words, the pipe to be revised is deleted when itslength is reduced to zero.

271

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The weld data is automatically re-generated. See the Reconstruct Component, page 232for information on weld data.

Move by Reversing Pipe — Reverses a fitting to fitting group of components byreversing the order of a pipe with respect to the group of components. The weld data isautomatically re-generated. See the Reconstruct Component, page 232 for how theweld data is reconstructed.

Move by Deleting Pipe — Moves the selected assembly a specified distance bydeleting pipe from the reference point to he destination point. The weld data isautomatically re-generated. See the Reconstruct Component, page 232 for how theweld data is reconstructed.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Piping Assembly by placing a data point to identify a connect point on thepiping assembly.

2. Accept/Reject by pressing <D> to accept the connect point or press <R> to reject theidentified point and review the other connect points.

3. Specify Distance by typing the distance to move the assembly in working units.

4. Accept Assembly to be Moved Assembly to be Moved x’ x" by selecting Confirmto move the assembly the specified distance in the direction of the component connectpoint.

272

3.Pip

ing

Delete Piping________________

3.4.5 Delete Piping

This command deletes piping components and segments from the active model. It activatesthe Delete Piping form which is used to specify the type of elements to be deleted and theextent of the deletion (volume).

When a piping segment that represents a branch is deleted, the two remaining header pipingsegments at the branch point are joined together automatically if the piping segment data isconsistent. Otherwise, you will be warned that the piping segments were not connected due topiping segment data discrepancies.

You can specify the extent of the deletion by identifying a segment, a pipeline, or theactive group.

You can delete components and pipes only (without deleting the segments), or deletecomponents, pipes, and segments.

When components are specified for deletion, all components will be deleted includingvalves, instruments, and other manually placed components.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by selecting one of the available options todefine the extent of the deletion and select the pipeline you want to delete.

2. Accept or Select Other Option. You can select any of the options previouslydescribed to reject the highlighted elements and redefine the elements to be deleted, orselect Confirm to accept the highlighted elements for deletion.

273


3.4.6 Delete Piping Assembly

This command deletes a group of connected mating components or a single component orpipe. It only deletes the component or pipe not the associated piping segment.

The Delete Piping Assembly command forms a welded joint to replace the gap when a pipingassembly has been deleted from a welded pipe. The system repairs the weld type and the weldnumber.

The system automatically defines the weld data for the pipe end that is being moved so that itis consistent with that of the welded component to which it is being connected. The applicableend of the pipe will have its weld type and weld number changed to be the same as that of theapplicable welded end of the other component. If the previous weld number was formed onthe basis of the component that was deleted, the weld number will be determined on the basisof the other component.

When a piping assembly is deleted, the two remaining piping segments are joined togetherautomatically if the piping segment data is consistent. Otherwise, you will be warned that thepiping segments were not connected due to piping segment data discrepancies. Theillustration and table below describes what happens depending on which connect point youchoose.

Selection Highlights for Deletion

CP2 Left Flange Left Flange, Valve, Right Flange

CP1 Left Flange Left Flange

CP1 Valve Valve, Right Flange

CP2 Valve Valve, Left Flange

CP1 Right Flange Right Flange

CP2 Right Flange Right Flange, Valve, Left Flange

274

3.Pip

ing

Delete Piping Assembly________________

Example

1. Select the Delete Piping Assembly command.

The Delete Piping Assembly form displays.

2. Identify Connect Point Place a data point to specify the connect point of the pipingassembly where you want the deletions to begin.

3. Accept/Reject Press <R> to reject the displayed connect point and have the systemdisplay the next available connect point or press <D> to accept the displayed connectpoint.

4. Accept Piping Assembly for Deletion Confirm to accept the highlighted componentsfor deletion.

275


3.4.7 Mirror Piping

This command mirrors existing piping to a specified location in the active model. It activatesthe Mirror Piping form which allows you to define the piping to be mirrored (by identifyinga pipeline or by using the active group) and the new location for the mirrored elements.

Commands

Active Group — Defines an active group to specify the group of piping to be mirrored.Only the elements within the group definition are mirrored. Therefore, some elementswhich are connected may become disconnected from the mirrored components. SeeActive Group, page 81 for more information.

Component List and Limit Points — Options are not supported by the Mirror PipingCommand.

Restore to Existing Location — Restore the piping to its original position.

Construct Point — Constructs the mirror location by using multiple inputs. When thepoint has been completely defined, select Confirm to enter the point.

Restart — Cancels the current operation and re-identify the elements to be mirrored.

276

3.Pip

ing

Mirror Piping________________

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by snapping to a segment or locate acomponent to identify the pipeline to be mirrored or select the Active Group optionfrom the form to mirror the elements defined by the active group.

2. Accept or Specify New Location. You can continue to define the location of themirrored piping.

277


3.4.8 Rotate Piping

This command rotates existing piping in the active model. You can rotate a pipeline or theelements defined by the active group by a specified angle of rotation. It activates the RotatePiping Form which enables you to define the rotation option:

Plan view - rotate about the z axis

East elevation - rotate about the x axis

North elevation - rotate about the y axis.

Reference Point - rotate about the point you used to identify the pipeline.

278

3.Pip

ing

Rotate Piping________________

Commands

Active Group — Defines the group of piping to be rotated. Only the elements whichare within the group definition are rotated. Therefore, some elements which areconnected may become disconnected from the rotated components. See Active Group,page 81 for more information.

Component List and Limit Points — Are not supported by the Rotate PipingCommand.

Alternate Reference Point — Defines an alternate point (other than the one you usedto identify the pipeline) to be the rotation point.

Restore to Existing Location — Restores the pipeline to its original position.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by snapping to a segment or locate acomponent to identify the pipeline to be rotated. The specified point is used as thereference point about which the pipeline will be rotated. You can also select the ActiveGroup option from the form to rotate the elements defined by the active group. Thedefined reference point for the group is used as the point about which the elements willbe rotated.

2. Specify Rotation by selecting one of the rotation options from the form. You canselect any one or all of the possible rotation options.

Plan View - rotates about the z axis,East Elevation - rotates about the x axis,North Elevation - rotates about the y axis.

3. Specify Rotation Angle by typing the desired rotation angle for the selected rotationoption. If you type a negative value, the system adds the value to 360 to determine thepositive angle.

4. Accept or Specify Rotation. You can change the angle(s) by selecting the rotationoption and typing the new angle, or select Confirm to accept the displayed rotation.

279


3.4.9 Reconstruct Piping

This command reconstructs a specified part of the model to update the graphicalrepresentation and the alphanumeric data associated with that piping, based on changes in thePiping Design RDB, the P&ID MDB, or the piping segment data in the model.

This command is useful in the following situations.

Changes in the Piping Design Reference Database

Piping Job SpecificationGraphic Commodity LibraryPhysical Data Library

Changes in the P&ID MDB

Piping segment dataInstrument and piping specialty component data

Changes in the model (a part, branch, or complete pipeline)

dimension data changesPiping materials classNominal piping diameter (a part or complete pipeline)Other piping segment dataComponent override datatemperature and pressure changes

- wall thickness calculations- branch reinforcement calculations- piping commodities that are only valid for certain temperatureranges within a specification

- gasket thickness that is a function of temperature

Due to the nature of MTO reporting of material descriptions (materialdescriptions are derived from the Material Description Library at the time thereport is created) changes to material descriptions do not cause a need forreconstruction. However, re-creation of reports is required as a result ofreconstruction.

If an eccentric size change is to be eliminated, it is recommended that youmanually delete the fitting before using this command.

It is highly recommended that you execute the Verify Data Integrity of Modelcommand on the Data Verification and Diagnostics form before reconstructing anypiping to find any errors which may have occurred in the process of building themodel. These errors may be compounded during reconstruction of that model and willcause erroneous results.

280

3.Pip

ing

Define Active Group________________

3.4.9.1 Define Active Group

The Active Group command allows to you define a group of components which can bemanipulated by the Reconstruct Piping command. The Pipeline option for the Active Groupcommand is the default. When using the Reconstruct Piping command, there are two veryuseful Active Group commands, Limit Components and Search Criteria Segment Data.These two options are discussed below:

Limit Components–When you select the Limit Components command you areprompted to identify the first and second limit component. Once you have specified atleast two components and defined a reference point (a point somewhere within therange of the two boundaries of the limited network), the system highlights the networkof components, including the two components selected to identify the network.

The limited network becomes a separate entity from the remainder of the pipingnetwork enabling you to independently reconstruct the components within the networkwithout effecting the rest of the model. Breaks are automatically created in the pipingsegments at the boundaries of the limited network.

You can use a number commands after defining a network. For example, the user mayfirst use the Mirror Piping command, then the Revise Segment Data command, andfinally use the Reconstruct Piping command on the same limited network.

When reconstruction has taken place, the system displays a dialog box that allows youto Accept to Re-Connect Limited Network. This option re-connects any pair of pipingsegments at the boundaries of the limited network to the remainder of the pipeline. Ifthere is a discrepancy in the requirement to reconstruct, the system does not performthe re-connection.

Search Criteria Segment Data–When you select the Search Criteria Segment Datacommand, you can specify the piping to be reconstructed on the basis of the linenumber. This option allows you to include disjointed groups of components(components with discontinuities).

281


3.4.9.2 Verification

Verification is a two-step process. After a limited network has been defined using the ActiveGroup command or a pipeline has been specified, the system performs a RDB verificationfollowed by a geometric verification.

RDB Verification

RDB verification ensures that each component can be reconstructed based on the currentmodel data and the Piping Design Reference Database, including the Piping Job Specification,the Graphic Commodity Library, and the Physical Data Library. This process verifies thateach component can be replaced based on data from the Piping Job Specification, wallthickness calculations, and branch reinforcement calculations.

Design rules verification, temperature pressure service limits verification, is performed duringreconstruction whenever a component or piping is reconstructed at a connection to apreviously reconstructed component or pipe. All connections in the piping network areverified for consistency. The same design rules checking used during component placementalso applies to reconstruction.

The system either performs or provides the following items during RDB Verification:

Provides ways to handle piping commodities that are no longer in the ReferenceDatabase, such as unions, nipples, and couplings. For example, you may choose todelete or replace unions, or replace in-line nipples with pipe.

Provides ways to change a branch component that was initially placed as a full-sizebranch to a branch table selection. This option may be used to change a branchcomponent that was initially placed as a reducing branch fitting to a branch by system,when the branch size has been revised to the same as the run size.

Provides a way to eliminate a components size change, when one or both of the nominalpiping diameters has been revised such that the concentric size change is no longerrequired. During the RDB verification when the concentric size change is reported asbeing undefined in the Reference Database for the full-size condition, you can select theDelete Commodity option to indicate that the concentric size change should be deleted.

Provides a way to insert a concentric size change when you have created a size breakusing the Attribute Break command. During the RDB verification when a DesignChecks discrepancy is reported for nominal piping diameter, you can select either theconcentric size change option or the eccentric size change option to indicate the typeof size change commodity that should be inserted.

Provides a way to replace a flange with a reducing flange, if you have created a sizebreak at the component center of a flange with the Attribute Break command. Duringthe RDB verification when the flange is reported as being undefined in the ReferenceDatabase for the reducing-size condition, you may select a reducing flange commodity.You can review the replacement selections prior to reconstructing the applicable piping

282

3.Pip

ing

Verification________________ Does not create error markers in the model since detailed information is displayed in thesame format as in the Reconstruct Component command.

Allows you to use the Revise Commodity Selection command to replace a pipingcommodity in the same way that the Replace option of the Reconstruct Componentcommand is used. The system allows you to review the relacement selections prior toreconstructing the applicable piping.

Also, you can replace a piping specialty or an instrument, even though that componentmay be defined in the Reference Database, however, it is recommended that you use theReplace option of the Reconstruct Component command to manually replace thecomponent before using the Reconstruct Piping command.

Reports any discrepancies in the data between a nozzle and the adjacent piping foundduring the RDB verification phase. The data comparisons between the nozzle and theassociated piping are determined on the same basis as for the interactive design checksin the placement of a component at a nozzle. In other words, the comparisons isdetermined on the basis of your selections for nozzle data transfer and comparisons, asspecified through the Project Data Manager.

Geometric Verification

Geometric verification is performed following RDB verification. When the Geometricverification process is initiated, it scans for the verification piping segment that is associatedwith the first real piping segment in the piping network. If the verification piping segment isfound, the location of each vertex of each piping segment in the network is determined by thelocation of the corresponding verification piping segment. If the verification piping segmentis not found, then the reconstruction reverts to the default set of rules for geometry control.

You can modify the geometry of the piping network or pipeline by modifying the vertices ofany verification piping segment with a MicroStation command, such as Move Vertex orModify Element, during reconstruction.

Manual revisions to the verification piping segments do not represent a permanent indicationof the desired geometry. If any graphical revisions are made to the piping network after theverification piping segments have been created, you must delete and re-create that verificationdata. You can select the Delete Verification Segments option from the Reconstruct Pipingform to delete the verification piping segments.

The system either performs or provides the following items during Geometric Verification:

During the Geometric Verification phase, an option is provided to display verificationcomponents with the verification piping segments. The verification graphics for acomponent are created on the basis of the data to be used to reconstruct that component.In other words, the component appears in the same location with the same orientationand is the same size as when the reconstruction of that component has been completed.These permanent graphics use the same symbology (level, color, weight, and style) asthe verification piping segments. The verification components are displayed by default.

283

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ When the Limited Components option is used, if any discontinuities result at theboundaries of the limited network during Geometry Verification, they are reported toyou before the reconstruction process is continued.

If a discrepancy in the location of a nozzle and the adjacent piping results duringGeometry Verification, they are reported to you before the reconstruction process iscontinued.

A warning is displayed, if the location of a pipe with one or more olet-type branchesmoves as a consequence of reconstructing a fitting-to-fitting situation such that one ofthe olet-type branches will not be located on that pipe.

284

3.Pip

ing

Mechanics________________

3.4.9.3 Mechanics

This section contains information about the general mechanics of this command. TheReconstruction of the Model Geometry section and Special Considerations section coverreconstruction in more general terms. The sections that follow them discuss the mechanics forspecific components.

Reconstruction of the Model Geometry

The basic premise in reconstructing a pipeline or piping network, is the determination of thosecomponents which are considered to be key components in the reconstruction of the centerlinegeometry of the network. The Reconstruct Piping command attempts to maintain keycomponents, such as branch points and change of direction points, at the same location in themodel. Reconstruction searches through the model for key components. Once a keycomponent is determined, that component is reconstructed at its existing location using thesame placement mode defined at initial placement. All components are reconstructed by theremembered placement mode (stored in user data for the component) except in some fitting tofitting situations.

The reconstruction process re-traces the pipeline to reconstruct any piping which may havebeen temporarily skipped on the first pass through that part of the model. This technique willnot result in any changes to the geometry of the centerline of the network except when afitting to fitting situation exists. In other words, the Reconstruct Piping command attemptsto reconstruct a key component by using the original definition of the placement sequence.The following rules are used to determine a key component.

A component at any end of the network is considered to be a key component forreconstruction. This includes the first component in the reconstruction process. Thefirst component to be reconstructed can be controlled by identifying the piping networkat that end. The only exception to this rule, is that reconstruction will not enter the firstbranch component that it encounters through the branch connect point of the branchcomponent. The reconstruction process must enter a branch through the header. In thissituation, the system would arbitrarily select another end of the piping network.

A branch component, change of direction component, or a reducing component isautomatically recognized as a key component.

Other components may be determined to be key components based on the method usedto place that component in the model. For example,placement of a valve assembly bythe center of the valve designates the valve as a key component. In this situation, thevalve is reconstructed by its center and the flanges are reconstructed by their respectivebolted ends based on the locations of the valve’s connect points.

However, if the valve assembly was placed in the model by the welded end of one ofthe flanges, then that flange is considered to be a key component and would bereconstructed by its welded end.

Piping is designated as either variable length or fixed length piping. This determinationis made at placement and is stored in the user data of the piping, where it can berevised.

285

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ If the piping is placed between the connect points of two components, either by thePlace Pipe option or by Automated Placement, it defaults to variable length piping.

If the piping is placed by specifying its length, it defaults to fixed length piping.

During reconstruction of a piping network, variable length piping is normally ignored insearch of the next key component. The exception occurs when variable length piping isat the end of the piping network. When the variable length piping is recognized, itsupstream end (in terms of tracing through the model) is remembered and the searchcontinues, skipping all other components, until a key component is recognized. Oncethis next key component is determined and reconstructed, any intervening fittings arereconstructed in reverse order until the downstream end of the piping is determined.

At this point, the variable length piping is reconstructed to fill the gap in the network.Fixed length piping is always reconstructed once it has been recognized. In general,this results in a change in the geometry downstream of the fixed length piping.

Special Considerations

The type of branch component may change as a result of reconstruction. If a tee-type branchbecomes an olet-type branch as a result of reconstruction, reconstruction will connect thepiping forming the header of the branch. However, if an olet-type branch is reconstructed intoa tee-type branch, then the piping that forms the header is broken by reconstruction in order toinsert the tee-type branch. In either case, the piping on the header must be associated with theappropriate piping segments to maintain the proper data structures in the model.

Special considerations are also required for the reconstruction of flanges. Once a keycomponent has been reconstructed, each connect point of that component is investigated for achange in the end preparation from bolted to non-bolted or from non-bolted to bolted.

In the former situation, the previously existing flange at that connection is deleted by thereconstruction process.

In the later case, a flange is placed at that connect point using a matching flange from thePiping Job Specification in the same way as Automated Component Placement, using endpreparation and pressure rating in lieu of option code.

If the key component is a flange, the system investigates the end preparation at the connectpoint of that component located at the bolted end of the flange for a change to non-bolted. Ifthis situation arises, the flange is deleted by the reconstruction process, even though it wasdesignated as a key component.

An eccentric reducer is automatically considered to be a key component in terms ofreconstruction. Reconstruction of an eccentric reducer always results in a change in thegeometry of the centerline, if the eccentric offset dimension of the eccentric reducer changes.In this case, the eccentric reducer maintains its location in the horizontal plane based upon itsinitial placement mode. However, it changes elevation based on the downstream connectpoint in terms of the trace through the model. For example, if an eccentric reducer was placedby connect point one (large end), but the reconstruction process enters the eccentric reducerthrough connect point two (small end) then the centerline elevation is maintained at the small

286

3.Pip

ing

Mechanics________________ end and the centerline elevation at the large end will change. However, the eccentric reducerwould maintain its location in the horizontal plane relative to the large end, unless a fitting tofitting situation existed at the small end.

A loop in the piping network is reconstructed using the previously stated techniques.However, a loop may not be closed properly, if the location of a branch point or a change ofdirection point is changed as result of the reconstruction of a fitting to fitting situation. Thiswould require some manual editing of the model to close the loop correctly.

Reconstruct Piping adjusts the centerline for placement by an offset from the centerline, suchas placement by bottom of pipe. Reconstruction will adjust the centerline of a pipe run of apiping segment, if the user data of that piping segment indicates that the pipe run was initiallyplaced as an offset from the centerline. This includes placement by bottom of pipe and willeventually include bottom of shoe and invert elevation (inside diameter). In addition to thecenterline being adjusted, the offset distance is updated as part of reconstruction.

This capability requires additional user data for a piping segment. This data consists of theprevious offset distance from the centerline, the direction to which the offset is to be applied,and an option flag that indicates which parameters were used to define the offset (such as 1/2piping outside diameter, insulation thickness, shoe height, or 1/2 piping inside diameter).

Although more than one pipe run of a piping segment can be flagged as being placed by anoffset from the centerline, only one set of offset data can be defined for any one pipingsegment. Therefore, you may need to place an attribute break in a piping segment when theoffset data changes, but no other attribute data differs.

The defaults for the option flag are derived as follows.

For aboveground piping, the pipe run is reconstructed by bottom of pipe if the line isnot insulated.

If the pipeline is insulated,

— if the shoe height can be derived from a table, the pipe run is reconstructed bybottom of shoe.

— if the shoe height was defined by a user key-in, the pipe run is reconstructed by thecenterline.

For underground piping, the pipe run is reconstructed by inside diameter.

287


3.4.9.4 Piping Commodity

A piping commodity is reconstructed by retrieving data from the Piping Job Specification,using the commodity item name and the option code from the initial placement of thecommodity. Additionally, the system determines the values of Piping Materials Class, firstsize, and second size from the current values in the associated piping segment(s). Pipingmaterials class and first size are derived from the piping segment associated with connectpoint one of the commodity. Second size is determined from the next largest nominal pipingdiameter of any of the remaining piping segments associated with that component (ifapplicable).

The values of any temperatures and temperature units defined for the piping segmentassociated with connect point one of the commodity being reconstructed are used. If themaximum temperature value is defined in the Piping Job Specification for that commodity, atemperature check is required.

All data that is normally retrieved from the Piping Job Specification for a piping commodityis updated in the database for that commodity with two possible exceptions.

If you manually revised the value of fabrication category, this override is recorded inthe user data for that commodity and will be respected by reconstruction.

If the schedule/thickness for the commodity was overridden, this override is recorded inthe user data for that commodity and will be respected by reconstruction. The overridevalue for schedule/thickness remains in the database for the commodity regardless ofthe value in the Piping Job Specification. You can define a schedule/thickness overridevalue in the appropriate piping segment, either by setting the override in the P&IDdrawing and then transferring that data to the model, or by defining the override in thepiping segment in the model.

Other than the schedule/thickness override, wall thickness calculations for all pipingcommodities are defined by the current data in the Piping Job Specification. In other words,the requirement for a wall thickness calculation, including MATCH conditions, aredetermined by the definition in the Piping Job Specification at the time of reconstruction,regardless of how schedule/thickness was defined when the commodity was placed initially.The data required for the calculation is derived from the associated piping segment and fromthe Piping Job Specification.

If a connect point is determined to be bolted as a result of retrieving data from the Piping JobSpecification, the gasket separation at that connect point is determined from the pipingmaterials class for that commodity. This gasket separation for the piping materials class canbe either a simple value or require a table access. If the gasket separation is determined froma gasket separation table, the nominal piping diameter from the associated piping segment, thegasket type option code as defined when the component was placed initially or revised at asubsequent time, and the appropriate data from the Piping Job Specification (end preparation,pressure rating, and table suffix for the commodity, and maximum temperature for the gasket)are used.

The data for a tap is reconstructed based on the definitions made at the time the tap wascreated, or last revised. If the source of the data for the tap was the Tap Properties Table, thetap data is retrieved from the Piping Job Specification based on the NPD of the piping

288

3.Pip

ing

Piping Commodity________________ segment associated with the tap, the defined tap option code, and the piping materials classbeing used for the piping commodity. Otherwise, the data for the tap is derived from anotherconnect point on the commodity, as defined at the time the tap was created or last revised.

During reconstruction, the dimensions and other physical data for the piping commodity arederived from the Physical Data Library using the data from the Piping Job Specification in thesame manner as the initial placement of the commodity.

289


3.4.9.5 Branch Components

Branch components are reconstructed in the same manner as other piping commodities with afew exceptions. If the branch component was initially placed using a branch table, the currentbranch table in the Piping Job Specification for the piping materials class associated with theheader is accessed to determine the commodity item name of the branch. If applicable, branchreinforcement calculations are performed in reconstruction for this situation. This can resultin the type of branch actually changing.

Reconstructing a branch from the branch table can also result in a change in the requirementfor branch reinforcement calculations. The requirement for a branch reinforcementcalculation is determined by the definition in the Piping Job Specification at the time ofreconstruction, regardless of whether the calculations were required when the branchcomponent was placed initially. Likewise, the data required for the calculation is derivedfrom the associated header and branch piping segments and from the Piping Job Specification.

If a branch was initially placed by explicitly specifying the commodity item name of thebranch, then the same type of branch will be reconstructed. This may or may not result inbranch reinforcement calculations, depending on the type of branch being reconstructed. Thisrequirement for reinforcement calculations is determined in the same manner as at initialplacement.

290

3.Pip

ing

Valves________________

3.4.9.6 Valves

Valves are reconstructed in the same manner as other piping commodities with one exception.Reconstruction will respect the valve operator display status, as defined in the user data forthe valve. If the valve operator display was controlled by the Piping Job Specification at thetime of placement, it will continue to be controlled by the spec. This could result in a valveoperator previously not displayed, being changed to a displayed mode (or vice versa).However, if you specified that the valve operator be displayed/not displayed in the modelregardless of the definition in the Piping Job Specification, then reconstruction will respectthat override.

A special case for reconstructing a piping commodity valve is where a valve appurtenance hasbeen added to the valve body. In this situation, the dimensional data for the valveappurtenance is defined through a form at the time the appurtenance was created, and thisdimensional data is retained in the user data for the valve. During reconstruction, the systemprompts with the form data defined in the initial placement of the appurtenance. In otherwords, you can manually revise the dimensional data for the appurtenance when the valve isreconstructed or accept the original values.

291


3.4.9.7 Weld Types

Weld types are updates at each welded end of any component being reconstructed, if requiredas a result of a change to the fabrication category from the Reference Database. For eachwelded end, where the weld type is by system the following applies:






1 1 1

1 5 21

1 7 21

1 15 21

1 16 21

1 17 21

1 25 21

1 27 21




The system uses the Weld Type Table to determine the weld type on the basis of thefabrication category for the component or pipe being reconstructed or updated and theother component at the welded joint.

If the weld type of the other component at the welded joint differs from the onedetermined by the project’s Weld Type Table, the weld type of the applicable end ofthat component is updated to the same weld type as that of the end of the component orpipe being reconstructed or updated on the basis of the Weld Type Table.

292

3.Pip

ing

Flanges________________

3.4.9.8 Flanges

When a flange is being reconstructed within the Reconstruct Component command, if theflange is connected to a thru-bolted end without bolt holes and a non-thru-bolted componentexists on the other end of the thru-bolted component, the flange is selected from the MaterialReference Database on the basis of the data (the pressure rating, end preparation, table suffix,and nominal piping diameter) for the other component. As an example, if a flange is beingreconstructed at one end of a spectacle blank for which a flange has been placed at the otherend, the specification data for the flange to be reconstructed is selected on the basis of the datafor the other flange. If another component does not exist at the other end of the thru-boltedcomponent, the default flange is selected from the Material Reference Database.

You can specify that an end of a component is to be thru-bolted with bolt holes. A specialrange of end preparation values, 200 through 279, will be reserved for thru-bolted ends withbolt holes. The following specific ranges of end preparation values and the correspondingtermination types will apply.

200 flat-face thru-bolted termination type201-205 without integral gaskets206-209 with integral gaskets

210 raised-face thru-bolted termination type211-215 without integral gaskets216-219 with integral gaskets

220 RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type221-225 without integral gaskets226-229 with integral gaskets

230 Male RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type231-235 without integral gaskets236-239 with integral gaskets

240 flat-face thru-bolted with cap screws termination type241-245 without integral gaskets246-249 with integral gaskets

250 raised-face thru-bolted with cap screws termination type251-255 without integral gaskets256-259 with integral gaskets

260 RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws termination type261-265 without integral gaskets266-269 with integral gaskets

270 flat-full-face thru-bolted termination type271-275 without integral gaskets276-279 with integral gaskets

293


3.4.9.9 Pipe Supports

The Reconstruct Piping command considers the effects of changes in design data, especiallynominal piping diameter, for physical pipe supports. All pipe support dimensions that arecomputed on the basis of nominal piping diameter (such as pipe shoe dimensions) or anyother piping segment data associated with reading table dimensions, are updated in the pipingmodel.

Physical pipe supports move with associated piping as part of the reconstruction. A physicalpipe support is moved the same distance and direction as the nearest vertex of the pipingsegment it is associated with.

Logical pipe supports also move with associated piping as a part of the reconstruction. Alogical pipe support is moved the same distance and direction as the nearest vertex of thepiping segment to which the physical pipe support is associated. Otherwise, logical pipesupport data is not changed.

For physical pipe supports, you are not prompted for i/form pipe support dimensions. Also,you are not required to review the each pipe support i/form for other potential changes.

All other changes to pipe supports (that is dimensional changes resulting fromspecification changes, pipe support number changes, or commodity codechanges) should be resolved by using the Reconstruct Component command.

When reconstruction occurs, the physical and logical pipe supports appear astemporary red-dashed graphics and must approved before proceeding.

294

3.Pip

ing

Generic Entry________________

3.4.9.10 Generic Entry

A generic entry in the Piping Job Specification, such as a concentric diameter change, will bereconstructed in the same manner as other piping commodities. However, the model code forthe generic entry will determine the type of component being created in the model followingreconstruction. In the case of a concentric diameter change, the component in the modelmight change as a result of reconstruction from a concentric reducer to a concentric swagebased on changes in the model data or revisions to the Piping Job Specification.

295


3.4.9.11 Commodity Overrides

Commodity overrides are reconstructed in basically the same manner as Piping commoditiesexcept that the data that is normally defined in the Piping Job Specification, such as endpreparation, pressure rating, and schedule/thickness, is derived directly from the data definedby the model when the commodity override was placed initially. The dimensions and otherphysical data are derived from the Physical Data Library using this commodity override data.

296

3.Pip

ing

Instruments and Piping Specialities________________

3.4.9.12 Instruments and Piping Specialities

Instruments and piping specialties placed in the model from data in the piping JobSpecification are reconstructed in the same manner as piping commodities with thefollowing exceptions.

As in placement of instruments and piping specialties, option code and maximumtemperature are not applicable in reconstruction.

The system first attempts to retrieve the instrument or piping specialty from the PipingJob Specification using its unique tag number. If this does not succeed, the instrumentor piping specialty is retrieved based on its generic name.

Instruments and piping specialties that were placed in the model solely from dataspecified through a form at placement are reconstructed in a special manner. Thesystem attempts to retrieve the instrument or piping specialty from the Piping JobSpecification using its unique tag number. If this does not succeed, another attempt ismade to retrieve the instrument or piping specialty based on its generic name. Optioncode and maximum temperature are not applicable in reconstruction.

If the instrument or piping specialty has been defined in the Piping Job Specification atthe initial placement, reconstruction will proceed in the same manner as the initialplacement of the instrument or piping specialty. If the instrument or piping specialtyhas not been defined in the Piping Job Specification (that is, you specified shapes anddimensions through the forms interface), the system reconstructs the item using the dataavailable at the time of reconstruction. This differs from the Reconstruct Componentcommand, which allows you to revise some of the data through the forms interface.

297


Commands

Active Group — Defines the elements to process in an active group.

Revise FTF Joint to Insert Pipe — Allows you to open a fitting-to-fitting joint forinserting pipe. This option is only available after a process selection has been made.

Review Fixed Length Piping — Review and revise any existing data constraints due tofixed length pipe prior to the reconstruction. Once this option is activated, the systemsequentially highlights each fixed length pipe within the active group. You then havethe opportunity to set the pipe to variable length.

Review Piping to Reconstruct — Displays piping which has been marked duringrevision of piping data. The segements selected for reconstruction display highlighted.A specific segment may be viewed by selecting the segment number. The arrow keysmay be used to display the next/previous segment to be reconstructed.

Review Replacement Selections — Displays items that have been replaced during theverification processes.

Component Placement Mode — Allows you to revise the default key component forany fitting-to-fitting group of components and revise the default placement mode forany component that has been designated as a key component for reconstruction. Allowsyou to designate Variable Length Pipe or Fixed Length Pipe for any piping selected.

Allows you to define the placement mode of the component being reconstructed orreplaced.

Pipe Run Placement Mode — Allows you to revise the placement mode for a piperun. You can set the toggle to Pipe Run by Centerline or Pipe Run by Bottom-of-Pipe. The default mode is Pipe Run by Centerline. In this mode each pipe run isreconstructed by its centerline other than those changes in centerline that result from thereconstruction of a fitting make-up or the reconstruction of a branch or change-of-direction component with a placement mode other than Pipe Run by Centerline.

You can revise the placement mode of a pipe run on the basis of one-half of the pipingoutside diameter and a direction. The default direction is Down. You can only specifyone direction per piping segment. If this is not enough for any specific situation, youcan create a piping segment break by using the Create Attribute Break command.

Once you have specified the required data for placement by bottom-of-pipe, this data isretained permanently and is updated automatically as the applicable piping isreconstructed. If you define the placement mode of a pipe run to be bottom-of-pipe, andthe pipe run changes from one size to another, it will not be necessary for the you to re-define the pipe run offset data for any subsequent reconstruction.

You can also change the placement mode of all horizontal pipe runs.

Delete Verification Graphics — This option deletes all the verification pipingsegments which exist in the active model file.

298

3.Pip

ing

Instruments and Piping Specialities________________ Rotate Component — Modify the orientation of a component or pipe. You can alsorevise the orientation of any non-symmetrical valve operator or any symmetrical valveoperator on a non-symmetrical valve. This includes the situation where a valve operatorchanges from symmetrical to non-symmetrical due to changes in the ReferenceDatabase or changes in the model.

This option is enabled by default. If this option has been enabled, you will be promptedto accept or specify the orientation of all such valve operators.

Revise Commodity Selection — Revise any commodity information for a componentor pipe. The commodity name for the reducing flange is determined on the basis ofentry #71 in the Commodity Name Table. If you have not added this entry into theCommodity Name Table, the reducing flange’s commodity name is ’6Q2C03’ bydefault.

The Revise Commodity Selection command and the Rotate Componentcommand can be used together to create a rolling offset to maintain theelevations of two perpendicular horizontal pipe runs. First, change the type ofcomponent for one of the two applicable bends on the basis of the desiredangle using the Revise Commodity Selection command by changing a 90degree bend to a 45 degree bend. Then, use the Rotate Component commandto deflect the secondary orientation of the bend component that is to be rotated.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group. Identify the pipeline by placing a datapoint over any member of the pipeline or snapping to a piping segment. You cancontrol where the reconstruction process begins by identifying a specific end point ofthe pipeline.

2. Accept Piping for Reconstruction by selecting Confirm to begin processing thehighlighted piping for reconstruction or select Restart to identify another pipeline.

299


3.4.10 Replace Piping

This command replaces all the piping commodities of a specific name within a working groupwith a different commodity name and/or commodity option.

Once you have selected the working group, the existing commodity name to be replaced, andthe new commodity name and/or commodity option, the components will be reconstructedafter retrieving the updated reference data based on the new commodity name and/or option.


If you are going to replace a piping commodity with an optional commodity item, make surethat the piping material class which contains the replacement item is active. You can checkand change the active piping material class with many options including the Connect toDesign option. If the error message, Add options are not available is displayed, the activepiping material class does not contain optional commodities for the selected item.

There is no provision for reorientation of new components.

Commands

Active Group — Activates the Active Group form for definition of the group to beprocessed. Refer to Active Group, page 81 for more information on defining the activegroup.

Revise Commodity Option — Allows you to revise commodities. See the Before usingthis Command section. See Commodity Option, page 148 for more information.

300

3.Pip

ing

Replace Piping________________ Delete Markers — Deletes all the Model Reconstruction error markers which exist inthe active model file.

Operating Sequence

1. Specify Commodity Name to Replace by selecting one of the commodity namesfrom the available buttons.

2. Accept or Specify Commodity Name by selecting Confirm or select a newcommodity name.

3. Specify New Commodity Name by selecting a commodity name to replace theexisting name.

4. Accept or Specify Commodity Option by selecting Confirm or select a newcommodity name.

5. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group. Identify the pipeline for replacement.

6. Accept Piping for Replacement by selecting Confirm to replace commodities on theselected pipe.

— OR —

Select the Active Group option.

301


3.5 Revise Data Commands

These commands enable you to revise information in the Design Database and defineadditional information for components. You can only revise information for items in theactive model.

Commands

Revise Attribute — Modifies the database attributes or user data associated with aselected element.

Attribute Break — Creates an attribute break at a point on an existing pipingsegment.

Connect Segments — Combines two piping segments with coincident endpoints.

Revise Component Data — Selectively revises data for piping components, pipes,instrument components, or pipe supports.

Revise Gasket Option — Specifies an optional gasket for a specified componentconnect point.

Revise Bolt Option — Specifies optional bolt data for a specified component connectpoint.

Revise Weld Type — Specifies the weld type for a specified component connectpoint.

Iso Drawing Limit — Places a marker indicating an isometric drawing limit in theuser data of a selected piping item connect point (both mated items will be updated).

302

3.Pip

ing

Revise Data Commands________________ Component Group — Defines a set of components to be treated as a group.

Revise Segment Data — Revises segment data for selected piping segments basedupon a combination of geography and database search criteria.

Update Segment From P&ID — Automatically updates piping segment data from theP&ID database and reloads piping segment data for those segments in the piping modelfor which P&ID node numbers were stored previously.

Re-Compute Thickness — Re-calculates the wall thickness values of entire pipelinesor of an active group.

Update from RDB — Updates data in the model based upon revisions to data in theSpecification/Material Reference Database, (such as a change to the Piping JobSpecification or Physical Data Library.)

Load Weld Numbers — Automatically creates weld numbers that are unique withinthe project.

Revise Inspection Keys — Allows revision of inspection iso keys.

Approve Piping — Changes the approval status attribute of a pipeline or the activegroup.

303


3.5.1 Revise Attribute

This command modifies the database attributes or user data associated with a selectedelement. You can modify

the database information of a component or segment

the user data associated with a component, pipe support, segment, or a PDS marker.

This command activates the Revise Attribute form used to select the attribute or user datainformation to be modified. When you enter a new attribute value, the system validates theentry and stores the revised information in the database. If you change the user data, thesystem toggles the value among the acceptable settings.


When you revise the schedule/thickness override using this command, the system provides alist of schedule/thickness values derived from the override schedule/thickness standard notetype 332 in the project’s Standard Note Library. This will help to prevent errors generatedfrom entering the schedule/thickness in the wrong format.





If you change insulation purpose to N (none) or blank (undefined), both the insulationthickness and the insulation density are automatically set to undefined.

You can revise the following attributes up to the maximum length of 50 characters: pipingcomponent remarks, piping/tubing remarks, instrument component remarks.

Commodity code (commodity_code) definitions can be changed when the piping componentdata source (source_of_data) is defined as one of the following:

304

3.Pip

ing

Revise Attribute________________

Piping cmdty component from User

Piping spclty component from User - complete specification input

Piping spclty component from User - partial specification input.

Commodity code (commodity_code) definition can not be made if they have been defined bythe reference database.

Piping cmdty component from PMC

If you modify the fabrication category (fabrication_cat), the weld type is updated at eachwelded end of the component or pipe being reconstructed or updated. It is no longer necessaryto remember to correct the weld data that results from updating the fabrication category of acomponent or pipe being reconstructed or updated at a welded joint when you have a WeldType Table loaded.






1 1 1

1 5 21

1 7 21

1 15 21

1 16 21

1 17 21

1 25 21

1 27 21

305

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ If a Weld Type Table has not been defined for the project, the weld type is revised to thedefault weld type value, ’shop weld’ (11).

If you set the toggle on the Revise Weld Type form to Respect Weld Type by User, theweld type is not revised for either the welded end of the component or pipe beingreconstructed or updated or the corresponding welded end of the other component. Also, theweld type is not revised when the mating welded end is not in the active piping model, sinceyou do not have write access to reference models. When the system defines the weld type, thefollowing considerations are made:

— The system uses the Weld Type Table to determine the weld type on the basis of thefabrication category for the component or pipe being reconstructed or updated and theother component at the welded joint.

— If the weld type of the other component at the welded joint differs from the onedetermined by the project’s Weld Type Table, the weld type of the applicable end of thatcomponent is updated to the same weld type as that of the end of the component or pipebeing reconstructed or updated on the basis of the Weld Type Table.



normal design

alternate design.

You can check the Normal Operating and Normal Design Temperatures and pressures byusing the Temperature and Pressure Data toggle on the Piping Data Control form of theProject Data Managerand setting the toggle to Minimum. By setting the toggle to NoMinimum you will be checking the Normal and Alternate Operating and Normal andAlternate Design Temperature and Pressures.

This toggle is not valid for piping and components that require wall thicknesscalculations, because these calculations use temperature ratings to read spectables. To preclude the entry of any pressures or temperatures for a segment,you must set the default pressure and temperature as undefined on the DefaultSegment Data form. Please refer to the Project Administrator ReferenceGuide for more information on this form.

No changes are permanent unless you select Confirm from the form.

Not all items can be revised. Some items are review only.

The P&ID node number - end 1 or P&ID node number - end 2 data for piping segments cannot be revised. The bend angle data for instrument components can not be revised.

306

3.Pip

ing


Commands

Identify Element — Revises the data for another element. Identify the new element aspreviously specified. The system displays the data retrieved from the element.Depending on the type of element this may include: one of the following conditions foreach welded connect point for a piping component, instrument component, and pipe:

shop weld defined by systemshop weld defined by userfield weld defined by systemfield weld defined by user.

Review Bolt Data Reviews all of the following data for each bolted end of a pipingcomponent, pipe, instrument component, or equipment nozzle so that you can determinewhat angle a valve operator may be rotated. This information is only available for acomponent with at least one bolted end.

the number of bolt holesthe bolt diameterthe bolt circle diameterthe acceptable rotation (360 degrees divided by the number of boltholes.

Integral Gasket — Places an Integral Gasket for the gasket thickness of each boltedend with an integral gasket for a piping component, instrument component, and pipe.The equipment number and nozzle number with the connected to nozzle data at eachend of a piping segment for which this data is applicable.

Load from P&ID — Revises the P&ID node numbers for a piping segment and thenupdates the appropriate piping segment data automatically from the P&ID DesignDatabase.

307

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ You can also update the data for a piping segment by snapping to graphics in the activeP&ID drawing. If you identify a component in the P&ID drawing that is associatedwith more than one segment, such as a reducer, the system updates the piping segmentdata in the model from the segment associated with the connect point nearest theselection point.

When you revise the schedule/thickness override using this command, the systemprovides a list of schedule/thickness values derived from the overrideschedule/thickness standard note type 332 in the projects’ Standard Note Library. Thiswill help to prevent errors generated from entering the schedule/thickness in the wrongformat.

Numbers in the range of 1-499 are reserved for the English system of units, whilenumbers in the range of 500-999 are reserved for the Metric system of units. Only thosevalues applicable to the active NPD system of units is displayed, although both sets ofvalues may have been defined in the Reference Database.

Although the override schedule/thickness value is selected from a list as a standard notetype, the alphanumeric description is loaded into the relational database.

The list is not displayed if the standard note 332 has not been defined, and you mustcontinue to type the schedule/thickness override.

You must ensure that the format in the Standard Note Library is consistent withthe remainder of the Reference Database.

Review xxxx — These options vary depending on the type of element identified. Theyenable you to jump directly to the specified set of information within the display. Thesystem also moves the coordinate system indicator along the identified element toreflect the data being reviewed.

Revise User Data

308

3.Pip

ing


You can use the user data for a piping segment to revise the centerline offsetdata for a pipe run of a piping segment. Defining this data allows theReconstruct Piping command to adjust the centerline for placement by anoffset from the centerline (such placement by bottom of pipe).

The user data consists of the previous offset distance from the centerline, thedirection to which the offset is to be applied, and an option flag that indicateswhich parameters were used to define the offset (1/2 piping outside diameter,insulation thickness, shoe height, or 1/2 piping inside diameter).

Although more than one pipe run of a piping segment can be flagged as beingplaced by an offset from the centerline, only one set of offset data can bedefined for any one piping segment. Therefore, you may need to place anattribute break in a piping segment when the offset data changes, but no otherattribute data differs.

For branch components with less than five connect points, you can specifywhether the branch component is to be associated with the header or with thebranch during isometric extraction.

The default setting is defined in the model seed file. For previously createdmodels, the default is that the branch component be associated with the header.

Review Piping Notes (standard note type 499)

Select a row from the form that corresponds to an attribute using standard note type 499. Thesystem displays a dialog box with the text for the piping notes. You can change the standardnote number, but you cannot change the text for the standard note.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Element by snapping to the component, segment, or marker to be reviewed orplace a data point to locate a piping component.

2. Specify Attribute Value (Revisable Attribute) by typing the new attribute value. If theattribute is code-listed, the system activates a form which lists the available code listtext for selection of the new value.

309


3.5.2 Attribute Break

This command creates an attribute break at a point on an existing piping segment. You canidentify the attribute break point by snapping to a specific vertex or by using a precision inputto define a point along a segment pipe run.

When you identify the piping segment to be revised, the system activates the Attribute Breakform. You can use this form to revise attributes in the same manner used for the ReviseAttribute command.


This command will respect revisions made to the following user data for piping segments.

selection of piping or tubingflow directioninsulation purposeinsulation thickness units

If Insulation Purpose is changed, an Automated Placement command mustbe performed before the results of an insulation attribute break can bedisplayed in graphics.



normal design

alternate design.



310

3.Pip

ing

Attribute Break________________

Commands

Create Break on Pipe Run — Defines where on a pipe run the attribute break is to beplaced.

— Distance from Intersection — Defines the distance on the pipe run from theintersection.

— Easting, Northing, and Elevation — Defines the distance using easting, northing,and elevation.

— Move From ’Other’ Point — Accepts a point on the pipe run for the break anddisplays the orientation tee and an Invert Direction command that allows you tospecify the direction to move.

Select Destination of Data — Defines which side of the attribute break is to receive thenew data.

Update from P&ID — This option updates the segment parameters to match aspecified segment from the P&ID design database. The system prompts for the P&IDnode numbers for the new piping segment being created. The appropriate pipingsegment data is updated automatically from the P&ID Design Database for that pipingsegment.

311

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ You can load the piping segment data by snapping to graphics in the active P&IDdrawing. If you identify a component in the P&ID drawing that is associated with morethan one segment, such as a reducer, the system creates the piping segment attributebreak with the data derived from the segment that is associated with the connect pointnearest the selection point.

The revised piping segment will retain the existing piping segment data, including theP&ID node numbers. The new piping segment is created from the original pipingsegment with data being transferred from the P&ID Database. This piping segment iscreated with the new P&ID node numbers.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Break Point — Select the break point by snapping to a vertex on the line orselect the Create Break on Pipe Run option to define a point on the line.

2. Accept Segment for Attribute Break or Select Other Segment for Break

3. Select Confirm to accept the highlighted piping segment.

312

3.Pip

ing

Connect Segments________________

3.5.3 Connect Segments

This command activates the Connect Segment form which is used to combine two pipingsegments with coincident endpoints. The system highlights one of the piping segments toindicate that the resulting piping segment will inherit its data.

The system displays any differences in the piping segment data including P&ID nodenumbers one entity at a time. It also reports discrepancies in the piping segment data loadedinto the relational database and the following piping segment data in the model:

flow direction

piping/tubing option

insulation thickness units

requirements to reconstruct

pipe run offset data for reconstruction

Piping segments which have one or more discrepancies of the types listedabove are not reconnected.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Segment End Point — Snap to the coinciding end point of the two pipingsegments to be connected.

313


3.5.4 Revise Component Data

This command selectively revises data for piping components, pipes, instrument components,or pipe supports. You can revise the following data:

Piping Component Data and Piping/Tubing Data

mto requirementsfabrication categoryconstruction status (segment override)hold status (segment override)heat tracing requirements (segment override)

heat tracing media (segment override)heat tracing temperature (seg. override)piece mark numbercolor coderemarks

Instrument Component Data

mto requirementsfabrication categoryconstruction status (segment override)hold status (segment override)design responsibility (segment override)construction responsibility (seg. override)heat tracing requirements (seg. override)heat tracing media (segment override)heat tracing temperature (segment override)insulation purpose (segment override)

insulation thickness (segment override)insulation density (segment override)cleaning requirements (segment override)safety classification (segment override)module number (segment override)package system number (segment override)piece mark numbercolor coderemarks

Pipe Support Data

mto requirementsfabrication categoryconstruction status (segment override)

hold status (segment override)piece mark numbercolor code

When fabrication category is revised for a piping commodity, or a piping specialty orinstrument with specification data from the Reference Database, the component is designatedas having a user override of fabrication category. This prevents later reconstruction of thatcomponent from updating the fabrication category specified with data from the ReferenceDatabase.

If you change insulation purpose to N (none) or blank (undefined), the insulation thicknessand insulation density are automatically set to undefined.

You can use the Active Group command to select the components to be revised based upon acombination of geography and database search criteria.

314

3.Pip

ing

Revise Component Data________________

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by snapping to a segment or locate acomponent on the pipeline to be revised, or select the Active Group option from theform to define the elements to be revised. The system displays the selected type of datafor the identified pipeline or active group.

2. Specify Attribute Value (Revisable Attribute) by typing the new attribute value. If theattribute is code-listed, the system activates a form which lists the available code listtext for selection of the new value.

315


3.5.5 Revise Gasket Option

This option specifies an optional gasket on a connect point basis. The command provides youwith a scrolled list of gaskets that meet the criteria of the bolted end selected by the user. Thislist includes the following data for each available gasket option.

gasket commodity name

description of gasket option

maximum temperature

end preparation

pressure rating

material description for gasket

You also have the option to review all data included in the Piping Job Specification for aspecific gasket option.

If you identify a bolted end (end A) at a spec break with this command, you can select theoptional gasket from the piping materials class associated with end A based upon the data atend B. In other words, you are selecting the piping materials class to be used by selecting theproper end of the bolted joint.

316

3.Pip

ing

Revise Gasket Option________________

Commands

Display Data for Gasket — Displays the data defined in the Piping Job Specificationfor the identified gasket option.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Connect Point for Gasket Option by placing a data point to locate thecomponent connect point to be revised.

2. Accept or Select Gasket Option by selecting the gasket option to be applied at theconnect point and select Confirm

317


3.5.6 Revise Bolt Option

This option displays a list of bolts that meet the criteria of the bolted end that you selected.This list includes the following data for each available bolt option.

bolt commodity name

description of bolt option

maximum temperature

end preparation

pressure rating

material description for bolt

You can also review all data included in the Piping Job Specification for a specific boltoption.

This command places a bolt option code from the piping job specification at both connectpoints of a bolted mating. It activates the Bolt Override Option form which selects the boltoption to be assigned to the mating components. This bolt option code is used to access thebolts at the selected mating (that is, determine the bolt override).

Commands

Display Data for Bolt — Displays the data defined in the Piping Job Specification forthe identified bolt option.

318

3.Pip

ing

Revise Bolt Option________________

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Component for Bolt Option by placing a data point to locate one of thecomponent connect points at the mating to be changed.

2. Accept or Select Bolt Option by selecting the bolt option to be used at the matingfrom the form and select Confirm to begin processing.

319


3.5.7 Revise Weld Type

This option specifies a weld type for a specified component connect point. You can select theweld type from a list of code-list values. The selected weld type is updated at both applicablewelded ends.

Each connect point set of attributes in the Design Database includes an attribute for weld type.These attributes are associated with standard note type 1100 in the Standard Note Library.Any weld types within the range:

11 through 20 are interpreted by the system as shop welds.

21 through 30 are interpreted by the system as field welds.

You can display the location of any existing field welds in the model. In this context, fieldweld refers to any weld type having a value within the range of 21 through 30.

Welded joints are recognized by both ends having end preparation values in one of thefollowing ranges.

301-309 beveled311-319 tapered and beveled391-399 plain end

421-429 socketwelded591-599 hole end

This command distinguishes between those weld types defined by the system and thosedefined by the user.

320

3.Pip

ing

Revise Weld Type________________

Commands

Respect Weld Type by User/Override Weld Type by User — Defines if the systemis to respect weld types which were previously defined by you or to override your weldtypes.

Default Option — The default mode allows the system to determine the weld type ateach welded joint of a pipeline or an active group. The weld type will remain asundefined (weld type value equals one) for any non-welded joint.

For welded ends, the determination of the weld type is assigned to a welded joint as afunction of the fabrication category of each of the mating welded ends. This user-specified, rules-based logic is specified in a Weld Type Table in the Piping JobSpecification Table Library. Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide formore information on this table.

The system searches the table with the two applicable fabrication category values. Ifthe pair of fabrication categories are not defined in the Weld Type Table, the weld typedefaults to a value of one for undefined or blank.

The system determines the weld type on the basis of component pairs; no decision ismade if only one of the ends at a welded joint is known. For example, you mustmanually assign the weld type for the piping that is connected to any welded nozzles.

The weld type is defined as undefined for any internal welds between the individualfittings and pipe that comprise an induction bend. The induction bend is recognized asany group of fittings and pipes that share the same non-zero component group number.

All welded joints are assigned a weld type equal to field weld (11), if either welded endhas a construction status of existing.

This option automatically displays temporary field weld display only symbols for eachwelded joint with a field weld type defined by the system. Field weld symbols are alsodisplayed for those welded joints where a field weld type has been defined by the user.

Weld Type at Joint by User — This option specifies the weld type at a welded joint.This action is saved in the component’s user data and will be respected by theautomated assignment of weld types. In other words, any definition of the weld type ata welded joint made by the user will not be revised by the automated assignment ofweld types by the system.

Weld Type on Pipe by User — This option identifies a weld point at a specified pointalong the centerline of a pipe. This action is saved in the component’s user data andwill be respected by the automated assignment of weld types. This option results in twopipes representing the length and location of the previously created pipe.

Identify Pipe End Place a data point to locate one end of the pipe.

Specify Distance from Pipe End or Accept Mid Point on Pipe

321

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Type a distance from the selected pipe end for the weld point or select Confirm to usethe midpoint of the pipe.

— OR —

Select one of the coordinate directions and snap to the appropriate graphic in the model.The system determines the weld location as the intersection of the pipe’s flow centerlinewith the selected coordinate axis and coordinate value. You can also Select the Movefrom Other Point option to define the weld location point using a reference point.Select the connect point (or center) of a component or a vertex of a piping segment.Then type the distance to move along the pipe run from the specified reference point.The system provides a piping orientation tee to define the direction to move.

Weld type at joint by system — This option changes any by user definition of weldtype at a welded joint and defines the weld type by system on the same basis as theautomated assignment of weld types.

Display Field Welds — This option displays the location of any existing field welds inthe model in a specified screen view. Place a point in the screen view to display thefield welds. The system displays a * to indicate the location of the field welds.

Symbol Size — Select this option to type a user-defined symbol size to be used for thefield weld symbols.

If you change the weld type of a welded joint for which the display only fieldweld symbol is displayed, that symbol is erased.


To use a weld type by system option, a Weld Type Table must exist in the Piping JobSpecification Table Library. The name of this table must be specified in the Type 63 data forthe model. Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for information on theWeld Type table. Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Project Administrator ReferenceGuide for information on defining the table name in the type 63 data.

322

3.Pip

ing

Revise Weld Type________________

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline by snapping to a segment or place a data point to locate a componentto identify the pipeline to be processed or select one of the Weld Type options from thebottom of the form. See the Options below for more information.

2. Select Weld Type to be used at the mating from the form and select Confirm to beginprocessing.

323


3.5.8 Iso Drawing Limit

This command places a marker indicating an isometric drawing limit in the user data of aselected piping item connect point (both mated items will be updated). The specified point isused during isometric extraction to determine the point on a pipeline to break an isometricdrawing.

You can use the Display Isometric Limits option to display the iso drawing limits in aparticular view. The iso drawing limit is also displayed in the user data (at a specific connectpoint) when using the Review Attribute command.

If you delete an isometric drawing limit for which the display only symbolrepresenting the isometric drawing limit is still displayed, that symbol iserased.

It is recommended that you do not place a manual isometric drawing limit atthe end of a line. Changes in line ID generate automatic limit points, andplacing a manual limit at the same location as an automatic limit can cause thesystem to generate an extra drawing sheet with no items on it.

Commands

Display Isometric Limits — Displays the location of any existing isometric limitpoints in the model in a specified screen view. Place a point in the screen view todisplay the limit points. The system displays a L to indicate the location of the limitpoints.

Symbol Size by System/Symbol Size by User — Select this toggle to determine thesize of the displayed limit symbols.

324

3.Pip

ing

Iso Drawing Limit________________ Symbol Size — Select this option to type a user-defined symbol size to be used for thesymbols.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Drawing Limit Point by placing a data point to identify the connect point ofthe item(s) to be marked as an isometric drawing limit.

2. Press <R> until the desired item/connect point is displayed and then press <D> to placethe marker.

325


3.5.9 Component Group

This command defines a set of components to be treated as a group. You can add and removecomponents from the group, highlight the components included in a specified group, or clearall the components from the group.

Commands

Start New Component Group — Creates a new component group. The systemdisplays the number of the group to be created in the Group Number field. Place adata point to locate the starting component in the group and continue to identifycomponents to make up the component group. The system highlights the components inthe group.

Add Component to Group — Adds components to an existing component group.Place a data point to locate one of the components in the component group. The systemupdates the Group Number. Place a data point to locate the component to add to thegroup and continue to identify components to add to the component group.

Drop Component From Group — Removes specified components from an existingcomponent group. Place a data point to locate one of the components in the componentgroup. The system updates the Group Number. Place a data point to locate thecomponent to drop from the group and continue to identify components to drop fromthe component group.

Review Component Group — Highlights the components included in a specifiedgroup. Place a data point to locate one of the components in the component group andthe system displays the component group information.

326

3.Pip

ing

Component Group________________

Clear Component Group — Drops all the components from a specified componentgroup. Place a data point to locate one of the components in the component group.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Component Group Option by selecting the option from the bottom of theform for the type of operation to perform.

327


3.5.10 Revise Segment Data

This command revises in one operation the attribute segment data for selected pipingsegments in a pipeline.

You can use the Active Group option to select the piping segments to be revised based upona combination of geography and database search criteria.

In revising the piping segment data, you are given an abbreviated set of key piping segmentdata including the following:

line number labelunit numberunit codeline sequence numbertrain numberpiping materials classnominal piping diameterinsulation purpose

insulation thicknessheat tracing requirementsheat tracing medianormal operating conditionsnormal design conditionsflow directionindication of piping or tubing

At any time, you can request the complete list of piping segment data or revert to theabbreviated list.


When you revise the schedule/thickness override using this command, the system provides alist of schedule/thickness values derived from the override schedule/thickness standard notetype 332 in the projects’ Standard Note Library. This will help to prevent errors generatedfrom entering the schedule/thickness in the wrong format.





If you change insulation purpose to N (none) or blank (undefined), the insulation thicknessand the insulation density are automatically set to undefined.

328

3.Pip

ing

Revise Segment Data________________ This command will respect revisions made to the following user data for piping segments.

selection of piping or tubingflow directioninsulation thickness units



normal design

alternate design.


If you move the cursor to a code-listed attribute by pressing <RETURN>(rather than placing a data point), the system will not activate the ReviewStandard Notes form. You can type the code-list text (such as MMA for fluidcode) or type an index number (such as 444).

Do not use this command to change the NPD (size) if you have pipe sizechanges on the pipeline, for example if there are reducers in the pipeline.

The P&ID node number - end 1 or P&ID node number - end 2 data for piping segments cannot be revised.

329


Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by snapping to a segment or locate acomponent on the pipeline to be revised or select one of the options to define theelements to be revised.

330

3.Pip

ing

Update Segment from P&ID________________

3.5.11 Update Segment from P&ID

This option automatically updates piping segment data from the P&ID database. This optionreloads piping segment data for those segments in the piping model for which P&ID nodenumbers were stored previously.

You can update piping segment data from the P&ID database for a single piping segment, apipeline or any of the active group options.

The piping segment data is updated according to the Correlation Table. The updating ofsegment data from the P&ID database is based on the complete or partial transfer flag storedwith the piping segment in the model.

Segment data is not updated from the P&ID database if any one of the following conditionsoccurs during the process of updating the segment data for a specific piping segment.

The piping materials class from the P&ID database is undefined in the referencedatabase.

The nominal piping diameter from the P&ID database is invalid for the piping materialsclass from the P&ID database on the basis of the NPD Table in the Piping SpecificationTable Library.

The active nominal piping diameter is invalid for the piping materials class from theP&ID database on the basis of the NPD Table in the Piping Specification Table Libraryin partial data transfer, where nominal piping diameter is not updated.

The fluid code from the P&ID database is invalid for the piping materials class from theP&ID database on the basis of the Fluid Code Table in the Piping Specification TableLibrary for a piping materials class where a Fluid Code Table is applicable.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Piping Segment or Select Active Group by selecting one of the optionsfrom the bottom of the form to determine the extent of the piping segment data to beupdated from the P&ID database.Piping Segment as GroupPipeline as GroupActive Group

2. Accept or Select Other Option by selecting Confirm to begin updating the segmentdata.

331


3.5.12 Re-Compute Thickness

This option re-calculates the wall thickness values of entire pipelines or of an active group.This is necessary if any of the data used in the wall thickness calculations has changed, andthus needs to be updated. (Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for adescription of the Wall Thickness and Branch Reinforcement Equations and the data whichaffects this calculation).

You can use the Active Group option to select the piping segments to be revised based upon acombination of geography and database search criteria.

Commands

Delete Markers — If the system encounters any errors in updating the wall thicknessdata it places a marker in the model. You can use this option to delete all the markersfrom the model.


This command is only necessary when data used in the wall thickness calculations haschanged. (Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for information on the datawhich affects wall thickness calculations).

332

3.Pip

ing

Re-Compute Thickness________________

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by placing a data point to identify thepipeline to be updated or select the pipeline using one of the other options.

2. Accept Piping for Thickness Calculations by selecting Confirm to accept thehighlighted elements.

The user data of a component or pipe is not updated if the source of thicknessdata flag changes.

This command does not respect user overrides of schedule/thickness for pipingcommodities.

333


3.5.13 Update from RDB

This command does not date stamp the component. To maintain consistencyof the RDB conflict reporting and resolving process, it is recommended to usethe Review RDB Report, page 370 Review RDB Report function instead ofthis command. Within the Review RDB Report function, the commandUpdate Component from RDB updates the component with the effective datadate and date stamp the component as last placed.

This option updates data in the model based upon revisions to data in the project ReferenceData (such as a change to the Piping Job Specification or Physical Data Library.) Thiscommand is only necessary when data in the RDB has changed.

You can use the Active Group option to select the piping segments to be revised based on acombination of geography and database search criteria.

You can select from the following attributes that do not alter the model geometry:

PJS attributes: commodity code, material grade, weight code, fabrication category, andstandard notes

Physical Data Library: surface area, dry weight, and wet weight If you update dryweight, the weight of the operator (if applicable) is updated for all valves.

You can use this command to change vendor or fabrication category in the model after thedesign has started and without reconstructing the model. You can enter weight data into themodel, even though that data may not have been available when the model had been created.

If you modify the fabrication category (fabrication_cat), the weld type is updated at eachwelded end of the component or pipe being reconstructed or updated. It is no longer necessaryto remember to correct the weld data that results from updating the fabrication category of acomponent or pipe being reconstructed or updated at a welded joint when you have a WeldType Table loaded.






1 1 1

1 5 21

1 7 21

1 15 21

1 16 21

1 17 21

1 25 21

1 27 21

334

3.Pip

ing

Update from RDB________________ If a Weld Type Table has not been defined for the project, the weld type is revised to thedefault weld type value, ’shop weld’ (11).

If you set the toggle on the Revise Weld Type form to Respect Weld Type by User, theweld type is not revised for either the welded end of the component or pipe beingreconstructed or updated or the corresponding welded end of the other component. Also, theweld type is not revised when the mating welded end is not in the active piping model, sinceyou do not have write access to reference models. When the system defines the weld type, thefollowing considerations are made:



You cannot use this command to update information from the Piping Job Specification orPhysical Data Library which effects the model graphics.

Although fabrication category can be updated from the Piping Job Specification, it will not beupdated for any component for which you have previously and explicitly overridden the valuefrom the Piping Job Specification.

This command can create discrepancies between the model and the ReferenceDatabase, but it will never create inconsistencies between the model graphicsand their associated database information.

335


Commands

Active Group — Defines a group of components which can be manipulated by theactive command. It activates the Define Active Group form used to define thecollection of components and/or segments to make up the group.

Delete Markers — Deletes all markers found during the verification process.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Data to be Updated by selecting the category of data to be updated from thePiping Job Specification or Physical Data Library.

2. Select Data to be Updated or Accept Current Selection by selecting anyadditional categories to be updated.

3. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group. Place a data point to identify the pipelineto be updated. The system highlights the selected pipeline. You can also select theactive group option to update the elements defined by the active group. The systemhighlights the elements in the active group.

4. Accept Piping for Update from RDB by selecting Restart to identify anotherpipeline or select Confirm to update the selected data in the highlighted elements.

336

3.Pip

ing

Load Weld Numbers________________

3.5.14 Load Weld Numbers

This option automatically creates weld numbers that are unique within the project.

You can create weld numbers for shop welds, field welds or for both shop and field welds.Any weld types within the range of 11 through 20 are interpreted by the system as shop welds.Any weld types within the range of 21 through 30 are interpreted as field welds. The weldtype attribute is associated with standard note type 1100 in the Standard Note Library.

The unique weld number is formed from the partition number of the active model andarbitrarily the table number, the system unique number, and the connect point number fromone of the welded ends.

characters 1-3 partition number

characters 4-7 system unique number

character 8 table number and connect point number

This command will not define weld numbers for any internal welds between the individualfittings and pipes that comprise an induction bend. The induction bend is recognized as anygroup of fittings and pipes that share the same non-zero component group number.

This command ensures that a piping component, pipe, or instrument component which formsone end of a welded joint and is deleted and replaced, after weld numbers have been assigned,will be assigned the same weld number as the other end of the welded joint. Although thisweld number may have been determined on the basis of the system unique number of thepiping that was deleted, that weld number will be unique within the project. This provides amethod for you to update the weld numbers at such welded joints without potentially re-assigning the weld numbers for previously numbered welded joints.

Note that a weld number will never be re-used when both ends of a welded joint have beendeleted and replaced.

337


Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by placing a data point to identify thepipeline to be revised. The system highlights the selected pipeline, or select the ActiveGroup option to update the elements defined by an active group. The systemhighlights the elements in the active group.

2. Accept to Load Weld Numbers by selecting Confirm to load the weld numberinformation to the database for the highlighted elements.

338

3.Pip

ing

Revise Inspection Keys________________

3.5.15 Revise Inspection Keys

This command activates the Revise Inspection Keys form. This form allows you to reviseinspection keys that have already been loaded.

Selecting and confirming a pipeline causes the system to begin cycling through the selectedline, highlighting inspection keys as they are encountered. To skip over the highlightedinspection key, select the right arrow key under the Active Inspection Key field.

Commands

1. Active Inspection Key Field, and Left and Right Arrows — The Active InspectionKey field displays the number of the highlighted inspection key. The left and rightarrow buttons signal the system to locate and display the previous or next inspectiontype the sequence, respectively.

2. Use Next Free Inspection Key — Places the next available inspection key number inthe Active Inspection Key field. If the form is accepted after selecting this option, theactive (highlighted) inspection number will be replaced by the next free inspection keynumber.

339


3. Only Discrepancies / All Inspection Keys — This toggle controls whether the systemlocates and highlights every inspection key, or just the inspection keys that classify asdiscrepancies.

The figure above represents a piping segment that includes a tee. It does not containany discrepancies, as the key numbers at each connect point match; therefore, noinspection keys would be highlighted if this toggle was set to Only Discrepancies.

If this toggle was set to Only Discrepancies, the figure above would cause the systemto highlight a discrepancy. The inspection key indicated by the arrow is in discrepancy;the system expects connected component ends to have the matching inspection keynumbers.

If this toggle was set to All Inspection Keys when the form was accepted, eachinspection key on the inspection line would be highlighted, and you would need to usethe right arrow key to prompt the system to continue traversing the line.

4. Window to Inspection ID — Windows in to the specified inspection iso line idnumber. This command prompts you for the inspection iso line id number (fromPD_table 118). Type in the appropriate inspection iso line id number, then confirm theform to window in to the specified inspection iso line.

5. Revise Inspection Point — Prompts you to select a point at which you wish to revisean inspection key. When a has been selected, the inspection key number for that pointis displayed in the Active Inspection Key field. Select the Use Next Free InspectionKey to place the next free inspection key number in the Active Inspection Key field;once the next available key number is displayed in the Active Inspection Key field,you may edit this number if you so desire. Confirming the form at this point willreplace the selected key with the number currently displayed in the Active InspectionKey field.

340

3.Pip

ing

Revise Inspection Keys________________

Steps

1. Select the Revise Inspection Keys command from the Revise Data palette.

The system actovates the Revise Inspection Keys form, and prompts you to identify theappropriate inspection iso line or select the appropriate option.

2. Identify the inspection key that you wish to revise. You can use either of two methodsto selection the key to be revised:

Select Revise Inspection Point, then place a data point on the point associatedwith the key you wish to revise.

— OR —

Set the Only Discrepancies / All Inspection Keys toggle to the desired setting,then place a data point on the iso inspection line containing the key to be revised.Use the right arrow key to scan through the line until the desired key is selected.

The system displays the selected key number in the Active Inspection Key field.

3. When the desired key is active, select the Use Next Free Inspection Key to place thenext available key number in the Active Inspection Key field.

The system writes the next available key number into the Active Inspection Key field.

4. You can confirm the form now to replace the selected key number with the nextavailable key number,

— OR —

you can edit the number in the Active Inspection Key field to contain any number youdesire, then confirm the form to write that number to the RDB.

341


3.5.16 Approve Piping

This command changes the approval status attribute of a pipeline or the active group byselecting the approval status from the list of standard notes for code list CL035. The systemactivates the Approve Piping form which identifies a pipeline or revise the componentsdefined by the active group.

With the exception of the Move Pipe Run and Move Pipeline End commands,revised pipe cannot be approved. You must change the approval status in order tomodify it.

Please be aware that the Move Pipe Run and Move Pipeline End commands do NOTcheck the approval status.

You can use the Active Group option to select the piping segments to be revised based upona combination of geography and database search criteria.

The system retrieves the appropriate color and level for the graphics of each component. Itthen updates the database approval status attribute and modifies the components, pipes,instruments, and segments to the new colors and levels.

Approval status is a code-listed attribute with the following values

2 approved3 unapproved11-20 various stages of approval where the piping cannot be revised21-30 various stages of approval where the user can revise the piping.

The Revision and Placement commands will respect approved piping and will not permit anyrevisions to that piping (or new placement connected to approved piping) without firstchanging the approval status.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by selecting the pipeline to be modified orselect the Active Group option from the form.

2. Select Standard Note by selecting the desired approval status from the form.

3. Accept or Identify Another Pipeline by selecting Confirm or select a differentpipeline or group for modification.

342

3.Pip

ing

Review Data Commands________________

3.6 Review Data Commands

These commands review information in the Design Database or review existing report files.You can only view the information you cannot make any changes.

Commands

Review Attribute — Used to review the attribute values and user data for a specifiedcomponent in the model.

Review Nozzle Data — Used to review the attribute values for all the nozzlesassociated with a specified equipment item.

Review Report — Used to review the contents of an existing MTO report.

Temporary Symbology — Used to set the display symbology for temporary graphics.

343


3.6.1 Review Attributes

This command reviews the following database information:

Attribute values of the identified piping component or segment.

Attribute values of the selected equipment item.

Attribute values of the selected equipment nozzle.

Selected attribute information for ModelDraft, HVAC, and raceway components.

You can also review the user data associated with the element and the information associatedwith the PDS markers placed in the model.

Commands

Review xxxx — The remainder of the options vary depending on what type of elementhas been identified. These options enable you to jump directly to the specified set ofinformation within the display. The system also moves the coordinate system indicatoralong the identified element to reflect the data being reviewed.

Review Notes (standard note type 499) Select a row from the form that corresponds toan attribute using standard note type 499. The system displays a dialog box with thetext for the piping notes. The dialog box disappears automatically with your next input.

344

3.Pip

ing

Review Attributes________________

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Element by snapping to the component, segment, equipment, nozzle or markerto be reviewed or place a data point to locate a piping component.

2. Review Bolt Data. Review the following data for each bolted end of a pipingcomponent, pipe, instrument component, or equipment nozzle so that you can determinewhat angle a valve operator may be rotated. This information is only available for acomponent with at least one bolted end.

the number of bolt holesthe bolt diameterthe bolt circle diameterthe acceptable rotation(360 degrees divided bythe number of bolt holes)

345


3.6.2 Review Nozzle Data

This command is used to review the nozzle data associated with a selected piece ofequipment. You can view the nozzle tag, nominal piping diameter, rating, table suffix, endprep, and piping materials class of the nozzles. For welded nozzles, the system displays theschedule/thickness rather than the pressure rating.

Identify Equipment by snapping to the equipment group to be reviewed.

Identify Equipment or Select Nozzle for Highlight. Select a nozzle from the form tohighlight in the model, or snap to the nozzle graphic to highlight the associated entry onthe form.

346

3.Pip

ing

Review Report________________

3.6.3 Review Report

This option displays an existing report in the Review Report form. You can use the formcontrols to page through the report. You can review any user-formatted reports including

Design Data (MTO) Reports

Design data reports are generated by the Report Manager.

Project Data Reports

Project data reports include those reports created through the Project Control Reportcommand of the Project Administrator.

Reference Data Reports

Reference data reports include the piping spec reports created with the Piping Job SpecManager and the quality control reports created with the Table Checker.

Commands

Select Another Report — Select this option to redisplay the list or reports and selectanother report to review.

Review Report Details — Displays the Review Report Details form which provides adetailed list of information for the report. It displays the revision description, therevised by, and the checked by report management data for the selected report.

347

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Substring Search — Searches the displayed file for the specified report number. Iffound, it displays the line containing the search string.

Two arrow buttons appear on either side of the substring entry to provide the RepeatSearch option. These arrow buttons allow the user to search backward or forward.Each time you select the Repeat Search option from the form, the system moves to thenext occurrence of the search string progressing from top to bottom in the file. If thesearch reaches the end of the file without finding the search string, the message SearchString Not Found appears. If you select Repeat Search again after the end of file, thesystem starts at the top of the file.

Filter List of Reports by Substring — Provides a field in which to enter a substring ofthe report numbers to display. Once you have entered the substring, only those reportswhich include the specified substring in the report number are displayed. A toggle isprovided to display either the complete or partial list of reports.

Restore Model View — Restores the active screen view to the view that was displayedbefore the Review Report option was selected. This option is available only after theMTO Diagnostics command has been selected.

MTO Diagnostics — Displays the MTO Diagnostics form which providesinformation on errors encountered in generating the displayed report. Some of theseerrors are listed below:

Information on errors resulting from material description for bolts, nuts, or gaskets notbeing found.

Information on errors resulting from a gasket determined on the basis of data at one endof a bolted joint differing from the gasket determined on the basis of the data at theother end.

In this situation, the gasket’s thickness and the gasket’s commodity code for both endsof the bolted joint are displayed.

The system highlights all components related to a piping segment for errors that applyonly to the piping segment (and not to its related components) so that the pipingsegment with the error can be easily identified.

When the nozzle associated with one end of piping segment cannot be located, theCoordinate System Indicator (CSI) is displayed at the end of the piping segment.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Report by selecting the report to be reviewed from the list. The system updatesthe form and displays the contents of the selected report file.

348

3.Pip

ing

Review Report________________

2. Report is Displayed for Review. Use the scroll bar and shift right/left arrows toreview the contents of the report or select one of the options from the bottom of theform.

349


3.6.4 Temporary Symbology

This command highlights elements based on specified search criteria or display temporaryattribute labels. You can use the highlight option or change the color, line weight, or linestyle.

Commands

Active Color — Sets the active color by selecting one of the available colors on theDefine Active Color form.

Active Weight — Sets the active weight for use in highlighting elements.

Active Line Style — Sets or modifies the symbol line style.

Segment Search Criteria — Defines the segment search criteria to be used inmodifying the display symbology.

Component Search Criteria — Defines the component search criteria to be used inmodifying the display symbology.

Display Only Labels — Places temporary attribute labels in a specified screen view.

This command only works for the active file.

350

3.Pip

ing

Temporary Symbology________________ Restore Permanent Symbology — Cancels the temporary symbology actionsperformed with the Temporary Symbology form.

Operating Sequence

1. Specify Search Criteria or Select Display Option. Select Segment Search Criteriaor Component Search Criteria to define the search criteria to be used in modifying thedisplay symbology.

2. Select one of the symbology options ( Active Line Style ) to define the activesymbology. (These options are only used when the toggle is set to Active Symbology.)

3. Select the Display Only Labels option to place temporary attribute labels in aspecified screen view.

351


3.6.4.1 Active Color

The Active Color option allows you to set the active color by selecting one of the availablecolors on the Define Active Color form. When you select the Active Color button, thesystem displays the Define Active Color form.

Operating Sequence

1. Select one of the available colors from the form.


352

3.Pip

ing

Active Weight________________

3.6.4.2 Active Weight

The Active Weight option allows you to set the active line weight for use in highlightingelements. When you select the Active Weight button, the system displays a slide bar.

Operating Sequence

You can modify the line weight by:

1. Modify the line weight by placing a data point at a specific point on the bar. The systemmoves the slide button to the data point displaying the new line weight.

— OR —

2. Modify the line weight by pressing <D> and holding the button as you move the mouseup or down the bar to the new line weight setting. As you move the slide button, thedisplayed line weight changes with respect to the new button position.

353


3.6.4.3 Active Line Style

The Active Line Style command allows you to set or modify the symbol line style. Whenyou select the Active Line Style button, the system displays the available line styles.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the desired line style.


354

3.Pip

ing

Display Only Labels________________

3.6.4.4 Display Only Labels

The Display Only Labels command places temporary attribute labels in a specified screenview. The system reviews the database attributes for the elements in the selected view andcalculates the location, size, and contents of the labels to be placed. A label is placed for eachpiping segment, tagged component, or symbol in the view.

This command only works for the active file.


Set the screen view to fit the segments to be labeled. Depending on the view perspective andthe spacing between line changes, labels may be placed on top of each other.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Label Type by selecting one of the Piping Segment, Tagged Component, orSymbol options to indicate the type of label to be displayed and place a data point toidentify the screen view to display the temporary label.


355


3.6.4.5 Restore Permanent Symbology

This command cancels the temporary symbology actions performed with the TemporarySymbology form. It restores the active symbology to the last saved (by File Design)parameters.

Operating Sequence

1. Specify Search Criteria or Select Display Option by selecting the RestorePermanent Symbology command.


356

3.Pip

ing

Analyze Data Commands________________

3.7 Analyze Data Commands

These commands enable you to review information related to the model analysis operations.You can also check for interferences within the active model file.

Refer to the section on Design Data Management for more information on performing themodel analysis operations.

Refer to the PDS Interference Checker/Manager Reference Guide for more information ondetecting and reviewing interference clashes.

Commands

Design Review — Reviews comments made during a Design Review session andrespond to those comments.

Piping Clash Review — Reviews detected interference clashes.

Piping Clash Check — Checks a specified pipeline for possible clashes.

Design Check Review — Reviews design check markers generated by the DesignChecker.

P&ID Comparison Review — Graphically reviews discrepancies between the P&IDdatabase and the piping model detected by the P&ID Consistency Checks Manager

Review RDB Report — Reviews components requiring reconstruction, replacement,or updating as a result of changes to the Reference Database.

Review Iso Drawing — Graphically review an isometric drawing for a specified lineid.

357


3.7.1 Design Review

This command reviews the comments made during a Design Review session. It activates theDesign Review form which displays information from the design review tag file.

You can review the comments by number, by a substring search, or by selecting the next orprevious comment number. You can also attach a short explanation to any comment.

When using the next comment or previous comment option, this command filters out anycomments that are not associated with the active model. This filter is applied by comparingthe physical location of the comment with the volumetric range of the active model.

If a comment was made for a particular component during a Design Review session, thatcomponent is highlighted in the specified screen view and the coordinate_axis is displayed atthe tag point. If the component is not found the system displays a message indicating thecomponent was deleted.

You can store the tag file name, active comment number, and screen view to be updated byselecting File Design.

You can choose whether or not to filter the DesignReview tags to those that overlap thevolume of the active piping model. The default is to filter the DesignReview tags beingreviewed by the volume.

For any DesignReview label that has been created without a leader line, the system determineswhether or not that tag is to be filtered from the review on the basis of the corresponding viewvolume. A rectangular view volume is computed as near a match to the tag’s perspectiveview as possible. If this rectangular volume overlaps the active piping model’s volume, thetag is displayed for review and possible comment.

The purpose of this change is a result of the fact that the tag’s view z location, as determinedduring the DesignReview session, may result in that tag’s 3D location not being within thevolume of the active piping model.

For any DesignReview tag that has been created with a leader line, the review of that tag willcontinue to be determined on the basis of whether the point of interest for that tag (thelocation of the component in the model), falls within the volume of the active piping model.

358

3.Pip

ing

Design Review________________

Operating Sequence

1. Select the tag file to be reviewed.

2. Accept or Select Other Tag File

3. Select Confirm to review the comments in the selected tag file. The system activatesthe Design Review form.

359


4. Select DesignReview Option.

5. Select the Comment Number field and type the number of the comment to review oruse the Previous Comment - Next Comment option to display the commentssequentially based on their order in the tag file.

You can also select the Substring field and type a word or phrase unique to thecomment to review. The system searches for the specified string in the comment anddisplays the associated comment.

You can change the tag file at any time by placing a data point over the TagFile field. The system displays the list of tag files for selection.

360

3.Pip

ing

Piping Clash Review________________

3.7.2 Piping Clash Review

This option locates and review those interference clashes that have been reported for theactive model. It can be used to help identify and correct interference clashes. This optionoperates similarly to the Interference Manager option in the Interference Checker/Managermodule.

As you review the clashes, the system highlights the two components involved in the clash.

Field Descriptions

Project Name — Displays the name of the active project.

Design Area — Displays the name of the active design area.

Responsible User — Displays the user’s initials for approved clashes when AccessControl is active. The displayed user ID is loaded into the Clash Review History datatable, PDtable_135, when the clash is approved.

Clash Description — Displays the type of the active clash. (For example, hard versushard is the type shown in the documentation illustration.)

Date — Displays the date the checker was run. The information in this field is set withthe Checker Run Dates option in the Interference Checker/Manager module.

361

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Marker Number — Displays the number of the current clash. Select a marker numberwith the left and right arrows, select the field and type a marker number, or select theKeyin Marker Number option and type a marker number.

Model / Area Name — Displays the names of the model files and the design area thathave components involved in a clash.

Item A and Item B — Displays the model and area name of the clashing components.The system accesses the user-defined labels in the Label Description Library to create:the primary description, which is displayed on the top line with a limit of 20 characters;and the secondary description, which is displayed on the bottom line and has a limit of40 characters. These descriptions are defined with the Clash Management Labelsoption on the Create Label Data form in the Reference Data Manager.

Comments: — Displays existing comments about the active clash.

Commands

Review Unapproved Clashes/ Review Approved Clashes — Limits active clashsearch to either unapproved or approved clashes.

Unapprove Clash — Select this option to unapprove the active approved clash.

Approve Real Clash — Select this option to approve the active clash as a real clash.

Approve False Clash — Select this option to approve the active clash as a false clash.

Plot Clashes — Select this option to immediately plot the clash being reviewed. Thesystem generates temporary plot files in the temp directory. This option uses the last-used queue or the default queue if nothing has been plotted during the current session.

Select View — Select this option and identify the screen view to display the activeclash.

Restore View — Select this option to restore the selected view to its original viewingparameters.

Highlight Clash — Select this option to highlight the active clash.

Keyin Marker Number — Select this option and type a marker number. The systemupdates the window coordinates about the clash in the selected view.

Detach Marker File / Attach Marker File — Set this toggle to the Detach MarkerFile setting to detach the marker file. Selecting the Attach Marker File settingrefreshes the marker file, updating any markers that may have changed when the filewas last modified.

362

3.Pip

ing

Piping Clash Review________________

Operating Sequence

1. Set the toggle to Review Unapproved Clashes or Review Approved Clashes todetermine the type of clashes to review.

2. Select the right arrow to scan the active model for the type of clashes selected in step 1.

The data for the next clash in the model will be presented in the appropriate fields.

3. Select any of the appropriate options to approve, unapprove, or plot the clashes asdesired.

363


3.7.3 Piping Clash Check

This command checks a pipeline or user-defined active groups for interferences immediatelyafter completing the line. It automatically creates interference envelopes in memory for anypiping in the selected pipeline or active group. It checks any attached reference models forwhich interference envelope files have been created previously. It also reports any referencemodels for which interference envelopes have not been created previously.

The results of this interactive clash checking is not maintained as a part of the InterferenceManagement data. However, you can use the Piping Clash Review option to review theclashes detected by this command.

Construction tolerances and angular tolerances (tolerance for recognizing horizontal beams fordetermining when piping is legitimately resting on steel) are considered during theinterference checking process.

The sparse version of the structural model is used when creating interference envelopes.Model management data must be loaded for the sparse structural models through the ProjectEnvironment Manager. In order to review clashes between piping and structural models,attach propagated structural models instead of sparse structural models.

This command does not affect the interference envelopes created by theInterference Manager’s Envelope Builder.

Commands

Select View — Identifies the screen view to display the active clash.

Restore View — Restores the active view(s) to the initial viewing parameters for theclash being checked.

Previous/Next Marker Number — Reviews the next/previous marker. The systemupdates the window coordinates about the clash in the selected view.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline or Define Active Group — Snap to a segment or locate acomponent to identify the pipeline to be processed or use the Define Active Groupcommand to identify define the items to be processed.

See the Active Group, page 81 for more information.

2. Select Confirm to Accept to Check Pipelineto process the identified pipeline orselect Cancel (X) to reject the pipeline.

3. Identify another pipeline as outlined or select the Piping Clash Review option toreview the detected clashes.

364

3.Pip

ing

Piping Clash Check________________

4. Select one of the options to review the clash.

365


3.7.4 Design Check Review

This command graphically reviews design check errors reported by the Design Checker. Asyou review each error in the report, the system displays information about which componentscaused the error and the type of error. The system also automatically windows to that part ofthe model.

Commands

Define Screen View — Allows you to identify the screen view to display the activemarker.

Restore Model View — Restores the active screen view to the view that was displayedbefore the Design Check Review option was selected.

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Define Screen View option.

2. Identify the screen view to display the active marker.

366

3.Pip

ing

P&ID Comparison Review________________

3.7.5 P&ID Comparison Review

This command graphically reviews any discrepancies in piping segment data between theP&ID Database and the piping model. It displays information from the Segment Data reportgenerated using the P&ID Comparison Report Manager in the Piping Design DataManagement module.

Commands

Update from P&ID Report — This option resolves the data conflicts between thepiping model and the P&ID Database for the active piping segment being reviewed.This option updates the piping segment in the model on the basis of the P&ID dataincluded in the report. Unless the comparison report is recreated and other discrepanciesare found, no discrepancies are displayed when the P&ID Comparison Reviewcommand is reactivated.

The system updates the piping model on the basis of the results presented inthe comparison report. The system does not retrieve the data from the P&IDDatabase, where it may have been changed.

Load from P&ID — Revises the P&ID node numbers for a piping segment and thenupdates the appropriate piping segment data automatically from the P&ID DesignDatabase.

You can also update the data for a piping segment by snapping to graphics in the activeP&ID drawing. If you identify a component in the P&ID drawing that is associatedwith more than one segment, such as a reducer, the system updates the piping segment

367

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ data in the model from the segment associated with the connect point nearest theselection point.

When you revise the schedule/thickness override using this command, the systemprovides a list of schedule/thickness values derived from the overrideschedule/thickness standard note type 332 in the project’s Standard Note Library. Thiswill help to prevent errors generated from entering the schedule/thickness in the wrongformat.

Numbers in the range of 1-499 are reserved for the English system of units, whilenumbers in the range of 500-999 are reserved for the Metric system of units. Only thosevalues applicable to the active NPD system of units is displayed, although both sets ofvalues may have been defined in the Reference Database.

Although the override schedule/thickness value is selected from a list as a standard notetype, the alphanumeric description is loaded into the relational database.

You must ensure that the format in the Standard Note Library is consistent withthe remainder of the Reference Database.

The list is not displayed if the standard note 332 has not been defined, and you mustcontinue to type the schedule/thickness override.

Update Node Numbers From P&ID — Updates the P&ID node numbers from theP&ID Database on the basis of the index to the P&ID segment table for any pipingsegment, where the P&ID Data Comparison command has reported that the nodenumbers no longer exist in the P&ID Database.

Inhibit Future Data Comparison — This option inhibits future data comparisons for aspecific piping segment in the model, when the P&ID data comparison command hasreported that the piping segment in the model has undefined node numbers and the linenumber label does not exist in the P&ID Database. Once the data comparisons havebeen inhibited for this piping segment, the error will not be reported in any future datacomparisons, unless the user chooses. This inhibits data comparisons for pipingsegments representing vents, drains, and off-line instrument connections that are notrepresented in the P&ID Database.

Approve Data Discrepancy — Approves a data conflict between the piping model andthe P&ID Database for the active piping segment being reviewed. This discrepancywill not be reported in later data comparisons unless any of the data being comparedchanges in either the piping model or in the P&ID Database.

Restore Model View — Restores the active screen view to the view that was displayedbefore the P&ID Comparison Review option was selected.

Active P&ID Comparison Field, and Left and Right Arrows The Active P&IDComparison field displays the number of the active P&ID comparison. The left andright arrow buttons signal the system to locate and display the previous or nextcomparison in the sequence, respectively.

368

3.Pip

ing

P&ID Comparison Review________________


You must have run the P&ID Consistency Checks Manager to create the P&ID ComparisonReport. Refer to the Chapter on Piping Design Data Management for more information onrunning the P&ID Consistency Checks Manager.

369


3.7.6 Review RDB Report

This command reviews any component in the model requiring reconstruction, replacement, orupdate as a result of changes to the Reference Database.

This command makes extensive use of data provided by the Reference Data Managersrevision management reports. Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide formore information regarding these reports.

You can review all pertinent information regarding the revision management reports for theReference Database on the basis of the following error types.

a dimension table has been revised

Use the Reconstruct Component command with this component.

a weight table has been revised

Use the Update from Reference Database command with this component.

a discrepancy between the specification data in the model and that in the ReferenceDatabase

Use either the Reconstruct Component or the Update from Reference Databasecommand with this component on the basis of which specification data has adiscrepancy.

the specification data for a component in the model is missing from the ReferenceDatabase; it has been deleted from the Reference Database

Delete this component and replace it with a different component or add this componentto the Reference Database.

Although a component might be reported through more than one Reference DatabaseRevision Management report as having data which is inconsistent with the ReferenceDatabase, the component will only be reported for review once by this command. Only themost severe discrepancy is reported using the following prioritized list.

1. The specification data for a component in the model is missing (has been deleted) fromthe Reference Database.

2. A dimension table has been revised.

3. A discrepancy between the specification data in the model and that in the ReferenceDatabase.

4. A weight table has been revised.

370

3.Pip

ing

Review RDB Report________________

Commands

Update Component from RDB– This option automatically revises the component in themodel without exiting the command. The system reconstructs the active component orupdates its data from the reference database on the basis of the type of error and the datainvolved. Once the component has been revised successfully, it will no longer be reported.The system also performs the following items where applicable:

Design Checker is automatically activated at the end of each end of any component or pipethat is being reconstructed. Design Checker is not activated for non-geometric data that isupdated on the basis of changes to the reference database.

If required as a result of a change to the fabrication category from the Reference Database, theweld type is updated at each welded end of the component or pipe being reconstructed orupdated. It is no longer necessary to remember to correct the weld data that results fromupdating the fabrication category of a component or pipe being reconstructed or updated at awelded joint when you have a Weld Type Table loaded.



No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1Units= INT, INT, INT


1 1 11 5 211 7 211 15 211 16 211 17 211 25 211 27 21






371

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The Report Date field represents the most recent date for which a discrepancy was reportedfor that component involving the component’s data in the model and the correspondingreference data. This date will not necessarily be the date the specific discrepancy wasreported or the date of the most recent revision management report.

The Discrepancy field indicates the type of error. For all components, regardless of the typeof discrepancy reported, the system indicates if the component requires reconstruction as aresult of changes to piping segment data in the model, such as piping materials class ornominal piping diameter. This might save you from needlessly updating the component’sdata from the Reference Database when other revision management facilities would indicatethat reconstruction is required. For example, a component might be reported as only requiringupdating as a result of revisions to the Reference Database, whereas that same componentmight require reconstruction as a result of changes in the model.

You can select the right arrow to display the next discrepancy. The components beingreviewed are sorted by line id.

If you must exit this command to make related revisions in the model or for any other reasonand then re-enter this command for analysis purposes, the next component in the revisionmanagement is displayed automatically.

372

3.Pip

ing

Review Isometric Drawing________________

3.7.7 Review Isometric Drawing

This command graphically reviews an isometric drawing in the Piping Designer modelingenvironment. You can review only one isometric drawing at any given time.

The format of the line id in the model, as specified in the Label Description Library, must beidentical to the format used for extracting the isometric drawings. The isometric drawingdefaults option must reference the line id of the piping segment.

This command determines the network address and pathname for the isometric drawing on thebasis of the isometric revision management data in the Project Control Database, as follows.

The isometric drawing index number is determined from the Isometric DrawingExtraction Data Table (PDtable_185) on the basis of the defined line id.

The isometric default index number is determined from the Isometric Drawing RevisionInformation Table (PDtable_186) on the basis of the isometric drawing index numberfrom the previous table.

The network address and the pathname for the isometric drawing are determined fromthe Isometric Files Data Table (PDtable_180) on the basis of the isometric default indexnumber from the previous table.

373


Commands

Select Line ID From Model / Select Line ID From List — Identify the line ID bylocating the piping in the active piping model or in a reference model of the samepiping design area as the active piping model or select the line ID from a list.

Display Iso Report — Displays the Review Iso Report form which providesinformation on errors encountered in generating the displayed report.

Iso Diagnostics — Review ISOGEN model graphics diagnostics similar to the MTODiagnostics option. You can window to the piping in the model that is causingproblems for the creation of the isometric drawing.

Swap Iso View and Model View — Swaps the views.

Disable Display of Iso Drawing — Disables the display of the Iso drawing.


You can only review isometric drawings for which isometric drawing management data hasbeen created in the Project Control Database. The system reads the Project Control Databaseto determine the isometric drawing’s file specification and disk location.

The drawing border must be specified as part of the isometric drawing management data inthe Project Control Database. If not, the isometric drawing will not be displayed. Thereference files are clipped to the extent of the drawing border associated with the isometricdrawing.

You can define the line id by locating piping in the active piping model or in a referencemodel of the same piping design area as the active piping model.

The reference file origin (corresponding to the lower left extent of the isometric drawingborder) is translated to an obscure part of the piping model to avoid any graphical overlapswith the 3D model. Only the isometric drawing graphics will be displayed in this view; allmodel categories are disabled for this view.

The isometric drawing and its drawing border are attached at the most negative point (in termsof X,Y,Z coordinates) of the model. The model view is rotated to a plan view and the displaydepths are set such than only the isometric drawing and its drawing border are viewed. Theisometric drawing and the corresponding drawing border are attached at an elevation of 15’(or the metric equivalent) from the minimum elevation in the project with display depths of+/- 1’ (or the metric equivalent).

The reference files for the isometric drawing and the corresponding drawing border are notscaled.

Before attaching the two reference files representing the isometric drawing, the active modelview is saved as a named model view, MDLISO.

374

3.Pip

ing

Review Isometric Drawing________________

Once the isometric drawing has been displayed, you can restore the view of the isometricdrawing to its previous state by using the saved model view.

Similarly, once an isometric drawing has been selected and displayed, that view of theisometric drawing will be saved as a named model view, ISOVUE. This restores the isometricdrawing to the same or a different view.

Snap lock and locate element lock for both the isometric drawing and the drawingborder are disabled when the reference files are attached.

You cannot control the display categories for the isometric drawing or the drawingborder. All categories in the isometric drawing and its drawing border will bedisplayed.

You can completely disable the display of the isometric drawing.

Neither the isometric drawing nor the corresponding drawing border are listedby the Reference Model command. The two saved model views, ISOVUE andMDLISO will not be listed by the Saved Model View command.

375


376

4.Co

nstru

ction

Construction Commands________________

4. Construction Commands

These commands provide construction aids. All of the placement commands result ingraphics being created in the PDS category for non-PDS graphics. All of the revisioncommands are prohibited from manipulating any PDS graphics other than those created by thecorresponding placement commands.

Command Groups

Construction Place Commands — Create graphics in the PDS category for non-PDSGraphics.

Construction Copy Commands — Copy non-PDS graphics in the PDS categorycreated by the Construction Place commands.

Construction Revise Commands — Manipulate graphics created by thecorresponding construction place commands.

377


4.1 Construction Place Commands

Create graphics in the PDS category for non-PDS Graphics.

Commands

Place Line — Places a line between two data points.

Place Line by Angle — Places a line at the active angle.

Place Circle by Center — Places a circle by defining the radius with two points.

Place Circle by Radius — Places a circle by defining a radius with a keyed-in value.

Place Circle by 3 Points — Places a circle by defining an edge with three data points.

Place Circle by Diameter — Places a circle by defining the diameter with two points.

Place Terminator — Places the active line terminator symbol at the end of a selectedline.

Perpendicular Bisector — Constructs a perpendicular bisector to an existing line.

378

4.Co

nstru

ction

Construction Copy Commands________________

4.2 Construction Copy Commands

Copy non-PDS graphics in the PDS category created by the Construction Place commands.

Commands

Mirror & Copy - Vertical — Mirrors and copies an element about a vertical axis.

Mirror & Copy - Horizontal — Mirrors and copies an element about a horizontal axis.

Mirror Copy — Mirrors and copies an element about a line.

Spin & Copy — Copies an element and rotates it by an angle defined by a data point.

Copy Element — Copies a specified element.

Copy Parallel by Distance — Copies an element parallel to and at a specified distance(defined with a data point) from the original.

Copy Parallel by Keyin — Copies an element parallel to and at a specified distance(defined with a key-in) from the original.

379


4.3 Construction Revise Commands

Manipulate graphics created by the corresponding construction place commands.

Commands

Delete Partial — Deletes selected portions of an element.

Modify Element — Modifies lines, line strings, shapes, circles, and ellipses.

Extend Line by Keyin — Extends a line or line segment by a keyed-in distance.

Extend Line by Distance — Extends a line or line segment by a distance defined by adata point.

Extend 1 to Intersection — Extends a line, line string, or arc element to intersect withanother element.

Extend Both to Intersection — Extends two lines, line strings, or arc elements untilthe elements intersect.

Mirror Original - Vertical — Repositions an element about a vertical axis.

Mirror Original - Horizontal — Repositions an element about a horizontal axis.

Mirror Original About Line — Repositions an element about a line.

Spin Original — Rotates an element by an angle defined by a data point.

Move Element — Moves an element to another location.

Delete Element — Deletes an element. If you are zoomed in too close to an element,the system may not be able to snap to the text node for deletion.

380

4.Co

nstru

ction

Construction Revise Commands________________ Change Symbology — Changes the symbology of an element to the active color, lineweight, and line style.

Change Color — Changes the color of an element to the active color.

Change Weight — Changes the line weight of an element to the active line weight.

Change Style — Changes the line style of an element to the active line style.

381


382

5.View

View Modification Commands________________

5. View Modification Commands

These commands provide view manipulations. All of these commands result in modifyingwhat is seen in selected views. These commands only manipulate the view of the model butdo not manipulate the actual model.

Options

Viewing — Modifies the view to define what is seen in it.

View More — Modifies the view to define what is seen.

Viewing Direction — Modifies the viewing direction.

View Depth — Modifies the view depth.

Open/Close — Allows a view to be opened or closed. The items in the sub-menu areview numbers. The views that are darkened are open.

Bottom-to-Top — Makes the bottom view fully visible, even if the view is fullyobscured before this item is chosen.

Cascade — Stacks views in numerical order with the lowest numbered view entirelyvisible and the title bar of each remaining view visible.

383

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Tile — Tiles open graphics views.

Swap — Swaps the screen image between two logical screens. When Swap is chosen,the physical screens are updated with the contents of the previously hidden logicalscreen.

This item is dimmed if your system is configured with dual monitors or if it does notsupport two virtual screens. Although the Swap command is not dimmed when using aNT workstation, it does not apply.

Update — Updates a view, all of the views, the right or left view, or the grid displayedon a view.

Previous — Modifies the screen image to display the previous view.

Next — Modifies the screen image to display the next view.

Copy — Copies the content of one view into another specified view.

Camera — Turns on the camera and defines the camera position and target.

–On turns the camera on.

–Off turns the camera off.

–Set Up turns on and sets up the camera.

–Move Camera moves the camera (like focusing the camera at an object and movingaround to obtain different views of it).

–Move Target moves the target (like standing in one position and pointing the cameraat different objects).

–Lens opens the Camera Lens setting box, which is used to set the angles and focallengths of view camera lenses. Changes take effect only if applied with the Applybutton.

384

5.View

View Modification Commands________________ Render — Converts and displays views in one of the following ways: wiremesh,hidden line, filled hidden line, constant, smooth, phong, phong stereo, or phongantialias. Also, FlyThrough activates the FlyThrough Producer setting box, which isused to create simple animations, called sequences, for visualizing 3D models.

Levels — Defines which levels are displayed in a view. Changes take effect only ifapplied with the Apply button.

All PDS level control is manipulated using Category Control. Intergraph doesnot recommend using native Microstation level controls (i.e. on/off, color, linetype, etc.) in conjunction with any PDS application.

385

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Rotation — Opens the change view rotation box, which is used to control viewrotation. Changes take effect only if applied with the Apply button.

386

5.View

View Commands________________

5.1 View Commands

These commands are the basic view modification commands.

Commands

Move and Center View — Repositions graphics within the same view.

Window Volume — Defines a window display volume using precision inputs.

Window Center — Defines a new center point for a window view.

Window Area — Defines a window viewing area by two data points.

Window Origin — Defines a window view by the window origin.

Refresh Views — Refreshes the specified views.

Viewing Options — Sets the screen display and view control options.

Zoom In — Changes the magnification to focus on a smaller display area.

Zoom Out — Changes the magnification to focus on a larger display area.

Fit — Displays all elements in a selected view.

Review Categories — Review or modify the displayed category data (segregationparameters) associated with a screen view.

View Equipment — Modifies a screen view allowing only the elements making up anequipment item to be displayed.

387

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Window to Named Item — Defines a window viewing area about a specified named

item.

Saved Model View — Saves the view orientation and clipping volume of a selectedscreen view.

388

5.View

Move and Center View________________

5.1.1 Move and Center View

The Move Window and Center command allows you to define a new window center bymoving a specified direction and distance from the current window center. You can defineany distance and direction, inside or outside the viewing volume.

Commands

Move to (absolute move) — These options define the absolute coordinate for the pointin the direction to be defined. Select the direction and type the absolute coordinate orsnap to an element to retrieve its corresponding coordinate.

Move (delta move) — These options define the change in the selected coordinate forthe point in the direction to be entered. Select only one of the directions.

Construct Point — Constructs a new active point using multiple inputs. You canmove the point along absolute or delta coordinates. Each input moves the coordinateindicator until you select Accept.

Distance and Direction — Specifies the exact distance the point will be moved and inwhat general direction. This option can be used in conjunction with the ConstructPoint command.

389


Operating Sequence

1. Select View by selecting one of the screen views from the indicators at the top of theform.

2. Specify Window Center by specifying the new window center in the selected screenview. The system updates the selected view with the new window center.

— OR —

Select either the Construct Point or the Distance and Direction option.

390

5.View

Construct Point________________

5.1.1.1 Construct Point

This command constructs a new active place point using multiple inputs. It allows you tocompute an offset distance or define absolute or delta coordinate values. Each input movesthe coordinate indicator until you select Accept to accept the displayed location and send thecoordinate location to the active independent command.

Commands




Compute Offset — Allows you to compute an offset.


Select a command which allows the active place point to be moved.

391


Operating Sequence

1. Identify Next Vertex by using the available options to construct a point.

2. Select Accept when the coordinates are correct.

392

5.View

Distance and Direction________________

5.1.1.2 Distance and Direction

This command moves the active place point a specified or calculated distance in a specifieddirection or along a defined angle.

Settings in the model’s type 63 data determine the form display for horizontal and verticalangles. For the horizontal angle, the system will display either CCW from East or CW fromNorth. For the vertical angle, the system will display either CCW from Plan or CW fromPlan.

You can use the Project Data Manager to define the horizontal angle in one of two ways:

The angle can be measured as a clockwise offset (looking at a plan view) from North(North=0). (This is the default setting in the delivered seed data.)

The angle can be measured as a counterclockwise offset (looking at a plan view) from East(East=0).

Commands



Horizontal Angle Vertical Angle — Type the angles in decimal degrees or select oneof the standard angles from the bottom of the form. Negative values are acceptable forboth options. The vertical angle is positive for a point above the active point andnegative for a point below the active point.

393

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Active Direction — The direction is defined by the segment pipe run at the activesegment point.

Up from Slope — The active direction is defined as perpendicular to the slopeddirection and in a generally upward direction. In other words, the vertical angle isincreased by 90 degrees.

Down from Slope — The active direction is defined as perpendicular to the slopeddirection and in a generally downward direction. In other words, the vertical angle isdecreased by 90 degrees.

Invert — The direction is defined by rotating the horizontal and/or vertical anglesabout the active flow centerline.

The Up from Slope and Down from Slope options specify a point thatrepresents the end of a pipe run normal to a sloped pipe run. These options areintended for use when the previous point is a branch point on a sloped piperun.

394

5.View

Window Volume________________

5.1.2 Window Volume

The Window Volume command allows you to define a new window volume by moving aspecified direction and distance from the current window volume.

Commands



Construct Point — Constructs a new active point using multiple inputs. You canmove the point along absolute or delta coordinates. Each input moves the coordinateindicator until you select Accept.


Operating Sequence

1. Select View by selecting one of the screen views from the indicators at the top of theform.

2. Specify Window Volume by specifying the new window view in the selected screenview. The system updates the selected view with the new window volume.

— OR —

Select either the Construct Point or the Distance and Direction option.

Viewing Options

This command provides access to a set of options that allow you to manipulate the modelviews for each screen or window.

395


P&ID Drawing View

The following view commands perform special processing when you select the active P&IDdrawing view or PD_Design view.

Fit View automatically sets the window area to the extent of the P&ID drawing border.

Copy View disables copying the active P&ID drawing view to another model view.However, you can copy another model view to the active P&ID drawing view. Thiscauses the P&ID drawing view to be saved as a named model view, PIDVUE, whichcan be recalled at a later time.

The View Rotation commands preserve the view definition in a saved model view,PIDVUE, when you select the active P&ID drawing view to be rotated. The selectedView Rotation command will then restore that view to the saved model view,MDLVUE, and then rotate that named model view about its origin.

396

5.View

Set View Orientation________________

5.1.2.1 Set View Orientation

The Plan View, Iso View, Looking North, Looking South, Looking East, and LookingWest commands allow you to set the view orientation to one of the standard viewingdirections. You can specify more than one screen with the same view.

The default screen orientations are:

Plan View — Orients a screen to the plan view orientation.

Isometric View — Orients a screen to the isometric viewing direction.

Looking North — Orients a screen view looking north.

Looking South — Orients a screen view looking south.

Looking East — Orients a screen view looking east.

Looking West — Orients a screen view looking west.

397


5.1.2.2 Update Window

The Update View commands updates the screen display for a virtual screen or a specifiedview.

Update Both — Updates both (left and right) virtual screens.

Update Left — Updates the left virtual screen.

Update Right — Updates the right virtual screen.

Update View — Updates the selected window view. The system prompts you to selectthe view to update.

398

5.View

Rotate About View________________

5.1.2.3 Rotate About View

The Rotate About View commands allow you to rotate a view about the selected axis (X, Yor Z). The angle follows the Right Hand Rule with the thumb pointing toward the positiveaxis.

X Axis - Rotates the horizontal axis of a screen view counter-clockwise.

Y Axis - Rotates the vertical axis of a screen view counter-clockwise.

Z Axis - Rotates the X and Y axes of a screen view counter-clockwise.

399


5.1.2.4 Match Planar Element Command

The Match Planar Element command allows you to establish a view normal to a planarelement.

400

5.View

Rotation 3 Points________________

5.1.2.5 Rotation 3 Points

The Rotation 3 Points command allows you to rotate the view orientation so that you arelooking normal to the X and Y planes defined by the three points. The first two data pointsdefine the X axis. The line between the first and third data points define the Y axis.

Operating Sequence

1. Enter first point @x axis origin by placing a data point to define the origin of the Xaxis.

2. Enter second point on x axis by placing a data point to define the positive directionof the X axis.

3. Enter point to define y axis by placing the third data point to define the Y axis. Theviewing plane will be parallel to the plane defined by the three data points.

401


5.1.2.6 Dialog View Rotation

This command activates the MicroStation View Rotation dialog box which can be used tocontrol view rotation.

Commands

Std. — Sets a standard orientation of Top, Bottom, Back, Left, Iso(metric), or RightIso(metric).

View — Sets the view for which rotation is displayed.

Step — Sets the rotation increment in degrees for each click on a "+" or "-" control.

"+" control — Rotates the view in the positive direction by the specified Step amount.

"-" control — Rotates the view in the negative direction by the specified Step amount.

Apply — Applies the displayed rotation to the chosen View.

402

5.View

Color Shading________________

5.1.2.7 Color Shading

The Permanent Color Shading and Color Shading options are used to render the contentsof a screen view. When you select either of the color shading options the system displays alist of render options.

Select the option for the type of rendering to be performed and select the screen view to beprocessed.

For Permanent Color Shading, select a view number from the form (1-8). Theselected view will display with the specified render option until you change it.

For Color Shading, place a data point in the screen view to be updated. The renderedview will revert to wireframe display when it is updated.

403


5.1.3 Render Options

Wiremesh

This option renders the contents of a view(s) as a wiremesh display. Wiremesh display issimilar to the default wireframe display in that all elements are transparent and do not obscureother elements. In a wiremesh display, however, curved surfaces are represented by apolygonal mesh rather than a simple wireframe. This representation can increase the realismof curved surfaces, although it may also increase the amount of clutter as more lines aredisplayed for surfaces that would normally be hidden.

Cross-Section

This option renders the contents of a view as a cross-section. If an auxiliary coordinatesystem (ACS) is active, the cross-section is cut at the X-Y plane of the ACS. Otherwise it iscut at the views active depth (parallel to the view).

Hidden Line

This option renders the contents of a view as a polygon display. In a polygon display, onlyparts of elements that would actually be visible are displayed. Lines hidden behind objectsare removed to create a more realistic representation. MicroStation accomplishes this bydecomposing each element into polygons. Hidden line removal processing is much slowerthan wireframe and wiremesh display, and the processing time is roughly equivalent to theother, more realistic type of rendering.

Filled Hidden Line

This option renders the contents of a view as a filled polygon display. A filled polygondisplay is identical to a polygon display except that the polygons are filled with element color.This creates an interesting cartoon-like effect that may be useful in some circumstances,particularly if the hardware can display only a limited number of colors.

Constant Shading

This option renders the contents of a view as a constant shaded model. In a constant shadedmodel, each element is displayed as one or more polygons filled with a single (constant)color. The color is computed once for each polygon from the element color, materialcharacteristics, and lighting configuration (see 3D concepts in the user’s guide). Curvedsurfaces are decomposed into a mesh of polygons. Each polygon is shaded with a single colorand surfaces appear tiled.

404

5.View

Render Options________________

Smooth Shading

This option renders the contents of a view as a smooth (Gouraud) shaded model. In smoothshaded models, the appearance of curved surfaces is more realistic than in constant shadedmodels because polygon color is computed at polygon boundaries and color is blended acrosspolygon interiors. This gives surfaces a smooth appearance.

Phong Shading

This option renders the contents of a view as a Phong shaded model. This is the most realistictype of rendering supported by MicroStation.

In a Phong shaded model, the color of each pixel is recomputed. Phong shading is useful forproducing high-quality images when speed is not critical and very exact lighting effects aredesired. If light sources are close to the objects being rendered, such as a spotlight shining ona home, Phong shading may be the only way to see the exact location of the light beam.

Large numbers of computations slow display time considerably. In most instances, Phongshaded models are very similar to smooth shaded models and do not justify the increasedprocessing time.

Stereo

This option renders the contents of a view as a 3D image. It creates a stereo pair of imagesand merges the two images into a single image, which you can view by wearing red/blueglasses. Put on the red/blue glasses making sure that the red lens is over the left eye and theblue lens is over the right eye. View the image with your eyes level and square to the screen.

405


5.1.3.1 Camera View

This option activates options used to define the target, position, and clipping planes for a viewcamera.

Camera Setup

This option lets you set the target, position, and clipping planes for a view camera and turn onthe camera for the view. The camera lens is set with the Camera Lens option.

To define the camera target use a data point. The point becomes the focal point (center) of theview. Objects beyond the target point will appear smaller due to the nature of the perspectiveprojection. Objects in front of the target point will appear larger and may be excluded fromthe viewing pyramid.

Place a data point to define the camera position. A dynamic pyramid displays to show theviewing volume with the camera at the pointer location.

Place a data point to define the front clipping plane (display depth). Any elements or portionsof elements in front of this plane are not displayed.

Place a final data point to define the back clipping plane (display depth). Any elements orportions of elements beyond this plane are not displayed, but the view is turned on.

406

5.View

Camera View________________

Camera Position

This option lets you set the position of a view camera without changing the camera target.This is like focusing the camera at an object and moving around to obtain different views ofthe object.

Camera Target

This option lets you set the target of a view camera without changing the camera position.This is like standing in one position and moving the camera to view different targets.

Camera Lens

This option activates the camera lens settings display list. This list lets you set the angles andfocal lengths of view camera lenses.

The camera lens settings displayed are for the view chosen from the view number option.

Angle/Focal Length

The lens angle for the camera of the chosen view can be specified in degrees or as the lensfocal length in millimeters (mm). You can also specify the lens by choosing a standard lensfrom the Standard option menu. The angles and focal lengths of the standard lenses are:

Standard Lens Angle Focal Length (mm)

Fisheye 93.3 20Extra Wide 74.3 28Wide 62.4 35Normal 46.0 50Portrait 28.0 85Telephoto 12.1 200Telescopic 2.4 1000

Camera Off

This option turns the camera view off.

407


5.1.3.2 Views

The Views commands allow you to manipulate views between two specified windows.

Copy View copies a selected view display from one window to another.

Swap View option allows you to change from either the right or left screen display.

View On option activates eight view options which correspond to the window views (1-4) onthe right screen and window views (5-8) on the left screen.

View Off option allows you to select and place a data point in the window view(s) to turnspecified views(s) off.

408

5.View

Level Symbology On________________

5.1.3.3 Level Symbology On

This command provides the option to enable the display of reference models with the activereference model symbology.

409


5.1.3.4 Level Symbology Off

This command provides the option to disable the display of reference models with the activereference model symbology.

410

5.View

Form Left/Right Screen________________

5.1.3.5 Form Left/Right Screen

The Form Right Screen / Form Left Screen toggle sets forms to be automatically displayedon the right (front) screen or the left (back) screen. This option is only relevant for dual-screenconfigurations.

411


5.1.3.6 Set/Do Not Set Display Depth for ReviewCommands

The Set/Do Not Set Display Depth for Review Commands toggle can be used to inhibit thechanging of display depths when using viewing commands.

412

5.View

Review Category________________

5.1.3.7 Review Category

This command allows you to review or modify the displayed category data (segregationparameters) associated with a screen view. You can use the display categories to selectivelysegregate the data for display, manipulation, and plotting purposes.

All the graphics in the model or drawing (both intelligent and MicroStation) are placed on acontrolled set of levels. You can display or not display various categories of graphic data byturning the category level(s) on or off. Each category is associated with a system level andcolor code as defined in the RDB. Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide forinformation on the level and color code assignments.

The displayed categories will differ depending on the setting for color code in the RDB(function of model category or function of fluid code ranges.)

Commands

Review/Revise — Identifies the status (on or off) of the MicroStation levels and thecorresponding model category descriptions for a selected screen view.

Add — Adds a model category or set of categories associated with a specific graphicto one or more screen views.

Remove — Removes model categories for a specified screen view.

Select Model Only/All Piping References — Allows you to define model categoriesfor the active piping model only or for all piping reference models. You can then updatethe category display.

413


5.1.3.7.1 Review/Revise Model Categories

The Review/Revise Model Categories command identifies the status (on or off) of theMicroStation levels and the corresponding model category descriptions for a selected screenview.

Commands


414

5.View

Add Category________________

5.1.3.7.2 Add Category

The Add Category command activates the Model Categories form allowing you to add amodel category or set of categories associated with a specific graphic to one or more screenviews.

The categories associated with a graphic segregation parameter are defined in the RDB.

Commands


415


5.1.3.7.3 Remove Category

The Remove Category command allows you to remove model categories for a specifiedscreen view. The categories associated with the segregation parameters are defined in theRDB.

Commands


416

5.View

View Equipment________________

5.1.3.8 View Equipment

This command modifies a screen view so that a window volume around a selected equipmentitem is displayed. Other equipment items inside that volume will also be displayed.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify a piece of equipment by one of the following methods: Typing the equipmentname (followed by a delimiter (/) and the equipment nozzle name, if desired), snappingto an associated graphic, or boresite locating to a particular piece of equipment. Youcan then press <D> to accept the selected equipment item or press <R> to reject theequipment item and select another equipment item.

2. Select View by pressing <D> in the screen view to display the piece of equipment.The system updates the window area for the identified view to include all the graphicelements which make up the selected equipment group. If you typed a nozzle tag in Step2, the system also highlights the specified nozzle.

417


5.1.3.9 Window to Named Item

This command locates a particular pipeline, piping component, piping specialty, instrument,pipe support, equipment, or nozzle in the active model or an attached reference file. Thesystem updates the screen display for a selected view to center the located element.

This command is useful for reviewing the model display following design verification orreporting.

It is important to understand how this command works with the RestoreModel View command. Since you can use the Window to Named Itemcommand to update multiple views, only the initial view that you select issaved by the system. When the Restore Model View command is activated,the initial saved view is restored.

Any typed alpha character must be capitalized.

Commands

Active Model Only/All Models — Defines that verification is done on only the activemodel or on all attached piping reference models that have been flagged with theLocate On toggle on the Reference Model Attachments form.

Line Number Label — Select this option to specify the line number label of a pipelinein the model or in one of the attached reference models. The system highlights thelocated piping segments. The volume of the model used for the window area will bethe minimum to encompass the piping located by the line number label.

Line ID — Select this option to specify the line ID of a pipeline in the model or in oneof the attached reference models.The system highlights the located piping segments. The volume of the model used forthe window area will be the minimum to encompass the piping located by the line id.

418

5.View

Window to Named Item________________ Piping Component Number — Select this option to specify the tag number of a pipingcomponent / piping specialty. in the model or in one of the attached reference models.

Instrument Component Number — Select this option to specify the tag number of aninstrument in the model or in one of the attached reference models.

Pipe — Select this option to specify the tag number of a pipe in the model or in one ofthe attached reference models.

Pipe Support — Select this option to specify the tag number of a pipe support in themodel or in one of the attached reference models.

Equipment & Nozzle Number — Select this option to specify the nozzle id/equipmentname of an equipment nozzle in an attached equipment model.

Equipment Number — Select this option to specify the equipment name of anequipment item in an attached equipment model.The volume of the model used for the window area will be the minimum to encompassthe equipment group.

Restore View — Select this option to restore the selected view to its original viewingparameters.


This command uses the item number of the component, specialty item, or equipment, or theline id of the pipeline to search the database. You can obtain the item numbers from theassociated design verification or material take-off reports. Refer to the description of theData Verification command for more information.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Item Type by selecting the desired option from the form to indicate the type ofelement to be displayed and type the item number of the element to be displayed. Thesystem searches the database for the specified named item. If the system cannot find thespecified item it displays the message Named Item Not Found.

2. Select View by placing a data point to identify the screen view in which thecomponent, pipeline, or equipment is to be centered. You can select multiple views ifdesired. The system updates the selected view(s) so that the specified element iscentered and highlights the element.

If the resulting window is for the end view of a piping segment, the systemexpands the volume to include the range of one piping or instrumentcomponent associated with that piping segment.

419


5.1.3.10 Saved Model View

The Saved Model View command allows you to create saved views, review and displayexisting saved views or delete existing saved view definitions. A saved view can be used increating drawings, defining a design volume or displaying a defined volume within the model.

The Saved Model View form lists all the saved view definitions for the active model. The listincludes the model view name (short description) and the model view description (longdescription).

Using this command with the active P&ID drawing view causes that view to be saved as viewPIDVUE. This special saved view name will not appear in the list of saved views.

The character C is a system reserved character and cannot be used as a savedview name.

Commands

Create Saved View — Creates a saved view using the active screen displays. If nosaved views have been defined for the active model, this is the active option.

Show Saved View — Displays a specified saved view.

Delete Saved View — Removes a specified saved view definition.

420

5.View

View, More Commands________________

5.2 View, More Commands


Commands

Update Left — Updates the screen display for the left virtual screen.

Update Right — Updates the screen display for the right virtual screen.

Update All — Updates the screen display for both left and right virtual screens.

Update View — Updates the screen display for the selected window view.

Align View — Aligns two views so that they display the same volume.

Copy View — Copies one view to another view.

View On — Turns on selected screen views.

View Off — Turns off selected screen views.

View Toggle — Turns On or Off the display of any of the eight screen views.

Move Up — Moves you (pans) up in the selected view.

Move Down — Moves you (pans) down in the selected view.

421

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Move Left — Moves you (pans) left in the selected view.

Move Right — Moves you (pans) right in the selected view.

Level Symbology On — Displays reference models with the active reference modelsymbology.

Level Symbology Off — Disables the displays reference models with the activereference model symbology.

Weight Display Toggle — Toggles the line weight in the selected view to 0 or to theweight of the graphic symbology of the graphics within the view.

Grid On/Off — Toggles the grid on and off in the selected view.

422

5.View

Viewing Direction________________

5.3 Viewing Direction


Commands

Plan View — Orients a screen view to the plan view orientation (Top).

Iso View — Orients a screen view to the isometric viewing direction.

South Elevation — Orients a screen view looking south.

North Elevation — Orients a screen view looking north.

West Elevation — Orients a screen view looking west.

East Elevation — Orients a screen view looking east.

Rotate View - Element — Rotates a view to align it with an existing planar element.

Rotate View - Absolute — Rotates a view to a specific orientation.

Rotate View - Relative — Rotates a view counterclockwise about its center.

Rotate about Z Axis — Rotates view about the Z axis.

Rotate about X Axis — Rotates view about the X axis.

Rotate about Y Axis — Rotates view about the Y axis.

Rotate View by 3 Points — Rotates a view as specified by data points.

423

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Match Planar Element — Rotates a view to align it with an existing planar element.

Dialog View Rotation — Activates the MicroStation View Rotation dialog box.

424

5.View

View Depth________________

5.4 View Depth


Commands

Set Active Depth — Sets the active depth; type the working unit value (relative to thecurrent active depth) of displacement.

Set Display Depth — Specifies the front and back of a range in a 3D view to bedisplayed along the Z axis.

Set Active Depth - Absolute — Sets the active depth along the Z axis for a specifiedview.

Set Display Depth - Absolute — Sets the display depth for a view. Specify the frontand back values which are the distances along the view Z axis from the global origin tothe front and back planes of the desired view cube.

Set Active Depth - Relative — Sets the display depth for the active view, where depthis the distance, in working units, to move the active depth along the Z axis.

Set Display Depth - Relative — Sets the display depth for a view. Specify the frontand back values which are the relative distance along the view Z axis from the front andback planes of the existing view cube to the front and back planes of the desired viewcube.

Show Active Depth — Displays the active depth for a specified view.

Show Display Depth — Shows the display depth for a specified view.

425


426

6.File

File Manipulation Commands________________

6. File Manipulation Commands

These commands provide file manipulations. These commands allow you to plot and diagnoseproblems in design files. They also allow you to define the active options for the file and whatreference models are attached and displayed.

Commands

File Options — Allows you to to plot and diagnose problems in design files.

Print — Print, is available only on Windows NT. If you are running PDS onMicroStation version 5.0, the Print command provides access to the MicroStationPrint command. If you are running PDS on MicroStation 95, the Print commandprovides access to the MicroStation Plot command.

Compress Design — Compresses the design file.

Exit — Exits the design file.

427


6.1 File Commands

These commands allow you to plot and diagnose problems in design files. They also allowyou to define the active options for the file and what reference models are attached anddisplayed.

Commands

Plot Model — Plots the active model.

File Design — Saves the active MicroStation and PDS parameters.

Exit — Exits the graphics environment and saves all changes to the design file.

Active Options — Sets the options for working in Piping Design.

Data Verification and Diagnostics — Provides access to a set of utilities used toverify the integrity of the model file.

Reference Model — Provides a set of options for controlling reference fileattachments.

Switch to Equipment — This command allows you to switch from the PD_Designapplication to the PD_Eqp application so you can modify equipment models in theactive project.

428

6.File

Plot Model________________

6.1.1 Plot Model

The Plot Model option allows you to plot the active model from the graphics environment.This command uses the reference model specifications made with the Reference Modelcommand to define which reference models are included in the plot.

Commands

Fence — Allows you to specify a section of the model to plot by fencing it.

View — Allows you to specify the view of the model to plot.

Saved View — Provides a display list of saved model views from which to select.

Volume — Allows you to specify the coordinates of the volume to plot.

No Rotation/Rotate 90 Degrees — Allows you to rotate the plot 90 degrees withrespect to the paper.

Submit Immediately/Submission is Delayed — Allows you to submit the plotimmediately or delay job submission to batch.

Field Descriptions

I/Plot Parameter Files: — Displays the available I/Plot parameter files. If you do notselect a file, the system uses the default file.

Queues: — Displays the available queues listed in the queue_descript file in the projectdirectory. This command uses the same plot queues as PD_Draw. You do not have tohave PD_Draw loaded. If it is not, the system creates the queue during installation ofPD_Design, but you must still create pipe queues from each workstation to the plotserver.

429


See the Queue Setup section in the first chapter of the Drawing ManagerUser’s Guide for more information.

Scales — Allows you to select a plot scale. These scales are defined in the StandardNote Library. m’ m"=n’ n" where m is the scale on the plot and n is the scale on themodel. For example, 1/4"=1’ indicates that 1/4 inch on the plot represents 1 foot in themodel.

If you select a scale that would result in the plot being larger than the size of theselected plotter’s paper and if the selected queue is local so that the size verification isaccessible, an error message is displayed and you must either select a smaller scale, re-define the volume to be plotted, or select a larger plotter.

430

6.File

File Design________________

6.1.2 File Design

The File Design command allows you to save the active parameters defined in the currentdesign session. This command saves:

MicroStation parameters such as active views and active display volumes

PDS parameters such as active segment parameters. It also saves the screen location ofthe Piping Designer base form.

The PDS parameters are defined in a set of Type 63 elements for the model.

431


6.1.3 Exit

The Exit command is used to exit graphics and save all changes to the design file. Exiting adesign file does NOT save the active parameters set in the file. To save the active parameters,you must use the File Design command (described above).

Select the Exit command to exit a design file and save the changes.

432

6.File

Active Options________________

6.1.4 Active Options

This command is used to set the options for working in the piping model. It activates theActive Options form used to specify or change the settings. You can access this command atany time while working in the model.

The default options are defined in the seed data for the piping models. You can save theactive options (as the new default) by selecting the File Design command.

Commands

NPD System of Units English — Toggles the system of units for nominal pipingdiameter between English and Metric units.These settings only affect the NPD units and not the model units.

Default Commodity Selection/Automated Commodity Options — Determines themethod for selecting commodity items for placement when you select a commodityitem from one of the Place Component forms. When the toggle is set to DefaultCommodity Selection, the system automatically selects the default choice for theselected commodity. When the toggle is set to Automated Commodity Options, thesystem displays a list of choices from which you can select.

— The Default Commodity Selection option selects the commodity item with optioncode 1 for placement.

— The Automated Commodity Options option activates the List of CommodityOptions form which displays all the optional and default components. This allowsyou to view all possible selections for a selected component.

433

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ For flanges when the Automated Commodity Options option is active and one ofthe following situations occurs, the system displays the optional and defaultcomponents.

–If the flange being selected is to be connected to a thru-bolted end (without boltholes), if another component does not exist at the other end of the thru-boltedcomponent.

–The flange is not being placed by the bolted end or the flange is not beingconnected to previously placed piping, the list of flange options is presentlydisplayed.

Commodity Material Description Display — Turns on/off the short materialdescription from the Material Description Library. When the setting is turned on, theshort material description is used:

— after accessing the PJS in Place Component

–when reviewing the commodity item data in the Commodity Options tutorial

–when reviewing the commodity item data in the Commodity Override tutorial

— when reviewing the commodity item data with the Review Piping Job Speccommand

— in reviewing the commodity item data for a component with the Review/ReviseAttributes command.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for more information on shortmaterial descriptions and the Material Description Library.

Specialty Material Description Display — Turns on/off the display of specialtydescriptions from the Specialty Material Description Library. When the setting isturned on, the specialty material description is used for piping specialties or instrumentsthat have been defined in the Reference Database for the following items during thePlace Component command:

–specific and typical piping specialties from list

–specific and typical instruments from list

Component Group — Specifies whether a set of components previously defined as acomponent group is treated as a group (Locked) or as individual components (NotLocked). This is a temporary setting. The setting is returned to the default setting ofNot Locked when you exit the design session unless you use the File Design optionwhile the setting is set to Locked.

Component Group specifies a group of components with the samecommodity code, for example a length of pipe, a pipe bend, and anotherlength of pipe. With these items associated as a component group, theMaterial Takeoff will report the items with the same commodity code asone length of pipe, rather than a pipe, a pipe bend, and another pipe. If

434

6.File

Active Options________________ there are items within a Locked component group that have differentcommodity codes, these items will not be reported in the MTO.

Example: 5 feet of pipe, an elbow, and another 5 feet of pipe associatedas a Locked component group will report as 10 feet of pipe. 5 feet ofpipe, a pipe bend component containing 2 feet of pipe, and another 5 feetof pipe associated as a Locked component group will report as 12 feet ofpipe, if the pipe bend has the same commodity code as the pipe.

Default Model Symbology — Toggles between setting the symbology to the defaultor detailed. These options use different Eden modules to place the components in themodel.

— The Detailed option places detailed graphics and uses the detailed Eden modules forplacement.

— The Default option places default graphics and uses the default Eden modules forplacement.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide and the PDS Eden InterfaceReference Guide for more information on Eden modules.

Connect Points — Identifies the nearest connect point or perform a sequential pointsearch of existing components.

— The All Connect Points option locates the connect points in sequence (CP1, CP2,etc.). You can press <R> to move to the next connect point, then press <D> toaccept the location.

— The Nearest Connect Point option locates the connect point closest to the cursorposition when you press <D>.

The locate options are used in conjunction with commands locating the connect point ofa component, such as Connect to Design.

Place Insulation Graphics — Allows you to control the display of insulation graphicsin a model.

The Insulation Graphics will only display if there is an InterferenceEden module created with the Piping Eden global variable insulationincorporated.

By using the Review Categories command, you can control the displayof the insulation category on a view-by-view basis. See ReviewCategory, page 413 for more information.

Plant Design Coordinate System — Allows you to work in the Plant coordinatesystem as defined in the Project Data Manager forms. The Plant coordinate system iscommon to all the models and drawings in a project. The system uses this globalcoordinate system to maintain the relationships among the various models comprising aplant. This is important when attaching reference models to the active model.

435

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Design Volume Coordinate System — Allows you to work in the Design Volumecoordinate system as defined in the Project Data Manager forms. The Design Volumecoordinate system also allows you to define a local coordinate system for a particularmodel.

Form Right Screen/Form Left Screen — Sets forms to be automatically displayed onthe right (front) screen or the left (back) screen. This option is only relevant for dual-screen configurations.

436

6.File

Data Verification and Diagnostics________________

6.1.5 Data Verification and Diagnostics

The Data Verification and Diagnostics command provides access to a set of utilities used toverify the integrity of the model file. This form also displays the Piping Design ProductCreation Date and software version.

Commands

Measure Distance — Measures perpendicular and absolute distance between twospecified points.

Measure Angle — Measures user specified angles.

Highlight Piping on Segment — Highlights all of the piping linked to a specifiedsegment.

Update Associativity to Segment — Updates the informational linkages which link apiping component to a piping segment.

Associate Segment with Nozzle — Establishes a linkage for a segment end which isgraphically connected to an equipment nozzle.

Review Attribute Linkage — Displays all the linkages for a specified pipingcomponent or piping segment.

Repair Graphic Linkage to Database — Corrects graphics in the model that have alinkage to a row that does not exist in the appropriate table of the design database.

Find Segment or Component by Linkage — Locates a piping component orsegment given its linkage.

437

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Verify Data Integrity of Model — Checks for piping segment overlaps, gaps in

piping components, and the existence of corresponding line routes for all InformationalLinkages.

Verify Nozzle at Pipeline End — Checks for linkage between the segment endpointand an equipment nozzle.

P&ID Data Comparison Options — Specifies the data comparison option forcomparing piping segments in the model with segments in the P&ID.

Re-Associate Model with P&ID Database — Updates the P&ID node numbers inthe piping model on the basis of the unique index (occurrence number) to the P&IDsegment table in the P&ID database.

Compare Segment Data — Compares the segment data of two connected segments.

Review Coordinates (IGDS) — Allows you to review the IGDS coordinates of apiping component or segment.

Review Piping Job Specification — Displays data in the Piping Job Specificationdatabase, including the associated tables and the piping commodity data, for any PipingMaterial Class.

Review Component Placement — Displays component placement data for the lastcomponent placed in the model during the active design session.

Review RDB Management Data — Displays the RDB files being used by the activemodel.

Review COG and Weights — Displays the weights of a component and itscorresponding center of gravity.

Verify Branch Reinforcement — Reports the calculated reinforcing pad width insituations where the reinforcement is inadequate.

Verify Wall Thickness Calculations — Displays the schedule/thickness values for aselected component.

438

6.File

Measure Distance________________

6.1.5.1 Measure Distance

The Measure Distance command allows you to measure distances between connect points,line route segments, nozzles, equipment, etc. When the form is displayed, the systemautomatically displays the absolute distance on each of the orthogonal plane display fields.

The measurements are not updated until a new measurement point is identified. Eachmeasurement is independent of any previous measurement; measurements are not cumulative.

Commands

Keypoint Snap — Sets keypoint snap on during the operation of this command.

Project Snap — Sets project snap on during the operation of this command.

Reference Point — Changes the current reference point by one of the followingmethods.

— Placing a data point to locate a component connect point or center.

— Snapping to a connect point or line route segment.

The system retains the active reference point for future use by this command.

439


6.1.5.2 Measure Angle

The Measure Angle command measures user specified angles by piping component, threedata points or two linear graphic elements (sharing a common vertex).

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Piping option and identify the piping components or segments that form theangle.

2. Select the Three Points option and identify point A, B and C with point B as thevertex.

3. Select the Two Lines option and identify lines A and B. The two lines must share acommon vertex.

440

6.File

Highlight Piping on Segment________________

6.1.5.3 Highlight Piping on Segment

The Highlight Piping on Segment highlights all the piping linked to a specified pipingsegment. This provides a quick way of determining if all piping is linked to a particularpiping segment.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Segment by snapping to a segment end or vertex on the piping segment.

— OR —

Place a data point to locate a component connect point or pipe on the piping segment.Then press <D> to accept the identified point or press <R> to reject the point.

2. Identify next Segment or select another option from the form.

441


6.1.5.4 Repair Associativity to Segment

The Repair Associativity to Segment command allows you to update/repair theinformational linkages which link piping items to piping segments. This should only benecessary if the segment has inadvertently been deleted and replaced.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Component or Pipe by placing a data point to locate a component connectpoint or pipe end.

2. Accept/Reject by pressing <D> to accept the identified component or pipe or press<R> to reject the point and identify another component.

3. Identify Segment by snapping to an end point or vertex on the piping segment.

442

6.File

Repair Associativity with Nozzle________________

6.1.5.5 Repair Associativity with Nozzle

The Repair Associativity with Nozzle command allows you to associate a segment with anozzle by defining the segment nozzle_pointer attribute at the specified segment end point.


A segment must exist in either the active model or an attached reference file. If thesegment exists in a reference file, the corresponding snap lock must be enabled.

A nozzle must exist within the project at the location of the segment end.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline End Point by snapping to the endpoint of the pipeline or place a datapoint to locate a component at the segment end.

2. Specify Nozzle by placing a data point to locate the nozzle datum point or type theequipment name/nozzle id to identify the nozzle. If the segment data differs, the systemactivates the Piping and Nozzle Data form.

443


6.1.5.6 Review Attribute Linkage

The Review Attribute Linkage command allows you to sequentially display all the databaselinkages for an identified piping item or piping segment.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Element by snapping to an end point or vertex on a piping segment.

— OR —

Place a data point to identify the component center or pipe. The system displays thefirst set of linkages in the form message area.

2. Accept for First Segment Linkage by selecting Confirm to accept the displayedinformation.

444

6.File

Repair Graphics Linkage to Database________________

6.1.5.7 Repair Graphics Linkage to Database

This option provides alternatives for correcting the situation where graphics in the model havea linkage to a row that does not exist in the appropriate table of the Piping Design Database.

You can select from the following options.

If the piping segment is associated with one or more components, the system promptsyou to identify another piping segment in the model to be used as the source of data forcreating a new database record for that piping segment.

The system creates a new row in the Piping Segment Data Table and updates the pipingsegment’s linkage to that new row. The system also updates the associativity for theapplicable components to that piping segment.

If the piping segment is not associated with any components, you can either create anew database record or delete the piping segment’s graphics from the model.

Operating Sequence

1. Snap to Piping to be Repaired. For piping components, pipes, instrumentcomponents, and pipe supports, snap to any part of the component’s graphics. (A databutton search will not function because the database record does not exist.)

2. For piping segments, snap to a point on the segment.

445


6.1.5.8 Find Segment or Component by Linkage

The Find Segment or Component by Linkage allows you to locate a piping segment orcomponent by the attribute linkage.


A database row number which belongs to a piping item or segment in the active modelmust be known. You can locate the row and number using the Review AttributeLinkage command.

Operating Sequence

1. Input Row Number of the table row as found in the database. You can locate the rowand number using the Review Attribute Linkage command.

2. Accept to Find Piping by selecting Confirm to accept the input row number.

446

6.File

Verify Data Integrity of Model________________

6.1.5.9 Verify Data Integrity of Model

The Verify Data Integrity of Model command allows you to check pipelines or the activemodel with or without piping reference models for inconsistent and illegal data structures, andfor gaps between piping items.

Including piping reference models is useful for verifying connectivity for MTO reports whichinclude implied data or for creating isometric drawings where the line crosses multiplemodels.

As the system processes the specified volume it displays one or more of the followingmessages indicating the status of the verification.

Number of Overlaps Is:Number of Invalid Elements Is:Number of Gaps Is:

The system places a diagnostics marker at the location of each inconsistent item.

You can remove the diagnostic markers by selecting the Delete Markersoption and then selecting Confirm.


In order to include piping reference models in the verification, you must do the followingitems:

Set the toggle for each piping reference model to Locate On on the Reference ModelAttachments form. You can specify Locate On for all attached piping referencemodels at one time by selecting the Apply to Discipline option along with setting thetoggle to Locate On.

Set the toggle to All Models on the Verify Data Integrity of Model form.

When the reference models are included for both the Pipeline and Model option, the systemverifies the data on the pipeline until the end is reached or an overlap situation is detected.

The system places a diagnostic marker in the active model file for each inconsistency which isdetected.

It places an O at the location where two piping segments overlap.

It places a G at the location where a gap is detected or where the linkage of a pipingitem does not match the linkage of the piping segment which underlies the item.

It places a L at the location where an invalid database linkage is detected.

447

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Some problems may be hidden by other problems during the verification process. You shouldalways re-verify data after you have corrected reported problems.

Zero-length piping segments are reported as invalid elements. This includes any pipingsegment that is associated with a tap to which no piping is connected independent of thelength of that piping segment.

Verification ensures that pipe supports are logically connected to the associated pipingsegment centerline.

Commands

Pipeline — Verify the specified items on a specific pipeline in the active model.

Model — Verify the specified items on the active model.

Verify Graphics and Linkages, Check Gaps — Verifies that the linkage of pipingitems matches the linkage of the piping segments to which it belongs, checks for validdatabase linkages, and checks for gaps on populated pipelines.

Verify Graphics and Linkages — Verifies that the linkage of piping items matchesthe linkage of the piping segments to which it belongs and checks for valid databaselinkages.

Validate Graphics — Verifies that the linkage of piping items matches the linkage ofthe piping segments to which it belongs.

Active Model Only/All Models — Defines that verification is done on only the activemodel or on all attached piping reference models that have been flagged with theLocate On toggle on the Reference Model Attachments form.

448

6.File

Verify Data Integrity of Model________________ Delete Markers — Deletes all markers found during the verification process.

Review Markers — Displays the markers found during the verification process.


The pipeline to be checked should be populated with components and pipes. TheCheck Gaps option assumes that all the piping segments for the pipeline or model havebeen populated with piping items.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Pipeline by placing a data point to locate a component connect point or pipeend on the pipeline. The system displays the line number label of the specified pipingsegment.

2. Select Other Option or Exit by selecting one of the verification options:

Verify Graphics and Linkages, Check Gaps (Default)Verify Graphics and LinkagesValidate Graphics

3. Accept or Select Other Option by selecting Confirm to begin processing thespecified verification.

449


6.1.5.10 Verify Data Integrity of Model Example

Check a pipeline for gaps, overlaps, and database linkage problems.

1. Select Pipeline.

2. Select Validate Graphics, Linkages, Check for Gaps.

3. Identify the pipeline.

4. Select Confirm to accept the form.

The system processes the pipeline. Once the system completes processing, it tallies upthe overlaps, invalid element, and gaps.

5. The system places red G’s, O’s, and L’s where a problem occurred.

This problem is caused by two components (or segment) overlapping each other.

The solution is usually finding out the amount of overlap in inches.

The use the correct command to move the amount of overlap.

450

6.File

Verify Data Integrity of Model Example________________ Sometimes this condition requires you to delete the components and replace themmanually.

This problem is caused by the component and segment not being linked in the database.

The solution is to use the Update Associativity to Segment option in the Diagnosticsform.

Sometimes this condition requires you to delete the components and replace themmanually.

This problem is caused by two components not connecting to each other, but with apiping segment connecting.

The solution is usually finding out the amount of the gap in inches then, using thecorrect command, move the amount of the gap.

Sometimes this condition requires you to delete the components and replace themmanually.

451


6.1.5.11 Verify Nozzle at Pipeline End

The Verify Nozzle At Pipeline End option allows you to verify the existence of a nozzleconnection at the end of specified pipeline.

If the endpoint is not connected to a nozzle, the system displays the message: NotConnected to Nozzle.

If the endpoint is connected to a nozzle and both elements have the same attribute, the systemdisplays the Equipment Name/ Nozzle ID and the message: Nozzle Data Compares withSegment Data.

If the endpoint is connected to a nozzle and the data differs, the system activates theComparison Of Nozzle And Piping Segment Data form which displays both the segmentdata and the nozzle data.


A pipeline must exist in either the active model or an attached reference model. If the pipelineexists in a reference model, make sure the reference file snap lock is enabled. For moreinformation refer to the Reference Model command.

452

6.File

P&ID Data Comparison Options________________

6.1.5.12 P&ID Data Comparison Options

This command specifies the options for comparing piping segments data in the model with theP&ID. The purpose of this rules-based command is to automatically mark piping segmentscorresponding to vents, drains, and off-line instrument connections to be ignored in P&IDdata comparisons. You have two options with this command.

The limit for the maximum number of vent/drain valves and instrumentconnections that can be processed in one piping model is 200 for each(expanded from 100).

Commands

Comparison Mode for Piping Segment — Marks a piping segment to have segmentdata comparisons inhibited (or enabled) in the P&ID Data Comparison Report. Usingthis option, you do not have to report extraneous piping segments which do not exist inthe P&ID Database and which have not been assigned P&ID node numbers in thepiping model (segment data has not been transferred from the P&ID database).

Mark Vents, Drains, and Instrument Connections — This is a rules-based commandfor the purpose of automatically marking piping segments corresponding to vents,drains, and off-line instrument connections for being optionally ignored in P&ID datacomparisons. Using this option, you do not have to report extraneous piping segmentswhich may not exist in the P&ID Database and usually are not assigned P&ID nodenumbers in the piping model. These piping segments representing vents, drains, andoff-line instrument connections are marked in the user data of the piping segment. Suchdesignations will only have an impact, if you choose to exclude these piping segmentsfrom the P&ID Data Comparison Report.

Refer to the discussion of P&ID Data Comparison in the section on P&ID DataTransfer for more information on the effects of these options.

453

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Review Inhibited Segments — Highlights the segments which have been inhibitedfrom P&ID data transfer. The system displays the message Forming List of PipingSegments. Then it highlights the first inhibited segment and activates the followingoptions at the bottom of the form.

You can select one of the view numbers to determine the view used to display theinhibited segments. Select the arrows to scroll through the inhibited segments.

Review Vents and Drains — Highlights the vents, drains, and instrument connectionswhich have been marked for exclusion from P&ID data transfer. You can select one ofthe view numbers to determine the view used to display marked items. Select thearrows to scroll through the marked items.

Inhibit — Excludes specified segments from comparison.

Enable — Enables comparisons for a segment which was previously excluded. Thedefault mode for all piping segments created in the model is to have P&ID datacomparisons enabled. Therefore, you only need to enable P&ID data comparisons, ifyou had previously (and inadvertently) designated that P&ID data comparisons beinhibited for a particular piping segment.

454

6.File

Re-Associate Model with P&ID Database________________

6.1.5.13 Re-Associate Model with P&ID Database

This command updates the P&ID node numbers in the piping model on the basis of theunique index (occurrence number) to the P&ID segment table in the P&ID Database. P&IDnode numbers can be changed by the P&ID propagation process for a specific segment in theP&ID Database as a result of changes to the P&ID drawing. P&ID node numbers enable thecorrelation of flow direction between the piping model and the P&ID Database.

You can check the correctness of the association between the segments in the piping modeland those in the P&ID Database by reviewing the following drawings.

P&ID drawings plotted with the node numbers displayed

Piping isometric drawings which have been created for checking purposes with P&IDnode numbers displayed for each piping segment

455


6.1.5.14 Compare Segment Data

This command compares the segment data between two identified piping segments. This canbe used to verify that all the segments on a specified pipeline have the same segment data.

The system reports discrepancies in the piping segment data loaded in the relational databaseand the following piping segment data in the model:

flow direction

piping/tubing option


requirements to reconstruct

pipe run offset data for reconstruction

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Segment ’A’ by snapping to a point on the first piping segment to becompared.

2. Identify Segment ’B’ by snapping to a point on the second piping segment to becompared.

3. Accept Previous Segment ’A’ or Identify Segment ’A’. Select Confirm to acceptthe highlighted segment A or snap to a point on another segment.

4. Accept Previous Segment ’B’ or Identify Segment ’B’. Select Confirm to acceptthe highlighted segment B or snap to a point on another segment.

456

6.File

Review Coordinates (IGDS)________________

6.1.5.15 Review Coordinates (IGDS)

The Review Coordinates (IGDS) command allows you to identify an element and review itscurrent coordinates in the design file.

The coordinates shown are neither PDS Plant Coordinates nor Design VolumeCoordinates. IGDS coordinates are the positional units (PU) within theMicroStation 32 design file.

457


6.1.5.16 Review Piping Job Specification

The Review Piping Job Specification command allows you to review the database tables forthe attached Piping Job specification database. See to the Reference Data Manager ReferenceGuide for a detailed description of the PJS.

Commands

Piping Materials Class Data — Reviews the attribute information for the activePiping Materials Class.

Piping Commodity Data — Reviews the commodity items in the active PipingMaterials Class.

Tap Properties — Reviews Tap Properties table for the active Piping Materials Class.

Piping Job Spec Tables — Review tables for the active PJS such as the BendDeflection table and Commodity Item Name table.

Piping Materials Class List — Reviews the piping material classes available in thePiping Job Specification database.

Piping Specialty Data — Reviews the piping specialty items available in the PipingJob Specification database.

Instrument Data — Reviews the instruments available in the Piping JobSpecification database.

Piping Materials Class Data–Review Piping Notes — Reviews the piping notes(standard note type 499) for piping material class data. When you select this option, thesystem displays a dialog box with the text for the piping notes. The dialog boxdisappears automatically with your next input.

458

6.File

Review Piping Job Specification________________ Piping Commodity Data–Review Piping Notes Reviews the piping notes (standardnote type 499) for piping commodity data. When you select this option, the systemdisplays a dialog box with the text for the piping notes. The dialog box disappearsautomatically with your next input.

Piping Specialty Data–Review Piping Notes Reviews the piping notes (standard notetype 499) for piping specialty data. When you select this option, the system displays adialog box with the text for the piping notes. The dialog box disappears automaticallywith your next input.

Instrument Data–Review Piping Notes Reviews the piping notes (standard note type499) for instrument data. When you select this option, the system displays a dialog boxwith the text for the piping notes. The dialog box disappears automatically with yournext input.


The Piping Job Specification database must already be defined.

The Active Piping Materials Class options reflect the setting for Piping Materials Class inthe active segment data.

459


6.1.5.17 Piping Materials Class Data

This option reviews the attribute data for the active piping material class. It displays the dataalphanumerically by piping materials class. You can scroll through the displayed data.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for a detailed description of the PipingMaterials Class database table.

460

6.File

Piping Commodity Data________________

6.1.5.18 Piping Commodity Data

This option reviews the commodity items in the active Piping Material Class available in thePJS. It displays the data alphanumerically by commodity name, green NPD value, red NPDvalue, and option code. You can scroll through the data sequentially or search for a specificentry. You can also select an individual entry to review the attributes defined in theCommodity Item entity for that particular item.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for a detailed description of thedatabase attributes. The system displays the maximum temperature with the system units, asdefined in the Type 63 data for the active model.

The system only displays the commodity items in the active Piping MaterialClass. To review the commodity items for another PMC, you must redefinethe active Piping Materials Class.

Commands

Search for Commodity Name — Searches for a specified commodity item such as6Q1C01 for a gate valve. The system searches for the specified entry and scrolls thedisplay to the located commodity item.

Search for Commodity Model Code — Searches for a specified commodity item bynew item name (such as GAT for a gate valve). The system searches for the specifiedentry and scrolls the display to the located item.

461


6.1.5.19 Tap Properties

This option reviews the Tap Properties table for the active piping material class. It displaysthe data alphanumerically by tap NPD value and option code. You can scroll through thedisplayed data.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for a detailed description of the TapProperties database table.

The system only displays the Tap Properties table for the active PipingMaterial Class. To review the tables for another PMC, you must redefine theactive Piping Materials Class.

462

6.File

Piping Job Spec Tables________________

6.1.5.20 Piping Job Spec Tables

This option reviews tables in the Spec Table Library including the Bend Deflection, PipeLength, Pipe Run Length, and Commodity Item Name tables.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for a detailed description of the SpecTables.

463


6.1.5.21 Piping Materials Class List

This option reviews the piping material classes available in the PJS. You can scroll throughthe data sequentially or search for a specific entry. You can also select an individual entry toreview the attributes defined in the Piping Material Class entity for that particular PMC.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for a detailed description of the PipingMaterials Class database table.

Commands

Search for Piping Materials Class — Searches for a specified PMC. The systemsearches for the specified entry and scrolls the display to the located class.

Search for Materials of Construction — Searches for a specified materials ofconstruction class. The system searches for the specified entry and scrolls the display tothe located class.

464

6.File

Piping Specialty Data________________

6.1.5.22 Piping Specialty Data

This option reviews the piping specialty items available in the piping job specificationdatabase. It displays the data alphanumerically by component number and model code. Youcan scroll through the data sequentially or search for a specific entry. You can also select anindividual entry to review the attributes defined in the PJS for that particular item.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for a detailed description of thedatabase attributes.

Commands

Search for Specialty Tag Number — Searches for a specified piping specialty. Thesystem searches for the specified entry and scrolls the display to the located item.

Search for Specialty Model Code — Searches for a specified specialty item number.The system searches for the specified entry and scrolls the display to the located item.

465


6.1.5.23 Instrument Data

This option reviews the instruments available in the Piping Job Specification database. Itdisplays the data alphanumerically by component number and model code. You can scrollthrough the data sequentially or search for a specific entry. You can also select an individualentry to review the attributes defined in the Instruments database table for that particular item.

Refer to the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for a detailed description of thedatabase attributes.

Commands

Search for Specialty Tag Number — Searches for a specified instrument name. Thesystem searches for the specified entry and scrolls the displays to the located item.

Search for Specialty Model Code — Searches for a specified instrument model code.The system searches for the specified entry and scrolls the display to the located item.

466

6.File

Review Component Placement________________

6.1.5.24 Review Component Placement

This command activates the Place Component Error Data form which reviews the physicaldata libraries and EDEN modules that were accessed in the last component placementoperation. This command will only function if a component has been placed in the currentdesign session.

The form displays the name of the Graphic Commodity Library and the name of the PhysicalData Commodity Library used during component placement. This information is followed bya listing of the the EDEN modules that were accessed. Indented lines indicate a modulewhich was called from another module. The system places an asterisk (*) beside the modulename where EDEN stopped executing.

This command is useful for debugging EDEN modules or for reviewing the table data whichwas accessed to place a component.


This command reflects data from the last component placement operation. If no componentwas placed in the current design session no information will be reported.

Commands

Table List — Activates a form which lists the tables referenced in the symbolplacement.

Component Data — Activates a form which displays the component data used toplace (or attempt to place) the component.

467


6.1.5.25 Table List

This option activates the Tables Referenced in the Symbol form to display the tablesaccessed by the last component placed. You can review the input and output data for aselected table or display the contents of the entire table.

Commands

Display Table — Select a table from the form. Then select the Display Table optionto display the contents of the table.

468

6.File

Table List________________ Error Display This option reactivates the Place Component Error Data form.

Component Data This option activates the Component Data form.

469


6.1.5.26 Component Data

This option activates the Component Data form which displays the data used to place thecomponent.

470

6.File

Review Component Placement Example________________

6.1.5.27 Review Component Placement Example

Review the tables required to place the last component.

— Either —

You receive this message if you have not placed any components in this current designsession.

— OR —

471

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ The system displays a listing of the component name and the tables required forplacement of that component.

1. Select Table List.

2. Select FWN_35_20_300_300_A from the list.

472

6.File

Review Component Placement Example________________

3. Select Display Table.

4. Select Component Data.

The system displays the information.

473


6.1.5.28 Review RDB Management Data

This option reviews the location and filenames for Reference Database Files, graphiccommodity data, dimension tables, and spec tables. Refer to the Reference Data ManagerReference Guide for a detailed description of these files and for information on changing anyof the files.

Reference Database Files

Material/Specification Reference Database — Identifies the Piping ReferenceDatabase for the project.

Piping Job Specification Table Library — Identifies the location of the Spec Tablelibrary (us_pjstb.l).

Short Material Description Library — Identifies the library which contains the shortbill-of-material description for all piping commodity items and the BOM descriptionaddenda for taps (us_shbom.l).

Long Material Description Library — Identifies the library which contains the longBOM description for all piping commodity items (us_lgbom.l). The long BOMdescription is only used for requisitions.

Specialty Material Description Library — Identifies the library which contains theBOM description for engineered items, in-line instruments, and pipe supports(us_spbom.l).

Standard Note Library — Identifies the location of the standard note library(std_note.l).

474

6.File

Review RDB Management Data________________ Label Description Library — Identifies the location for the label description library(labels.l).

Piping Assembly Library — Identifies the location for the Piping Assembly library.This library contains the symbol definitions for assemblies. (assembly.l)

Graphic Commodity Library — Identifies the library which contains the Edenmodules used to place components in the model. (pip_gcom.l)

Physical Data Library — These fields identify the library files which contain thephysical data tables for a range of geometric industry standards. (us_pcdim.l)

Commodity Synonym Library — Identifies the user-defined library which containsthe map for translating the piping commodity names used in the P&ID task to thosespecified in the Piping Job Specification.

475


6.1.5.29 Review COG and Weights

This command reviews the weight values (dry weight, water weight, and operator weight) fora specified component and its corresponding center of gravity.

476

6.File

Verify Branch Reinforcement________________

6.1.5.30 Verify Branch Reinforcement

The Verify Branch Reinforcement command allows you to check the calculated reinforcingpad width in situations where the reinforcement is inadequate.

The system determines the branch reinforcement type (reinforcing pad or reinforcing weld)and the branch selection mode (by system or by user) automatically based on the branchcomponent’s commodity name and its option code.

Commands

Connect to Branch Point — Place a data point to locate the branch reinforcementcomponent.

Reinforcing Pad by Branch Table Reinforcing Weld by Branch Table — Thesystem searches the Piping Job Specification for an RPAD or RWELD using the activesegment parameters. Then it looks in the defined branch table. If the branchreinforcement data is adequate, the system displays the data in the form.

477


Reinforcing Pad by User Reinforcing Weld by User — For either of the by useroptions, the system prompts you for the Reinforcing Pad/Weld Thickness and theSpecify Reinforcing Pad/Weld Width.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Branch Reinforcement Type or Connect to Branch Point Select Connectto Branch Point and place a data point to locate the branch reinforcement componentor snap to one of the three piping segments that form the branch point.

2. Specify Reinforcing Pad/Weld Thickness by typing the thickness value for thereinforcing component at the identified branch point.

3. Specify Reinforcing Pad/Weld Width by typing the width value for the reinforcingcomponent at the identified branch point.

478

6.File

Verify Wall Thickness Calculations________________

6.1.5.31 Verify Wall Thickness Calculations

This option allows you to calculate the wall thickness values of a specified component. Referto the Reference Data Manager Reference Guide for a description of the wall thicknessequations and the data which affects wall thickness calculations.

Operating Sequence

1. Identify Connect Point by placing a data point to locate the component connect pointto process.

2. Press <D> to accept the component and connect point.

479


6.2 Reference Models

This command activates the Reference Model Attachments form containing a list of thecurrent reference models attached to the active model. This form allows you to attach anddetach models, and add, remove, and review reference model categories.

The description given in the Model Management Data Table of the Project Control Databasefor each reference model is displayed on the Reference Model Attachments form. Once youhave selected a model, the following options are displayed.

Commands

Display On/Display Off — Displays the reference model in all of the views.

Snap On/Snap Off and Locate On/Locate Off — Allows you to data point to anycomponent including nozzles and snap to any segment in the reference model.

Apply to Active — Defines the settings for the Display On/Display Off, SnapOn/Snap Off, or Locate On/Locate Off toggles for only the active model.

Apply to Discipline — Defines the settings for the Display On/Display Off, SnapOn/Snap Off, or Locate On/Locate Off toggles for the all attached models in thediscipline of the selected model.

Apply to All — Defines the settings for the Display On/Display Off, Snap On/SnapOff, or Locate On/Locate Off toggles for the all attached models in all disciplines.

Attach Model — Attaches reference models to the active model.

Automatic Attach & Verify — Automatically attaches reference files to the model.It displays a list of models in the project that have elements within the range of theactive model and highlights any reference models that are currently attached.

480

6.File

Reference Models________________ Detach Model — Detaches the reference file from the active model.

Reference Model Categories — Adds, removes, or review/revise model categories tothe selected reference model.

Reload Reference Model — Reloads reference models in the MicroStation cache andupdates graphics for the selected model.

Reference Symbology by User — Manually overrides the default reference modelsymbology as defined in the Project Control Database.

Reference Symbology by System — Resets the reference model symbology back towhat is defined in the Project Control Database.

481


6.2.1 Attach Model

This option allows you to attach reference models to the active model.

For structural models, a toggle is provided which allows you to specify that the sparse orpropagated version of the reference model be attached. If both the sparse and propagated areincluded in the same model, the toggle should be set to Propagated Model and both will beattached. You can also use this toggle to re-define attached models.

You must load the model management data of the Project Control database for the sparsestructural models through the Project Environment Manager in order for this option to work.

When you attach the first electrical raceway model to the active piping model,the system initializes the Electrical Raceway Database.

482

6.File

Automatic Attach & Verify________________

6.2.2 Automatic Attach & Verify

This option activates the Automatic Attachment/Verify form used to automatically attachreference files to the active model. It displays a list of models in the project that haveelements within the range of the active model and highlights any reference models that arecurrently attached.

If there are no reference files attached, the first form displays the discipline list and only theAttach Model and Auto Attach/Verify options are available. After activating one of the twooptions the system displays the form with disciplines and more options available.

Commands

Select All — Selects all displayed models for attachment.

483


6.2.3 Detach Model

This option is used to detach selected reference model attachments from the active model.

484

6.File

Reference Model Category________________

6.2.4 Reference Model Category

Reviews/Revises, adds, and removes reference model categories. The displayed categorieswill vary based on the discipline of the selected reference model. That is, equipmentcategories will display for an equipment model, piping categories for a piping model, and soforth.

Commands

Review/Revise — Reviews model categories for the selected reference model. Themodel categories, which are based on the active reference model attachment(s), arelisted on the form.

Add — Adds model categories to the selected reference model.

Remove — Removes model categories for the selected reference model.

Select Model Only/All Discipline Models — Defines model categories for the activemodel only or for all reference models of the discipline being defined. You can thenupdate the category display. The Discipline name varies depending on the type ofcategory you are defining.

485


6.2.5 Reload Reference Model

This option reload reference models into the MicroStation cache and updates graphics for theselected model. This is useful when the reference models have been altered since they wereattached in the current design session.

486

6.File

Reference Symbology by User________________

6.2.6 Reference Symbology by User

This option overrides the color, weight, and line style reference file symbology defined in theProject Control Database with user defined symbology.

For user defined symbology to display, you must use the Level Symbology On/Offcommand. See Viewing Options, page 395 for more information. To reset the symbology tohow it is defined in the Project Control Database, select the Reference Symbology bySystem option.

Commands

Color — Defines the color to use.

Style — Defines the line style to use.

Weight — Define the line weight to use.

487


6.2.7 Reference Symbology by System

This option restores the symbology of all reference models from any manual overrides to thesymbology defined in the Project Control Database.

488

6.File

Switch to Equipment________________

6.3 Switch to Equipment

This command activates the Switch to Equipment Model form that allows you to easilyswitch to the Equipment Modeling (PD_Eqp) environment so that you can modify equipmentmodels that are referenced from the active piping model.

Select the desired equipment model, then confirm the form to enter the Equipment Modelingenvironment. When you are finished using the Equipment Modeling environment, selectReturn to Piping from the File pull-down menu.

If Access Control is being used on the active project, this command doesverify that the you have access to modify equipment data before allowing youto do so.

489


490

7.Elem

ent

Element Commands________________

7. Element Commands

The Element pull-down provides the Analyze command .

7.1 Analyze

The Analyze option opens the Element Information settings box, which is used to changethe attributes of an element(s) and review design file data associated with them, such asgeometry and database attributes.

DO NOT use the Analyze command to change any properties of a PDS element.This feature should be used only as an investigative tool in PDS applications. It ispermissible to use this command on non-intelligent, user-defined elements in themodel file; however, use of this command should be limited to those elements.

When the Analyze command is active and a single graphics element is selected, the displayeddata pertains to that element. Use the Next command to display data on any nested elements.

The element type is shown in the title bar. The type number is shown in the upper left cornerof the settings box.

Refer to the MicroStation User’s Guide for more information on the Analyze command.

491


492

8.Settin

gs

Setting Commands________________

8. Setting Commands

The Settings commands provide the ability to modify rendering, fonts and colors used duringa graphics session.

Command Groups

Colors — Modifies the colors used in the graphics environment. Use the File Designcommand from the File palette to save your settings before exiting the design file.

Each tile in the color palette represents a color in the active color table. To modify acolor, you must first select it. The selected color has an enlarged tile in which its indexnumber (0-255) is displayed. The view background color is in the lower right corner ofthe palette, denoted by "B."

Double-clicking a tile opens the Modify Color dialog box, which is used to modify thecolor.

Fonts — Opens the Fonts setting box. To see a type sample for a font, select in the listbox.

493

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Rendering — Opens the Rendering Settings box, which is used to adjust renderingsettings. It controls distance cuing, which determine how atmospheric fading is set inthe view. You can also set the Fog Color in this dialog box, which can be used to createa realistic atmospheric haze.

494

9.User

User Commands________________

9. User Commands

These commands provide access to PDS help and to the user preferences and buttonassignment that are specific to your system.

Help

Displays Help for the PDS 3D products.

User Preferences

The User Preferences command changes things that apply only to your system such as howmemory is used on your system, how windows are displayed, how various items on the screenare laid out and behave, how reference files are attached by default, and so on. As the nameimplies, you can adjust these settings to suit your preferences.

Button Assignments

The Button Assignments command changes digitizing tablet or mouse button assignments.You can change the 3D Data and 3D Tentative buttons assignments, as well as 10 cursorbutton assignments for cursor button menus.

495


496

10.Man

agem

ent

Piping Design Data Management________________

10. Piping Design DataManagement

These commands, available when you select Piping Design Data Manager from PD_Shell,are used to verify the integrity of the Piping model. You can perform post placement designchecks, approve piping, examine database linkages, and compare the active model dataagainst the posted P&ID data.

Commands

Design Checker — Performs Post Placement Design Checks on a specified volume.See Design Checker, page 499 for information.

P&ID Comparison Report Manager — Creates P&ID Comparison reports for aspecified set of model files in a batch environment. See the P&ID Comparison ReportManager, page 512 for information.

Approval Control Manager — Approves piping using search criteria with a data setof models, design areas, or on a project-wide basis outside of the graphics environment.See Approval Control Manager - Line ID, page 531 for information.

Approval Control Manager - Line ID — Approves piping using a list of line IDswith a data set of either models, design areas or on project-wide basis outside of thegraphics environment. See Approval Control Manager - Line ID, page 531 forinformation.

497

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Database Verification Manager — Checks for inconsistencies between the model fileand the piping database. See the Database Verification Manager, page 533 forinformation.

Component I/Forms Customization — Customizes the definition of the pipingcommodity names or pipe support model codes that appear on the placement forms.See Component I/Forms Customization, page 534 for information.

Segment Data I/Forms Customization — Customizes how the brief list of pipingsegment data appears on forms the placement forms. See Segment Data I/FormsCustomization, page 538 for information.

Inspection Iso Data Manager — Loads inspection iso IDs and keys. See InspectionIso Data Manager, page 550 for information.

Weld Numbering — Creates, assigns, or deletes user-defined weld numbers forprojects, areas, models, or specific weld IDs. See Weld Numbering, page 554 forinformation.

498

10.Man

agem

ent

Design Checker________________

10.1 Design Checker

This command performs Post Placement Design Checks on a specified volume. It activatesthe Design Checker form which identifies the model to be processed. The system performsdesign checks between mating components, a component and its associated segments, matingsegments, and a segment and the piping job specification tables. The design check processgenerates an ASCII report in the file model.dc (where model is the name of the active modeldesign file). It also creates a non-printable, sorted file named model.dci in the same directory.This file is used by the Design Checks Review command. The model.dc file can be saved,printed and saved, or printed and deleted. The report lists all the unique line ID labels thatwere checked. Any errors encountered while processing the volume are listed on the report.You can display the report in the graphics environment by selecting the Review Reportcommand or by print the report.

You can use the Design Check Review command to review the marker and determine whichcomponents caused the error and the type of error.

Commands

Data Integrity Validation / No Data Integrity Validation — Performs or does notperform data integrity checking prior to Design Consistency Checking.

Submit Immediately / Delayed Submit — Submits or delays submission of the job.When the toggle is set to Delayed Submit, the system displays fields which allow youto delay submission until a more convenient time.

Print / Delete — Submits the generated report output file to the specified print queueand deletes the output file.

499

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Print / Save — Submits the generated report output file to the specified print queue andsaves the output file.

Save — Saves the output file without printing.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Design Area — Select a design area from the form.

2. Select Model — Select a model from the form.

3. Accept or Toggle for Delayed Submission — Set the toggle for delayed submission.

Refer to Printer/Plotter Setup in the Project Administrator Reference Guide,for more information on the Queue Description Library and setting up printqueues.

500

10.Man

agem

ent

Post Placement Design Checks Theory________________

10.1.1 Post Placement Design Checks Theory

The Design Checker performs a set of checks using information in the RDB as well asstandard checks defined in the software.

The RDB set of checks is defined using the Project Data Manager in the ProjectAdministrator. Until you have defined checks using the Project Data Manager, the defaultfor all of the post-placement RDB checks are set to the same state as the interactive designchecks.

The Piping RDB defines:

the acceptable tolerance values between connected components to be used in processingdesign checks.

hard and soft design rule consistency check parameters for components and pipingsegments.

the compatibility between different end preparations

Refer to the Project Data Manager in the Reference Data Manager Reference Guidefor information on defining or modifying these parameters.

Each of the following checks is assigned a hard or soft error condition and a check/no checkcondition in the Design Consistency Checks options in the project seed data. The check/nocheck condition designates whether the values are actually tested. The hard/soft errorconditions are used when an error occurs during the check.

- flow direction- flow centerline alignment- outside diameter- schedule/thickness- piping materials class- materials of construction class- insulation thickness- insulation purpose.

The Flow Direction option enables or disables the reporting of the flowdirection comparisons between flow-dependent components and associatedsegments. It does not disable the checks or reporting of segment flowdirection.

The interactive design checks performed during component or pipe placementdisable the schedule/thickness option since the interactive checks areperformed prior to wall thickness calculations. However, the Design Checkerwill continue to respect your selection of the schedule/thickness option. TheDesign Checker does not report discrepancies for schedule/thickness whenone or both of the values being compared is not required (NREQD).

501

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ A hard error indicates a fatal error condition. For example, if connecting componentshave incompatible end preparations you should know this before you get to the fieldand try to build the pipeline.

A soft incompatibility indicates a warning. For example if the piping materials classesare not the same, you should know this, but it should not be a problem when you try tobuild the pipeline.

The Temperature and Pressure Data toggle on the Piping Data Control form of theProject Data Manager allows you to specify No Verification or Verify Complete Set for thefollowing data.

maximum temperature check between the component and the piping segment to ensurethe segment temperatures do not exceed the component maximum temperature

temperature range and pressure range check between the piping segment and the pipingjob spec temperature and pressure service limits table to ensure that the temperaturesand pressures of the segment are within the limits of the piping job spec table

Mechanics

The Design Checker report follows the conventions listed below:

Only the component data relevant to the enabled design checks is displayed in thereport. For example if the pressure rating comparison is enabled, the pressure rating,end preparation, and table suffix values is included in the report. If the comparison ofpiping outside diameter is disabled, the applicable values are not included in the report.

When a discrepancy is encountered at a value, an asterisk proceeds the value in thereport. This applies to all data that is displayed within the report, except for thefollowing options, which only compare a single data item:

— component flow report

— hold status report

— nominal piping diameter report

— gasket thickness report

— nozzle location report

— piping segment flow direction report.

Certain checks are always performed during Post Placement Design Checks. The systemperforms the following checks regardless of settings in the Model Type 63 data:

check on pressure rating, end preparation, and nominal piping diameter. Theseparameters are always reported as hard errors. (This check is also performed duringplacement.)

502

10.Man

agem

ent

Post Placement Design Checks Theory________________ pipe length threshold check to ensure that the pipe exceeds the minimum pipe lengthdefined in the spec.

nominal piping diameter check between the component and the piping segment toensure equality.

flow direction check between piping segments to ensure that the flow is in the samedirection.

hold status check between the component and the piping segment to ensure equality.

nozzle location check between the segment end and the nozzle to ensure that the nozzleand segment end are coincident.

for bolted connections, check to ensure:

— gasket separation at the bolted end is a positive value and is identical to the valuedefined in the Piping Materials Class Entity or the value derived from the GasketGap Table.

— the appropriate gasket is found in the piping commodities data of the Piping JobSpecification.

— the gasket separation at the bolted end is identical to one-half the actual gasketthickness defined in the modifier column of the piping commodities data in thePiping Job Specification.

for bolted components, number of bolts, bolt diameter, and bolt circle diameter checkbetween the components to ensure equality if pressure rating and/or table suffix aredifferent.

for thru-bolted components check in the following circumstances:

— If the component being placed is thru-bolted without bolt holes, the pressure ratingdesign checks is enabled as follows. The value of the pressure rating of the thru-bolted component is compared for equality with that of the ’other’ end at the boltedjoint. The pressure rating value is determined in the same manner as in formingdimension table names. In other words, ’CL300’ is considered as equivalent to’300’. If a discrepancy results, a warning is displayed. You can override thiswarning.

— If the component being placed is connected to a thru-bolted end without bolt holes,the pressure rating design checks is enabled. However, the data to be used for thecomparison of pressure rating, including pressure rating, end preparation, tablesuffix, and nominal piping diameter, is determined on the basis of the non-thru-bolted component on the other end of the thru-bolted component, if such acomponent exists. This is necessary, since, by definition, this thru-bolted endpreparation does not have bolts, but the bolt data is required for the pressure ratingcomparison. This provides a solution for pressure rating comparisons at thru-boltedends without requiring you to create ’artificial’ bolt data tables. The remaining datafor the design checks comparison is determined from the thru-bolted component.

503

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Although the end preparation from the other component is used in the pressurerating comparison, the end preparation from the thru-bolted component without boltholes is used in the end preparation comparison. In this situation, the pressure ratingof the thru-bolted component without bolt holes is ignored in the pressure ratingcomparison.

If another component does not exist at the other end of the thru-bolted component,the pressure rating design checks is enabled as follows. The value of the pressurerating of the component being placed is compared for equality with the thru-boltedcomponent. The pressure rating value is determined in the same manner as informing dimension table names. In other words, ’CL300’ is considered asequivalent to ’300’. If a discrepancy results, a warning is displayed. You canoverride this warning.

For example, if an orifice flange is being placed at one end of an orifice plate forwhich an orifice flange has been placed at the other end, the pressure rating designchecks is performed on the basis of the data for the two orifice flanges. However, ifan orifice flange is being placed at one end of an orifice plate for which no orificeflange has been placed at the other end, the pressure rating design checks isdisabled.

— You can specify that an end of a component is to be thru-bolted with bolt holes. Forthis situation, pressure rating design checks is enabled in the normal manner. Inother words, the data for the design checks comparison is determined on the basis ofthe thru-bolted component with bolt holes.

A special range of end preparation values, 200 through 279, is reserved for thru-bolted ends with bolt holes. The following specific ranges of end preparation valuesand the corresponding termination types apply.

504

10.Man

agem

ent

Post Placement Design Checks Theory________________

200 flat-face thru-bolted termination type

201-205 without integral gaskets206-209 with integral gaskets

210 raised-face thru-bolted termination type


220 RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type


230 Male RTJ-face thru-bolted termination type


240 flat-face thru-bolted with cap screws termination type


250 raised-face thru-bolted with cap screws termination type


260 RTJ-face thru-bolted with cap screws termination type


270 flat-full-face thru-bolted termination type


The following ranges of end preparation values are not considered as thru-bolted without bolt holes:

111-119121-129131-139141-149151-159161-169171-179181-189

additional flow direction check between connected piping segments to ensure segmentflow direction is compatible.

check for integral gasket option used incorrectly in the model. It reports any boltedjoint for which the gasket thickness is zero and neither end of the bolted joint has anend preparation that is recognized as integral gasket.

505


10.1.2 Sample Design Checker Report

The following is an example Design Checker report showing all the various parts of thereport. Refer to Design Checks Theory for a description of the types of information reported.The following data is included within the report.

line number label for component A

component number (or commodity name or model code) for component A

end preparation at bolted end in question for component A

line number label for component B

component number (or commodity name or model code) for component B

end preparation at bolted end in question for component B

Component Parameter Report

This report is a component to component check.

506

10.Man

agem

ent

Sample Design Checker Report________________ ERROR No. 6,13 & 17: This error was caused by placing two components in the samepipeline, that are of different size connected to each other.

Segment Parameters Report

This report is a component to component check for the segment data associated with thecomponents.

ERROR No. 21: This error was caused by placing two connecting piping segments withdifferent piping material classes, different materials of construction and different insulationpurposes. This maybe as per the design conditions, but the software is pointing out there is adifference for your consideration and/or approval.

Commodity Item Temperature Report

This report is a check of the component’s maximum temperature to the temperature ranges ofthe segment.

ERROR No. 7 & 18: This error was caused by placing a component with temperatureattributes on a pipeline without temperature defined.

507


Pipe/Tube Nominal Length Report

This report is a comparison of the pipe length in the database to the hard/soft lengths in thepipe length threshold tables.

ERROR No. 24: This error was caused by placing a pipe length shorter than the desired, butlonger than the minimum allowed.

Temperature and Pressure Service LimitsReport

This report is a comparison of the segment to the associated table of the piping material class.

ERROR No. 20 & 23: This error was caused because the service limits were not placed onthe segment at the time of placement.

Component Flow Report

This report is a comparison of the component flow to the segment flow.

ERROR No. 10: This error was caused by changing the flow direction of the segment afterthe flow dependent component was placed.

508

10.Man

agem

ent

Sample Design Checker Report________________ ERROR No.14: This error was caused by placing the components with the attribute of Holdon and the segment without any Hold status.

ERROR No.22 & 26: This error was caused by placing the components with the attribute ofHold off and the segment with Hold on.

Nominal Piping Diameter Report

This report is a comparison between the piping segment diameter to the component diameter.

ERROR No. 1 through 5, 8: These errors were caused by changing the active segmentparameters of a pipeline to a different size and not changing the graphics to reflect thatchange.

Nozzle Consistency Location Report

This report is a check to determine that the equipment/nozzle is located at the end of theassociated segment.

ERROR No. 27: This error was caused by not correctly connecting to the equipment/nozzlebefore placing components or sketching piping segments.

509


Gasket Thickness Report

This report is a check on the gasket thickness of the component to the piping job specification.

ERROR No. 9: This error was caused by placing a component without an implied gasket.

Bolt Data Report

This report is a check of the bolted data associated with two components.

ERROR No. 12: This was caused by the user placing mating components of differentpressure ratings, causing the bolt patterns and bolt diameters to be different.

510

10.Man

agem

ent

Sample Design Checker Report________________

Segment Flow Direction Report

This report is a check on the flow direction of all the segments.

ERROR No. 28: This error was caused by having diverging flow at the reducer.

ERROR No. 29: This error was caused by having converging flow at the reducer.

ERROR No. 30: This error was caused by having conflicting or no flow at a tee.

ERROR No. 31,32 & 33: This error was caused by having undefined flow for the segments.

511


10.2 P&ID Comparison Report Manager

These commands allow you to create segment data and named component existence reports.You can specify one or more piping models to be processed.

Commands

Segment Data Comparison Report — Compares and reports any discrepancies inpiping segment data between the P&ID database and the Piping Design database in abatch environment. See Segment Data Comparison Report, page 513 for moreinformation.

Segment Data Comparison Report Plus Update Model — Compares and reportsany discrepancies in piping segment data between the P&ID database and the PipingDesign database in a batch environment, then updates the piping model so that there areno discrepancies between P&ID data and piping model data. See Segment DataComparison Report Plus Update Model, page 517 for more information.

Update Model — Updates the piping model so that there are no discrepanciesbetween P&ID data and piping model data. See Update Model, page 520 for moreinformation.

Named Component Existence Report — Compares the existence of user-specifiednamed components between the piping model and the P&ID database on the basis of auser-defined list of lines or a selected design area or model. See the Named ComponentExistence Report, page 522 for more information.

512

10.Man

agem

ent

Segment Data Comparison Report________________

10.2.1 Segment Data Comparison Report

The system compares segment data on the basis of the matching criteria defined in thepid_to_piping correlation table. If there is no matching criteria defined, the system comparessegment data on the basis of the P&ID node numbers that are common to both the P&IDdatabase and the piping design database or the node numbers and line number labels,depending on what you specify using the toggles.

If the P&ID master database exists, it is used with the model as the basis for the comparison.If it does not exist, the comparison is done using the P&ID task database and the PipingDesign database. If both the P&ID master and the P&ID task databases exist, the setting inthe type 63 data for the model being processed is used to determine which database (master ortask) to use. As part of the report, the system includes which database was used for thecomparison.

The piping segment data is compared using the attributes specified in the Correlation Tablefor data transfer. The piping segment data is also compared on the basis of the complete orpartial data transfer flag. Refer to P&ID Data Transfer for more information on theCorrelation Table and the transfer process. If a match is found, each attribute value, asspecified in the Correlation Table and filtered for either complete or partial data transfer, iscompared with the corresponding attribute value in the P&ID database. For any pair ofcorresponding attribute values that differ, the discrepancy is reported.

The report includes a comparison of the flow direction for the piping segment in the modeland the P&ID segment by using the P&ID node numbers. If no corresponding segment isfound in the P&ID database for a piping segment with valid matching criteria, an error isreported.

If the search mode is set to END in the pid_to_piping file, the system compares all of theP&ID segment mates which have matching search criteria to the applicable piping segment,and uses the P&ID segment which best matches the piping segment for the comparison.Otherwise, the search mode will be FIRST, and comparison is made with the first P&IDsegment which has matching criteria.

The report also reports line sequence numbers.

Because the data comparisons are performed on the basis of the piping segments in the model,not all segments in the P&ID database are checked.

The system creates the following files in the same directory location as the processed modelfile.

A report file named model_number.pc (where model_number is the number of themodel as extracted from the Project Control Database).

A non-printable, sorted file named model_number.pci. This file is used by the ReviewP&ID Comparison Report command.

A non-printable, sorted file named model_number.pca. This file is used by the P&IDData Comparison, Update Model, Segment Data Comparison Report, UpdateModel, and Review P&ID Comparison Report commands for the approval of data

513

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ discrepancies. The .pca file is initially created when you approve a discrepancy, andthe file is appended to with each additional approval.

You can format the title page and the heading for each page of the P&ID Segment Data reportusing the \win32app\ingr\pddesign\sample\pid_cmprpt.fmt format file. The remainder of thereport will be in the following format.

<line number> <P&ID Node Numbers> <P&ID Drawing Number>

Attribute Value in Model Value in P&IDline_number_label 2"A-A5A2F-N-55011 2"A-A5A2F-P-550107line_sequence_no 550111 550107insulation_purpose N P

This data in the Comparison Report is sorted first by line number label and then by the P&IDnode numbers where applicable.

Commands

Project — Specifies that the entire active project will be processed.

Piping Design Areas — Allows specification of one or more design areas to beprocessed.

Piping Models — Allows specification of one or more models in a selected design areato be processed. Select the desired design area, then select the desired model(s).

Define Search Criteria — Limits the scope of the report to include only selectedpiping and components.

514

10.Man

agem

ent

Segment Data Comparison Report________________

Operating Sequence

1. Select the Define Search Criteria comand. The system activates the Search Criteriaform, which prompts you to select the attribute to be restricted.

2. Select Attribute by selecting the attribute to be restricted. After selecting attributefrom the attribute display list, the system displays the selected attribute in a separatefield and displays a list of operators.

3. Select an operator to define the search criteria.

The system displays the selected operator and prompts you to type an attribute value.

4. Enter Attribute Value by typing the attribute value. For a sub-string search, type astring to appear anywhere within the attribute value (do not use wild cards). If theattribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the Standard NoteLibrary.

5. Select the value and select Confirm. The system validates the input and displays thedefined search criteria in the Search Criteria display field.

6. Accept or Select And/Or Operator

Select AND to specify an additional condition, or select OR to specify an alternativecondition.

— OR —

Select Confirm to accept the defined search criteria and return to the parent form.

Do NOT Compare ’Transfer Disabled’ Piping Segments / Compare ’TransferredDisabled’ Piping Segments Compares or does not compare segments that have beentransferred disabled. The default setting for this toggle defined by the exclusion criteriavalue in the pid_to_piping file.

Compare Piping Segments With Node Numbers / Compare All Piping SegmentsCompares segments that are assigned P&ID node numbers in the piping model or tocompare all piping segments. This toggle is disabled if the matching criteria (in thepid_to_piping file) is something other than P&ID node numbers.

Use Default Values (from P&ID Correlation Table) for Non-partial Attributes, ifNPD differs / Do Not Use Default Non-partial Attributes Uses or does not use thedefault non-partial attribute values in the event that the NPD values differ whenexecuting the Update Model feature. The default values for the non-partial attribnutesare defined in the pid_to_piping file.

515

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Print / Delete Submits the generated report output file to the specified print queue anddeletes the output file.

Print / Save Submits the generated report output file to the specified print queue andsaves the output file.

Save Saves the output file without printing.

Submit Immediately / Delayed Submit Submits or delays submission of the job.When the toggle is set to Delayed Submit, the system displays fields which allow youto delay submission until a more convenient time.

Create Header Format Specifies a report format file to define the title page andheading for the segment data report.

Select Header Format Selects an existing header format for the segment data report.

For either of the Print options, the system displays a list of queues based oninformation in the project’s Queue Description Library.


Steps

1. Select the Segment Data Comparison Report command from the P&ID ComparisonReport Manager menu.

The system activates the Segment Data Comparison Report form, and prompts you toset the desired comparison options or confirm the form to accept the default selections..

2. Select the desired options to limit the scope of the report, then confirm the form tosubmit the report for processing.

516

10.Man

agem

ent

Segment Data Comparison Report Plus Update Model________________

10.2.2 Segment Data Comparison Report PlusUpdate Model

This command combines the functionality of the Segment Data Comparison Reportcommand and the Update Model command. The form allows you to limit the scope of thereport, then update the piping model based on the selected limitations.

Refer to Segment Data Comparison Report, page 513 for details on the Segment DataComparison Report.

Commands





517


Operating Sequence

1. Select the Define Search Criteria comand.

The system activates the Search Criteria form, which prompts you to select theattribute to be restricted.

2. Select Attribute to be restricted.

After selecting attribute from the attribute display list, the system displays the selectedattribute in a separate field and displays a list of operators.

3. Select Operator to define the search criteria.


4. Enter Attribute Value. For a sub-string search, type a string to appear anywherewithin the attribute value (do not use wild cards). If the attribute is code-listed, thesystem displays a list of values from the Standard Note Library.

5. Select the value and select Confirm. The system validates the input and displays thedefined search criteria in the Search Criteria display field.



— OR —


Do NOT Compare ’Transfer Disabled’ Piping Segments / Compare ’TransferredDisabled’ Piping Segments Compares or does not compare segments that have beentransfer-disabled. The default setting for this toggle defined by the exclusion criteriavalue in the pid_to_piping file.

Compare Piping Segments With Node Numbers / Compare All Piping SegmentsCompares segments that are assigned P&ID node numbers in the piping model or tocompare all piping segments. This toggle is disabled if the matching criteria (in thepid_to_piping file) is something other than P&ID node numbers.

518

10.Man

agem

ent

Segment Data Comparison Report Plus Update Model________________ Use Default Values (from P&ID Correlation Table) for Non-partial Attributes, ifNPD differs / Do Not Use Default Non-partial Attributes Uses or does not use thedefault non-partial attribute values in the event that the NPD values differ. The defaultvalues for the non-partial segment attribnutes are defined in the pid_to_piping file.

Print / Delete Submits the generated report output file to the specified print queue anddeletes the output file.

Print / Save Submits the generated report output file to the specified print queue andsaves the output file.

Save Saves the output file without printing.


Create Header Format Specifies a report format file to define the title page andheading for the segment data report.

Select Header Format Selects an existing header format for the segment data report.

For either of the Print options, the system displays a list of queues based oninformation in the project’s Queue Description Library.


519


10.2.3 Update Model

This command allows you to update the piping model to include data from the P&ID, basedon the previously-generated P&ID comparison report. You can update selected data for theentire project, selected piping design areas, or selected piping models in a specified designarea.

Commands





Operating Sequence

1. Select the Define Search Criteria comand.

The system activates the Search Criteria form, which prompts you to select theattribute to be restricted.

520

10.Man

agem

ent

Update Model________________

2. Select Attribute to be restricted.

After selecting attribute from the attribute display list, the system displays the selectedattribute in a separate field and displays a list of operators.

3. Select Operator to define the search criteria.


4. Enter Attribute Value by typing the attribute value. For a sub-string search, type astring to appear anywhere within the attribute value (do not use wild cards). If theattribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the Standard NoteLibrary.

5. Select the value and select Confirm.

The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria in the SearchCriteria display field.



— OR —


Use Default Values (from P&ID Correlation Table) for Non-partial Attributes, ifNPD differs / Do Not Use Default Non-partial Attributes Uses or does not use thedefault non-partial attribute values in the event that the NPD values differ. The defaultvalues for the non-partial segment attribnutes are defined in the pid_to_piping file.


521


10.2.4 Named Component Existence Report

The Named Component Existence Report command compares the existence of user-specified named components between the Piping Design Database and the P&ID database in abatch environment on the basis of a user-defined list of lines.

If the P&ID Master database exists then it is used with the model as the basis for thecomparison. If it does not exist, the comparison is done using the P&ID Task database and thepiping design database. As part of the report, the system includes which database was used forthe comparison. The comparison does not make use of the topology of either the P&IDdrawing or the piping model, therefore, the order of components is not considered as part ofthe report.

A user-defined list, design area, or model is used to define which items are included in thereport. The user-defined list must have one line-id per line. Whether you create a list or use adesign area or model, the list of line ids used to perform the comparison is included in thereport.

For information about the Header Format, seeCreate Header Format, page 526 Create Header Format orSelect Header Format, page 526Select Header format .

The comparison considers the entire pipeline in both the P&ID database and the piping designdatabase. If a line id is part of multiple P&IDs or is included in multiple models, the completedefinition of all P&IDs or models is included in the report regardless of the line-id optionselected.

The following items are included in the comparison report:

The named components in the piping design database are included and are compared onthe basis of the following data:

— Tagged piping commodities are compared on the basis of their piping componentnumber.

— Piping specialties are compared on the basis of their piping component number.

— In-line instruments are compared on the basis of their instrument componentnumber.

Tagged piping commodities in the P&ID database which have the following data areincluded:

— The Commodity Code Flag is set to by system or by user and the commodity code isdefined.

— The Piping Component Number is defined.

Piping specialties in the P&ID database are determined by those piping components thathave the following data are included:

522

10.Man

agem

ent

Named Component Existence Report________________

— The Commodity Code Flag is set to by user.

— The Commodity Code Flag is blank.

— The Piping Component Number is defined.

P&ID instruments in the P&ID database are determined by the following data:

— Only those instruments which are applicable to the 3D model, such as thoserequiring dimension definition in the RDB, which are determined by an InstrumentCorrelation List.

The Instrument Correlation List, necessary to define the applicable instruments, is a user-defined ASCII file that resides in the project directory and is named pid_instrument. With thislist you can specify the inclusion or exclusion of P&ID instruments on the basis of theinstrument’s AABB code or its AABBCC code. You can include or exclude groups ofinstruments on the basis of the AABB code for that instrument by using the appropriatekeyword, either Include or Exclude followed by the AABB code. You can specify exceptionsto the AABB codes on the basis of specific AABBCC code so that you can exclude from aninclude group or those that can include with an exclude group by adding the exceptions underthe line containing the Include or Exclude statement. The ! character is interpreted as acomment line.

The following represents the default P&ID Correlation List that defines the P&ID instrumentthat are applicable to the 3D model. In this example, the AABB code is meant to represent asubstring search of the AABBCC code.

!Include all control valvesInclude 7P1E

!Include all relief devicesInclude 7P2C

!Include all other in-line instrumentsInclude 7P3C

!except for the following7P3C447P3C46

!Exclude all off-line instrumentsExclude 7Q4D

!except for the following7Q4D217Q4D2477Q4D27Q4D287Q4D297Q4D307Q4D317Q4D327Q4D33

! Exclude all system functionsExclude 7Q5A

523

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ You can format the title page and the heading for each page of the P&ID Named ComponentExistence report using the win32app\ingr\pddesign\sample\pid_cmprpt.fmt. The remainder ofthe report contains the following sections:

The list of line ids that determine the basis for the report.

Named components in the P&ID database that are not in the 3D model are reported withthe component number and the P&ID number.

Named components in the 3D model that are not in the P&ID database are reported withthe component number, the design area number, and the model number.


Append the following data to the default P&ID Correlation Table in support of the P&IDNamed Component Existence Report. Do not change the names in the P&ID CorrelationTable for any of the following data.

The following data is used from the Piping Component Table of the P&ID database.

— The following data is used to determine the P&ID number for the piping componentfor reporting purposes.

P&ID Data Model Col P&ID Col Complete Partialcomp_drawing_index_no n/a 2 n/a n/a

— The following data is used to determine the line id for the pipingcomponent for reporting purposes.

P&ID Data Model Col P&ID Col Complete Partialcomp_segment_index_no n/a 3 n/a n/a

— The following data is used to distinguish between a pipingcommodity and a piping specialty.

P&ID Data Model Col P&ID Col Complete Partialcmdty_code n/a 29 n/a n/a

524

10.Man

agem

ent

Named Component Existence Report________________

— The following data is used from the Instrument Component Tableof the P&ID database.

— The following data is used to determine the P&ID drawingnumber for the instrument component for reporting purposes.

P&ID Data Model Col P&ID Col Complete Partialinstr_drawing_index_no n/a 3 n/a n/a

— The following data is used to determine the line id for theinstrument component for reporting purposes.

P&ID Data Model Col P&ID Col Complete Partialinstr_segment_index_no n/a 4 n/a n/a

— The following data is used to determine the instrument componentthat should be included in the comparison.

P&ID Data Model Col P&ID Col Complete Partialinstr_aabbcc_code n/a 10 n/a n/a

Commands

List of Line-Ids — Specifies the location of a list of line-ids to use when comparingpiping segment data. You can override the specified node and path.

Line-Ids in a Design Model — Specifies the model the system uses to extract line idsfrom the piping design database for comparison.

525

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Line-Ids in a Design Area — Specifies the design area the system uses to extract lineIDs from the piping design database for comparison. All of the line ids for all modelsassociated with the database are included.

Create Header Format

This option is used to create a record of the format files for the Segment Data and NamedComponent Consistency reports in the project control database. The File Specification: fieldis where the actual name of the format file is specified. The format file specifies the format ofthe title page and heading for each page of the report. The remainder of the report ispredefined by the product.


You must create the report format file with a text editor. Refer to the Report ManagerReference Guide for information on defining a report format file. This file should only definethe header information; not the content of the report file. The sample format file for theSegment Data and Named Component Existence report iswin32app\ingr\pddesign\sample\pid_cmprpt.

Select Header Format

This option allows you to select an existing record of the format files from the project controldatabase for the Segment Data and Named Component Consistency reports.

526

10.Man

agem

ent

Approval Control Manager________________

10.3 Approval Control Manager

This option approves piping using search criteria with a data set of models, design areas, or ona project-wide basis outside of the graphics environment. The system updates the databaseapproval status attribute and modifies the components, pipes, instruments, and segments to thenew colors and levels.

Commands

Project — Performs approval on the entire project using the specified search criteria.

Areas — Performs approval on the design areas using the specified search criteria andselect Confirm.

Models — Performs approval on the models using the specified search criteria andselect Cancel (X) from the Design Area display list form to accept the selected modelsand exit the selection process.

Submit for Processing — Allows you to submit the job for processing or to delaysubmission.

527


Field Descriptions

Revise Approval Status to: — Approval status is a code-listed attribute using thefollowing values


Once piping has an approved status, the system does not allow revisions without theapproval status first being revised.

Search Criteria — Allows you to select existing search criteria or to define new searchcriteria.

See the Segment Search Criteria, page 529 for more information.


You must have write access to all the piping models, design areas or the entire projectdepending on the data set you define for approval.

528

10.Man

agem

ent

Segment Search Criteria________________

10.3.1 Segment Search Criteria

When the Search Criteria field is activated by placing a data point on the Approval ControlManager form, the Search Criteria form is activated.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Attribute the attribute you want to restrict or select Other and select theattribute from the display window. The system displays the selected attribute anddisplays a list of operators.

2. Select Operator required to define the search criteria. The system displays theselected operator and prompts you to type an attribute value.

3. Specify Attribute Value. For a sub-string search, type a string to appear anywherewithin the attribute value (do not use wild cards).

If the attribute is code-listed, the system displays a list of values from the standard notelibrary. Select the value and select Confirm.

The system validates the input and displays the defined search criteria.

4. Accept or Select AND/OR Operator

529


Select the AND button to specify an additional condition, or select the OR button tospecify an alternative condition, or select Confirm to accept the defined search criteria.

5. Select Standard Note value from the list and select Confirm.

The system activates the Approval Control Manager form.

530

10.Man

agem

ent

Approval Control Manager - Line ID________________

10.4 Approval Control Manager - Line ID

This option approves piping using a list of line IDs with a data set of either models, designareas or on project-wide basis outside of the graphics environment. The system updates thedatabase approval status attribute and modifies the components, pipes, instruments, andsegments to the new colors and levels.

Commands

Project — Performs approval on the entire project using the specified search criteria.

Areas — Performs approval on the design areas using the specified search criteria andselect Confirm.

Models — Performs approval on the models using the specified search criteria andselect Cancel (X) from the Design Area display list form to accept the selected modelsand exit the selection process.

Submit for Processing — Allows you to submit the job for processing or to delaysubmission.

Field Descriptions

Revise Approval Status to: — Approval status is a code-listed attribute using thefollowing values


Once piping has an approved status, the system does not allow revisions without theapproval status first being revised.

Line Id File Name — Type the name of the line ID file.

The maximum number of line IDs that can be processed using a singleLine ID list file is determined by the following equation:

3700 / (28 + length of line_id attribute indesign.ddl)

With the delivered line_id attribute, 71 lines can be processed usinga single list file.

Line Id Directory — Type the name of the directory where the file resides.

531

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Line ID Network Address — Type the name of the network address where the fileresides.


You must have write access to all the piping models, design areas or the entire projectdepending on the data set you define for approval.

532

10.Man

agem

ent

Database Verification Manager________________

10.5 Database Verification Manager

This option checks for inconsistencies between a specified model file and the piping designdatabase. The system creates a report named model_number.dbv which lists any discrepanciesfound in the model. The comparisons consist of verifying:

All linkages in the model including information linked to segments correspond tooccurrences in the database. The system verifies that the information is in the correctpartition in the database and that all the occurrences in the database correspond tolinkages in the model.

All components are associated with existing (but not necessarily the correct) pipingsegments.

For graphics without database entries, the system modifies the color in the model. You canthen use the Repair Graphic Linkage to Database command. For database entries withoutgraphics, the system deletes the database entry after the report is run.

You can select any number of model files. The system compares the data in the model filewith the data in the database and reports any inconsistencies. It creates a report namedmodel_number.dbv which lists any discrepancies found in the model. For graphics withoutdatabase entries, the system modifies the color in the model. You can then use the RepairGraphic Linkage to Database command. For database entries without graphics, the systemdeletes the database entry after the report is run.

533


10.6 Component I/Forms Customization

This command customizes the definition of the piping commodity names or physical pipesupport model codes that appear in the forms required by the Piping Designer application.

If any error occurs while processing the forms, they are deleted from the currentworking directory to prevent confusion. Therefore, do not enter the PD_Shellenvironment while in the user’s forms directory. An error message is displayed whenyour working directory is the same as the forms directory.

If you use Form Builders to modify the forms, see Form Builder Guidelines, page 549 forguidelines.

The definition of the piping commodity names is specified by a neutral file. The pipingcommodity names appear in the following commands and on the corresponding forms.

Command Form

Place Component — PDplace_cmp.fb

Reconstruct Component — PDrpl_cmdty.fb

Replace Piping — PDreplace.fb

The definition of the physical pipe support model codes are specified bya neutral file. You can pre-define up to 12 groups of pipe support types.The model codes will appear in the following command and itscorresponding form.

Place Pipe Support — PSP000.fb

For either option, you can replace the default entries with those specified in the neutral file orappend user-defined names/codes to the default entries.

534

10.Man

agem

ent

Component I/Forms Customization________________

Commands

Commodities/Pipe Supports — Modifies either the piping commodity names on thepiping commodities forms or the pipe support model codes on the Place PhysicalSupport forms.

Rebuild/Append — Specify that the entries defined in the neutral file are to replacethose on the existing forms or whether they are to be to be appended the entries definedin the neutral file to those on the existing forms.

Field Descriptions

Keyin I/Forms Definition File — Type the name of the neutral file that defines thecommodity names/model codes to be included in the customizable forms. This neutralfile is expected to reside in the current working directory.

Mechanics

The system copies the affected forms from the forms directory to the current directory forprocessing.

If any error occurs while processing the neutral file, the system deletes the copied form(s)from the current working directory to avoid confusion.

535

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ If the forms are revised successfully, you must copy them to the forms directory locationspecified in the pds.cmd file to use them in the product.

The system performs the following actions when the piping commodity names are replaced onthe commodity item forms.

It copies the three forms from the forms directory specified in pds.cmd to the currentworking directory.

It deletes all forms gadgets associated with the forms group numbers 100 through 150from each of the three forms. This represents all piping commodity name buttons onthese forms.

For all commodity names except those in the primary group, it adds the new pipingcommodity names to each of these forms on the basis of the piping commodity namedefinition file. The piping commodity names are added to the forms in groups of 24gadgets (6 columns by 4 rows). A maximum of 51 groups can be created. A maximumof 600 piping commodity names can be created on these forms.

For the primary group of piping commodity names, it allocates piping commoditynames from the other groups in the following manner.

4 bends8 branches9 valves6 fittings3 flanges0 fire & safety components

For example, the first eight entries following the keyword BRANCHES will appear onthe primary form, and the remaining entries for this group will appear on the Branchesform. Commodity names to be included in the primary group are automatically limitedto one line of text with a maximum of 9 characters.

The system performs the following actions when the piping commodity names are beingappended to the commodity item forms.

It copies the three forms from the forms directory location specified in pds.cmd to thecurrent working directory.

It adds the new piping commodity names to each of these forms on the basis of thepiping commodity name definition file. The piping commodity names are added tothese forms at the end of the existing piping commodity names for the correspondinggroup with a maximum of 24 gadgets (6 columns by 4 rows) in any one group. A totalof 51 groups, including the default groups, are permitted in these forms.

The piping commodity names are added in the precedence of by column and then byrow. Piping commodity names can be appended to these forms up to a total of 600names.

536

10.Man

agem

ent

Component I/Forms Customization________________ The piping commodity name buttons in the primary group are created with a gadget size of 70x 25. All other piping commodity name buttons are created with a size of 70 x 35. Thepiping commodity group names, such as Bends, Branches, and Valves, are created with a sizeof 70 x 15.

The system performs the following actions when the pipe support names are being replacedon the form.

It copies the form from the forms directory location specified in pds.cmd to the currentworking directory.

It deletes all gadgets associated with the forms group numbers 100 through 150 fromthis form. This represents all pipe support name buttons on the form.

It adds the new pipe support model codes to the form on the basis of the pipe supportname definition file. The pipe support names are added in groups of 12 gadgets (6columns by 2 rows). A maximum of 51 groups can be created. A maximum of 600pipe support model codes can be created on this form. The pipe support group namesare added to the form from left to right on the basis of the order in the definition file.

All pipe support name buttons are created with a size of 70 x 50. The pipe supportgroup names are created with a size of 70 x 15.

The system performs the following actions when the pipe support model codes are beingappended to the form.

It copies the form from the forms directory location specified in pds.cmd to the currentworking directory.

It adds the new pipe support model codes to the form on the basis of the pipe supportname definition file. The pipe support model codes are added at the end of the existingpipe support model codes for the corresponding group with a maximum of 12 gadgets(6 columns by 2 rows) in any one group. A total of 51 groups, including the defaultgroups, are permitted in this form. The pipe support model codes are added in theprecedence of by column and then by row. Pipe support model codes can be appendedto this form up to a total of 600 model codes. The pipe support group names are used todetermine where to append the pipe support model codes.

All pipe support model code buttons will be created with equal size, 70 x 50.

Only those group buttons specified in the neutral file are displayed. If you specify 12 or lesspipe support model codes in only one group, that group button will not be displayed.


The neutral file to be processed must exist in the active working directory (the directory fromwhich you entered the PD_Shell environment). See the Piping Commodity Name NeutralFile, page 541 and the Pipe Support Model Codes Neutral File, page 545 for a detaileddescription of the neutral file formats.

537


10.7 Segment Data I/FormsCustomization

This command customizes how the brief list of piping segment data appears on the forms onwhich it is displayed in the Piping Designer application. This customization is defined in aneutral file which must reside in your current working directory.

If any error occurs while processing the forms, they are deleted from the currentworking directory to prevent confusion. Therefore, do not enter the PD_Shellenvironment while in the user’s forms directory. An error message is displayed whenyour working directory is the same as the forms directory.

If you use Form Builders to modify the forms, see Form Builder Guidelines, page 549 forguidelines.

The definition of the piping segment data is specified by a neutral file. The piping segmentdata appears in the following commands and the corresponding forms. Command Form

Active Segment Data — PDSASD.fb

Load/Update from P&ID Database — PDpid_data.fb

Review Attributes — PDSREV.fb

Revise Attributes — PDSRVS.fb

Revise Segment Data — PDrev_seg.fb

Attribute Break — PDatr_break.fb

538

10.Man

agem

ent

Segment Data I/Forms Customization________________


The neutral file to be processed must exist in the active working directory (the directory fromwhich you entered the PD_Shell environment). See the Segment Data Neutral File, page 546for a detailed description of the neutral file formats.

You must have write access to all of the piping models, design areas or the entire projectdepending on the data set you define for approval.

Mechanics

The system performs the following actions when the segment data information is replaced onthe segment data forms. You must then copy the forms into the forms directory of the product.

The brief list of piping segment data is added to these forms on the basis of the ’brieflist’ definition file. A maximum of seven rows of piping segment data fields arepermitted to be created. The number of fields per row are restricted by the length ofeach field on that row. Each row including spaces may not exceed 80 characters. Thefields are added to the form from left to right on the basis of the order in the definitionfile. The spacing between the fields is distributed evenly on the basis of unused space.The text for the attribute name is center-justified above the review field.

It copies the forms from the forms directory location specified in pds.cmd to the currentworking directory.

All forms gadgets associated with the forms group number 300 are deleted from theform. This represents all the brief piping segment data buttons and text on the form.

539


Copy Forms

Once the forms have been revised in the current working directory, make sure to copy theforms to the required location (win32app\pdshell\forms\). Also, make sure to copy the formsto all of the necessary workstations. If an error occurs while processing the neutral file, thesystem deletes the copied form(s) from the current working directory.

Set Default List

If you want the brief list to be displayed, make sure to define Brief List using the PipingSegment Data toggle on the Piping Data Control form. This form is found in the ProjectData Manager in the Project Administrator.

540

10.Man

agem

ent

Piping Commodity Name Neutral File________________

10.7.1 Piping Commodity Name Neutral File

The following is a description of the neutral file for piping commodity name definition. Adefault file is delivered with the PD_Design product in the filewin32app\ingr\pddesign\sample\commodity.form.

Use one of the following keywords to precede a group of piping commodities, such as bends.

BENDSBRANCHESFITTINGSFLANGESVALVESFIRE&SAFETY

Each keyword must be followed by a list of the piping commodities to be included (orappended) for that group. Each piping commodity includes a description and the pipingcommodity name (the name used to read from the Piping Job Specification) in the form.

"description" "commodity name"

The description text can appear on one or two lines (on the form button) and is limited to 9characters per line. The piping commodity name is limited to 6 characters. The definition foreach piping commodity must have one of the following formats.

For gadgets to be created with only one line of text:

"text for the button" "commodity name"

Example: "90ˆ" "6Q2C76"

For gadgets to be created with two lines of text:

"text on line one$text on line two" "commodity name"

Example: 90ˆ 3D$Elbow" "6Q2C86"

Piping commodity names to be included in the primary group are automatically limited to oneline of description text.

The following characters are reserved as special commodity names.

& 90 degree branch table

] variable angle branch table (uses the active bend angle)

The following characters are reserved as special prefixes for commodity names and result inspecialized processing as part of reading from the Material Reference Database.

541

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ & must precede any piping commodity name which is to be considered as a flange(used for specialized searches for flanges in the Material Reference Database on thebasis of pressure rating, end preparation, and table suffix and for automaticallydetermining the placement mode when connected to piping or a nozzle)

[ must precede any piping commodity name which is to be considered as a branchreinforcement component, thus resulting in branch reinforcement calculations

* must precede any piping commodity name which is to be considered as a reducer(used for automatically determining the placement mode when connected to piping or anozzle)

You can add comment lines anywhere in the neutral file, by inserting ! as the first column ofthe comment line. For example,

! Commodities Added on 4-Mar-92

Sample Neutral File

BENDS

"90ˆ" "6Q2C76"

"45ˆ–90ˆ" "6Q2C75"

"45ˆ" "6Q2C56"

"< 45ˆ" "6Q2C55"

"5.625ˆ$Elbow" "6Q2C49"

"11.25ˆ$Elbow" "6Q2C51"

"22.5ˆ$Elbow" "6Q2C53"

"45ˆ$Elbow" "6Q2C57"

"45ˆ Long$Radius" "6Q2C59"

"45ˆ Long$Tangent" "6Q2C60"

"45ˆ$Union" "6Q2C63"

"45ˆ$Street" "6Q2C65"

"45ˆ$Long" "6Q2C68"

"90ˆ$Union" "6Q2C88"

"Pipe$Bend" "6Q2C47"

"45ˆ 3D$Elbow" "6Q2C61"

"90ˆ$Reducing" "6Q2C84"

"45ˆ$Short" "6Q2C66"

"90ˆ Long$Rad/Tang" "6Q2C82"



"90ˆ Short$Radius" "6Q2C79"

"90ˆ Long$Radius" "6Q2C80"

"90ˆ Red$Street" "6Q2C91"

"90ˆ$Street" "6Q2C90"

"90ˆ 3D$Elbow" "6Q2C86"

"90ˆ$Short" "6Q2C93"

"90ˆ$Long" "6Q2C94"

"180ˆClose$Return" "6Q3C07"

"180ˆ$Return" "6Q3C01"

"180ˆShort$Return" "6Q3C03"

"Miter" "6Q3C14"

"180ˆ Long$Return" "6Q3C05"

"90ˆ$Miter" "6Q3C18"

"180ˆ Med$Return" "6Q3C08"

"180ˆ Open$Return" "6Q3C09"

"45ˆ$Miter" "6Q3C16"

FLANGES

"Default" "%6Q2C01"

"Orifice" "%6Q2C06"

"Blind" "6Q2C08"

"Weldneck" "%6Q2C01"

"Long$Weldneck" "%6Q2C01"

"Slip-On" "%6Q2C01"

"Reducing$Slip-On" "%6Q2C03"

"Reducing$Plate" "%6Q2C03"

"Plate" "%6Q2C01"

"Reducing$Threaded" "%6Q2C03"

"Expander$Flange" "6Q2C04"

"Reducing$Flange" "%6Q2C03"

"Threaded" "%6Q2C01"

"Socket$Weld" "%6Q2C01"

"Lap Joint" "%6Q2C01"

542

10.Man

agem

ent

Piping Commodity Name Neutral File________________

BRANCHES

"90 Degree" "&"

"Tee" "6Q3C22"

"R/Pad" "[6Q3C80"

"Elbolet" "6Q3C77"

"Var Angle" "]"

"Weldolet" "6Q3C73"

"R/Weld" "[6Q3C82"

"Endolet" "6Q3C79"

"Sockolet" "6Q3C74"

"Reducing$Brnch Tee" "6Q3C24"

"Street$Tee" "6Q3C31"

"Saddle" "6Q3C70"

"Latrolet" "6Q3C78"

"Nippolet" "6Q3C76"

"Sweepolet" "6Q3C72"

"Red Run &$Brnch Tee" "6Q3C25"

"Drip Ring$Tee" "6Q3C36"

"Lateral" "6Q3C47"

"Reducing$Lateral" "6Q3C49"

"Red Run &$Brnch Lat" "6Q3C50"

"Wye" "6Q3C45"

"Reducing$Short Wye" "6Q3C53"

"Cross" "6Q3C60"

"Reducing$Cross" "6Q3C62"

"Threadolet" "6Q3C75"

"Basin$Tee" "6Q3C38"

"On-Run$Union Tee" "6Q3C27"

"On-Brnch$Union Tee" "6Q3C28"

"Reducing$Instr Tee" "6Q3C34"

"Reducing$Long Wye" "6Q3C55"

"90ˆ Long$Wye" "6Q3C54"

"90ˆ Short$Wye" "6Q3C52"

"Basin$Cross" "6Q3C64"

"Red Run &$Brnch Crs" "6Q3C63"

"Buttweld" "6Q3C84"

VALVES

"Gate" "6Q1C01"

"Vent/Drn" "6Q1C76"

"Plug" "6Q1C16"

"Globe" "6Q1C11"

"Butterfly" "6Q1C26"

"Inst Root" "6Q1C80"

"Ball" "6Q1C06"

"Check" "6Q1C38"

"Wafer Chk" "6Q1C39"

"Stop$Check" "6Q1C41"

"Ang Stop$Check" "6Q1C42"

"Y Stop$Check" "6Q1C43"

"3 Way$Inst Root" "6Q1C81"

"3 Way$Ball" "6Q1C08"

"Deluge" "6Q1C69"

"3 Way$Plug" "6Q1C18"

"4 Way$Plug" "6Q1C19"

"4 Way$Inst Root" "6Q1C82"

"3 Way$Slide" "6Q1C34"

"Ext Body$Gate" "6Q1C02"

"Conduit$Gate" "6Q1C03"

"Blank$Gate" "6Q1C04"

"Knife$Gate" "6Q1C32"

"Tank$Drain" "6Q1C62"

"Hose" "6Q1C72"

"3 Way$Globe" "6Q1C13"

"Y Globe" "6Q1C14"

"Angle$Globe" "6Q1C12"

"Diaphragm" "6Q1C30"

"Foot" "6Q1C58"

"Angle$Hose" "6Q1C73"

"Float" "6Q1C57"

"Angle$Check" "6Q1C40"

"Angle" "6Q1C37"

"Slide" "6Q1C33"

"3 Way" "6Q1C05"

"Back Flow$Preventer" "6Q1C50"

"Angle$Blowdown" "6Q1C53"

"Y$Blowdown" "6Q1C54"

"Pinch" "6Q1C56"

"Needle" "6Q1C22"

"Automat$Recirc" "6Q1C51"

FITTINGS

"Concentric" "*6Q2C23"

"Eccentric" "*6Q2C24"

"Br Nipple" "6Q3C88"

"End" "6Q2C16"

"Cap" "6Q2C21"

"Plug" "6Q2C19"

"Concentric$Reducer" "6Q2C27"

"Eccentric$Reducer" "6Q2C28"

"Concentric$Swage" "6Q2C35"

543


"Eccentric$Swage" "6Q2C36"

"Reducing$Insert" "6Q2C46"

"Reducing$Coupling" "6Q2C32"

"Bushing" "6Q2C44"

"Blank$Disc" "6Q2C12"

"Head" "6Q2C17"

"Half$Coupling" "6Q2C26"

"In-Line$Nipple" "6Q3C89"

"Open$Spc Blank" "%6Q2C10"

"Closed$Spc Blank" "%6Q2C11"

"Blind$Spacer" "%6Q2C13"

"Open$Spacer" "%6Q2C15"

"Tapered$Spacer" "%6Q2C14"

"Coupling/$Connector" "6Q2C25"

"Hose$Connect" "%6Q2C43"

"Union" "%6Q2C39"

"Orifice$Union" "%6Q2C40"

"Dielect$Union" "6Q2C41"

FIRE&SAFETY

"Fire$Monitor" "6Q4C01"

"Elev Fire$Monitor" "6Q4C02"

"3/W Fire$Hydrant" "6Q4C13"

"Hose Rack$Station" "6Q4C25"

"Spray$Sprinkler" "6Q4C32"

"Rem Fire$Monitor" "6Q4C03"

"Rem Foam$Monitor" "6Q4C06"

"Elev Foam$Monitor" "6Q4C05"

"Foam$Monitor" "6Q4C04"

"Fire$Hydrant" "6Q4C10"

"Hydrant$w/Nozzle" "6Q4C11"

"Eye$Wash" "6Q4C38"

"Safety$Shower" "6Q4C39"

"Shower &$Eye Wash" "6Q4C40"

"Pre-Action$Sprinkler" "6Q4C31"

"Wet$Sprinkler" "6Q4C30"

"Foam$Chamber" "6Q4C26"

"Hose$Reel" "6Q4C24"

"Siamese" "6Q4C60"

"90ˆ$Siamese" "6Q4C66"

544

10.Man

agem

ent

Pipe Support Model Codes Neutral File________________

10.7.2 Pipe Support Model Codes Neutral File

The following is a description of the neutral file for the physical pipe support name definitionfile. A default file is delivered with the PD_Design product in the filewin32app\ingr\pddesign\sample\support.form. A group of pipe supports must be preceded byone of as many as 12 user-specified keywords that are applicable to that group of pipesupports. The name of the group is limited to 9 characters. The syntax for the user-specifiedgroup of pipe supports is as follows.

GROUP "name of group"

Each keyword must be followed by a list of the pipe supports to be included (or appended).Each pipe support includes a description (or a symbol key), the pipe support model code, andthe name of the pipe support’s form, if applicable. The description text may appear on asmany as three lines (on the form button) with each line limited to 9 characters. You can alsospecify the number of a symbol from a symbol library, in place of a text description. Thesymbol is expected to reside in a symbol library named USERsymbols, that resides in thewin32app\ingr\pdshell\sym directory, on the local workstation. The pipe support model codeis limited to 6 characters. The definition for each pipe support must have one of the followingformats.

For gadgets to be created with only one line of text:

"text for the form button" "model code" "form name"

For gadgets to be created with two lines of text:

"text on line 1$text on line 2" "model code" "form name"

For gadgets to be created with three lines of text:

"text on line 1$text on line 2$text on line 3" "model code" "form name"

For gadgets to be created with a symbol or icon:

"#symbol number" "model code" "form name"

You can add comment lines anywhere in the neutral file, by inserting ! as the first column ofthe comment line.

545


10.7.3 Segment Data Neutral File

The following is a description of the segment data neutral file. The file is expected to residein your current working directory. You must define a neutral file as described below:

Define fields for piping segment data on as many as seven rows. The number of fieldsthat are defined on a each row is restricted on the basis of the sum of the lengths of eachof the fields on that row.

The description for each row of fields must be preceded by a keyword to define the rownumber, ’Row n’, where ’n’ is the row number with a value of one through seven.

Following the definition of the row number must be one line of data for each attribute.The definition of the field for each attribute must contain the following data, usingcommas as delimiters:

— The attribute number for the applicable column in the Piping Segment Data Table,PDtable_12_n, in the Piping Design Database. You may determine this value fromthe ’design.ddl’ in the ’project directory’.

— The field length for the attribute. The field length determines the number ofcharacters of data that are displayed. For alphanumber data, the field length may beless than the default length in the database, but should not be less than themaximum length for any one value.

— The attribute name to be displayed on the form. The text for the attribute name iscentered above the field corresponding to that attribute. The format of the definitionof the attribute field is shown below:

2, 40, "LINE NUMBER LABEL"

where 2 is the attribute number, 40 is the field length, and "LINE NUMBERLABEL" (must be in quotes) is the attribute name.

You may add ’comment’ lines anywhere in the brief segment data list neutral file, aslong as the first column of that line is the special comment delimiter ’!’.

You must define a row number on one line, and then follow that by one or more linesdefining the attributes on that row with no more than one attribute defined per line oftext.

You must number rows as 1-8 in the following format: ROW <row number 1-8>.

The keyword for the row number is case insensitive. In other words, ROW, Row, androw are all valid keywords.

A column number of 0 may be used to place text only, without a field for an attribute.This may be useful for those fields which require multiples lines of text. The text iscentered over an imaginary field based on the number of characters displayed that hasbeen defined.

546

10.Man

agem

ent

Segment Data Neutral File________________ The following special column numbers must be used for data that is not loaded into therelational database.

— 902 insulation thickness units

— 903 flow direction

The number of characters displayed is not applicable to the special column numbers.These fields have the following lengths:

— 902, 13 insulation thickness units

— 903, 19 flow direction

The gadget representing flow direction will not be added to forms where it alreadyexists.

Default Customization

The following example demonstrates how the default forms have been customized. A defaultfile is included in the PD_Design sample directory as brief.form.

ROW 12,40,"Line Number Label"3,24,"Line ID"4,16,"Unit Number"901,20,""

ROW 25,4,"Unit Code"9,10,"Fluid Code"10,16,"Line Sequence Number"8,4,"Train Number"

ROW 312,16,"Piping Materials Class"11,10,"Nominal Piping Diameter"23,8,"Schedule/Thickness Override"

ROW 40,40,Insulation0,40,Heat Tracing

ROW 514,10,"Purpose"15,10,"Thickness"902,10,"System of Units"17,10,"Requirements"18,10,"Media"

ROW 60,40,Normal Operating Conditions0,40,Normal Design Conditions

547


ROW 724, 12, "Pressure"0,8,25, 12, "Temperature"0,4,28, 12, "Pressure"0,8,29, 12, "Temperature"

548

10.Man

agem

ent

Form Builder Guidelines________________

10.7.4 Form Builder Guidelines

You can also modify the delivered forms directly using Form Builder. Form Builder is partof the I/Forms Development Toolkit (FORMS) product. This is an optional product whichmust be purchased separately. It is not included with the delivered system nucleus or includedwith the PDS products.

Refer to the Intergraph I/FORMS Reference Manual, the Intergraph I/FORMS Programmer’sGuide and the Intergraph I/FORMS Programmer’s Reference Manual for more informationon using the Form Builder product.

You must adhere to the following guidelines if you revise any of these forms through theForm Builder product.

Do not create form groups or gadgets in the range of 100 through 150, 300, or 401-903.

Do not change the forms command key for the Bends, Branches, Fittings, Flanges,Valves, or Fire & Safety gadgets.

Do not change the forms command key for the pipe support group or brief list gadgets.

Do not delete the forms group number 100 or delete or revise in any way the Bends,Branches, Fittings, Flanges, Valves, or Fire & Safety buttons from group number100.

Do not add additional buttons to group number 100 with the text Bends, Branches,Fittings, Flanges, Valves, or Fire & Safety.

Do not add gadgets to the piping commodity names forms groups with the text Bends,Branches, Fittings, Flanges, Valves, or Fire & Safety.

549


10.8 Inspection Iso Data Manager

Each item in the as-built model (that has been upgraded to PDS version 6.0, or was designedusing PDS version 6.0 or greater) can have inspection iso key numbers assigned to it.

Inspection key numbers are used to assist in maintenance or modification of the existing plantand the as-built model. The ISOGEN module can produce isometric drawings using theinspection iso key numbers so that maintenance personnel can easily locate and identifyspecific components ans their connection points.

Inspection Iso Data Manager loads inspection key numbers for each piping, equipment, orinstrumentation item into the RDB. Each piping, equipment, or instrument item will receiveone inspection key number for each connection point, and one inspection key number for theitem itself. An illustration of a piping segment with a tee is shown below; each number in theillustration represents an inspection iso key number.

Selecting the Inspection Iso Data Manager command from the Design Data Managementmanu activates the Inspection Iso Data Manager menu.

550

10.Man

agem

ent

Inspection Iso Data Manager________________

Commands

Load Inspection Iso IDs — Scans each piping model in the active project, then loadseach line ID number into PD_table 118. When this process is complete, a log file(pdinsiso.rep) is written to the temp directory.

Load Inspection Iso Keys — Writes inspection iso key numbers for every piping,equipment, or instrumentation component found on every pipeline specified.

Mechanics

For each inspection iso line, the inspection key numbers start at 1 and are incremented andinserted into the attributes of each pipe, component, or connection (weld, bolted section) asthe items are found. Pipe supports are numbered after all pipes and piping components havebeen numbered; this results in the pipe supports having key numbers significantly higher thanthe nearby keys. Only one inspection key will be created for pipe supports; inspection keyswill not be created at the points where pipe supports and piping are connected.

The highest inspection key number used is stored in the Project COntrol Database (PD_table118) for later use by the Revise Inspection Key command.

If two inspection iso lines share a common inspection point, this inspection point will belongto only one inspection iso, and will be reported only with the iso line to which it belongs. Forexample, assume that two inspection iso lines are connected by a weld. The weld be will beowned by the inspection iso line associated with the component at the welded joint that hasthe lower easting coordinate value at its component center. If the easting coordinate valuesare the same, the lower northing coordinate value will be used to determine ownership of thisweld. If the northing coordinate values are the same, the lower elevation coordinate of thecomponent centers will determine ownership of the weld.

Both the Load Inspection Keys command and the Revise Inspection Keys command willlock the appropriate models to prevent simultaneous use by other users.

551


10.8.1 Inspection Key Loader

This command writes inspection iso key numbers for every piping, equipment, orinstrumentation component found on every inspection pipeline specified. Pipelines to beprocessed for receipt of inspection iso keys are specified by user-selected criteria. You canprocess all line IDs listed listed in PD_table 118 or in a user-created ASCII file, on a project-wide basis, or in selected design areas, or in selected models.

Commands

Project — Sets the inspection key loader to process the entire active project.

Design Areas — Sets the inspection key loader to process only selected design areas.

Models — Sets the inspection key loader to process only selected models.

Selection of Inspection Lines by System / Selection of Inspection Lines by User —Accepting the system default, Selection of Inspection Lines by System, processes allinspection lines listed in PD_table 118 for the selected geographical extent. Using theSelection of Inspection Lines by User option activates the File Name, Path Name,and Network Address fields to allow you to specify the location of the user-createdsearch criteria file that specifies which line IDs will receive inspection iso key numbers.

The user-defined search criteria file for this command must list each inspection iso linenumber (from PD_table 118) to be loaded on a separate line of the file.

552

10.Man

agem

ent

Inspection Key Loader________________

Field Descriptions

File Name — Type the name of the ASCII file to be used for user-specified loading ofinspection iso keys.

Path Name — Type the path to the ASCII file to be used for user-specified loading ofinspection iso keys.

Network Address — Type the node name of the system that houses the ASCII searchcriteria file.

Submission Time — Specify the day, hour, minute, and AM/PM designation for thetime to submit the job for processing.

553


10.9 Weld Numbering

These commands allow you to create, apply, or delete user-defined weld numbers for welds inthe project.

Commands

Revise Weld Numbering Settings — Provides options for how user-defined weldnumbers are created and assigned. See Revise Weld Numbering Settings, page 557, formore information.

Load Weld IDs on Segments — Scans each piping model in the active project andloads each weld ID number into pdtable_171. Refer to Load Weld IDs on Segments,page 559, for more information.

Load Weld Numbers — Generates weld numbers at each welded connect point byproject, selected areas, models, or individually. For more information, refer to LoadWeld Numbers, page 561.

Delete Weld Numbers — Removes weld numbers from each welded connect point forall piping models in the selected group: by project, areas, models, or weld ID. For moreinformation, refer to Delete Weld Numbers, page 563.

554

10.Man

agem

ent

Weld Numbering________________

Mechanics

User-defined weld numbering uses a Weld ID Label (353) to define the search criterion thatdetermines a line break for weld numbering. The label has two purposes:

Defines the weld number prefix for the generated weld number. The combination of theweld ID and the weld sequence number should be unique within the project.

Defines the search criterion that defines a line break for restarting weld numbers.

The weld ID Label is user-definable and can include attributes from the Piping Segment Datatable. For example, a Weld Number label might be defined as

Area (dd_schema.pdtable_12.design_area_number)-Unit Code (dd_schema.pdtable_12.unit_code)Line Sequence No (dd_schema.pdtable_12.line_sequence_no)-

Distiller-380105-1

The value formatted by the Weld ID label is stored in the piping segment data in a newcolumn named weld_id (ddschema.pdtable_12.weld_id). This column is populatedautomatically when any of the values associated with the Weld ID label are modified. That is,it behaves in the same manner as the line_id and line_number_label columns.

Numbering Scheme

You can maintain a single sequence for all welds or maintain individual sequences for eachweld category (shop, field, or offshore). The weld categories are determined by the range ofweld type code list values from codelist 1100.

0 - 19 shop welds20 - 29 field welds30 - 39 offshore welds

The highest weld numbers assigned for each Weld ID are stored in the Project ControlDatabase (pdtable_171.weld_id_data) for later use by the Load Weld Numbers command.

Weld Number Assignment

For user-defined welds, the Load Weld Numbers command provides the followingfunctionality:

Run as a batch job outside the piping model so that weld numbers can be assigned atmodel boundaries. In traversing the Weld ID, the command will process across allpiping models required to finish the weld number search criteria request.

555

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ For each Weld ID, weld numbers are assigned to the line in sequence starting from 1 orfrom the highest existing weld number on the line. The weld numbers are inserted intothe weld_no column for each welded connect point of a pipe, component, or instrumentas the items are found.

The combination of the weld ID and the weld sequence number will result in uniqueweld numbers based on user-defined search criteria.

Weld number assignments will use a traversal algorithm controlled by a toggle with thefollowing options:

— Topology (default) - start from the point on the line with the lowest easting,northing, and elevation coordinate value and work along the line.

— Reverse Topology - start from the point on the line with the highest easting,northing, and elevation coordinate value and work back along the line.

The following rules apply when running Load Weld Numbers after weld numbers havealready been loaded for some of the pipelines:

If the weld number is undefined, the software will assign the next available weldnumber, as determined from the highest weld number used for that Weld ID.

New weld numbers will be assigned only to connect points that do not already have avalue for weld number.

The setting for Remodel Revision Control will determine how the system assigns weldnumbers if there is a mismatch, by having a weld number at one side of a weldedmating and a blank on the other side. The software will assign the weld number fromthe intact half to the blank end or assign a new weld number to both the mating end.

For welded joints at a weld ID break, the mating end with the highest coordinate valuewill own the weld and determine the sequence number assignment.

Weld Number Deletion

The Delete Weld Numbers command can be used to delete any existing weld numbers. Youcan delete weld numbers based on search criteria: Project, Area, Model, or Weld ID(s). Thiscommand will delete any loaded PDS weld number (system or user-defined) for the selectedentries.

556

10.Man

agem

ent

Revise Weld Numbering Settings________________

10.9.1 Revise Weld Numbering Settings

These commands allow you to choose from user- or system-defined weld numbers. If you aregenerating user-defined weld numbers, you can select the traversal and sequencing methods.These settings are stored in pdtable_171 in the Project Control Database.

Field Descriptions

Weld Numbering Type — Indicates the method for generating the PDS weld numbers.

— System Weld Numbers - Weld numbers can be generated using the Load WeldNumbers Command in Piping Designer. Refer to Load Weld Numbers, page 337for more information.

— User Defined Weld Numbers - Weld numbers can be generated using the LoadWeld Numbers command in Piping Design Data Manager. Refer toLoad Weld Numbers, page 561 . The other fields on this dialog are available onlywhen this toggle is set to User Defined Weld Numbers.

Weld Number Sequencing Type — Indicates the method for sequencing user-definedweld numbers.

— Single Sequence for all Weld Categories - Welds will be numbered sequentiallyper weld ID.

— Separate Sequence for each Weld Categories - Welds will be numberedsequentially per weld ID and weld category (shop, field, or off-shore).

557

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Remodel Revision Control — Indicates how to handle weld numbers in the situationwhere one side of a welded connection has been deleted after weld numbers wereloaded.

— Assign New Weld Numbers - Delete the weld number from the intact half andassign a new weld number at the mating.

— Reassign from intact half - Assign the existing weld number from the intact half tothe new item at the mating.

Line Traversal — Indicates how the pipelies will be scanned for weld numbering. TheTopology option indicates that the welds will be numbered from the lowest coordinate,along the main line, and then along any branches. The Reverse Topology optionindicates that weld numbers will start with the highest coordinate and move toward thelowest, also moving first along the main line and then along the branches.

558

10.Man

agem

ent

Load Weld IDs on Segments________________

10.9.2 Load Weld IDs on Segments

This command scans each piping model in the active project and loads the following:

Each distinct weld ID into pdtable_171 of the project schema.

The weld ID for each piping segement in to the weld_id column in pdtable_12 of thedesign schema.

Only unapproved piping segments are processed. No weld IDs are loaded for any approvedpipelines.

Label 355 must be defined in the Label Description Library to determine the segmentattributes that constitute a weld ID. As delivered in PDS 7.0, the Weld ID is defined to be thesame as the Line ID.

When this process is complete, a log file (pdldwids.rep) is written to a subdirectory(wi<process_id>) of TEMP.

SAMPLE LOG FILE

INFO: Project Name:5_adsINFO: Initializing Project DatabaseINFO: Project Database Initialization CompleteINFO: Initializing Design DatabaseINFO: Design Database Initialization CompleteINFO: Opened Label Description LibraryINFO: Successfully Initialized Data for Model pipea1m1INFO: Successfully Initialized Data for Model pipea1m2INFO: Successfully Initialized Data for Model pipea1m3INFO: Successfully Initialized Data for Model doc_pipe1INFO: Successfully Initialized Data for Model doc_pipe2

Elapse time = 1:20Cpu time = 1:20

.*****. Segment Weld ID Loader Job Error Log Creation Time: May09, 2001

Started Loading Segment Weld IDs in model ’pipea1m1’.Finished Loading Segment Weld IDs in model ’pipea1m1’.Started Loading Segment Weld IDs in model ’pipea1m2’.Finished Loading Segment Weld IDs in model ’pipea1m2’.Started Loading Segment Weld IDs in model ’pipea1m3’.Finished Loading Segment Weld IDs in model ’pipea1m3’.Started Loading Segment Weld IDs in model ’doc_pipe1’.Finished Loading Segment Weld IDs in model ’doc_pipe1’.Started Loading Segment Weld IDs in model ’doc_pipe2’.

6 - No Unapproved Segments Found for Model ’doc_pipe2’ to Loadthe Weld ID

Finished Loading Segment Weld IDs in model ’doc_pipe2’.End of Segment Weld ID Loader Job.

559


Field Descriptions

Submit Immediately/Delayed Submit — Allows you to submit the processing jobimmediately or delay the job submission to batch.


560

10.Man

agem

ent

Load Weld Numbers________________

10.9.3 Load Weld Numbers

These commands allow you to generate user-defined weld numbers at each welded mating fora set of pipelines. You can identify the lines to process by project, selected areas, specificmodels, or individually. Additionally, you can generate weld numbers by identifying aspecific ASCII file that contains a list of the weld IDs for which you need to create weldnumbers.

Commands

Selection of Welds IDs by System

— Project — Generates weld numbers for the welds in all piping models in theproject.

— Design Area — Generates weld numbers for the welds in the piping models withinthe selected area.

— Models — Generates weld numbers for the welds in the selected piping models.

— Weld IDs — Creates weld numbers for a selected line (weld ID) or set of lines.

Selection of Weld IDs by User

— File Name —Type the name of the ASCII file to be used for user-specified loadingof weld numbers. This file should contain a list of weld IDs (1 per line) to beprocessed.

561


— Path Name — Type the path to the ASCII file to be used for the user-specifiedloading of weld numbers.

— Network Address — Type the node name of the system that houses the ASCIIsearch criteria file.

Submit Immediately/Delayed Submit — Allows you to submit the weld numbercreation job immediately or delay the job to batch.


562

10.Man

agem

ent

Delete Weld Numbers________________

10.9.4 Delete Weld Numbers

These commands allow you to remove any or all PDS weld numbers loaded to the designdatabase. You can remove weld numbers by project, area, model, individually, or using anASCII file that contains a list of specific weld IDs.

Commands

Selection of Weld IDs by System

— Project — Removes weld numbers from all the welds in the entire project.

— Design Area — Deletes weld numbers from the welds in the piping models withinthe selected area.

— Models — Removes weld numbers from the welds in the selected piping models.

— Weld IDs — Deletes weld numbers from a selected line (weld ID) or set of lines.

Selection of Weld IDs by the User

— File Name —Type the name of the ASCII file to be used for the removal of user-specified weld numbers.

— Path Name — Type the path to the ASCII file to be used for the removal of user-specified weld numbers.

563


— Network Address — Type the node name of the system that houses the ASCIIsearch criteria file.

Submit Immediately/Delayed Submit — Allows you to submit the weld numbercreation job immediately or to delay the job to batch.


564

11. Tran

sfer

P&ID Data Transfer________________

11. P&ID Data Transfer

This section describes the conventions that apply to the loading, updating, and comparison ofpiping segment data between the P&ID Database and the piping model. This section alsodescribes the method for transferring data between SmartPlant P&ID and PDS 3D.

The PDS P&ID data can be transfered to the piping model using several commands:

Sketch

Place Component

Revise Attributes

Attribute Break

What can be done with the Piping DataTransfer Options?

1. You can transfer Segment Data from the P&ID on the following forms:

— on the Active Segment Data form while Sketching or Placing Components. Seethe Active Segment Data, page 50 section for more information.

— on the Revise Attributes form. See the Revise Attribute, page 304 section for moreinformation.

— on the Attribute Break form. See the Attribute Break, page 310 section for moreinformation.

2. While placing piping, you can retrieve the AABBCC codes for components fromP&IDs.

3. While placing specialty items and instruments, you can retrieve tag numbers from theP&ID.

4. You can snap to an off-page connector to window in on the connected drawing andhighlight the segments with the correct line ID.

5. You can generate and print a Segment Data report which contains any discrepancies inpiping segment data between the P&ID database and the Piping Design database in thebatch environment.

— This report is created using the P&ID Comparison Report Manager in the PipingDesign Data Management module.

565


— The P&ID Comparison Review command uses a binary version of the SegmentData report to interactively review discrepancies and update segment data in thepiping model during a piping design session. You must first create a Segment Datareport for this command to work successfully.

6. You can generate a Named Component Existence report from the P&ID ComparisonReport Manager form, which checks for consistency in the existence of namedcomponents, specialites and instruments by their tag numbers. This report is createdusing the P&ID Comparison Report Manager on the Design Data Managementform.

7. You can edit any attribute including the ones being downloaded. The downloadedattributes are color coded to allow you to see the transfer values more easily. On acomplete transfer, the transferred attribute values are yellow, and other attributes areblack. On a partial transfer, the transferred attributes are blue, any default attributes arered, and other attributes are black.

566

11. Tran

sfer

PDS P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer________________

11.1 PDS P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer

11.1.1 Database Requirements

The P&ID database and Piping database must share the same risschema. In order forthis to be so, the 2D and 3D projects must have the same name.

The P&ID database tables should have their privileges granted to PUBLIC.

The unit_no and line_id attributes must be consistent for P&ID and Piping.

The P&IDs must have been successfully propagated with an OK status.

The P&IDs should be propagated with Load labels, node markers and PJS look upoptions.

The correlated attributes in the 2D and 3D databases should be of the same data type(integer, codelisted, character, etc.).

567


11.1.2 P&ID Correlation Table

The P&ID Correlation Table, also known as the pid_to_piping file, is an ASCII file used tocorrelate a particular column or columns in the P&ID segment table of the P&ID Databasewith a corresponding column in the piping segment table of the Piping Design Database.

The P&ID Correlation Table defines which database columns are to be transferred andcompared.

Any columns not specified in the Correlation Table will not be transferred.

Correlation table files must reside in the project directory for the piping project.

The pid_to_piping file maps P&ID columns to Piping columns for either Complete orPartial data transfer. This file is delivered with PD_SHELL product and is copied to theproject directory when a new project is created.

The pid_npd_equiv file maps the P&ID codelist values of Nominal Piping Diameter(NPD) to Piping values of NPD. This file is delivered with PD_SHELL product and iscopied to the project directory when a new project is created.

When editing the pid_npd_equiv file, either start with the first characteron the left margin, or tab (do not use the space bar) to the first character,then enter the edits. Make sure that any new entries are added to boththe metric and english sections in the same order.

You can define a pid_instrument file to use while generating the Named ComponentExistence report.

Any 2D attribute with a floating point will be handled as an integer whentransferred to 3D. The 3D software only accepts decimals to the thousandthplace.

The P&ID column numbers required in the Correlation table are from the relational databaseand are not the P&ID attribute numbers.

During the interactive loading of segment data, you can specify that either a complete orpartial set of data be considered. The Correlation Table specifies which columns are to beloaded, updated, or compared for both complete and partial data transfer.

Most piping segment data is transferred as is, but some data requires minimal conversion forloading into the piping model. The following attributes require data conversion due todiffering requirements and database storage techniques between the piping model and theP&ID drawing:

nominal piping diameter

The nominal piping diameter value and the nominal piping diameter units from theP&ID Database are used to create a nominal piping diameter value with the unitsembedded for storage in the piping model. Note the piping model’s column number fornominal piping diameter units in the default Correlation Table is ’-1’.

568

11. Tran

sfer

P&ID Correlation Table________________ undefined values for decimal attributes

flow direction

schedule/thickness override


The insulation thickness units from the P&ID Database are used to update the insulationthickness units flag for the piping segment in the model to either same as model or sameas npd.

If the insulation thickness system of units (English or metric) in the P&ID database isequivalent to the nominal piping diameter system of units in the P&ID database, theinsulation thickness units flag for the piping segment in the model is set to same as npd,the default. If the insulation thickness system of units in the P&ID database differsfrom the nominal piping diameter system of units in the P&ID database, the insulationthickness units flag for the piping segment in the model is set to same as model. Ineither case, if the specific insulation thickness units in the P&ID database differs fromthe piping model’s subunits, the insulation thickness value will be converted.

Note the piping model’s column number for insulation thickness units in the defaultCorrelation Table is ’-1’.

insulation density

The insulation density and the insulation density units from the P&ID Database areused with the piping model’s insulation density units to convert an insulation densityvalue for the piping segment in the model.

Note the piping model’s column number for insulation density units in the defaultCorrelation Table is ’-1’.

heat tracing media temperature units

The heat tracing media temperature and the heat tracing media temperature units fromthe P&ID Database are used with the piping model’s temperature units to convert a heattracing media temperature value for the piping segment in the model.

Note the piping model’s column number for heat tracing media temperature units in thedefault Correlation Table is ’-1’.

The Correlation Table is expected to exist in the project directory (where the seed model, seeddrawings, etc., are) for the applicable project. A default Correlation Table is delivered in thePD_Shell product and is automatically copied to the project directory when a new project iscreated. You can edit the Correlation Table, if required, to add columns to or delete columnsfrom both the complete and partial data transfer processes. An asterisk (*) signifies that datatransfer and comparison is applicable for that particular column. You may add user-definedcolumns of piping segment data to the Correlation Table.

569


When transferring data, you must place an * in the complete column.If you place an * in the partial column and you do not have an * in thecomplete column of the pid_to_piping file, this attribute is interpreted as acomplete transfer.

The "-" in the second column indicates that location is hard coded for the valueof this attribute. The user does not have the option to enter a value for thislocation. If override of this value is needed, a new entry must be made in thisfile.

The default Correlation Table is listed below:

# Segment Data Model P&ID Complete Partial

#If you desire to default the ’non-partial’ attributes during a partial transfer of

#data, in the partial column place a ’-’, skip at least one space, and define the

#default value. The default value will be used whenever an interactive transfer

#occurs, or if the toggle is set for the batch update. The complete,

#partial and default values are supported ONLY in this section of the file.

#example: attribute_one 99 100 * - default_value

unit_number 4 13

unit_code 5 2 * *

module_no 6 79 *

package_system_no 7 81 *

train_number 8 23 * *

fluid_code 9 22 * *

line_sequence_no 10 24 * *

nominal_piping_dia 11 15 *

npd_units -1 16

piping_mater_class 12 25 * *

insulation_purpose 14 26 * *

insulation_thick 15 28 *

insulation_thick_units -1 29

insulation_density 16 30 * *

insulation_density_units -1 31

heat_tracing_reqmt 17 73 * *

heat_tracing_media 18 74 * *

heat_tracing_temp 19 75 * *

heat_tracing_temp_units -1 76

construction_stat 20 60 * *

hold_status 21 83 * *

schedule_override 23 66 *

nor_oper_pres 24 39 *

nor_oper_temp 25 41 *

alt_oper_pres 26 43 *

alt_oper_temp 27 45 *

nor_dgn_pres 28 47 *

nor_dgn_temp 29 49 *

alt_dgn_pres 30 51 *

alt_dgn_temp 31 53 *

steam_outlet_temp 32 86 *

mater_of_construct 33 61 *

safety_class 34 59 *

design_resp 37 69 *

construction_resp 38 78 *

supply_resp 39 71 *

coating_reqmts 40 72 *

cleaning_reqmts 41 77 *

fluid_category 42 84 *

nor_op_pres_units 43 40 *

nor_op_temp_units 44 42 *

alt_op_pres_units 45 44 *

alt_op_temp_units 46 46 *

nor_dgn_pres_units 47 48 *

nor_dgn_temp_units 48 50 *

alt_dgn_pres_units 49 52 *

alt_dgn_temp_units 50 54 *

steam_temp_units 51 87 *

test_system_no 64 55 *

test_fluid 65 56 *

test_pressure 66 57 *

### Data extracted from the Piping Segment Table ( piping_seg, 112 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

570

11. Tran

sfer

P&ID Correlation Table________________ # upstrm_node_no

pid_node_number_a - 10

# dwnstrm_node_no

pid_node_number_b - 11

flow_direction - 14

# line_no_label

line_number_label - 21

# dwg_occ_no

drawing_segment_index_no - 3

line_id - 12

# piping_thk_flag

piping_thickness_flag - 68

### Data extracted from the Equipment Table ( eq_group, 106 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

equipment_number - 7

### Data extracted from the Equipment Nozzle Table ( eq_nozz, 108 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

nozzle_number - 5

# pid_seg_occ_no

nozzle_segment_index - 4

# eq_grp_occ_no

equipment_nozzle_index - 2

# node_no

equip_nozzle_node_no - 13

### Data extracted from the Piping Component Table ( piping_comp, 120 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

#piping_comp_table is the delimiter to signal the information below belongs to

# P&ID’s piping_comp table and Piping’s pdtable_34_<partition_number>.

# piping_comp_table signals that the following attributes belong to pdtable_34.

piping_comp_table

piping_comp_number 2 6

aabbcc_code 3 9

commodity_code_flag - 28

cmdty_code 8 29

# opt attribute in P&ID is placed into the option_code attribute in Piping

commodity_option_code 5 27

# pid_seg_occ_no

comp_segment_index_no - 3

# dwg_occ_no

comp_drawing_index_no - 2

# generic_tag_no

specialty_generic_tag_no - 44

#any attributes you desire to transfer (beyond those defined above) are listed

# here. You determine which are transferred between P&ID piping_comp table

# and piping pdtable_34. NOTE: Complete, partial and default do NOT

# apply to these attributes.

#attribute name (any thing) piping attr no p&id attr no

const_status 32 23

heat_tracing_media 35 34

heat_tracing_reqmts 34 33

hold_status 33 41

ht_tracing_media_temp 36 35

opening_action 31 17

remarks 46 20

### Data extracted from the Instrument Component Table ( instr_comp, 131 )of the P&ID Design Database:

571

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ #instr_comp_table is the delimiter to signal the information below belongs to

# P&ID’s instr_comp table and Piping’s pdtable_67_<partition_number>.

# instr_comp_table signals that the following attributes belong to pdtable_67.

instr_comp_table

instrument_tag_number - 5

# pid_seg_occ_no

instr_segment_index_no - 4

# aabbcc_code

instr_aabbcc_code - 10

# dwg_occ_no

instr_drawing_index_no - 3

#generic_tag_no

instr_generic_tag_no - 80


# here. You determine which are transferred between P&ID instr_comp table




cleaning_reqmts 39 60

const_resp 32 35

const_status 29 24

dgn_resp 31 25

fail_action_1 28 56



hold_status 30 40


insulation_purpose 36 31

insulation_thick 37 33

module_no 41 36

package_system_no 42 38

remark_2 52 22

safety_classification 40 20

### Data extracted from the Drawing Table ( dwg, 102 ) of the P&ID Project Database:

drawing_number - 3

#unit_occ_no

unit_index_number - 2

drawing_title - 16

network_address - 7

path_name - 8

file_specification - 5

propagation_status - 10

approval_initials - 21

approval_date - 22

revision_id - 27

for_comments_date - 29

for_design_date - 30

for_construct_date - 31

task_name - 4

### Data extracted from the Unit Table ( unit, 101 ) of the P&ID Project Database:

unit_number - 4

unit_code - 3

unit_name - 5

### Data extracted from the Task RDB Table ( task_rdb, 98 ) of the P&ID Project Database:

pid_task_name - 2

pid_task_rdb_node - 3

572

11. Tran

sfer

P&ID Correlation Table________________ pid_task_rdb_path - 4

### Data extracted from the PID Segment Table ( pid_seg, 110 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

# net_type_occ_no

piping_segment_index_no - 4

### Data extracted from the PID Drawing Revision Data Table ( dwg_rev_data,

### 103 ) of the P&ID Design Database includes the following:

dwg_occ_no - 2

### Data extracted from the Piping Connector Table (piping_connector, 124) of

### the P&ID Design Database includes the following:

connector_no - 4

#dwg_occ_no of the piping connector table

connect_dwg_occ_no - 2

#pid_seg_occ_no of the piping connector table

connect_pid_seg_occ_no - 3

#matching_criteria is the criteria to be used for matching the P&ID and Piping

#segments together. Nodea (piping attribute 67) and Nodeb (piping attribute 68)

#are the default criteria. The matching criteria is defined by listing the

#piping attribute numbers separated by a space on the line below.

matching_criteria 67 68

#search_mode is the method for searching for the matching criteria. The default

#is ’FIRST’ – stop on the first match found. The other option is ’END’ which

#means to search the entire database looking for a match. If more than one match

#is found, the software evaluates all of the matches for an exact match of the

#transfer data.

search_mode FIRST

#exclusion_criteria has been a part of the submission process in the past. We

#have added the capability to default this value. Values are ’YES’ for do not

#check the transfer disabled segments and ’NO’ to check the transfer disabled

#segments. This option can still be modified at submission.

exclusion_criteria YES

The line number label and line id (which are formed automatically from otherattributes on the basis of label formats in the Label Description Library) areupdated without being included in the Correlation Table. The definition of theline number label in the P&ID Database has been included exclusively for usein creating the P&ID Data Comparison Report.

If you selected the option to have fluid code updated from the value in the piping materialsclass of the Reference Database, fluid code will not be updated from the P&ID Databasedespite the fact that fluid code may be defined in the P&ID Correlation Table.

Although the column numbers for the piping segment data in the model have been included inthe Correlation Table, these numbers should not be revised by the user, except to add user-defined columns.

Although the P&ID node numbers are transferred automatically with both complete andpartial data transfer, it will not be necessary to designate these columns for transfer in theCorrelation Table. Note that the P&ID node numbers are case sensitive. In other words, theP&ID node numbers will make use of both upper case and lower case alphabetic characters inaddition to numeric characters.

During component placement, a comparison is made between the P&ID data and the pipingsegment. If a discrepancy is found, a warning is issued. You may choose to override thiswarning if you wish.

573


Default Attribute Values

If you wish to define default values to be used for attributes that are not transferred during aduring a partial transfer (but that are transferred during a complete transfer), place a - in thepartial column, skip at least one space, then enter a value to be used as a default. Thesevalues will be used as the default value for the attribute when an interactive transfer isperformed, or when the batch update toggle is set.

Matching Criteria

The matching criteria are used to match the P&ID and Piping segments together. Nodea(piping attribute 67 from PD_table 12, PID_id_part_a) and nodeb (piping attribute 68PD_table 12, PID_id_part_b) are the default criteria, as these values are adjacent to thematching_criteria keyword in the delivered pid_to_piping file. To substitute another attributeas the matching criteria, enter the desired piping attribute number. For example, you woulduse number 10 if you wanted to use the line sequence number as the matching criterion.

The insulation density, insulation thickness, and heat tracing temperatures areassumed to have matching units for the piping design file and the P&ID. Thenominal diameter will be converted to the appropriate P&ID value beforesearching for the matching criteria in the P&ID.

User-selected Attribute Transfer

You may specify any other piping, piping component, or instrument attributes which you wishto transfer by placing the attributes in the pid_to_piping file.

Refer to the section below that details the piping attributes to be transferred for an example onhow these attributes should be specified:

### Data extracted from the Piping Component Table ( piping_comp,

120 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

#piping_comp_table is the delimiter to signal the information below

belongs to

# P&ID’s piping_comp table and Piping’s

pdtable_34_<partition_number>.

# piping_comp_table signals that the following attributes belong to

pdtable_34.

piping_comp_table


aabbcc_code 3 9


cmdty_code 8 29

# opt attribute in P&ID is placed into the option_code attribute in

Piping


# pid_seg_occ_no


574

11. Tran

sfer

P&ID Correlation Table________________

# dwg_occ_no


# generic_tag_no


#any attributes you desire to transfer (beyond those defined above)

are listed

# here. You determine which are transferred between P&ID

piping_comp table

# and piping pdtable_34.


const_status 32 23



hold_status 33 41



remarks 46 20

Search Mode

The search mode is the method used for searching for the matching criteria. FIRST is thedefault search criteria, as this option is adjecent to the search_mode keyword. FIRSTinstructs the system to stop searching when the first match is found. The other option is END,which instructs the system to search the entire database looking for a match. If more than onematch is found, the software evaluates all of the matches for an exact match of the transferdata.

Exclusion Criteria

The exclusion criteria feature controls whether or not the transfer-disabled segments arechecked. The YES keyword instructs the system to avoid checking the transfer-disabledsegments, while NO instructs the system to check the transfer-disabled segments. This optioncan still be modified at submission time.

Note that you are responsible for coordinating and controlling the timing andapproval of the data transfer of piping segment data from the P&ID Databaseto the piping model.

575


11.1.3 P&ID Graphical Data Transfer Setup

You can select and view an active P&I drawing while working in a piping model. Thisenables the graphical transfer of piping segment data by snapping to graphics in the activeP&I drawing. You can also specify a component name for placement by selecting acomponent in the P&I drawing.

You can use the following options to select the active P&I drawing to be displayed. Only oneP&I drawing can be active for the purposes of data transfer.

You can select a drawing from a list of P&I drawings extracted from the Project ControlDatabase. This list of drawings is limited to those P&I drawings which have been propagatedfor the active unit number in the piping model. The applicable drawings are listed inalphanumeric order by drawing number.

Since the P&ID Database is unit dependent and the Piping Design Database is design areadependent, one Piping design area may include data from different P&ID units. Therefore,you must specify the correct unit number in the active segment data prior to requesting a listof P&I drawings from the P&ID Database.

Commands

Select P&I Drawing by Line ID — Allows you to specify a line id by identifyingpiping in the piping model or by accepting the active line id. The system determinesthe P&I drawing (or list of drawings) from the line id. It searches the Segment Table ofthe P&ID Database using the system unique number for the drawing and the line id forthe segment. All P&ID segments belonging to the specified line ID will be highlighted.

Select P&I Drawing by Nozzle — Allows you to specify an equipment number andnozzle number by locating a component connected to a nozzle, by typing in anequipment number and nozzle number, or by placing a data point over a nozzle in anequipment model. The system determines the P&I drawing from the equipmentnumber and nozzle number and data in the P&ID Database.

576

11. Tran

sfer

P&ID Graphical Data Transfer Setup________________ All P&ID segments that have the same line ID as the segment connected to the activenozzle will be highlighted.

Review P&I Drawing Details — Displays information about a selected P&I Drawingin the active unit.

P&ID Drawing Display Categories — Displays P&ID display categories. Categoriesthat are currently displayed are highlighted on this form; selecting a category willtoggle its setting.

There are multiple levels associated with most P&ID categories, soturning a category off in this form may not actually result in turning thatcategory off for display.

577


Mechanics

Once you select a drawing by any of the described methods, the P&I drawing and thecorresponding drawing border are attached as reference files with the following additionalfeatures.

If the system does not find a border, the drawing is attached without the border.

A selected screen view is used to display the P&I drawing. The system stores this viewnumber in the Type 63 data for the piping model.

The reference files for the P&I drawing and the corresponding drawing border aredistinguished by the following reference file logical names, which are reserved for use by thiscommand:

PID_transfer_drawing - for the P&I drawing

PID_transfer_border - for the P&I drawing border

The reference files are clipped to the extent of the drawing border associated with the P&Idrawing.

The view of the active P&I drawing is clipped (by a window area) to the extent of the drawingborder associated with the P&I drawing.

The reference file origin (corresponding to the lower left extent of the P&I drawing border) istranslated to an obscure part of the piping model to avoid any graphical overlaps with the 3Dmodel. The system modifies the P&ID view such that only the P&I drawing appears in thisview. In other words, the display of all model categories is disabled for this view.

The P&I drawing and its drawing border are attached in the most negative point (in terms ofX,Y,Z coordinates) of the model. The model view is automatically rotated to a plan view andthe display depths are set such than only the P&I drawing and its drawing border are viewed.The P&I drawing and the corresponding drawing border are attached at an elevation of 10’ (or

578

11. Tran

sfer

P&ID Graphical Data Transfer Setup________________ the metric equivalent) from the minimum elevation in the project with display depths of +/- 1’(or the metric equivalent).

The reference files for the P&I drawing and the corresponding drawing border are not scaled.

Before attaching the two reference files representing the P&I drawing, the system saves theactive model view as a named model view, MDLVUE.

Once the active P&I drawing has been displayed, you can restore the screen view to itsprevious state by using this saved model view. The screen view for the active P&I drawing issaved as a named model view, PIDVUE. This enables you to restore the active P&I drawingto the same or a different view.

The system disables snap lock and locate element lock for both the P&I drawing and the P&Idrawing border when the reference files are attached. These locks are only enabled when thesystem prompts you to identify graphics in the P&I drawing.

You can control the display categories for the P&I drawing, but not the drawing border. Allcategories in the P&I drawing border are displayed.

The following are the default display categories. The text for the categories and the designfile levels associated with those categories are read from the level/segregation file in theP&ID Reference Database.

guide linesgap graphics, not displayedheat tracing graphicspiping nodessignal linestitle blockequipment categorypiping categoryinstrument categoryalldrawing dumbequipment dumbpiping dumb

instrument dumball dumbrevision cloudsrevision trianglesmodule breakspackaged system breaksbad assembly graphicsholdsP&I Drawing - in-houseP&I Drawing - formalMat of Const DwgPressure/Temp Dwg

These categories are not mutually exclusive. In other words, enabling the display of onecategory may enable the display of another category that had previously been selected to notbe displayed.

You can completely disable the display of the active P&I drawing. This option provides ameans to discontinue the use of the two reference file attachments for the P&I drawing. Atany subsequent time, you can re-display that or any other P&I drawing.

The P&I drawing and the drawing border are not listed as attached by the Reference Modelcommand. The saved model views PIDVUE and MDLVUE are not listed by the SavedModel View command.

579


11.1.4 Load Active Data from P&ID MDB

This option enables you to update the active segment data based on information defined in theP&ID Task.

The system verifies the temperature and pressure service limits when loading segment datafrom the P&ID Database into an existing piping segment for which data was previouslytransferred.

Commands

P&ID Node Numbers — Updates the active data to match a specified segment fromthe P&ID database. The system uses the Unit Number (defined in the Active SegmentData) and the P&ID Master Data Base Node and Path (defined in the project files) todetermine the database which contains the segment data. (Refer to P&ID DataTransfer for more information on the P&ID database.)

Equipment and Nozzle Numbers — Updates the active segment data from the P&IDwith the segment data attached to a specified Equipment/Nozzle Id.

Graphical P&ID Data Setup — Updates the active segment data by snapping tographics in the active P&I drawing. The P&ID Database is referenced using the P&IDproject number. A single table is read from this database using the unit number and theattribute linkage from the segment in the P&I drawing. Refer to P&ID Graphical DataTransfer Setup, page 576, for more information on this option.

580

11. Tran

sfer

Load Active Data from P&ID MDB________________

If you identify a component in the P&I drawing that is associated with more than onesegment, such as a reducer, the active segment data is derived from the segment that isassociated with the connect point nearest the data point.

The order of the P&ID node numbers, as specified, determines the assignment of flowdirection in the piping model. By convention, P&ID node number A is at the ActivePlacement Point. As a part of the data transfer process, the P&ID node numbers arestored in the piping model for subsequent use and to retain the associativity between thesegment in the P&ID Database and the segment(s) in the piping model. Likewise, theunique index into the P&ID Segment Table is stored in the piping model in order toenable the later comparison and update of P&ID node numbers from the P&IDDatabase into the piping model. It is possible that the P&ID node numbers may bechanged by the P&ID propagation process for a specific segment in the P&ID Databaseas a result of changes to the P&I drawing.

A warning message is displayed if any one of the following conditions occurs in theprocess of loading the active data from the P&ID Database:

the piping materials class from the P&ID Database is undefined in the ReferenceDatabase.

the nominal piping diameter from the P&ID Database is invalid for the piping materialsclass from the P&ID Database on the basis of the Nominal Piping Diameter Table in thePiping Specification Table Library.

the active nominal piping diameter is invalid for the piping materials class from theP&ID Database on the basis of the Nominal Piping Diameter Table in the PipingSpecification Table Library in partial data transfer, where nominal piping diameter isnot loaded.

the fluid code from the P&ID Database is invalid for the piping materials class from theP&ID Database on the basis of the Fluid Code Table in the Piping Specification TableLibrary for a piping materials class where a Fluid Code Table is applicable.

581



Check the value for the Unit Number in the active segment data. The system uses the definedUnit Number to locate the P&ID database information.

Operating Sequence

1. Select Option by selecting one of the options provided to define the P&ID to be used.

2. Input P&ID Node Number for Active Point or Accept Active P&ID NodeNumber A

3. Select Confirm to use the active node number or type the node number at one end ofthe segment in the P&ID to be used to update the active data.

4. Input Other Node Number for Active Point or Accept Active P&ID Node NumberA

5. Select Confirm to use the active node number or type the second node number from theP&ID to be used to update the active data.

The order of the node numbers determines the Active Flow Directionbased on the flow direction in the P&ID database.

The system searches the P&ID database for the specified node numbers and loads thesegment data into the active segment data.

6. Specify Equipment Number. Select the nozzle by placing a data point over thenozzle datum point or by keying in the equipment_name/nozzle_id (for example,TANK1/N12). The system searches the P&ID database for the segment attached to thenozzle and loads the data into the active segment data.

582

11. Tran

sfer

P&ID node numbers________________

11.1.5 P&ID node numbers

When piping segment data is transferred from the P&ID Database to the piping model, theP&ID node numbers derived from that database are reflected in the model as a form ofassociativity between the P&I drawing and the piping model. The following rules dictate howP&ID node numbers are assigned during the creation of piping segments in the model.

Transferring piping segment data from the P&ID Database by any means results in theP&ID node numbers being stored with the piping segment that is to be created by eitherthe Place Component or Sketch command.

If you continue creating new piping segments in the model, either by explicitly placinga piping segment or by placing a component that results in the placement of a pipingsegment, the new piping segments continue to include the P&ID node numbers from theinitial piping segment.

If, at any time, you update the piping segment data manually with the Active SegmentData option, the P&ID node numbers for the subsequent piping segment is assigned asundefined (blank).

Using the First Size or Second Size option to place a reducing component will notresult in the P&ID node numbers being assigned as undefined unless you also use theActive Segment Data option.

If you place a component after specifying the active placement point with the Connectto Design option, the P&ID node numbers for the subsequent piping segment is derivedfrom those of the connected piping.

The P&ID node numbers are assigned as undefined when you connect to a nozzle,unless the active segment data is then updated from the P&ID Database.

If you place a component after specifying the active placement point with the Point inSpace option, the P&ID node numbers for the subsequent piping segment is assigned asundefined (blank).

If, in the Sketch command, you place a piping segment after specifying the activeplacement point with the Construct Point option, the P&ID node numbers for thesubsequent piping segment are assigned as undefined (blank).

583


11.1.6 Update Segment Data from P&ID

You can update the active segment data by node number, by equipment/nozzle id, or bysnapping to graphics in the active P&I drawing.

You can specify that the piping segment data transfer be complete or partial on the basis ofthe Correlation Table. The default mode is complete, and once the piping segment has beencreated in the model the active mode is restored to complete. In other words, the nextoperation will revert to complete data transfer, unless you explicitly select partial datatransfer.

The Active Segment field message reflects the method of placement of the active segment.For example, if the connected to design at a particular segment which was placed usingpartial data transfer, the message with indicate partial. If a gate valve is placed at thispoint,the underlying segment is extended. If new node data is downloaded, the new segmentdata is transferred using the method specified by the toggle switch, which is set to completeby default.

When a reducing/edpanding component is placed, the segment data is used for the inital like-diameter portion of the component. The segment data for the portion with the differentdiameter is placed using partial data transfer.

A warning message is displayed if any one of the following conditions occurs in the processof loading the active data from the P&ID Database:

The piping materials class from the P&ID Database is undefined in the ReferenceDatabase

The nominal piping diameter from the P&ID Database is invalid for the pipingmaterials class from the P&ID Database on the basis of the NPD Table in the PipingSpecification Table Library

The active nominal piping diameter is invalid for the piping materials class from theP&ID Database on the basis of the NPD Table in the Piping Specification Table Libraryin partial data transfer, where nominal piping diameter is not loaded.

The fluid code from the P&ID Database is invalid for the piping materials class fromthe P&ID Database on the basis of the Fluid Code Table in the Piping SpecificationTable Library for a piping materials class where a Fluid Code Table is applicable

584

11. Tran

sfer

Update by Node Number________________

11.1.6.1 Update by Node Number

You can update the active segment data by specifying two P&ID node numbers. This optionis provided in both the Place Component and Sketch commands. You can accept both oreither of the two active (previously specified) P&ID node numbers.

The P&ID Database is referenced using the P&ID project number. A single table is read fromthis database using unit number, P&ID node number ’A’, and P&ID node number ’B’. Sincethe P&ID Database is unit dependent and the Piping Design Database is design areadependent, one Piping design area may include data from different P&ID units, each unitbeing designated by a unique unit number.

The order of the P&ID node numbers, as specified by the user, determines the assignment offlow direction in the piping model. By convention, P&ID node number ’A’ is at the ActivePlacement Point. As a part of the data transfer process, the P&ID node numbers are stored inthe piping model for subsequent use and to retain the associativity between the segment in theP&ID Database and the segment(s) in the piping model. Likewise, the unique index into theP&ID segment table is stored in the piping model in order to enable the later comparison andupdate of P&ID node numbers from the P&ID Database into the piping model. It is possiblethat the P&ID node numbers may be changed by the P&ID propagation process for a specificsegment in the P&ID Database as a result of changes to the P&ID drawing.

11.1.7 Transfer by Equipment Number and NozzleNumber

You can update the active segment data by specifying an equipment number and nozzlenumber. If you are actively connected to a nozzle in the model, this option automaticallysearches the P&ID Database using the ’active’ equipment number and nozzle number.Otherwise, you must either snap to the appropriate nozzle or type the equipment number andnozzle number for the appropriate nozzle. This option is provided in both the PlaceComponent and Sketch commands.

The system accesses the P&ID Database using the P&ID project number. A single table isread from this database using the unit number, the equipment number, and the nozzle number.

The assignment of flow direction in the piping model is determined by the flow direction atthe nozzle end of the segment in the P&ID drawing. As a part of the data transfer process, theP&ID node numbers determined from reading the segment table in the P&ID Database arestored in the piping model for subsequent use and to retain the associativity between thesegment in the P&ID Database and the segment(s) in the piping model. Likewise, the uniqueindex into the P&ID segment table is stored in the piping model in order to enable the latercomparison and update of P&ID node numbers from the P&ID Database into the pipingmodel. It is possible that the P&ID node numbers may be changed by the P&ID propagationprocess for a specific segment in the P&ID Database as a result of changes to the P&IDdrawing.

585


11.1.8 Update From Active P&I Drawing

You can update the active segment data by snapping to graphics in the active P&I drawing.The system reads a single table from the P&ID Database using the unit number and theattribute linkage from the segment in the P&I drawing.

If you identify a component in the P&I drawing that is associated with more than onesegment, such as a reducer, the active segment data is derived from the segment associatedwith the connect point nearest the identification point.

The order of the P&ID node numbers determines the assignment of flow direction in thepiping model. By convention, P&ID node number A is at the Active Placement Point. As apart of the data transfer process, the P&ID node numbers are stored in the piping model forsubsequent use and to retain the associativity between the segment in the P&ID Database andthe segment(s) in the piping model. The unique index into the P&ID Segment Table is alsostored in the piping model to enable the comparison and update of P&ID node numbers fromthe P&ID Database into the piping model. The P&ID node numbers may be changed by theP&ID propagation process for a specific segment in the P&ID Database as a result of changesto the P&I drawing.

586

11. Tran

sfer

P&ID Data________________

11.1.9 P&ID Data

Revise Attributes

You can update the data for a previously placed piping segment, using the Revise Attributescommand, by specifying two P&ID node numbers.

The order of the input of the two P&ID node numbers is used to control the assignment offlow direction in the piping model. P&ID node number ’A’ is associated with ’end 1’ of thesegment, while P&ID node number ’B’ will be associated with ’end 2’.

As with the previously described option, the piping segment data will be updated based uponthe Correlation Table. Likewise, the user will have the option to specify that the pipingsegment data transfer is to be complete or partial on the basis of the Correlation Table.

You can also update the data for a previously placed piping segment by snapping to graphicsin the active P&I drawing.

Attribute Break

You can load the piping segment data for an attribute break, using the Attribute Breakcommand, by specifying two P&ID node numbers.

The order of the input of the two P&ID node numbers is used to control the assignment offlow direction in the piping model. P&ID node number A is associated with the end of thepiping segment being placed at the attribute break’s location, while P&ID node number B isassociated with other end of the piping segment being placed.

Under user control, the revised piping segment will retain the existing piping segment data,including the P&ID node numbers. The new piping segment will be created from the originalpiping segment with data being transferred from the P&ID Database using those P&ID nodenumbers specified by the user. This piping segment will also be created with the ’new’ P&IDnode numbers.

As with the previously described option, the piping segment data will be updated based uponthe Correlation Table. Likewise, the user will have the option to specify that the pipingsegment data transfer is to be complete or partial on the basis of the Correlation Table.

You can also load the piping segment data for an attribute break, by snapping to graphics inthe active P&I drawing.

587


11.1.10 Name From P&ID

This option enables you to select the piping or instrument component to be placed byidentifying a component in the P&ID drawing. If an instrument is selected which has a tagnumber that does not exist in the Piping Job Specification, the system displays theInstrument Placement form with the two sections Data From Reference Database andData From User. Select Data from User and pick the shape desired and type in thedimensions required. This allows the tag number and attributed defined in the pid_to_pipingfile to transfer from the P&ID into the Piping Design database.

588

11. Tran

sfer

P&ID Data Comparison Options________________

11.1.11 P&ID Data Comparison Options

The P&ID Data Comparison Options command is provided as part of the Diagnosticscommand for the purpose of specifying the data comparison option for piping segments in themodel. You have two options with this command:

the ability to mark a piping segment to have segment data comparisons inhibited (orenabled) in the P&ID Data Comparison Report. This option is intended to assist theuser by not reporting extraneous piping segments which do not exist in the P&IDDatabase and have not been assigned P&ID node numbers in the piping model, i.e.segment data has not been transferred from the P&ID database. Note that the defaultmode for all piping segments created in the model is to have P&ID data comparisonsenabled. Thus it is not necessary for the user to take any action to enable P&ID datacomparisons, unless the user had previously and inadvertently designated that P&IDdata comparisons be inhibited for a particular piping segment.

a rules-based command for the purpose of automatically marking piping segmentscorresponding to vents, drains, and off-line instrument connections for being optionallyignored in P&ID data comparisons. The option is intended to assist the user by notreporting extraneous piping segments which may not exist in the P&ID Database andusually are not assigned P&ID node numbers in the piping model.

These piping segments representing vents, drains, and off-line instrument connectionswill be marked in the user data of the piping segment. Such designations will only havean impact, if the user chooses to have these piping segments excluded from the P&IDData Comparison Report.

The limit for the maximum number of vent/drain valves and instrument connectionsthat can be processed in one piping model is 200 for each.

Piping segments for vents, drains, and off-line instrument connections are very troublesome inthat:

they occur in the piping model, but usually do not exist in the P&ID Database

numerous piping segments of these types will occur in a project

These types of piping segments will be recognized by virtue of the following set of rules forany piping segment.

vents and drains:

— P&ID node numbers are undefined for the piping segment in the model or thepiping segment has had ’partial’ data transfer; and

— includes one or more vent/drain valves; and

— ends in a ’closing component’, e.g. an end, a plug, a cap, or a blind flange

589

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Note that these specific piping commodities will be recognized on the basis ofcomparing the commodity name with the following entries in the Commodity NameTable of the Piping Job Specification Table Library. In the case of the ’closing’components, the connect point geometry type, as used by Piping Eden and stored withthe component’s user data, will be used to assist in filtering piping components that donot apply to the rules. For this situation, a connect point geometry type of ’singleconnect point’ will be used in conjunction with searching for an acceptable commodityname.

You can specify as many as three commodity names for piping commodities that are tobe considered as vent/drain valves. The following entries in the Commodity NameTable have been reserved for this use.

25 vent/drain valve ’A’ 6Q1C7626 vent/drain valve ’B’ -27 vent/drain valve ’C’ -

If lines 25-27 are left with a value of ’-’ in the Commodity Name Table,the software will perform the vent and drain segment search as if one ofthe lines 25-27 had 6Q1C76 (vent and drain valve) in it. Thisprocedure is hard-coded in the software.

The user will have the ability to specify as many as ten commodity names for pipingcommodities that are to be considered as ’closing’ components. The following entries inthe Commodity Name Table have been reserved for this use.

28 end 6Q2C1629 plug 6Q2C1930 cap 6Q2C2131 blind flange 6Q2C0832 ’closing’ component ’A’ -33 ’closing’ component ’B’ -34 ’closing’ component ’C’ -35 ’closing’ component ’D’ -36 ’closing’ component ’E’ -37 ’closing’ component ’F’ -

If all items in the range of 28-37 have a value of ’-’ in the CommodityName Table, the software will perform the search as if the previouslylisted items were actually in the table. This procedure is hard-coded inthe software.

Note that this command has a restriction of a maximum of 200 vent/drain valves thatcan be processed in one piping model.

off-line instrument connections:

— P&ID node numbers are undefined for the piping segment in the model or thepiping segment has had ’partial’ data transfer; and

— includes an ’instrument indicator’ at the end of the piping segment

590

11. Tran

sfer

P&ID Data Comparison Options________________ An instrument indicator will be recognized as having one of as many as threeinstrument model codes defined by the user in the Commodity Name Table of thePiping Job Specification Table Library. The default entry for the first of these threemodel codes is IND, which is the default instrument indicator in the GraphicCommodity Library.

38 instrument indicator ’A’ IND39 instrument indicator ’B’ -40 instrument indicator ’C’ -

Note that this command has a restriction of a maximum of 200 off-line instrumentconnections that can be processed in one piping model.

You can request that these piping segments and the associated piping be highlighted as ameans for verifying which piping segments have been marked to inhibit P&ID datacomparisons.

If you have both task and master databases in the P&ID application and wouldlike to run the comparison report(s) from the task database rather than themaster database, use the Project Administrator, Project Data Manager, Seed,Piping Model Data (Revise), Piping Data Control option.

If the comparison report is to be run from the task database, but was not set upat the beginning of the project, you must propagate this change to all existingpiping models.

591


11.2 SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer

The SmartPlant Attribute Mapper delivered with PDS allows you to transfer SmartPlantP&ID data to PDS 3D in much the same way as you can transfer PDS P&ID data.

SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D transfer requires that either a full version of SmartPlant P&ID orthe SmartPlant P&ID components delivered with PDS be installed on the same computer asPDS. Refer to the PDS Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for moreinformation on this "silent install" of the SmartPlant P&ID components.

In order to transfer SmartPlant P&ID data to an existing project, you must copy theSPMap.mdb and SPTransferOpt files from the win32app\ingr\pdshell\pid\directory to the project directory. If you are transferring SmartPlant P&ID data to a new PDSproject, the software automatically copies these files to the project directory.

The SPMap.mdb file is a Microsoft Access database created and edited by the SmartPlantAttribute Mapper, which maintains the mapping of SmartPlant P&ID attributes to PDS 3Dattributes. See SmartPlant Attribute Mapper, page 594 for more information on theSmartPlant Attribute Mapper.

SPTransferOpt is a text file containing the Matching Criteria, Search Mode and ExclusionCriteria settings as described in the P&ID Correlation Table. Refer to P&ID CorrelationTable, page 568 for more information on these settings.

Rather than using the P&ID node numbers to transfer piping segments, the SmartPlant P&IDto PDS 3D process uses the SmartPlant drawing SP_ID and pipe run SP_ID to identify andgroup different pipe segments in the 3D drawing. The drawing ID is represented by theindex_to_pi_dwg attribute in table 12, while the pipe run ID is represented by thepid_index_no attribute.

In the graphical Piping Design environment, the SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D process doesnot require you to specify a unit_no. Instead, the PDS 3D forms that control the transferof data use the unit_no attribute as a filter.

Workflow

1. Use SmartPlant Attribute Mapper to set up the attributes to be mapped. Refer toSmartPlant Attribute Mapper, page 594 for more information.

2. If you are transferring data to a project created prior to version 6.4.1, copy theSPMap.mdb and SPTransferOpt files from the pdshell\pid\ directory to theproject directory. If you are transferring data to a new PDS project, the softwareperforms this step automatically.

3. In PDS, select the project to which you want to transfer data, and a model within thatproject.

592

11. Tran

sfer

SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer________________

4. In the Piping Designer graphical environment, select any of the commands whichsupport data transfer (Sketch, Place Component, Revise Attribute, or AttributeBreak).

5. Select the Load from P&ID option.

593


11.2.1 SmartPlant Attribute Mapper

The SmartPlant Attribute Mapper provides an interface for mapping SmartPlant P&IDattributes to PDS 3D attributes.

Workflow

1. Select Start > Programs > PD_Shell > SP PID to PDS 3D.

The system displays a list of PDS projects.

2. Double-click the project to define or revise the attribute map.

If the project has not been mapped to a SmartPlant P&ID project the system promptsyou to select a SmartPlant site.

594

11. Tran

sfer

SmartPlant Attribute Mapper________________ Browse to the domain and node name of the SmartPlant Manager site for the project.

If the site contains more than one SmartPlant P&ID project the system displays a list ofprojects.

The system begins initializing the attribute map file. This may take some time, becausethe system must resolve all the database and codelist entries for both the PDS 3D andSmartPlant P&ID projects.

11.2.1.1 Define Mapped Attribute as Unmapped

1. Select the Entities > Mapped folder from the project tree view.

2. Click on an entity in the mapped folder to display a list view of mapped attributes.

3. Click the mapped attribute to designate as Unmapped.

4. Click the Unmapped icon to change the status of the attribute.

11.2.1.2 Define Unmapped Attribute as Ignored

1. Select the Entities > Unmapped folder from the project tree view.

2. Click on an entity in the Unmapped folder to display a list view of unmappedattributes.

3. Click the unmapped attribute to designate as Ignored.

4. Click the Ignored icon to change the status of the attribute.

595


11.2.1.3 Map Undefined Attribute to a SmartPlantAttribute

Use the No Default Transfer Mode to designate attributes that will transfer when theComplete Data Transfer option is selected in the Piping Design software. Attributesdesignated as No Default are not transferred when the Partial Data Transfer option isselected in the Piping Design software.



3. Click an unmapped attribute to display a list of SmartPlant attributes. This list isfiltered to include matching codelist attributes or matching data type attributes fromSmartPlant P&ID.

4. Select the SmartPlant attribute that best corresponds to the unmapped attribute.

5. Select No Default as the Transfer Mode.

6. Click the Mapped icon to map the attribute to the selected SmartPlant attribute.

11.2.1.4 Map Undefined Attribute for Partial Transfer

Use the Partial Transfer Mode to designate attributes that will transfer when the PartialData Transfer option is used in the Piping Design software. Attributes designated as Partialare also transferred when the Complete Data Transfer option is used in the Piping Designsoftware.



3. Click an unmapped attribute to display a list of SmartPlant attributes.

4. Select the SmartPlant attribute that best corresponds to the unmapped attribute. Thislist is filtered to include matching codelist attributes or matching data type attributesfrom SmartPlant P&ID.

5. Select Partial as the Transfer Mode.

6. Click the Mapped icon to map the attribute to the selected SmartPlant attribute.

596

11. Tran

sfer

SmartPlant Attribute Mapper________________

11.2.1.5 Map Undefined Attribute for Default Transfer

Use the Default Transfer Mode to designate an attribute and a default value that will transferwhen the Partial Data Transfer option is used in the Piping Design software. Attributesdesignated with a Default value are also transferred when the Complete Data Transferoption is used in the Piping Design software.



3. Click an unmapped attribute to display a list of SmartPlant attributes.

4. Select the SmartPlant attribute that best corresponds to the unmapped attribute. Thislist is filtered to include matching codelist attributes or matching data type attributesfrom SmartPlant P&ID.

5. Select Default as the Transfer Mode.

6. Key in a default value that will be assigned to the attribute during data transfer.

7. Click the Mapped icon to map the attribute and default value to the selected SmartPlantattribute.

Special Attributes

Some of the attributes have different data structures in PDS 3D and SP PID, these attributesare defined correctly in the delivered SPMap.mdb file but could not be mapped correctly viathe Attribute Mapper. These attributes are delivered as Mapped-Read Only to prevent youfrom making any changes.

PDS Attribute PDS data type SmartPlant Attribute SmartPlant data typemater_of_construct Character MaterialOfConstClass Codelistedfluid_category Character FluidSystem Codelistednominal_piping_dia Integer NominalDiameter Codelistedschedule_overide Character ScheduleOrThickness Character with Units

597


11.3 SmartPlant Attribute MapperInterface

11.3.1 Tree View

The SmartPlant Attribute Mapper tree view displays PDS attributes which you can map toSmartPlant P&ID attributes. These entries are divided into groups according to their functionin PDS.

Unmapped Entries

These entries are not mapped to a corresponding SmartPlant P&ID entry. You can either mapor ignore unmapped entries.

Mapped Entries

These entries are mapped to SmartPlant P&ID entries. You can change this mapping.

Ignored Entries

These entries are ignored by SmartPlant Migrator and not included in the translation. You canmap these entries to SmartPlant P&ID entries.

598

11. Tran

sfer

SmartPlant Attribute Mapper Interface________________

Codelist Entries

These entries are codelists (lists of available choices for specific situations) which also appearin one of the other groups. Codelists are called select lists in SmartPlant Data DictionaryManager. You can not edit any of the mappings in this group. You can change the mapping ofa codelist in any of the other groups.

599


11.3.2 List View

The SmartPlant Attribute Mapper list view displays various information about the PDSattributes and codelist entries. You can modify the mapping of these attributes in theAttribute Map.

Name

System name of the attribute or codelist.

PDS Attribute

Display name of the attribute.

PDS Attribute Type

The data type of the attribute.

SmartPlant Item

The SmartPlant item that corresponds to the PDS attribute.

600

11. Tran

sfer

List View________________

SmartPlant Attribute

The SmartPlant attribute that corresponds to the PDS attribute.

Status

Mapping status of the PDS attribute or codelist.

U = Unmapped M = Mapped I = Ignored C = Codelisted

R = Read-only

Modified

The date and time the attribute was last modified.

Codelist Number

Number of the selected PDS codelist.

PDS Entry

Entry in the selected PDS codelist.

SmartPlant Entry

Entry in the SmartPlant codelist which corresponds to the entry in the PDS codelist.

SmartPlant Codelist

The SmartPlant codelist which is mapped to the PDS codelist.

601


11.3.3 Attribute Map

This area lets you map PDS items to their SmartPlant P&ID equivalents.

Name

The name of the selected PDS attribute.

Type

The data type of the selected PDS attribute.

Set Attribute Status

Allows you to change the mapping status of the selected attribute. You can change the statusto Unmapped, Ignored, or Mapped.

Transfer Mode

Specifies whether the attribute will be transferred during a partial transfer, a complete transfer,or both.

602

11. Tran

sfer

Attribute Map________________

Display Name

The display name of the SmartPlant attribute.

Name

The system name of the SmartPlant attribute.

Type

The data type of the SmartPlant attribute.

603


11.3.4 File Menu

Refresh Command

This command updates the window with the current information.

Exit Command

This command closes the mapping project and dismisses the SmartPlant Migrator application.

604

Erro

r Messag

es

Appendix A: Error Messages________________

Appendix A Error Messages

The PDS 3D products share common message files contained in thewin32app\ingr\pdshell\msg directory.

pdsmc.msg - command field messages

pdsme.msg - error and warning messages

pdsmp.msg - prompts and messages

pdsms.msg - status messages.

605


606

AA

BB

CC

Appendix B: AABBCC Code Listing________________

Appendix B AABBCC Code Listing

Component Sort by AABBCC Code

AABBCC Code Model Code Description

6Q1C01 GAT gate valve6Q1C02 GATEX extended body gate valve6Q1C03 GATCON conduit gate valve6Q1C04 GATBL blank gate valve6Q1C05 3WV valve (3-way)6Q1C06 BAL ball valve (2-way)6Q1C08 BAL2W ball valve (3-way)6Q1C11 GLO globe valve (2-way)6Q1C12 GLOA angle globe valve (2-way)6Q1C13 GLO3W globe valve (3-way)6Q1C14 GLOY Y globe valve6Q1C16 PLU plug valve (2-way)6Q1C18 PLU3W plug valve (3-way)6Q1C19 PLU4W plug valve (4-way)6Q1C22 NEE needle valve6Q1C26 BFY butterfly valve6Q1C30 DIA diaphragm valve6Q1C32 KNF knife gate valve6Q1C33 SLI slide valve (2-way)6Q1C34 SLI3W slide valve (3-way)6Q1C37 AV angle valve6Q1C38 CK check valve6Q1C39 CKWF wafer check valve6Q1C40 CKA angle check valve6Q1C41 CKST stop check valve6Q1C42 CKAST angle stop check valve6Q1C43 CKYST Y stop check valve6Q1C50 CKBF backflow preventer6Q1C51 CKAR automatic recirculation valve6Q1C53 BDA angle blowdown valve6Q1C54 BDY Y blowdown valve6Q1C56 PIN pinch valve6Q1C57 FLO float valve6Q1C58 FOOT foot valve6Q1C62 TKDR tank drain valve6Q1C69 DEL deluge valve6Q1C72 HOS hose valve6Q1C73 HOSA angle hose valve6Q1C76 VDV vent/drain valve6Q1C80 IRV instrument root valve (2-way)6Q1C81 3WRV instrument root valve (3-way)

607

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 6Q1C82 4WRV instrument root valve (4-way)

6Q2C01 FWN flange6Q2C03 FR reducing flange6Q2C04 FE expander flange6Q2C06 FO orifice flange6Q2C08 FBLD blind flange6Q2C10 BLSPO open spectacle blank6Q2C11 BLSPC closed spectacle blank6Q2C12 BDISC blank disc6Q2C13 BLPAD blind spacer6Q2C14 TSPA tapered spacer6Q2C15 SPA open spacer6Q2C16 END end6Q2C17 HD head6Q2C19 PLUG plug6Q2C21 CAP cap6Q2C23 CDC concentric diameter change6Q2C24 EDC eccentric diameter change6Q2C25 CPL coupling/connector6Q2C26 CPLH half coupling6Q2C27 REDC concentric reducer6Q2C28 REDE eccentric reducer6Q2C32 CPLR reducing coupling6Q2C35 SWGC concentric swage6Q2C36 SWGE eccentric swage6Q2C39 UN union6Q2C40 UNO orifice union6Q2C41 UND dielectric union6Q2C43 HC hose connection6Q2C44 BUSH bushing6Q2C46 INST reducing insert6Q2C47 PIPB pipe bend6Q2C49 E5 5.625°10; elbow6Q2C51 E11 11.25°10; elbow6Q2C53 E22 22.5°10; elbow6Q2C55 45DC 45°10; direction change6Q2C56 45DC 45°10; direction change6Q2C57 E45 45°10; elbow6Q2C59 E45LR 45°10; long radius elbow6Q2C60 E45LT 45°10; long tangent elbow6Q2C61 E453D 45°10; 3D elbow6Q2C63 E45U 45°10; union elbow6Q2C65 E45ST 45°10; street elbow6Q2C66 E45S 45°10; short elbow6Q2C68 E45L 45°10; long elbow6Q2C73 E60 60°10; elbow6Q2C75 4590DC 45°10;-90°10; direction change6Q2C76 90DC 90°10; direction change6Q2C77 E90 90°10; elbow6Q2C79 E90SR 90°10; short radius elbow6Q2C80 E90LR 90°10; long radius elbow

608

AA

BB

CC

Appendix B: AABBCC Code Listing________________ 6Q2C82 E90LT 90°10; long radius long tangent elbow6Q2C84 E90R 90°10; reducing elbow6Q2C86 E903D 90°10; 3D elbow6Q2C88 E90U 90°10; union elbow6Q2C90 E90ST 90°10; street elbow6Q2C91 E90RST 90°10; reducing street elbow6Q2C93 E90S 90°10; short elbow6Q2C94 E90L 90°10; long elbow

6Q3C01 R180 180°10; return6Q3C03 R180SR 180°10; short radius return6Q3C05 R18LR 180°10; long radius return6Q3C07 R180CL 180°10; close return6Q3C08 R180MD 180°10; medium return6Q3C09 R180OP 180°10; open return6Q3C14 M miter6Q3C16 M45 45°10; miter6Q3C18 TM90 90°10; miter6Q3C22 T tee6Q3C24 TRB reducing branch tee6Q3C25 TRRB reducing run & branch tee6Q3C27 TUOR on-run union tee6Q3C28 TUOB on-branch union tee6Q3C31 TST street tee6Q3C34 TRI reducing instrument tee6Q3C36 TDR drip ring tee6Q3C38 TBA basin tee6Q3C45 Y wye6Q3C47 L lateral6Q3C49 LRB reducing branch lateral6Q3C50 LRRB reducing run & branch lateral6Q3C52 S90YB 90°10; short wye6Q3C53 S90YRB 90°10; reducing short wye6Q3C54 L90YB 90°10; long wye6Q3C55 L90YRB 90°10; reducing long Y branch6Q3C60 X cross6Q3C62 XRB reducing branch cross6Q3C63 XRRB reducing run & branch cross6Q3C64 XBA basin cross6Q3C70 SAD saddle6Q3C72 SWOL sweepolet6Q3C73 WOL weldolet6Q3C74 SOL sockolet6Q3C75 TOL threadolet6Q3C76 NOL nippolet6Q3C77 EOL elbolet6Q3C78 LOL laterolet6Q3C79 FOL endolet6Q3C80 RPAD reinforcing pad6Q3C82 RWELD reinforcing weld6Q3C84 BWELD buttweld6Q3C88 NIP branch nipple

609

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 6Q3C89 NIPIL in-line nipple

6Q4C01 MN fire monitor6Q4C02 ME elevated fire monitor6Q4C03 MR remotely operated fire monitor6Q4C04 MF foam monitor6Q4C05 MFE elevated foam monitor6Q4C06 MFR remotely operated foam monitor6Q4C10 H2W fire hydrant (2-way)6Q4C11 H2WN fire hydrant w/monitor nozzle (2-way)6Q4C13 H3W1 fire hydrant (3-way)6Q4C24 HR1 hose reel6Q4C25 HRST hose rack station6Q4C26 CF foam chamber6Q4C38 EW eye wash6Q4C39 SS safety shower6Q4C40 SSEW safety shower & eye wash6Q4C60 S2W siamese (2-way)6Q4C66 S2W90 90°10; siamese (2-way)6P4C30 SW wet sprinkler6P4C31 SPA pre-action sprinkler6P4C32 SSP spray sprinkler

610

AA

BB

CC

Appendix B: Component Sort by Model Code________________

Component Sort by Model Code

Model Code AABBCC Code Description

AV 6Q1C37 angle valve

BAL 6Q1C06 ball valve (2-way)BAL2W 6Q1C08 ball valve (3-way)BDA 6Q1C53 angle blowdown valveBDISC 6Q2C12 blank discBDY 6Q1C54 Y blowdown valveBFY 6Q1C26 butterfly valveBLPAD 6Q2C13 blind spacerBLSPC 6Q2C11 closed spectacle blankBLSPO 6Q2C10 open spectacle blankBUSH 6Q2C44 bushingBWELD 6Q3C84 buttweld

CAP 6Q2C21 capCDC 6Q2C23 concentric diameter changeCF 6Q4C26 foam chamberCK 6Q1C38 check valveCKA 6Q1C40 angle check valveCKAR 6Q1C51 automatic recirculation valveCKAST 6Q1C42 angle stop check valveCKBF 6Q1C50 backflow preventerCKST 6Q1C41 stop check valveCKWF 6Q1C39 wafer check valveCKYST 6Q1C43 Y stop check valveCPL 6Q2C25 coupling/connectorCPLH 6Q2C26 half couplingCPLR 6Q1C32 reducing coupling

DEL 6Q1C69 deluge valveDIA 6Q1C30 diaphragm valve

EDC 6Q2C24 eccentric diameter changeEND 6Q2C16 endEOL 6Q3C77 elboletEW 6Q4C38 eye washE5 6Q2C44 5.625°10; elbowE11 6Q2C51 11.25°10; elbowE22 6Q2C53 22.5°10; elbowE45 6Q2C57 45°10; elbowE45L 6Q2C68 45°10; long elbowE45LR 6Q2C59 45°10; long radius elbowE45LT 6Q2C60 45°10; long tangent elbowE45S 6Q2C66 45°10; short elbowE45ST 6Q2C65 45°10; street elbowE45U 6Q2C63 45°10; union elbow

611

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ E453D 6Q2C61 45°10; 3D elbowE60 6Q2C73 60°10; elbowE90 6Q2C77 90°10; elbowE90L 6Q2C94 90°10; long elbowE90LR 6Q2C80 90°10; long radius elbowE90LT 6Q2C82 90°10; long radius long tangent elbowE90R 6Q2C84 90°10; reducing elbowE90RST 6Q2C91 90°10; reducing street elbowE90S 6Q2C93 90°10; short elbowE90SR 6Q2C79 90°10; short radius elbowE90ST 6Q2C90 90°10; street elbowE90U 6Q2C88 90°10; union elbowE903D 6Q2C86 90°10; 3D elbow

F 6Q2C01 flangeFBLD 6Q2C08 blind flangeFE 6Q2C04 expander flangeFLO 6Q1C57 float valveFO 6Q2C06 orifice flangeFOL 6Q3C79 endoletFOOT 6Q1C58 foot valveFR 6Q2C03 reducing flange

GAT 6Q1C01 gate valveGATBL 6Q1C04 blank gate valveGATCON 6Q1C03 conduit gate valveGATEX 6Q1C02 extended body gate valveGLO 6Q1C11 globe valve (2-way)GLOA 6Q1C12 angle globe valve (2-way)GLOY 6Q1C14 Y globe valveGLO3W 6Q1C13 globe valve (3-way)

HC 6Q2C43 hose connectionHD 6Q2C17 headHOS 6Q1C72 hose valveHOSA 6Q1C73 angle hose valveHRST 6Q4C25 hose rack stationHR1 6Q4C24 hose reelH2W 6Q4C10 fire hydrant (2-way)H2WN 6Q4C11 fire hydrant w/monitor nozzle (2-way)H3W1 6Q4C13 fire hydrant (3-way)

INST 6Q2C46 reducing insertIRV 6Q1C80 instrument root valve (2-way)

KNF 6Q1C32 knife gate valve

L 6Q3C47 lateralLOL 6Q3C78 lateroletLRB 6Q3C49 reducing branch lateralLRRB 6Q3C50 reducing run & branch lateralL90YB 6Q3C54 90°10; long wye

612

AA

BB

CC

Appendix B: Component Sort by Model Code________________ L90YRB 6Q3C55 90°10; reducing long Y branch

M 6Q3C14 miterME 6Q4C02 elevated fire monitorMF 6Q4C04 foam monitorMFE 6Q4C05 elevated foam monitorMFR 6Q4C06 remotely operated foam monitorMN 6Q4C01 fire monitorMR 6Q4C03 remotely operated fire monitorM45 6Q3C16 45°10; miter

NEE 6Q1C22 needle valveNIP 6Q3C88 branch nippleNIPIL 6Q3C89 in-line nippleNOL 6Q3C76 nippolet

PIN 6Q1C56 pinch valvePIPB 6Q2C47 pipe bendPLU 6Q1C16 plug valve (2-way)PLUG 6Q2C19 plugPLU3W 6Q1C18 plug valve (3-way)PLU4W 6Q1C19 plug valve (4-way)

REDC 6Q2C27 concentric reducerREDE 6Q2C28 eccentric reducerRPAD 6Q3C80 reinforcing padRWELD 6Q3C82 reinforcing weldR18LR 6Q3C05 180°10; long radius returnR180 6Q3C01 180°10; returnR180CL 6Q3C07 180°10; close returnR180MD 6Q3C08 180°10; medium returnR180OP 6Q3C09 180°10; open returnR180SR 6Q3C03 180°10; short radius return

SAD 6Q3C70 saddleSLI 6Q1C33 slide valve (2-way)SLI3W 6Q1C34 slide valve (3-way)SOL 6Q3C74 sockoletSPA 6Q2C15 open spacerSPA 6P4C31 pre-action sprinklerSS 6Q4C39 safety showerSSEW 6Q4C40 safety shower & eye washSSP 6P4C32 spray sprinklerSW 6P4C30 wet sprinklerSWGC 6Q2C35 concentric swageSWGE 6Q2C36 eccentric swageSWOL 6Q3C72 sweepoletS2W 6Q4C60 siamese (2-way)S2W90 6Q4C66 90°10; siamese (2-way)S90YB 6Q3C52 90°10; short wyeS90YRB 6Q3C53 90°10; reducing short wye

613

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ T 6Q3C22 teeTBA 6Q3C38 basin teeTDR 6Q3C36 drip ring teeTKDR 6Q1C62 tank drain valveTM90 6Q3C18 90°10; miterTOL 6Q3C75 threadoletTRB 6Q3C24 reducing branch teeTRI 6Q3C34 reducing instrument teeTRRB 6Q3C25 reducing run & branch teeTSPA 6Q2C14 tapered spacerTST 6Q3C31 street teeTUOB 6Q3C28 on-branch union teeTUOR 6Q3C27 on-run union tee

UN 6Q2C39 unionUND 6Q2C41 dielectric unionUNO 6Q2C40 orifice union

VDV 6Q1C76 vent/drain valve

WOL 6Q3C73 weldolet

X 6Q3C60 crossXBA 6Q3C64 basin crossXRB 6Q3C62 reducing branch crossXRRB 6Q3C63 reducing run & branches cross

Y 6Q3C45 wye

3WRV 6Q1C81 instrument root valve (3-way)3WV 6Q1C05 valve (3-way)4WRV 6Q1C82 instrument root valve (4-way)45DC 6Q2C56 45°10; direction change90DC 6Q2C76 90°10; direction change4590DC 6Q2C75 45°10;-90°10; direction change

45DC 6Q2C55 45°10; direction change

614

AA

BB

CC

Appendix B: Component Sort by Description________________

Component Sort by Description

Description Model Code AABBCC Code

BENDSpipe PIPB 6Q2C47

BLANKSblank disc BDISC 6Q2C12closed spectacle BLSPC 6Q2C11open spectacle BLSPO 6Q2C10

CONNECTORSbushing BUSH 6Q2C44hose connection HC 6Q2C43reducing insert INST 6Q2C46

COUPLINGScoupling/connector CPL 6Q2C25half CPLH 6Q2C26reducing CPLR 6Q2C32

CROSSESbasin XBA 6Q3C64cross X 6Q3C60reducing branch XRB 6Q3C62reducing run & branch XRRB 6Q3C63

ELBOWS5.625°10; E5 6Q2C4911.25°10; E11 6Q2C5122.5°10; E22 6Q2C5345°10; direction change 45DC 6Q2C5545°10; E45 6Q2C5745°10; direction change 45DC 6Q2C5645°10; long E45L 6Q2C6845°10; long tangent E45LT 6Q2C6045°10; long radius E45LR 6Q2C5945°10; short E45S 6Q2C6645°10; street E45ST 6Q2C6545°10; union E45U 6Q2C6345°10; 3D E453D 6Q2C6145°10;-90°10; direction change 4590DC 6Q2C7560°10; E60 6Q2C7390°10; E90 6Q2C7790°10; direction change 90DC 6Q2C7690°10; long E90L 6Q2C9490°10; long radius E90LR 6Q2C8090°10; long radius long tangent E90LT 6Q2C8290°10; short E90S 6Q2C93

615

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ 90°10; short radius E90SR 6Q2C7990°10; street E90ST 6Q2C9090°10; reducing E90R 6Q2C8490°10; reducing street E90RST 6Q2C9190°10; union E90U 6Q2C8890°10; 3D E903D 6Q2C86

ENDScap CAP 6Q2C21end END 6Q2C16head HD 6Q2C17plug PLUG 6Q2C19

FIRE EQUIPMENTfoam chamber CF 6Q4C26hose rack station HRST 6Q4C25hosereel HR1 6Q4C24

FLANGEblind FBLD 6Q2C08expander FE 6Q2C04flange FWN 6Q2C01orifice FO 6Q2C06reducing FR 6Q2C03

HYDRANTSfire (2-way) H2W 6Q4C10fire (3-way) H3W1 6Q4C13fire w/monitor nozzle H2WN 6Q4C11

LATERALlateral L 6Q3C47reducing branch LRB 6Q3C49reducing run & branch LRRB 6Q3C50

MITERSmiter M 6Q3C1445°10; M45 6Q3C1690°10; TM90 6Q3C18

MONITORSelevated fire ME 6Q4C02elevated foam MFE 6Q4C05fire MN 6Q4C01foam MF 6Q4C04remotely operated fire MR 6Q4C03remotely operated foam MFR 6Q4C06

NIPPLESbranch NIP 6Q3C88in-line NIPIL 6Q3C89

616

AA

BB

CC

Appendix B: Component Sort by Description________________ OLETSelbolet EOL 6Q3C77endolet FOL 6Q3C79laterolet LOL 6Q3C78nippolet NOL 6Q3C76sockolet SOL 6Q3C74sweepolet SWOL 6Q3C72threadolet TOL 6Q3C75weldolet WOL 6Q3C73

SAFETY EQUIPMENTeye wash EW 6Q4C38shower SS 6Q4C39shower & eye wash SSEW 6Q4C40

SIAMESEsiamese (2-way) S2W 6Q4C6090°10; (2-way) S2W90 6Q4C66

SPACERSblind BLPAD 6Q2C13open SPA 6Q2C15tapered TSPA 6Q2C14

SPRINKLERSpre-action SPA 6P4C31spray SSP 6P4C32wet SW 6P4C30

SWAGESconcentric SWGC 6Q2C35eccentric SWGE 6Q2C36

TEESbasin TBA 6Q3C38drip ring TDR 6Q3C36on-branch union TUOB 6Q3C28on-run union TUOR 6Q3C27reducing branch TRB 6Q3C24reducing instrument TRI 6Q3C34reducing run & branch TRRB 6Q3C25street TST 6Q3C31tee T 6Q3C22

REDUCERSconcentric REDC 6Q2C27concentric diameter change CDC 6Q2C23eccentric REDE 6Q2C28eccentric diameter change EDC 6Q2C24

617

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ RETURNS180°10; R180 6Q3C01180°10; close R180CL 6Q3C07180°10; long radius R18LR 6Q3C05180°10; medium R180MD 6Q3C08180°10; open R180OP 6Q3C09180°10; short radius R180SR 6Q3C03

UNIONSdielectric UND 6Q2C41orifice UNO 6Q2C40union UN 6Q2C39

VALVESangle AV 6Q1C37angle blowdown BDA 6Q1C53angle check CKA 6Q1C40angle globe (2-way) GLOA 6Q1C12angle base HOSA 6Q1C73angle stop check CKAST 6Q1C42automatic recirculation CKAR 6Q1C51backflow preventer CKBF 6Q1C50ball (2-way) BAL 6Q1C06ball (3-way) BAL3W 6Q1C08blank gate GATBL 6Q1C04butterfly BFY 6Q1C26check CK 6Q1C38conduit gate GATCON 6Q1C03deluge DEL 6Q1C69diaphragm DIA 6Q1C30drain/vent VDV 6Q1C76extended body gate GATEX 6Q1C02float FLO 6Q1C57foot FOOT 6Q1C58gate GAT 6Q1C01globe (2-way) GLO 6Q1C11globe (3-way) GLO3W 6Q1C13hose HOS 6Q1C72instrument root (2-way) IRV 6Q1C80instrument root (3-way) 3WRV 6Q1C81instrument root (4-way) 4WRV 6Q1C82knife gate KNF 6Q1C32needle NEE 6Q1C22pinch PIN 6Q1C56plug (2-way) PLU 6Q1C16plug (3-way) PLU3W 6Q1C18plug (4-way) PLU4W 6Q1C19slide (2-way) SLI 6Q1C33slide (3-way) SLI3W 6Q1C34stop check CKST 6Q1C41tank drain TKDR 6Q1C62vent/drain VDV 6Q1C76

618

AA

BB

CC

Appendix B: Component Sort by Description________________ wafer check CKWF 6Q1C39Y blowdown BDY 6Q1C54Y globe GLOY 6Q1C14Y stop check CKYST 6Q1C433-way 3WV 6Q1C05

WELDSbuttweld BWELD 6Q3C84reinforcing pad RPAD 6Q3C80reinforcing weld RWELD 6Q3C82saddle SAD 6Q3C70

WYESwye Y 6Q3C4590°10; long L90YB 6Q3C5490°10; reducing long L90YRB 6Q3C5590°10; reducing short S90YRB 6Q3C5390°10; short S90YB 6Q3C52

619


620

Fo

rms

Appendix C: Piping Designer Forms________________

Appendix C Piping DesignerForms

This appendix lists the forms used to place components, piping specialties, instruments, andpipe supports. These form names are supplied in order for you to quickly access and modifythem if necessary. All these forms are delivered with the PD_Shell product in thewin32app\ingr\pdshell\forms directory.

Fire and Safety

FS001 Fire Monitor

FS013 Fire Hydrant

FS10A Fire Hydrant

FS11A Fire Hydrant

FS2B Fire Monitor

Instruments

INA000 Instrument Components

INA001 Instrument

INA003 Instrument Ball Valve

INA004 Instrument - Rotary Plug Valve

INA005 Instrument - Butterfly Valve

INA006 Instrument - Diaphragm Valve

INA007 Instrument - Solenoid Valve

INA008 Instrument - 3-Way Globe Valve

INA009 Instrument - 3-Way Ball Valve

621

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ INA010 Instrument - 3-Way Rotary Plug Valve

INA011 Instrument - Knife Valve

INA012 Instrument - Automatic Recirculation

INA013 Instrument - Angle Solenoid Valve

INA014 Instrument - Angle Pressure Relief Valve

INA015 Instrument - Pressure Refief Rupture Disc

INA016 Instrument - with Upstream Regulator

INA017 Instrument - with Downstream Regulator

INA018 Instrument - Restriction Orifice Union

INA019 Instrument - Orifice Plate

INA020 Instrument - with Upstream Valve

INA021 Instrument - with Downstream Valve

INA022 Instrument - Cylindrical with 2 CPs

INA023 Instrument - Rectangular with 2 CPs





INA028 Instrument Indicator

INB000 Instrument Components

INB001 Instrument

INB002 Instrument

INB003 Instrument

INB004 Instrument

INB005 Instrument

622

Fo

rms

Appendix C: Piping Designer Forms________________ INB006 Instrument Diaphragm Valve

INB007 Instrument

INB008 Instrument 3-Way Globe Valve

INB009 Instrument

INB010 Instrument

INB011 Instrument Orifice Plate

Piping Assemblies

PALCST Control Station Assembly

PALT1A Temperature Assembly Dimension

PALT3A Temperature Instrument Construction (T3A)

PAS000 Place Piping Assembly

PAS001 Place Piping Assembly (valves and flanges)

PAS002 Place Piping Assembly (flow instrument connections)

PAS003 Place Piping Assembly (level instrument connections)

PAS004 Place Piping Assembly (temperature instrument connections)

PAS005 Place Piping Assembly (pressure)

PAS006 Place Piping Assembly (hydrostatic vents/drains)

PAS007 Place Piping Assembly (optional vents/drains)

PAS010 Pump Discharge

PAS011 Pump Suction

PAS012 Elbow, Reducer, Flange

PAS013 Flange, Eccentric Reducer, Flange

623

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ PAS014 Flange, Concentric Reducer, Flange

PAS015 Temperature Indicator

Piping Commodities

PDplace_cmp Place Component

Piping Specialties

PSA000 Piping Specialty Components

PSA001 Piping Specialty - Flame Arrestor

PSA002 Piping Specialty - Hammer Arrester

PSA003 Piping Specialty - Exhaust Head

PSA004 Piping Specialty - Free Vent without Screen

PSA005 Piping Specialty - Free Vent with Screen

PSA006 Piping Specialty - Expansion Joint

PSA007 Piping Specialty - Swivel Joint Type 1



PSA010 Piping Specialty - Dresser Coupling

PSA011 Piping Specialty - Flex Hose

PSA012 Piping Specialty Sample Cooler

PSA013 Piping Specialty - Spary Nozzle

PSA014 Piping Specialty - Single Basket Strainer

PSA015 Piping Specialty - Sump Strainer

624

Fo

rms

Appendix C: Piping Designer Forms________________ PSA016 Piping Specialty - T-Strainer

PSA017 Piping Specialty - Y-Strainer

PSA018 Piping Specialty - Basket Strainer

PSA019 Piping Specialty - Cone Strainer

PSA020 Piping Specialty - Flat Plate Strainer

PSA021 Piping Specialty - Inverted Bucket Steam Trap

PSA022 Piping Specialty - Float Thermostatic Steam Trap

PSA023 Piping Specialty - Liquid Expansion Steam Trap

PSA024 Piping Specialty - Thermostatic Steam Trap

PSA025 Piping Specialty - Thermostatic Steam Trap w/o Strainer

PSA026 Piping Specialty - Thermostatic Steam Trap w/ Strainer

PSA027 Piping Specialty - Box with 2 CPs



PSA030 Piping Specialty - Cylinder with 2 CPs



PSB000 Piping Specialty Components

PSB001 Piping Specialty







625

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ PSB008 Piping Specialty



Pipe Supports

PSP000 Place Pipe Support

PSP001 Pipe Support - Type 1








Valve Operators

VA1003 Chain Operator

VA1331 Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel

VA1332 Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel

VA2003 Valve Appurtenance - Floor Stand

VA3003 Valve Appurtenance - Extension Stem

VO0331 Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel


626

Fo

rms

Appendix C: Piping Designer Forms________________ VO0333 Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel



VOI331 Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel

VOP000 Valve Operators

VOP003 Valve Operator - Handwheel

VOP004 Valve Operator - Type 4

VOP005 Valve Operator - Inclined Handwheel

VOP006 Valve Operator - Type 6

VOP009 Valve Operator - Short Wrench

VOP011 Valve Operator - Long Wrench

VOP017 Valve Operator - Lever

VOP019 Valve Operator - Short T-Handle

VOP021 Valve Operator - Long T-Handle

VOP025 Handwheel Special Type

VOP027 Valve Operator - Special Wrench

VOP029 Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel

VOP031 Gear Top Mounted Inclined Hand Wheel

VOP033 Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel - Type 1

VOP035 Gear Side Mounted Inclined Hand Wheel

VOP039 Valve Operator - Lever Quick Action



VOP331 Gear Side Mounted Hand Wheel

ZO401D Operator

627


628

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

Glossary

absolute path name The sequence of directories, beginning with the root directory (/) thatlocates a file. See also path name and relative path name.

active depth The plane in a 3-D design upon which you can place elements and performmanipulations.

active process The process which is displayed in the Process ID field; it controls themessage fields, the menus, and the keyboard. The active process has ahighlighted window icon strip.

application software Software designed to meet specific needs, unlike system software whichruns other software.

batch processing A method of processing data which collects a series of operations into agroup (or ‘‘batch’’) and executes the group in a continuous stream withoutuser intervention.

batch queue A queue, or channel for moving requests, created through NQS. A batchqueue handles scheduling for processes submitted through the Batchoptions screen menu.

branch point A point on a pipeline which separates piping segments so that they can beassigned different segment parameters. A branch point allows forplacement of branch components.

cancel button The button located in the upper right corner of a form containing a red X orthe word cancel. Select the cancel button to exit the form or option.

cell A permanent association of elements that can be stored and placed as agroup, and then manipulated as individual elements.

character A column data type that stores alphanumeric character data.

client In network operations, a node which accesses data or performs a function onthe remote resource (usually a server). All network operations (database,NFS, NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/serverrelationship.

column An attribute of a database table. A group of columns defines a table in adatabase.

command Instructions from the user to perform a function on specified data.

confirm button A button that appears in the upper right corner of a form and contains agreen check mark or the word confirm. Select the confirm button to initiatea specified option.

629


coordinate The location of a point along the X, Y, or Z axis.

coordinate system A geometric relation used to denote the location of points in the designcube. The most common coordinate system is the rectangular coordinatesystem, whereby points are located by traversing the X, Y, and Z axes of thedesign cube. Normally, coordinate systems have their origin defined as0,0,0, though this is not required. Other coordinate systems are used to moreeasily express the coordinates of specific geometric entities. For example,you can use a spherical coordinate system to help define points on a sphere,and you can use a cylindrical coordinate system to help define points on acylinder.

coordinates An ordered set of absolute or relative data values that specify a location in acoordinate system.

core files The image files written by System V for a number of reasons, the mostcommon of which are memory violations, illegal instructions, bus errors,and user-generated quit signals.

cursor The pointer that the user moves on the screen to indicate an item or area.

data button The mouse button used to place data points and tentative points, to acceptpreviously selected elements, and to select commands from forms andmenus.

data entry field The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known askey-in field.

data point A point placed by pressing the data button on the mouse. Data points selectcommands from the panel menus and Menu Bar, place elements, identifyand accept elements, and activate windows and perform windowmanipulations.

database A collection of comprehensive informational files having predeterminedstructure and organization that can then be communicated, interpreted, orprocessed by a specific program.

database table The part of the database that is made of rows and columns and containsinformation about the project and design elements.

default The predetermined value of a parameter that is automatically supplied bythe system or program whenever a value is not specified by the user.

delete To remove, destroy, eliminate, or erase.

delimiter A separating mark or space; a character or sequence of contiguouscharacters that mark the end of a string of characters.

device A nonaddressable component of a network, that is, a component onto whicha user cannot log, for example, tape drive, disk drive, and floppy disk.

630

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

directory A file that contains the names of other files.

display-list box A small box with horizontal dashes located at the end of a form key-in field.When selected, a list of the data available for that field is displayed. Inputcan then be selected from the list with a data point instead of keying in theinformation.

domain The set of acceptable values for a value within a component.

dragging Another term for the dynamic function that attaches the cursor to an elementso you can see it move.

easting A term used in plane surveying that describes an east, or positive, differencein longitude.

entity An object (project, drawing, element, and so forth.) of interest about whichinformation is stored; a relational database table.

envelope file See interference envelope.

file specification A UNIX path name that tells the system where to locate a file.

filename A user-defined name given to an interactively created file. The name shouldbe relevant to the contents of the file.

form An interface or screen menu designed with the I/FORMS product. Becausemany of the screen menus in the application software are built withI/FORMS, you must have the FORMS_S product on your workstation.

full path name The name of the entire path or directory hierarchy to a file, including the filename. See also relative path name.

gadget A portion of a form, such as a button, a field, or a checklist, that responds toinformation. Gadgets can display default values or act as data entry areas.

header The first items of information in a file which precede any actual data. Theheader contains information on the structure and contents of the file.

hierarchy A classified structure with superiors (roots) and subordinates (dependents)for grouping files or commands.

icon A pictorial representation or image; a symbol that graphically identifies acommand.

Informix A relational database management system supported by RIS.

Ingres A relational database management system supported by RIS.

interference envelope An equipment modeling primitive or parametric component that is used inconjunction with or instead of model graphics for interference checking.Interference envelopes are given different levels and display symbology todistinguish them from primitives.

631


invert elevation The lowest point on the internal diameter of the pipe.

isometric Relating to or being a drafting system characterized by three equal axes atright angles; a view in which the horizontal lines of an element are drawn atan angle to the horizontal and all verticals are projected at an angle from thebase.

key An attribute (column) in a table which is chosen as the access vehicle toindividual rows of the table.

key-in field The field on a screen used to accept user-supplied data. Also known as adata entry field.

keypoint A point on an element, including vertices, to which you can snap.

keyword A word recognized by the software that provides access to a certainfunction.

menubar The strip at the top of the screen that contains icons for selectingcommands.

message area The area that appears in the MicroStation Command Window when you areworking in a design file. It is divided into the Command Status field, theCurrent Command field, the Prompt field, and the Key-in field.

model A graphic representation or schema.

network An interconnection of host computers and workstations that enables them toshare data and control. The term network can mean the devices that connectthe system, or it can mean the connected system.

NFS Network File System, the system that provides access to data that isdistributed among machines through an interconnection of host computersand workstations. NFS allows you to mount a remote resource to your localworkstation so you can access the data as though it were local. NFS isusually used to access centralized data on a server.

node Any addressable device (such as a workstation or a server) that is connectedto a network. The network enables the connected nodes to share data andsystem control.

node address The hard-wired Ethernet address assigned to each node when it ismanufactured. It is necessary for each node to identify and communicatewith another node in the network.

node name A name, or alias, that can be assigned to the node address of a device on anetwork.

northing A term used to describe a north coordinate location in the plant coordinatesystem.

632

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

nozzle A special equipment modeling primitive that contains the connection pointto piping. This point does NOT include a gasket allowance, but ratherrepresents the face-of-flange coordinate.

NQS Network Queuing System, the software package that allows you to definenetwork-wide batch and device queues. Use of NQS involves setting uplocal resource queues on the system(s) where the resources reside andsetting up ‘‘pipe queues’’ on the systems that are to have access to theresources.

Oracle A relational database management system supported by RIS.

origin In coordinate geometry, the point where the x, y, and z-axes intersect.

origin point The point at which the coordinate system is placed.

orthogonal view A view which is a projection of the model onto a plane along lines whichare orthogonal to the plane.

parameter A property whose value determines the characteristics or behavior ofsomething.

path A sequence of directories leading to a file or a sequence of menus leading toa command.

path name The sequence of directories leading to a file. See also absolute path nameand relative path name.

PDS Plant Design System

pipe queue A controlled channel for moving requests to batch or device queues onremote systems and for receiving status and/or data in response.

place data point To identify a specific element, or indicate a specific point in the design file.

plane A spatial element in geometry that may or may not have a boundary, but islevel, having no elevations or depressions, and is three-dimensional.

RDB Reference Database.

reference database A collection of reference data containing information relative to industrydesign codes, vendor’s catalog data, job specifications, commodity libraries,graphics symbology, label descriptions, report formats and otherinformation of a similar manner.

relative path name The sequence of directories leading from the current directory to a particularfile. See also path name and absolute path name.

rotate To turn; to change the angular orientation; to transform by revolution abouta specific axis.

633


row A unit of related information in a table. One collection of column values fora table.

rubberbanding The animation dynamic that enables you to specify the position of a datapoint while the element changes as you move the cursor.

schema A description of the overall structure of the rulebase or database.

schema file A file that outlines the overall logical structure of a rule base or a database.

server In network operations, the node which maintains common data or performsa common task needed by clients. All network operations (database, NFS,NQS) between two or more nodes establish a client/server relationship.

Structured QueryLanguage SQL

Language developed by IBM for creating, modifying, and queryingrelational databases.

style The symbology of an element such as continuous dashes, dash-dot, solid,and so forth.

surface The skin of a three-dimensional geometric element.

symbology The display style of an element, including color, style, and weight.

table A collection of data for quick reference, either stored in sequential locationsin memory or printed as an array of rows and columns of data items of thesame type.

toggle To switch; to change between two alternatives.

user name A name that provides access to an account on the system.

values Data, either entered by the user or determined by the software, that arestored in an attribute.

variable A quantity that may assume any one of a set of values.

vector A quantity possessing both magnitude and direction, generally representedas a line. Vectors can be manipulated geometrically and are represented asa coordinate triple (x,y,z).

view The defined area of vision on a screen. A view allows you to see aprescribed volume of the design cube. Views are created with their own x,y, and z axes. The x,y plane of the view is parallel to the screen, while thez-axis can be thought of as coming straight out of the view towards you.The view axes maintain this relationship regardless of the rotation withrespect to the design cube. See also active depth.

virtual memory External memory for a computer that can be used as if it were an extensionof the computer’s internal memory. The software uses virtual memory tostore data. This means that unneeded files and data, stay on the disk untilthey are called for. Because the internal processing memory stores aminimal amount of data, the software can perform processing more quickly.

634

Glo

ssary

Glossary________________

working directory The directory from which you are accessing files.

635


636

Ind

ex

Index________________

Index 1/2 flange outside

diameter 761/2 piping outside diameter 75

Aaccept

and place component 173and start new segment 171

activecolor 352group 81options 428, 433

commodity selection 102, 433component group 434connect point 435default model symbology 435design volume coordinate system 436insulation graphics 435material description display 434NPD units 433plant design coordinate system 435specialty description display 434

P&ID 586placement point 41segment data 50slope option 175style 354weight 353

active flow direction 52add

category 415chain wheel 201reference model category 485tap 205to valve 203valve appurtenance 203

align view 421analyze 491

commands 357data 357

designcheck review 366review 358

P&ID comparison review 367piping clash

check 364review 361

anglesintersect 189measure 440

approvalcontrol manager 527

line ID 531status 342

approvepiping 342

areawindow 387

assemblypiping 150

associatesegment with nozzle 443

attachmodel 482

attributebreak 40, 310review 344revise 304

attribute breaksand insulation purpose 310

automatedcommodity options 102, 433placement 195

automated placement component selection 196automatic attach & verify 483

Bbatch

processes 38bend

angle 100deflection table 197to tee-type branch 65

bends and tee-type branches 236bio-pharmaceutical 194bolts

revise 318bottom-to-top 383branch

insertion tables 197intersect 184on pipe run option 176reinforcement

637

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ branch (continued)

reinforcement (continued)verify 477

branches 236break

attribute data 310brief active data list 52button assignments 495bypass

create 178

Ccamera 384

lens 407off 407position 407setup 406target 407view 406

cascade 383category control 413

add 415remove 416review/revise 414

centerwindow 387

center of gravityreview 476

centerlines 40chain wheel 201change

color 381style 381symbology 381weight 381

clash check 364color

shading 403colors 493command overview 29commodity

data 461item name table 196options 148override 158selection 102, 433swap 300

commodity materialdescription

display 434

comparesegment data 456

complete active data list 52component

accept piping segment and place 173automatic placement 195data 470dimensions

measure 439find by linkage 446forms customization 534group 326, 434place 95placement

errors 160review 467

revision 231delete 246move

pipe support 254reconstruct component 232revise

pipe 242tap 250

rotate component 248search criteria 87selection during automated placement 196

componentsbio-pharmaceutical 194

compress design 427compute distance 73

1/2 flange outside diameter 761/2 piping outside diameter 75insulation thickness 77measurement 78

connectpoint 44, 435segments 313to design 58, 108

connectionsinstrument 152, 153pressure 155temperature 154

constant shading 404construct point 70, 391

by vessel OD 68construction

commands 377copy

commands 379place

638

Ind

ex

Index________________ construction (continued)

place (continued)commands 378

revisecommands 380

construction graphics 229controls

orientation 96conventions

forms 35coordinate

review (IGDS) 457system 49, 435

indicator 42coordinate system indicator 42copy 384

and mirror piping 223and rotate piping 226element 379parallel by distance 379parallel by keyin 379pipe support 217piping 220view 421

createbypass 178header format 526piping segment toggle 191

creationcommands 91

cross-section 404

Ddata

verification and diagnostics 437compare segment data 456find segment or component by linkage 446highlight piping on segment 441measure

angle 440distance 439

P&ID data comparison options 453re-associate model with P&ID database 455repair

associativity to segment 442associativity with nozzle 443database linkage 445

reviewattribute linkage 444COG and weights 476component placement 467

data (continued)verification and diagnostics

(continued)review (continued)

coordinates (IGDS) 457piping job specification 458RDB management data 474

verifybranch reinforcement 477data integrity of model 447nozzle at pipeline end 452wall thickness calculations 479

data managementinspection iso IDs 550inspection iso keys 550

data verification and diagnostics 428database

reference 45requirements 567verification manager 533

defaultmodel

symbology 435define

flow 52segment vertices 46slope 175

deletecomponent 246element 380partial 380piping 273

assembly 274segment vertex 260

designcheck

review 366status error 165

checker 366, 499sample report 506theory 501

construction commands 377piping commands 89review 358volume coordinate system 49, 436

detachmodel 484

diagnostics 437dialog view rotation 402, 424diaphragm

type 4 136

639

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ diaphragm (continued)

type 6 136display

field weld 355isometric drawing limit 355only labels 355report 347

display depthset for review commands 412

distancemeasure 439

distance and direction 71, 393document

organization 16purpose 15

drainsvents

hydrostatic 156operational 157

Eeast elevation 423edit

attribute 304segment data 328

elementcommands 491

environment 29equipment

number and nozzle number 585switch to 428, 489

equivalent NPD 169error

messages 605place component 160

examples of component reconstruction 233exit 427, 428, 432extend

1 to intersection 380both to intersection 380line

by distance 380by keyin 380

pipe run 180extension stem 203

Ffile 427

commands 427, 428design 428, 431

filled hidden line 404find

segment or component by linkage 446fire

safety 192fit 387flanges 237

valve 151floor stand 203flow

direction 52fonts 493form

builder guidelines 549forms

conventions 35customization 534, 538, 549fire and safety 621instruments 621left/right screen 411pipe supports 626piping

assemblies 623commodities 624specialties 624

placement 621valve operators 626

Ggadgets

conventions 35gaskets

revise 316gear

inclinedside mount 132

side mounttype B 134type C 135

top mount 127inclined 131

graphics 39grid on/off 422group

components 326operations

active group 81group revision 261

640

Ind

ex

Index________________ Hhandwheel

inclinedvalve operator 124

special 124valve operators 123

headerformat

create 526select 526

help 495hidden line 404highlight

piping on segment 441hydrostatic

ventsdrains 156

Iidentify

active segment point 46inclined

handwheelvalve operators 124

side mountgear 132

top mountgear 131

insertpiping segment vertex 259

inspection isodata manager 550load IDs 550load keys 550, 552revise key 339

inspection keyrevise 339

inspection key loader 552instrument

connections 152, 153data 141, 466

from RDB 139from user 141piping job specification 139

option 138symbol options 144

insulation graphicsplace 435

insulation thickness 77integrity of model

verify 447

interference check 364intersect

by angles 189skewed 186sloped pipe run 188to branch 184underground piping 182with plane 190

introductionproject organization 27setup 28

iso view 423isometric

drawinglimit 324review 373

view 397item

window in 387

Jjob specification

review 458tables 463

joinsegments 313

Llabels

display only 355lens 407level

symbologyoff 410, 422on 409, 422

levels 385lever

quick action 126valve operator 125

loadweld numbers 337

locatecomponents 435

locate item 418logical pipe supports

reconstruction of 294logical support 215long

T-handle 130wrench 129

641

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ looking

east 397north 397south 397west 397

Mmagnify 387match

planar element 400, 424materials class

data 460list 464

measureangle 440distance 439

measurement 78metric 433midpoint 80mirror

and copy piping 223piping 276

mirror & copy 379horizontal 379vertical 379

mirror originalabout line 380horizontal 380vertical 380

miscellaneouscommands

view equipment 417model

categories 387data

review 343attributes 344nozzle data 346report 347

revise 302display

category control 413plot 429revision

component 231piping 261segment vertex 256

modifyelement 380forms 549

moveand center view 387, 389down 421element 380from active point 62from reference point 63left 422pipe

run 265support 254

pipeline end 268piping 263

assembly 270segment vertex 257

right 422to coordinate axis 64up 421window 389

Nname from P&ID 588named component existence report 522named item 418neutral file

pipe support model codes 545, 546piping commodity names 541

next 384nipple to a pipe 238node numbers 583non-radial branch 238north elevation 423nozzle

data 346repair associativity to 443verify at pipeline end 452

NPD units 433

Oopen

close 383operational

ventsdrains 157

operatorsvalve 122

orientationcontrols 96tee 42

out of spec placement 158override

commodity 158

642

Ind

ex

Index________________ overview

piping design 25

Ppd_design

reconstruction 294PDS environment 31

PD_Shell 32PD_Shell 32

form conventions 35permanent color shading 403perpendicular bisector 378phong shading 405physical pipe supports

reconstruction of 294physical support 208P&ID

commodity name 588comparison report manager 512comparison review 367correlation table 568data 580, 587

comparison options 453, 589transfer 565

by equipment number and nozzle number585

correlation table 568database requirements 567update

by node number 585segment data 584

graphical data transfer 576node numbers 583update segment

data 584from P&ID 331

p&idexclusion criteria 575matching criteria 574node numbers 573search mode 575

P&ID comparisonupdate model 520

p&id display categories 577p&id transfer

completeestablishing default attribute values 574

pid_to_piping file 570pipe 239

delete segment vertex 260insert piping segment 259

pipe (continued)move

pipeline end 268segment vertex 257

placement 111re-connect

end and reconstruct 245pipe end 243

reconstruct 244revise 242run

extend 180move 265shorten 180

supportcopy 217logical 215model codes neutral file 545, 546move 254physical 208

pipe supports 239logical

reconstruction of 294physical

reconstruction of 294piping 111

approval 342assembly 150

delete 274move 270

clashcheck 364review 361

commands 89commodity

data 461names 541

connect point 44copy 220

and mirror 223and rotate 226

designdata management 497

approval control manager 527approval control manager line ID 531database verification manager 533design checker 499P&ID comparison report manager 512

overview 25designer

setup 28

643

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ piping (continued)

job specification 45, 115, 139review 458tables 463

materials class data 460mirror 276revision 261

deletepiping 273piping assembly 274

mirror piping 276move

pipe run 265pipeline end 268piping 263

assembly 270reconstruct piping 280replace piping 300rotate piping 278

segments 40, 166specialty 114

data 465from RDB 115from user 117

symbol options 120underground 182

piping materials class list 52piping specialties or instruments 239place

and start new segment 171centerlines 166circle

by center 378by diameter 378by edge 378by radius 378

component 95commodity

options 148override 158

error forms 160instrument 138piping specialty 114

construction graphics 229instrument 138insulation graphics 435line 378

by angle 378logical support command 215physical support 208pipe 111

place (continued)piping assembly 150point 41, 108, 110terminator 378

place componentin sketch command 173

placement 91add

chain wheel 201to valve 203

automated placement 195component 95copy

and mirror piping 223piping 220

mode 98physical support 208place construction graphics 229sketch 166tap component 205

plan view 397, 423planar element

match 400plane

intersect 190plant

coordinate system 49, 435plot

model 428, 429point

in space 66, 110start with piping 67

on pipe 61on segment 60

populate piping segments 195post placement design checks theory 501precision input 56

bend to tee-type branch 65compute distance 73connect to design 58construct point 70, 391distance and direction 71, 393midpoint 80move

from active point 62from reference point 63to coordinate axis 64

pointin space 66on pipe 61on segment 60

644

Ind

ex

Index________________ pressure

connections 155previous 384primary axis 42print 427project

organization 27purchased length pipe 111

Qquick action

lever 126

RRDB

review report 370update from 334

re-associate model with p&id database 455re-compute thickness 332re-connect

end and reconstruct 245pipe end 243

reconstructcomponent 232pipe 244

re-connect end and reconstruct 245piping 280, 294

referencedatabase 45models 428, 480

add model category 485attach model 482automatic attach & verify 483detach model 484levels 485reload reference model 486remove model category 485review/revise model category 485

symbologyby system 488by user 487

refreshviews 387

reloadreference model 486

removecategory 416piping 273reference model category 485

render 385options 403

rendering 494repair

associativity to segment 442graphics linkage to database 445

replacepiping 300

reportsdisplay 347named component existence 522segment data 513

restore permanent symbology 356review

attribute linkage 444attributes 344category 413

add category 415remove category 416review/revise model categories 414

COG and weights 476component placement 467

component data 470table list 468

coordinates (IGDS) 457data 343isometric drawing 373nozzle data 346P&ID

comparison data 367piping

job specification 458instrument data 466piping

commodity data 461job spec tables 463materials class data 460materials class list 464specialty data 465

tap properties 462materials class list 464

RDBmanagement data 474report 370

report 347temporary symbology 350

review P&ID drawing details 577review/revise

categories 387model categories 414p&id display categories 577reference model category 485

645

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ revise

attribute 304break 310

bolt option 318component 231

data 314group 326

connect segments 313data 302gasket option 316group 261inspection keys 339iso drawing limit 324model

categories 414pipe 242

re-connectpipe end 243

reconstruct pipe 244segment commands 256segment data 328tap 250weld type 320

rotate3 points 401about view (x,y,z) 399and copy piping 226component 248piping 278view

about x axis 423about y axis 423about z axis 423absolute 423by 3 points 423element 423relative 423

rotation 386route piping segments 166

Ssafety

fire 192saved model

view 388saved model view 420search criteria

component data 87segment data 85

secondary axis 42

segmentattribute break 310compare segment data 456connect 313data 328

active 50find by linkage 446highlight piping on 441piping 40repair associativity to 442search criteria 85vertex 256

delete 260insert 259move 257

vertices 46segment data

forms customization 538segment data comparison report 513

plus update model 517segment search criteria 529select header format 526select P&ID drawing

by line ID 576by nozzle number 576

service limits error 163set

active depth 425absolute 425relative 425

display depth 425absolute 425relative 425

view orientation 397set display depth 412settings

commands 493setup 28shading

color 403short

T-handle 130wrench 128

shorten pipe run 180show

active depth 425display depth 425

side mount geartype A 133

sketch 166accept

646

Ind

ex

Index________________ sketch (continued)

accept (continued)and place component 173and start new segment 171

active slope 175branch on pipe run 176create bypass 178extend/shorten pipe run 180intersect

by angles 189to branch 184underground piping 182with plane 190

intersect sloped pipe run 188skewed intersection 186slope on/off 174

skewed intersection 186slope 175

on/off 174sloped pipe run

intersect 188smooth shading 405south elevation 423special

handwheel 124wrench 127

specialtydata 465item 114

specialty materialdescription

display 434spin and copy 379spin original 380start

new segment 171with piping 67

stereo 405support

copy pipe support 217logical 215move pipe support 254physical 208

swap 384swap commodity 300switch to equipment 428, 489symbology

model 435reference file

system 488user defined 487

systemof units

NPD 433

Ttable list 468tables

bend deflection 197branch insertions 197commodity item name 196

tag 101tap

component 205properties 462revise 250

temperatureconnections 154

temporary symbology 350active

color 352line style 354weight 353

display only labels 355restore permanent symbology 356

T-Handlelong 130

T-handleshort 130

tile 383top mount

gear 127inclined

gear 131transfer

from P&ID 565trigonometric calculator 79type 4

diaphragm 136type 6

diaphragm 136type A

side mount gear 133type B

gearside mount 134

type Cgear

side mount 135typefaces 19

647

Piping Design Reference Guide — April 2002________________ Uunderground piping 182update 384

all 421by node number 585from RDB 334left 421right 421segment data

from P&ID 331, 584, 586view 421window 398

update from existing segment 53user

commands 495preferences 495

utilities 437

Vvalve

flanges 151operators 122

valve operatorhandwheel 123inclined top mount gear 131lever 125

quick action 126long

wrench 129long T-handle 130short T-handle 130side mount gear

type A 133side mount gear type B 134side mount gear type C 135special

handwheel 124top mount

gear 127valve operators

handwheelinclined 124

inclined side mount gear 132valves

addchain wheel 201extension stem 203floor stand 203

ventsdrains

hydrostatic 156

vents (continued)drains (continued)

operational 157verification 437verify

branch reinforcement 477data integrity of model 447nozzle at pipeline end 452wall thickness calculations 479

vertexdelete 260insert 259move 257segment 46

vessel OD construct point 68view

commands 383depth 425equipment 417manipulations 408more 421off 421on 421rotation 402, 424saved 420toggle 421update 398viewing options 395

viewingdirection 423

viewing options 387, 395camera view 406color shading 403dialog view rotation 402form screen 411match planar element 400rotate about view 399rotation 3 points 401set view orientation 397update window 398views 408

volumewindow 395

Wwall thickness

calculationsverify 479

re-compute 332weight

display toggle 422

648

Ind

ex

Index________________ weights

review 476weld

numbers 337revise type 320

weld number 554weld numbering settings 556weld types 239west elevation 423wheel

add chain wheel 201window

area 387center 387move 389named item 387, 418origin 387update 398volume 387, 395

wiremesh 404wrench

long 129short 128special 127

Zzoom

in 387out 387

649


650

Piping Design Graphics (PD_Design) Reference Guide Addendum February 2003 DPDS3-PB-200028B For PDS version 07.02.00.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200028A.

Piping Design Reference Guide Addendum – February 2003

652

Table of Contents Revise Attribute (replaces 3.5.1).............................................................................. 653 Revise Component Data (replaces 3.5.4)................................................................. 660 Approval Control Manager - Line ID (replaces 10.4) ............................................. 663 Weld Numbering (replaces 10.9) ............................................................................. 665 SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer (replaces 11.2)............................................ 668

653

Revise Attribute (replaces 3.5.1) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 304-309 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).

The following information has been added:

• Weld ownership toggle See the following text for details.

This command modifies the database attributes or user data associated with a selected element. You can modify the database information of a component or segment the user data associated with a component, pipe support, segment, or a PDS marker.

This command activates the Revise Attribute form used to select the attribute or user data information to be modified. When you enter a new attribute value, the system validates the entry and stores the revised information in the database. If you change the user data, the system toggles the value among the acceptable settings.

When you revise the fluid codes using this command, the system provides a list of appropriate fluid codes on the basis of the piping materials class, from the Fluid Code Table within the Piping Job Specification Table Library. Any fluid code selected will be valid for the applicable piping materials class.

When you revise the schedule/thickness override using this command, the system provides a list of schedule/thickness values derived from the override schedule/thickness standard note type 332 in the project’s Standard Note Library. This will help to prevent errors generated from entering the schedule/thickness in the wrong format.

Numbers in the range of 1-499 are reserved for the English system of units, while numbers in the range of 500-999 are reserved for the Metric system of units. Only those values applicable to the active NPD system of units is displayed, although both sets of values may have been defined in the Reference Database.

Although the override schedule/thickness value is selected from a list as a standard note type, the alphanumeric description is loaded into the relational database.

Caution: You must ensure that the format in the Standard Note Library is consistent with the remainder of the Reference Database.

The list is not displayed if the standard note 332 has not been defined, and you must continue to type the schedule/thickness override.

If you change insulation purpose to N (none) or blank (undefined), both the insulation thickness and the insulation density are automatically set to undefined.

You can revise the following attributes up to the maximum length of 50 characters: piping component remarks, piping/tubing remarks, instrument component remarks.


654

Commodity code (commodity_code) definitions can be changed when the piping component data source (source_of_data) is defined as one of the following:

Piping cmdty component from User

Piping spclty component from User - complete specification input

Piping spclty component from User - partial specification input.

Commodity code (commodity_code) definition cannot be made if they have been defined by the reference database.

Piping cmdty component from PMC

If you modify the fabrication category (fabrication_cat), the weld type is updated at each welded end of the component or pipe being reconstructed or updated. It is no longer necessary to remember to correct the weld data that results from updating the fabrication category of a component or pipe being reconstructed or updated at a welded joint when you have a Weld Type Table loaded.

If the Weld Type Table is loaded, the system defines the weld type using the Weld Type Table. A Weld Type Table is delivered in win32app\ingr\pddata\sample\data called weld.tbl. A sample of the data that it contains is shown below. Table_Data_Definition ’Weld_Type_Table’No_Inputs 2 No_Outputs 1Units= INT, INT, INT! Fab Cat Fab Cat Weld Type1 1 11 5211 7211 15 21

655

1 16 211 17 211 25 211 27 21

If a Weld Type Table has not been defined for the project, the weld type is revised to the default weld type value, ’shop weld’ (11).

If you set the toggle on the Revise Weld Type form to Respect Weld Type by User, the weld type is not revised for either the welded end of the component or pipe being reconstructed or updated or the corresponding welded end of the other component. Also, the weld type is not revised when the mating welded end is not in the active piping model, since you do not have write access to reference models. When the system defines the weld type, the following considerations are made:

— The system uses the Weld Type Table to determine the weld type on the basis of the fabrication category for the component or pipe being reconstructed or updated and the other component at the welded joint.

— If the weld type of the other component at the welded joint differs from the one determined by the project’s Weld Type Table, the weld type of the applicable end of that component is updated to the same weld type as that of the end of the component or pipe being reconstructed or updated on the basis of the Weld Type Table.

The Weld Ownership toggle specifies how weld ownership is determined. The “Default weld ownership” option causes the system to assign weld ownership using the implied item ownership rules. Please refer to the Report Manager (PD_Report) User’s Guide for more information on implied item ownership. The “Weld ownership by this component” option assigns weld ownership to the currently selected component.

This command verifies that you have at least one of the sets of pressures and temperatures defined completely. For instance the pressure value, the system of units for the pressure value, the temperature value, and the system of units for the temperature value must all be defined for one of the following conditions:


normal design

alternate design.

You can check the Normal Operating and Normal Design Temperatures and pressures by using the Temperature and Pressure Data toggle on the Piping Data Control form of the Project Data Manager and setting the toggle to Minimum. By setting the toggle to No Minimum you will be checking the Normal and Alternate Operating and Normal and Alternate Design Temperature and Pressures.

Note: This toggle is not valid for piping and components that require wall thickness calculations, because these calculations use temperature ratings to read spec tables. To preclude the entry of any pressures or temperatures for a segment, you must set the default pressure and temperature as undefined on the Default


656

Segment Data form. Please refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for more information on this form.

Note: No changes are permanent unless you select Confirm from the form.

Not all items can be revised. Some items are review only.

The P&ID node number - end 1 or P&ID node number - end 2 data for piping segments cannot be revised. The bend angle data for instrument components cannot be revised.

Commands Identify Element — Revises the data for another element. Identify the new element

as previously specified. The system displays the data retrieved from the element. Depending on the type of element this may include: one of the following conditions for each welded connect point for a piping component, instrument component, and pipe:

shop weld defined by system shop weld defined by user field weld defined by system field weld defined by user.

Review Bolt Data Reviews all of the following data for each bolted end of a piping component, pipe, instrument component, or equipment nozzle so that you can determine what angle a valve operator may be rotated. This information is only available for a component with at least one bolted end.

the number of bolt holes the bolt diameter the bolt circle diameter the acceptable rotation (360 degrees divided by the number of bolt holes.

657

Integral Gasket — Places an Integral Gasket for the gasket thickness of each bolted end with an integral gasket for a piping component, instrument component, and pipe. The equipment number and nozzle number with the connected to nozzle data at each end of a piping segment for which this data is applicable.

Load from P&ID — Revises the P&ID node numbers for a piping segment and then updates the appropriate piping segment data automatically from the P&ID Design Database.

You can also update the data for a piping segment by snapping to graphics in the active P&ID drawing. If you identify a component in the P&ID drawing that is associated with more than one segment, such as a reducer, the system updates the piping segment data in the model from the segment associated with the connect point nearest the selection point.

When you revise the schedule/thickness override using this command, the system provides a list of schedule/thickness values derived from the override schedule/thickness standard note type 332 in the projects’ Standard Note Library. This will help to prevent errors generated from entering the schedule/thickness in the wrong format.

Numbers in the range of 1-499 are reserved for the English system of units, while numbers in the range of 500-999 are reserved for the Metric system of units. Only those values applicable to the active NPD system of units is displayed, although both sets of values may have been defined in the Reference Database.

Although the override schedule/thickness value is selected from a list as a standard note type, the alphanumeric description is loaded into the relational database.

The list is not displayed if the standard note 332 has not been defined, and you must continue to type the schedule/thickness override.

Caution: You must ensure that the format in the Standard Note Library is consistent with the remainder of the Reference Database.

Review xxxx — These options vary depending on the type of element identified. They enable you to jump directly to the specified set of information within the display. The system also moves the coordinate system indicator along the identified element to reflect the data being reviewed.


658

Revise User Data

Note: You can use the user data for a piping segment to revise the centerline offset data for a pipe run of a piping segment. Defining this data allows the Reconstruct Piping command to adjust the centerline for placement by an offset from the centerline (such placement by bottom of pipe).

The user data consists of the previous offset distance from the centerline, the direction to which the offset is to be applied, and an option flag that indicates which parameters were used to define the offset (1/2 piping outside diameter, insulation thickness, shoe height, or 1/2 piping inside diameter).

Although more than one pipe run of a piping segment can be flagged as being placed by an offset from the centerline, only one set of offset data can be defined for any one piping segment. Therefore, you may need to place an attribute break in a piping segment when the offset data changes, but no other attribute data differs.

For branch components with less than five connect points, you can specify whether the branch component is to be associated with the header or with the branch during isometric extraction.

The default setting is defined in the model seed file. For previously created models, the default is that the branch component be associated with the header.

Review Piping Notes (standard note type 499)

Select a row from the form that corresponds to an attribute using standard note type 499. The system displays a dialog box with the text for the piping notes. You can change the standard note number, but you cannot change the text for the standard note.

659

Operating Sequence 1. Identify Element by snapping to the component, segment, or marker to be reviewed

or place a data point to locate a piping component.

2. Specify Attribute Value (Revisable Attribute) by typing the new attribute value. If the attribute is code-listed, the system activates a form that lists the available code list text for selection of the new value.


660

Revise Component Data (replaces 3.5.4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 314-315 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Weld ownership toggle • Updated command description

See the following text for details.

This command allows you to revise common attributes shared by a group of components along a pipeline or other active group. You can activate this command by selecting a component or segment.

Note: When you select a component or segment, the component displayed is arbitrary.

You can revise the following data:

Piping Component Data and Piping/Tubing Data

mto requirements heat tracing temperature (seg. override)

fabrication category piece mark number

construction status (segment override) color code

hold status (segment override) remarks

heat tracing requirements (segment override)

weld ownership

heat tracing media (segment override)

Instrument Component Data

mto requirements insulation density (segment override)

fabrication category cleaning requirements (segment override)

construction status (segment override) safety classification (segment override)

hold status (segment override) module number (segment override)

design responsibility (segment override) package system number (segment override)

construction responsibility (seg. override) piece mark number

661

heat tracing requirements (seg. override) color code

heat tracing media (segment override) remarks

heat tracing temperature (segment override) insulation thickness (segment override)

insulation purpose (segment override) weld ownership

insulation thickness (segment override)

Pipe Support Data

mto requirements hold status (segment override)

fabrication category piece mark number

construction status (segment override) color code

When fabrication category is revised for a piping commodity, or a piping specialty or instrument with specification data from the Reference Database, the component is designated as having a user override of fabrication category. This prevents later reconstruction of that component from updating the fabrication category specified with data from the Reference Database.

If you change insulation purpose to N (none) or blank (undefined), the insulation thickness and insulation density are automatically set to undefined.

You can use the Active Group command to select the components to be revised based upon a combination of geography and database search criteria.


662

Operating Sequence 1. Identify Pipeline or Select Active Group by snapping to a segment or locate a

component on the pipeline to be revised, or select the Active Group option from the form to define the elements to be revised.

The system displays the selected type of data for the identified pipeline or active group.

2. Specify Attribute Value (Revisable Attribute) by typing the new attribute value. If the

attribute is code-listed, the system activates a form that lists the available code list text for selection of the new value.

663

Approval Control Manager - Line ID (replaces 10.4) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 531-532 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Search Criteria Attribute field See the following text for details.

This option approves piping using a list of values for the search criteria attribute specified on the form, with a data set of either models, design areas or on project-wide basis outside of the graphics environment. The default search criteria attribute is line_id. The system updates the database approval status attribute and modifies the components, pipes, instruments, and segments to the new colors and levels.

Commands Project — Performs approval on the entire project using the specified search criteria.

Areas — Performs approval on the design areas using the specified search criteria and select Confirm.

Models — Performs approval on the models using the specified search criteria and select Cancel (X) from the Design Area display list form to accept the selected models and exit the selection process.


664

Submit for Processing — Allows you to submit the job for processing or to delay submission.

Field Descriptions Revise Approval Status to: — Approval status is a code-listed attribute using the

following values

2 approved 3 unapproved 11-20 various stages of approval where the piping cannot be revised 21-30 various stages of approval where the user can revise the piping.

Once piping has an approved status, the system does not allow revisions without the approval status first being revised.

Search Criteria Attribute --- Specifies the segment data attribute from pdtable_12 the system uses to determine whether to revise the approval status for a piping segment. The approval status is revised when this attribute is present in the specified List File. The default Search Criteria Attribute is line_id.

List File Name — Type the name of the search criteria attributes list file.

Note: The maximum number of search criteria attributes that can be processed using a single list file is determined by the following equation:

3700 / (28 + length of search criteria attribute indesign.ddl)

For example, with the delivered line_id attribute, 71 lines can be processed using a single list file.

Directory — Type the name of the directory where the file resides.

Network Address — Type the name of the network address where the file resides.

Before using this command You must have write access to all the piping models, design areas or the entire project depending on the data set you define for approval.

665

Weld Numbering (replaces 10.9) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 554-556 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Clarification for weld numbering at joints See the following text for details.

These commands allow you to create, apply, or delete user-defined weld numbers for welds in the project.

Commands Revise Weld Numbering Settings — Provides options for how user-defined weld

numbers are created and assigned. See Revise Weld Numbering Settings, page 557, for more information.

Load Weld IDs on Segments — Scans each piping model in the active project and loads each weld ID number into pdtable_171. Refer to Load Weld IDs on Segments, page 559, for more information.

Load Weld Numbers — Generates weld numbers at each welded connect point by project, selected areas, models, or individually. For more information, refer to Load Weld Numbers, page 561.


666

Delete Weld Numbers — Removes weld numbers from each welded connect point for all piping models in the selected group: by project, areas, models, or weld ID. For more information, refer to Delete Weld Numbers, page 563.

Mechanics User-defined weld numbering uses a Weld ID Label (355) to define the search criterion that determines a line break for weld numbering. The label has two purposes:

Defines the weld number prefix for the generated weld number. The combination of the weld ID and the weld sequence number should be unique within the project.


The weld ID Label is user-definable and can include attributes from the Piping Segment Data table. For example, a Weld Number label might be defined as Area (dd_schema.pdtable_12.design_area_number)-Unit Code (dd_schema.pdtable_12.unit_code)Line Sequence No (dd_schema.pdtable_12.line_sequence_no)-

Distiller-380105-1

The value formatted by the Weld ID label is stored in the piping segment data in a new column named weld_id (ddschema.pdtable_12.weld_id). This column is populated automatically when any of the values associated with the Weld ID label are modified. That is, it behaves in the same manner as the line_id and line_number_label columns.

Numbering Scheme You can maintain a single sequence for all welds or maintain individual sequences for each weld category (shop, field, or offshore). The weld categories are determined by the range of weld type code list values from codelist 1100.

0 - 19 shop welds 20 - 29 field welds 30 - 39 offshore welds

The highest weld numbers assigned for each Weld ID are stored in the Project Control Database (pdtable_171.weld_id_data) for later use by the Load Weld Numbers command.

Weld Number Assignment For user-defined welds, the Load Weld Numbers command provides the following functionality:

Run as a batch job outside the piping model so that weld numbers can be assigned at model boundaries. In traversing the Weld ID, the command will process across all piping models required to finish the weld number search criteria request.

For each Weld ID, weld numbers are assigned to the line in sequence starting from 1 or from the highest existing weld number on the line. The weld numbers are inserted

667

into the weld_no column for each welded connect point of a pipe, component, or instrument as the items are found.

The combination of the weld ID and the weld sequence number will result in unique weld numbers based on user-defined search criteria.

Weld number assignments will use a traversal algorithm controlled by a toggle with the following options:

— Topology (default) - start from the point on the line with the lowest easting, northing, and elevation coordinate value and work along the line.

— Reverse Topology - start from the point on the line with the highest easting, northing, and elevation coordinate value and work back along the line.

The following rules apply when running Load Weld Numbers after weld numbers have already been loaded for some of the pipelines:

If the weld number is undefined, the software will assign the next available weld number, as determined from the highest weld number used for that Weld ID.

New weld numbers will be assigned only to connect points that do not already have a value for weld number.

The setting for Remodel Revision Control will determine how the system assigns weld numbers if there is a mismatch, by having a weld number at one side of a welded mating and a blank on the other side. The software will assign the weld number from the intact half to the blank end or assign a new weld number to both the mating end.

Weld ownership determines the sequence number assignment. If the user has assigned weld ownership to a particular component at the joint, the weld will be numbered in the sequence belonging to the category based on the Weld Type of the owning component. Otherwise, the mating end with the highest coordinate value will own the weld and determine the sequence number assignment.

Weld Number Deletion The Delete Weld Numbers command can be used to delete any existing weld numbers. You can delete weld numbers based on search criteria: Project, Area, Model, or Weld ID(s). This command will delete any loaded PDS weld number (system or user-defined) for the selected entries.


668

SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer (replaces 11.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 592-593 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Limitations section See the following text for details.

The SmartPlant Attribute Mapper delivered with PDS allows you to transfer SmartPlant P&ID data to PDS 3D in much the same way as you can transfer PDS P&ID data.

SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D transfer requires that either a full version of SmartPlant P&ID or the SmartPlant P&ID components delivered with PDS be installed on the same computer as PDS. Refer to the PDS Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information on this "silent install" of the SmartPlant P&ID components.

In order to transfer SmartPlant P&ID data to an existing project, you must copy the SPMap.mdb and SPTransferOpt files from the win32app\ingr\pdshell\pid\ directory to the project directory. If you are transferring SmartPlant P&ID data to a new PDS project, the software automatically copies these files to the project directory.

The SPMap.mdb file is a Microsoft Access database created and edited by the SmartPlant Attribute Mapper, which maintains the mapping of SmartPlant P&ID attributes to PDS 3D attributes. See SmartPlant Attribute Mapper, page 594 for more information on the SmartPlant Attribute Mapper.

SPTransferOpt is a text file containing the Matching Criteria, Search Mode and Exclusion Criteria settings as described in the P&ID Correlation Table. Refer to P&ID Correlation Table, page 568 for more information on these settings.

Rather than using the P&ID node numbers to transfer piping segments, the SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D process uses the SmartPlant drawing SP_ID and pipe run SP_ID to identify and group different pipe segments in the 3D drawing. The drawing ID is represented by the index_to_pi_dwg attribute in table 12, while the pipe run ID is represented by the pid_index_no attribute.

In the graphical Piping Design environment, the SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D process does not require you to specify a unit_no. Instead, the PDS 3D forms that control the transfer of data use the unit_no attribute as a filter.

Limitations The Graphical P&ID Setup is not able to convert and display a SmartPlant P&ID that

has a blank space in the P&ID file path.

669

The Attribute Mapper cannot display SPPID version 3.0 plants created using hierarchy2. For data transfer to PDS all plants should be created using hierarchy1 or hierarchy3.

Because the standard background for SmartPlant P&ID is white and the standard background for PDS is black, there may be some problems in properly displaying the P&ID within Piping Designer. There are two methods to facilitate the display such that all the P&ID items are clearly visible.

— Method 1: Turn off the Reference File > Use Color Table setting under User > User Preferences > Reference File. This will cause the P&ID to be displayed with the active color scheme for the piping model, rather than maintaining the colors from the P&ID.

— Method 2: Change the Background color of the piping model to be a light color via Settings > Colors.

Workflow 1. Use SmartPlant Attribute Mapper to set up the attributes to be mapped. Refer to

SmartPlant Attribute Mapper, page 594 for more information.

2. If you are transferring data to a project created prior to version 6.4.1, copy the SPMap.mdb and SPTransferOpt files from the pdshell\pid\ directory to the project directory. If you are transferring data to a new PDS project, the software performs this step automatically.

3. In PDS, select the project to which you want to transfer data, and a model within that project.

4. In the Piping Designer graphical environment, select any of the commands that support data transfer (Sketch, Place Component, Revise Attribute, or Attribute Break).



670

Index approval

control manager line ID, 663

attribute revise, 653

component data

revise, 660

revise attribute, 653 component data, 660

SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer, 668 transfer

from SmartPlant P&ID, 668 weld numbering, 665

Piping Design Graphics (PD_Design) Reference Guide Addendum October 2004 DPDS3-PB-200028C For PDS version 07.03.00.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200028B.

Piping Design Reference Guide Addendum – October 2004

672

Table of Contents Construction Place Commands (replaces 4.1) ..........................................................673

Area Volume Graphics....................................................................................................674 File Commands (replaces 6.1) ..................................................................................676

Switch to Pipe Support ....................................................................................................678 Switch to FWP.................................................................................................................679 Switch to Stress Analysis ................................................................................................680 Switch to Iso Interactive..................................................................................................681

Piping Design Data Management (replaces 10.0) ....................................................682 Revise Attributes ......................................................................................................684

Segment ...........................................................................................................................685 Piping Component...........................................................................................................687 Instrument Component ....................................................................................................689 Piping/Tubing..................................................................................................................691 Pipe Support ....................................................................................................................693

P&ID Correlation Table (replaces 11.1.2)................................................................695 SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer (replaces 11.2) ............................................704

673

Construction Place Commands (replaces 4.1) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (p. 378 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Area Volume Graphics command See the following text for details.

Create graphics in the PDS category for non-PDS Graphics.

Commands Place Line — Places a line between two data points.

Place Line by Angle — Places a line at the active angle.

Place Circle by Center — Places a circle by defining the radius with two points.

Place Circle by Radius — Places a circle by defining a radius with a keyed-in value.

Place Circle by 3 Points — Places a circle by defining an edge with three data points.

Place Circle by Diameter — Places a circle by defining the diameter with two points.

Place Terminator —Places the active line terminator symbol at the end of a selected line.

Perpendicular Bisector — Constructs a perpendicular bisector to an existing line.

Area Volume Graphics — Displays clash and design area volumes as graphical blocks in the model.


674

Area Volume Graphics The Area Volume Graphics command displays the interference checking and design areas in the model so that you can see their location.

For the Drawing Graphics environment, you can control the symbology of the volume graphics using the PDS Drawing Annotation Category Data option in the Project Data Manager in Project Administrator. Please refer to the Project Administrator Reference Guide for information on changing the volume graphic symbology.

Before you can see the volumes in the Equipment, Raceway, PE_HVAC, and FrameWorks Plus environments, you must turn on the Constructions view attribute. You can activate the View Attributes dialog box by pressing CTRL+B.

In addition, the following system environment variables must be defined to control the symbology and level of the volumes in the Piping, Equipment, Raceway, PE_HVAC, and FrameWorks Plus environments: AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_COLOR AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_WEIGHT AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_STYLE AREA_VOLUME_GRAPHICS_LEVEL

Please refer to the Project Setup Technical Reference for more information on setting environment variables.

675

Commands Place Diagonal Lines - Displays diagonal lines within the volume marker for

easier identification in the model.

Add/Revise Graphics - Select the area to add to the model, or unselect an already attached area to remove it from the model.

Remove Graphics - Removes the selected area from the model.

Hilite Graphics - Highlights the area in the model.

Update Graphics - Updates areas that are already displayed in the model. Use this command if the boundaries of the area are changed.


676

File Commands (replaces 6.1) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (p. 428 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Switch to Pipe Support command • Switch to FWP command • Switch to Stress Analysis command • Switch to Iso Interactive command


These commands allow you to plot and diagnose problems in design files. They also allow you to define the active options for the file and what reference models are attached and displayed.

Commands Plot Model — Plots the active model.

File Design — Saves the active MicroStation and PDS parameters.

Exit — Exits the graphics environment and saves all changes to the design file.

Active Options — Sets the options for working in Piping Design.

Data Verification and Diagnostics — Provides access to a set of utilities used to verify the integrity of the model file.

Reference Model — Provides a set of options for controlling reference file attachments.

Switch to Equipment — This command allows you to switch from the PD_Design application to the PD_Eqp application so you can modify equipment models in the active project.

677

Switch to Pipe Support – This command allows you to switch from the PD_Design application to the Pipe Support Designer application so you can modify pipe support models in the active project.

Switch to FWP – This command allows you to switch from the PD_Design application to FrameWorks Plus so you can modify structural models in the active project.

Switch to Stress Analysis – This command allows you to switch from the PD_Design application to the PD_Stress application to run stress analysis.

Switch to Iso Interactive – This command allows you switch from the PD_Design application to the PD_Iso application to run the interactive isometric extraction command.


678

Switch to Pipe Support This command allows you to switch to the Pipe Support Designer environment so that you can modify pipe support models that are referenced from the active model.

Please refer to the Pipe Supports Modeler Reference Guide for more information on pipe support models.

679

Switch to FWP This command displays the Switch to Frameworks Model form, which allows you to switch to the Frameworks Plus (FWP) environment so that you can modify structural models that are referenced from the active model.

Select the desired Frameworks Plus model, then confirm the form to enter the FWP environment. When you are finished using the FWP environment, save the FWP model, and exit the FWP environment.

Note: If Access Control is being used on the active project, this command does verify that you have access to modify FWP data before allowing you to do so.

Please refer to the FrameWorks Plus Reference Guide for more information on FrameWorks Plus.


680

Switch to Stress Analysis This command displays the Plant Design - Stress Analysis form, which allows you to generate stress analysis neutral files for pipe runs.

Please refer to the PDS Stress Analysis Interface User’s Guide for more information on piping stress analysis.

681

Switch to Iso Interactive This command displays the Interactive Iso Interactive form, which allows you to run the Interactive Isometric Extraction command in PD_Iso.

Please refer to the ISOGEN Reference Guide for more information on extracting isometric drawings.


682

Piping Design Data Management (replaces 10.0) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 497-498 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Revise Attributes command See the following text for details.

These commands, available when you select Piping Design Data Manager from PD_Shell, are used to verify the integrity of the Piping model. You can perform post placement design checks, approve piping, examine database linkages, compare the active model data against the posted P&ID data, revise attributes for multiple models at the same time, manage user defined weld numbers, customize the data that appears on placement forms, and load inspection iso IDs and keys.

Commands Design Checker — Performs Post Placement Design Checks on a specified volume.

See Design Checker, page 499 for information.

P&ID Comparison Report Manager — Creates P&ID Comparison reports for a specified set of model files in a batch environment. See the P&ID Comparison Report Manager, page 512 for information.

Approval Control Manager — Approves piping using search criteria with a data set of models, design areas, or on a project-wide basis outside of the graphics environment. See Approval Control Manager - Line ID, page 531 for information.

683

Approval Control Manager - Line ID— Approves piping using a list of line IDs with a data set of either models, design areas or on project-wide basis outside of the graphics environment. See Approval Control Manager - Line ID, page 531 for information.

Database Verification Manager— Checks for inconsistencies between the model file and the piping database. See the Database Verification Manager, page 533 for information.

Component I/Forms Customization— Customizes the definition of the piping commodity names or pipe support model codes that appear on the placement forms. See Component I/Forms Customization, page 534 for information.

Segment Data I/Forms Customization— Customizes how the brief list of piping segment data appears on forms the placement forms. See Segment Data I/Forms Customization, page 538 for information.

Inspection Iso Data Manager— Loads inspection iso IDs and keys. See Inspection Iso Data Manager, page 550 for information.

Weld Numbering — Creates, assigns, or deletes user-defined weld numbers for projects, areas, models, or specific weld IDs. See Weld Numbering, page 554 for information.

Revise Attributes — Allows you to update segment and component data using search criteria with a data set of models, design areas, or on a project-wide basis outside the graphics environment.


684

Revise Attributes This command allows you to select the type of data to update in the selected data set.

Commands Segment— Updates piping segment data in the selected data set.

Piping Component — Updates piping component data in the selected data set.

Instrument Component — Updates instrument component data in the selected data set.

Piping/Tubing — Updates piping and tubing data in the selected data set.

Pipe Support — Updates pipe support data in the selected data set.

685

Segment This command updates segment data using a list of values for the search criteria specified on the form, with a data set of either models, design areas or on project-wide basis outside of the graphics environment. The system updates the segment data for the segments in the data set that match the selected search criteria.

Note: The Approved segments in the data set will not be updated, even if they match the search criteria.

Commands Project — Updates segment data on the entire project using the specified search

criteria.

Areas — Updates segment data on the selected design areas using the specified search criteria.

Models — Updates segment data on the selected models using the specified search criteria.

Revise Attributes — Allows you to specify the attributes to update in the selected data set.



686

Field Descriptions Search Criteria — Specifies the criteria used to select segments in the data set. The

default is no search criteria.

Before using this command You must have write access to all the piping models, design areas or the entire project depending on the data set you define for revision.

Operating Sequence 1. Select Project, Areas, or Models to define the data set in which you want to update

attributes.

Note: You can select multiple areas or models for revision.

2. Select search criteria to limit the update to particular segments in the selected data set.

3. Click Revise Attributes.

The Revise Attributes form displays.

4. Update attributes as necessary.

5. Click Accept.

6. Click Submit for Processing.

7. Select whether to submit the job immediately or run the job at a specified time.

8. Click Accept.

687

Piping Component This command updates piping component data using a list of values for the search criteria specified on the form, with a data set of either models, design areas or on project-wide basis outside of the graphics environment. The system updates the piping component data for the components in the data set that match the selected search criteria.

Note: Piping components on the Approved segments in the data set will not be updated, even if they match the search criteria.

Commands Project — Updates piping component data on the entire project using the specified

search criteria.

Areas — Updates piping component data on the selected design areas using the specified search criteria.

Models — Updates piping component data on the selected models using the specified search criteria.


Piping Component/Segment Toggle — Specifies whether to use piping component search criteria or segment search criteria.



688

Field Descriptions Search Criteria — Specifies the criteria used to select piping components in the data

set. The default is no search criteria.



attributes.


2. Select search criteria to limit the update to particular piping components in the selected data set.




5. Click Accept.



8. Click Accept.

689

Instrument Component This command updates instrument component data using a list of values for the search criteria specified on the form, with a data set of either models, design areas or on project-wide basis outside of the graphics environment. The system updates the instrument component data for the components in the data set that match the selected search criteria.

Note: Instrument components on the Approved segments in the data set will not be updated, even if they match the search criteria.

Commands Project — Updates instrument component data on the entire project using the

specified search criteria.

Areas — Updates instrument component data on the selected design areas using the specified search criteria.

Models — Updates instrument component data on the selected models using the specified search criteria.


Instrument Component/Segment Toggle — Specifies whether to use instrument component search criteria or segment search criteria.



690

Field Descriptions Search Criteria — Specifies the criteria used to select instrument components in the

data set. The default is no search criteria.



attributes.


2. Select search criteria to limit the update to particular instrument components in the selected data set.




5. Click Accept.



8. Click Accept.

691

Piping/Tubing This command updates piping and tubing data using a list of values for the search criteria specified on the form, with a data set of either models, design areas or on project-wide basis outside of the graphics environment. The system updates the piping and tubing data for the pipes and tubes in the data set that match the selected search criteria.

Note: Pipes and tubes on the Approved segments in the data set will not be updated, even if they match the search criteria.

Commands Project — Updates piping and tubing data on the entire project using the specified

search criteria.

Areas — Updates piping and tubing data on the selected design areas using the specified search criteria.

Models — Updates piping and tubing data on the selected models using the specified search criteria.


Piping/Tubing / Segment Toggle — Specifies whether to use piping and tubing search criteria or segment search criteria.



692

Field Descriptions Search Criteria — Specifies the criteria used to select piping and tubing in the data

set. The default is no search criteria.



attributes.


2. Select search criteria to limit the update to particular piping and tubing in the selected data set.




5. Click Accept.



8. Click Accept.

693

Pipe Support This command updates pipe support data using a list of values for the search criteria specified on the form, with a data set of either models, design areas or on project-wide basis outside of the graphics environment. The system updates the pipe support data for the pipe supports in the data set that match the selected search criteria.

Note: Pipe supports on the Approved segments in the data set will not be updated, even if they match the search criteria.

Commands Project — Updates pipe support data on the entire project using the specified search

criteria.

Areas — Updates pipe support data on the selected design areas using the specified search criteria.

Models — Updates pipe support data on the selected models using the specified search criteria.


Pipe Support/Segment Toggle — Specifies whether to use pipe support search criteria or segment search criteria.



694

Field Descriptions Search Criteria — Specifies the criteria used to select pipe supports in the data set.

The default is no search criteria.



attributes.


2. Select search criteria to limit the update to particular pipe supports in the selected data set.




5. Click Accept.



8. Click Accept.

695

P&ID Correlation Table (replaces 11.1.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 568-575 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Clarification to note regarding ‘-‘ character in the Correlation Table

• Clarification to Search Mode section See the following text for details.

The P&ID Correlation Table, also known as the pid_to_piping file, is an ASCII file used to correlate a particular column or columns in the P&ID segment table of the P&ID Database with a corresponding column in the piping segment table of the Piping Design Database.

The P&ID Correlation Table defines which database columns are to be transferred and compared.

Any columns not specified in the Correlation Table will not be transferred.

Correlation table files must reside in the project directory for the piping project.

The pid_to_piping file maps P&ID columns to Piping columns for either Complete or Partial data transfer. This file is delivered with PD_SHELL product and is copied to the project directory when a new project is created.

The pid_npd_equiv file maps the P&ID codelist values of Nominal Piping Diameter (NPD) to Piping values of NPD. This file is delivered with PD_SHELL product and is copied to the project directory when a new project is created.

Note: When editing the pid_npd_equiv file, either start with the first character on the left margin, or tab (do not use the space bar) to the first character, then enter the edits. Make sure that any new entries are added to both the metric and english sections in the same order.

You can define a pid_instrument file to use while generating the Named Component Existence report.

Note: Any 2D attribute with a floating point will be handled as an integer when transferred to 3D. The 3D software only accepts decimals to the thousandth place.

The P&ID column numbers required in the Correlation table are from the relational database and are not the P&ID attribute numbers.

During the interactive loading of segment data, you can specify that either a complete or partial set of data be considered. The Correlation Table specifies which columns are to be loaded, updated, or compared for both complete and partial data transfer.


696

Most piping segment data is transferred as is, but some data requires minimal conversion for loading into the piping model. The following attributes require data conversion due to differing requirements and database storage techniques between the piping model and the P&ID drawing:

nominal piping diameter

The nominal piping diameter value and the nominal piping diameter units from the P&ID Database are used to create a nominal piping diameter value with the units embedded for storage in the piping model. Note the piping model’s column number for nominal piping diameter units in the default Correlation Table is ’-1’.

undefined values for decimal attributes

flow direction

schedule/thickness override


The insulation thickness units from the P&ID Database are used to update the insulation thickness units flag for the piping segment in the model to either same as model or same as npd.

If the insulation thickness system of units (English or metric) in the P&ID database is equivalent to the nominal piping diameter system of units in the P&ID database, the insulation thickness units flag for the piping segment in the model is set to same as npd, the default. If the insulation thickness system of units in the P&ID database differs from the nominal piping diameter system of units in the P&ID database, the insulation thickness units flag for the piping segment in the model is set to same as model. In either case, if the specific insulation thickness units in the P&ID database differs from the piping model’s subunits, the insulation thickness value will be converted.

Note the piping model’s column number for insulation thickness units in the default Correlation Table is ’-1’.

insulation density

The insulation density and the insulation density units from the P&ID Database are used with the piping model’s insulation density units to convert an insulation density value for the piping segment in the model.

Note the piping model’s column number for insulation density units in the default Correlation Table is ’-1’.

heat tracing media temperature units

The heat tracing media temperature and the heat tracing media temperature units from the P&ID Database are used with the piping model’s temperature units to convert a heat tracing media temperature value for the piping segment in the model.

697

Note the piping model’s column number for heat tracing media temperature units in the default Correlation Table is ’-1’.

The Correlation Table is expected to exist in the project directory (where the seed model, seed drawings, etc., are) for the applicable project. A default Correlation Table is delivered in the PD_Shell product and is automatically copied to the project directory when a new project is created. You can edit the Correlation Table, if required, to add columns to or delete columns from both the complete and partial data transfer processes. An asterisk (*) signifies that data transfer and comparison is applicable for that particular column. You may add user-defined columns of piping segment data to the Correlation Table.

Note: When transferring data, you must place an * in the complete column. If you place an * in the partial column and you do not have an * in the complete column of the pid_to_piping file, this attribute is interpreted as a complete transfer.

Note: The "-" in the second column indicates that location is hard coded for the value of this attribute. The user should not change this option in order to have a value for this location. If an override of this value is needed, a new entry must be made in this file.

The default Correlation Table is listed below:

# Segment Data Model P&ID Complete Partial

#If you desire to default the 'non-partial' attributes during a partial transfer of

#data, in the partial column place a '-', skip at least one space, and define the

#default value. The default value will be used whenever an interactive transfer

#occurs, or if the toggle is set for the batch update. The complete,

#partial and default values are supported ONLY in this section of the file.

#example: attribute_one 99 100 * - default_value

unit_number 4 13

unit_code 5 2 * *

module_no 6 79 *

package_system_no 7 81 *

train_number 8 23 * *

fluid_code 9 22 * *

line_sequence_no 10 24 * *

nominal_piping_dia 11 15 *

npd_units -1 16

piping_mater_class 12 25 * *

insulation_purpose 14 26 * *

insulation_thick 15 28 *

insulation_thick_units -1 29

insulation_density 16 30 * *

insulation_density_units -1 31

heat_tracing_reqmt 17 73 * *

heat_tracing_media 18 74 * *

heat_tracing_temp 19 75 * *

heat_tracing_temp_units -1 76

construction_stat 20 60 * *

hold_status 21 83 * *

schedule_override 23 66 *


698

nor_oper_pres 24 39 *

nor_oper_temp 25 41 *

alt_oper_pres 26 43 *

alt_oper_temp 27 45 *

nor_dgn_pres 28 47 *

nor_dgn_temp 29 49 *

alt_dgn_pres 30 51 *

alt_dgn_temp 31 53 *

steam_outlet_temp 32 86 *

mater_of_construct 33 61 *

safety_class 34 59 *

design_resp 37 69 *

construction_resp 38 78 *

supply_resp 39 71 *

coating_reqmts 40 72 *

cleaning_reqmts 41 77 *

fluid_category 42 84 *

nor_op_pres_units 43 40 *

nor_op_temp_units 44 42 *

alt_op_pres_units 45 44 *

alt_op_temp_units 46 46 *

nor_dgn_pres_units 47 48 *

nor_dgn_temp_units 48 50 *

alt_dgn_pres_units 49 52 *

alt_dgn_temp_units 50 54 *

steam_temp_units 51 87 *

test_system_no 64 55 *

test_fluid 65 56 *

test_pressure 66 57 *

### Data extracted from the Piping Segment Table ( piping_seg, 112 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

# upstrm_node_no

pid_node_number_a - 10

# dwnstrm_node_no

pid_node_number_b - 11

flow_direction - 14

# line_no_label

line_number_label - 21

# dwg_occ_no

drawing_segment_index_no - 3

line_id - 12

# piping_thk_flag

piping_thickness_flag - 68

### Data extracted from the Equipment Table ( eq_group, 106 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

equipment_number - 7

### Data extracted from the Equipment Nozzle Table ( eq_nozz, 108 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

nozzle_number - 5

# pid_seg_occ_no

nozzle_segment_index - 4

# eq_grp_occ_no

equipment_nozzle_index - 2

# node_no

equip_nozzle_node_no - 13

### Data extracted from the Piping Component Table ( piping_comp, 120 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

#piping_comp_table is the delimiter to signal the information below belongs to

699

# P&ID's piping_comp table and Piping's pdtable_34_<partition_number>.

# piping_comp_table signals that the following attributes belong to pdtable_34.

piping_comp_table


aabbcc_code 3 9


cmdty_code 8 29

# opt attribute in P&ID is placed into the option_code attribute in Piping


# pid_seg_occ_no


# dwg_occ_no


# generic_tag_no



# here. You determine which are transferred between P&ID piping_comp table




const_status 32 23



hold_status 33 41



remarks 46 20

### Data extracted from the Instrument Component Table ( instr_comp, 131 )of the P&ID Design Database:

#instr_comp_table is the delimiter to signal the information below belongs to

# P&ID's instr_comp table and Piping's pdtable_67_<partition_number>.

# instr_comp_table signals that the following attributes belong to pdtable_67.

instr_comp_table

instrument_tag_number - 5

# pid_seg_occ_no

instr_segment_index_no - 4

# aabbcc_code

instr_aabbcc_code - 10

# dwg_occ_no

instr_drawing_index_no - 3

#generic_tag_no

instr_generic_tag_no - 80


# here. You determine which are transferred between P&ID instr_comp table




cleaning_reqmts 39 60

const_resp 32 35

const_status 29 24

dgn_resp 31 25

fail_action_1 28 56



hold_status 30 40


700


insulation_purpose 36 31

insulation_thick 37 33

module_no 41 36

package_system_no 42 38

remark_2 52 22

safety_classification 40 20

### Data extracted from the Drawing Table ( dwg, 102 ) of the P&ID Project Database:

drawing_number - 3

#unit_occ_no

unit_index_number - 2

drawing_title - 16

network_address - 7

path_name - 8

file_specification - 5

propagation_status - 10

approval_initials - 21

approval_date - 22

revision_id - 27

for_comments_date - 29

for_design_date - 30

for_construct_date - 31

task_name - 4

### Data extracted from the Unit Table ( unit, 101 ) of the P&ID Project Database:

unit_number - 4

unit_code - 3

unit_name - 5

### Data extracted from the Task RDB Table ( task_rdb, 98 ) of the P&ID Project Database:

pid_task_name - 2

pid_task_rdb_node - 3

pid_task_rdb_path - 4

### Data extracted from the PID Segment Table ( pid_seg, 110 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

# net_type_occ_no

piping_segment_index_no - 4

### Data extracted from the PID Drawing Revision Data Table ( dwg_rev_data,

### 103 ) of the P&ID Design Database includes the following:

dwg_occ_no - 2

### Data extracted from the Piping Connector Table (piping_connector, 124) of

### the P&ID Design Database includes the following:

connector_no - 4

#dwg_occ_no of the piping connector table

connect_dwg_occ_no - 2

#pid_seg_occ_no of the piping connector table

connect_pid_seg_occ_no - 3

#matching_criteria is the criteria to be used for matching the P&ID and Piping

#segments together. Nodea (piping attribute 67) and Nodeb (piping attribute 68)

#are the default criteria. The matching criteria is defined by listing the

#piping attribute numbers separated by a space on the line below.

matching_criteria 67 68

#search_mode is the method for searching for the matching criteria. The default

#is 'FIRST' -- stop on the first match found. The other option is 'END' which

#means to search the entire database looking for a match. If more than one match

#is found, the software evaluates all of the matches for an exact match of the

#transfer data.

701

search_mode FIRST

#exclusion_criteria has been a part of the submission process in the past. We

#have added the capability to default this value. Values are 'YES' for do not

#check the transfer disabled segments and 'NO' to check the transfer disabled

#segments. This option can still be modified at submission.

exclusion_criteria YES

Note: The line number label and line id (which are formed automatically from other attributes on the basis of label formats in the Label Description Library) are updated without being included in the Correlation Table. The definition of the line number label in the P&ID Database has been included exclusively for use in creating the P&ID Data Comparison Report.

If you selected the option to have fluid code updated from the value in the piping materials class of the Reference Database, fluid code will not be updated from the P&ID Database despite the fact that fluid code may be defined in the P&ID Correlation Table.

Although the column numbers for the piping segment data in the model have been included in the Correlation Table, these numbers should not be revised by the user, except to add userdefined columns.

Although the P&ID node numbers are transferred automatically with both complete and partial data transfer, it will not be necessary to designate these columns for transfer in the Correlation Table. Note that the P&ID node numbers are case sensitive. In other words, the P&ID node numbers will make use of both upper case and lower case alphabetic characters in addition to numeric characters.

During component placement, a comparison is made between the P&ID data and the piping segment. If a discrepancy is found, a warning is issued. You may choose to override this warning if you wish.

Default Attribute Values If you wish to define default values to be used for attributes that are not transferred during a during a partial transfer (but that are transferred during a complete transfer), place a - in the partial column, skip at least one space, then enter a value to be used as a default. These values will be used as the default value for the attribute when an interactive transfer is performed, or when the batch update toggle is set.

Matching Criteria The matching criteria are used to match the P&ID and Piping segments together. Nodea (piping attribute 67 from PD_table 12, PID_id_part_a) and nodeb (piping attribute 68 PD_table 12, PID_id_part_b) are the default criteria, as these values are adjacent to the matching_criteria keyword in the delivered pid_to_piping file. To substitute another attribute as the matching criteria, enter the desired piping attribute number. For example, you would use number 10 if you wanted to use the line sequence number as the matching criterion.

Note: The insulation density, insulation thickness, and heat tracing temperatures are assumed to have matching units for the piping design file and the P&ID. The


702

nominal diameter will be converted to the appropriate P&ID value before searching for the matching criteria in the P&ID.

User-selected Attribute Transfer You may specify any other piping, piping component, or instrument attributes which you wish to transfer by placing the attributes in the pid_to_piping file.

Refer to the section below that details the piping attributes to be transferred for an example on how these attributes should be specified:

### Data extracted from the Piping Component Table ( piping_comp,

120 ) of the P&ID Design Database:

#piping_comp_table is the delimiter to signal the information below

belongs to

# P&ID's piping_comp table and Piping's

pdtable_34_<partition_number>.

# piping_comp_table signals that the following attributes belong to

pdtable_34.

piping_comp_table


aabbcc_code 3 9


cmdty_code 8 29

# opt attribute in P&ID is placed into the option_code attribute in

Piping


# pid_seg_occ_no


# dwg_occ_no


# generic_tag_no


#any attributes you desire to transfer (beyond those defined above)

are listed

# here. You determine which are transferred between P&ID

piping_comp table

# and piping pdtable_34.


const_status 32 23



hold_status 33 41



remarks 46 20

703

Search Mode The search mode is the method used for searching for the matching criteria. FIRST is the default search criteria, as this option is adjecent to the search_mode keyword. FIRST instructs the system to stop searching when the first match is found. The other option is END, which instructs the system to search the entire database looking for a match. If more than one match is found, the software evaluates all of the matches for an exact match of the transfer data. If all matched segments in the P&ID database have exactly the same transfer data values, then the data is transferred. Otherwise, no data is transferred, and the report indicates the differences.

Exclusion Criteria The exclusion criteria feature controls whether or not the transfer-disabled segments are checked. The YES keyword instructs the system to avoid checking the transfer-disabled segments, while NO instructs the system to check the transfer-disabled segments. This option can still be modified at submission time.

Note: Note that you are responsible for coordinating and controlling the timing and approval of the data transfer of piping segment data from the P&ID Database to the piping model.


704

SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer (replaces 11.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 668-669 in the PDS 7.2 version of the document).


• Note regarding SPPID 4.1 and PDS 7.3 • Instructions for converting projects to use SPPID GUIDs


The SmartPlant Attribute Mapper delivered with PDS allows you to transfer SmartPlant P&ID data to PDS 3D in much the same way as you can transfer PDS P&ID data.

SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D transfer requires that either a full version of SmartPlant P&ID or the SmartPlant P&ID components delivered with PDS be installed on the same computer as PDS. Refer to the PDS Project Administrator (PD_Project) Reference Guide for more information on this "silent install" of the SmartPlant P&ID components.

In order to transfer SmartPlant P&ID data to an existing project, you must copy the SPMap.mdb and SPTransferOpt files from the win32app\ingr\pdshell\pid\ directory to the project directory. If you are transferring SmartPlant P&ID data to a new PDS project, the software automatically copies these files to the project directory.

The SPMap.mdb file is a Microsoft Access database created and edited by the SmartPlant Attribute Mapper, which maintains the mapping of SmartPlant P&ID attributes to PDS 3D attributes. See SmartPlant Attribute Mapper, page 594 for more information on the SmartPlant Attribute Mapper.

SPTransferOpt is a text file containing the Matching Criteria, Search Mode and Exclusion Criteria settings as described in the P&ID Correlation Table. Refer to P&ID Correlation Table, page 568 for more information on these settings.

Rather than using the P&ID node numbers to transfer piping segments, the SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D process uses the SmartPlant drawing SP_ID and pipe run SP_ID to identify and group different pipe segments in the 3D drawing. The drawing ID is represented by the index_to_pi_dwg attribute in table 12, while the pipe run ID is represented by the pid_index_no attribute.

Note: For data transfer from SmartPlant P&ID version 4.1 and later, the SmartPlant drawing ID is represented by the sppid_drawing_guid attribute in table 12, and the pipe run ID is represented by the sppid_piperun_guid attribute. Refer to the Limitations section below for instructions about upgrading existing projects to use these SmartPlant P&ID GUIDs.

705

In the graphical Piping Design environment, the SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D process does not require you to specify a unit_no. Instead, the PDS 3D forms that control the transfer of data use the unit_no attribute as a filter.

Limitations The Graphical P&ID Setup is not able to convert and display a SmartPlant P&ID that

has a blank space in the P&ID file path.

The Attribute Mapper cannot display SmartPlant P&ID version 3.0 plants created using hierarchy2. For data transfer to PDS all plants should be created using hierarchy1 or hierarchy3.

Because the standard background for SmartPlant P&ID is white and the standard background for PDS is black, there may be some problems in properly displaying the P&ID within Piping Designer. There are two methods to facilitate the display such that all the P&ID items are clearly visible.

— Method 1: Turn off the Reference File > Use Color Table setting under User > User Preferences > Reference File. This will cause the P&ID to be displayed with the active color scheme for the piping model, rather than maintaining the colors from the P&ID.

— Method 2: Change the Background color of the piping model to be a light color via Settings > Colors.

PDS 7.3 supports data transfer from SmartPlant P&ID version 4.1 and later. SmartPlant P&ID versions 3 and 4.0 are not supported.

To transfer SmartPlant P&ID 4.1 data into a PDS project created with PDS 7.2 or earlier, it is necessary during the project upgrade process from PDS 7.2 to PDS 7.3 to convert the existing index_to_pi_dwg and pid_index_no attributes in table 12 of the PDS piping database to reference the appropriate SmartPlant P&ID drawing and pipe run GUIDs. A batch file named convert_smartplant.bat is delivered with PDS 7.3 to perform this attribute conversion.

The batch file is delivered in the pdshell\bin directory. The command line that appears in the batch file is: pdsicon.exe .\ pdcnvrtguid.exe. You can run the batch file from the delivery directory, or you can specify an alternate location for the called executable files in the batch file. For example, if your PDS software is installed on the f: drive, you could modify the batch file command line to read: f:\win32\ingr\pdshell\bin\pdsicon.exe f:\win32app\ingr\pdshell\bin\pdcnvrtguid.exe.

Use the following workflow to convert the existing entries in the piping database.

1. Double-click the convert_smartplant.bat file.

The system displays a list of existing 3D projects.

2. Select a project and accept.


706

For each piping segment in the selected project, the system attempts to retrieve the applicable SmartPlant GUID. If successful, the software writes the GUID value to the sppid_drawing_guid and sppid_piperun_guid attributes in the piping database, and resets the values for the index_to_pi_dwg and pid_index_no attributes to zero.

If the GUID lookup fails, the index_to_pi_dwg and pid_index_no attributes retain their existing values.

3. Check the spidguid.log file in the temp\project name directory.

This log file will contain a list of all models checked, and the conversion status for each piping segment in those models: nothing found, GUID converted to, or unable to convert.

4. In the SPTransferOpt file in the project name\project directory, change the matching_criteria value to the attribute number for the sppid_piperun_guid attribute in the piping database, as listed in the design.ddl file. This change allows the comparison report to compare the sppid_piperun_guid instead of the pid_index_no.

Note: By default, the matching_criteria value is set to 73, which is the attribute number for the pid_index_no attribute in the delivered piping database. The default attribute number for the sppid_piperun_guid attribute is 78, but this number may vary if your project contains user defined attributes.

Workflow 1. Use SmartPlant Attribute Mapper to set up the attributes to be mapped. Refer to

SmartPlant Attribute Mapper, page 594 for more information.

2. If you are transferring data to a project created prior to version 6.4.1, copy the SPMap.mdb and SPTransferOpt files from the pdshell\pid\ directory to the project directory. If you are transferring data to a new PDS project, the software performs this step automatically.

3. In PDS, select the project to which you want to transfer data, and a model within that project.

4. In the Piping Designer graphical environment, select any of the commands that support data transfer (Sketch, Place Component, Revise Attribute, or Attribute Break).


707

Index Area Volume Graphics command, 674 attributes

revising, 684 commands

Construction, 673 File, 676 Instrument Component, 689 Pipe Support, 693 Piping Component, 687 Piping Design Data Management, 682 Piping/Tubing, 691 Place, 673 Revise Attributes, 684 Segment, 685

Construction commands, 673 Construction Place commands

Area Volume Graphics, 674 data transfer

from SmartPlant P&ID, 704 P&ID correlation table, 695

File commands, 676 Switch to FWP, 679

Switch to Iso Interactive, 681 Switch to Pipe Support, 678 Switch to Stress Analysis, 680

Instrument Component command, 689 P&ID correlation table, 695 Pipe Support command, 693 Piping Component command, 687 Piping Design Data Management commands,

682 Piping/Tubing command, 691 Place commands, 673 revise attributes, 684 Revise Attributes command, 684 Segment command, 685 SmartPlant P&ID to PDS 3D Transfer, 704 Switch to FWP command, 679 Switch to Iso Interactive command, 681 Switch to Pipe Support command, 678 Switch to Stress Analysis command, 680 volume graphics

displaying, 674

Piping Design Graphics (PD_Design) Reference Guide Addendum November 2005 DPDS3-PB-200028D For PDS SE version 08.00.00.** This document supplements DPDS3-PB-200028C.

Table of Contents Window to Named Item (replaces 5.1.3.9)...............................................................710 Reference Models (replaces 6.2) ..............................................................................713

Attach Model (replaces 6.2.1) .........................................................................................715 Attach Area Volume........................................................................................................718 Detach Model (replaces 6.2.3) ........................................................................................720

Weld Numbering (replaces 10.9)..............................................................................722 Revise Weld Numbering Settings (replaces 10.9.1)........................................................725 Delete Unused Weld IDs.................................................................................................727

709

Piping Design Reference Guide Addendum – November 2005

Window to Named Item (replaces 5.1.3.9) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 418-419 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Inspection Iso ID, Segment Search Criteria, and Component Search Criteria


This command locates a particular pipeline, piping component, piping specialty, instrument, pipe support, equipment, or nozzle in the active model or an attached reference file. The system updates the screen display for a selected view to center the located element.

This command is useful for reviewing the model display following design verification orreporting.

Tech Tip: It is important to understand how this command works with the Restore Model View command. Since you can use the Window to Named Item command to update multiple views, only the initial view that you select is saved by the system. When the Restore Model View command is activated, the initial saved view is restored.

Note: Any typed alpha character must be capitalized.

710

Commands Active Model Only/All Models — Defines that verification is done on only the

active model or on all attached piping reference models that have been flagged with the Locate On toggle on the Reference Model Attachments form.

Line Number Label — Select this option to specify the line number label of a pipeline in the model or in one of the attached reference models. The system highlights the located piping segments. The volume of the model used for the window area will be the minimum to encompass the piping located by the line number label.

Line ID — Select this option to specify the line ID of a pipeline in the model or in one of the attached reference models.

The system highlights the located piping segments. The volume of the model used for the window area will be the minimum to encompass the piping located by the line id.

Inspection Iso ID — Select this option to specify the inspection iso ID of a pipeline in the model or in one of the attached reference models.

The system highlights the located piping segments. The volume of the model used for the window area will be the minimum to encompass the piping located by the inspection iso id.

Segment Search Criteria --- Select this option to define search criteria for piping segments.

Piping Component Number — Select this option to specify the tag number of a piping component / piping specialty. in the model or in one of the attached reference models.

Instrument Component Number — Select this option to specify the tag number of an instrument in the model or in one of the attached reference models.

Pipe Tag — Select this option to specify the tag number of a pipe in the model or in one of the attached reference models.

Pipe Support Number — Select this option to specify the tag number of a pipe support in the model or in one of the attached reference models.

Component Search Criteria — Select this option to define search criteria for piping components.

Equipment & Nozzle Number — Select this option to specify the nozzle id/equipment name of an equipment nozzle in an attached equipment model.

Equipment Number — Select this option to specify the equipment name of an equipment item in an attached equipment model.

The volume of the model used for the window area will be the minimum to encompass the equipment group.

Restore View — Select this option to restore the selected view to its original viewing parameters.

711


Before using this command This command uses the item number of the component, specialty item, or equipment, or the line id of the pipeline to search the database. You can obtain the item numbers from the associated design verification or material take-off reports. Refer to the description of the Data Verification command for more information.

Operating Sequence 1. Select Item Type by selecting the desired option from the form to indicate the type of

element to be displayed and type the item number of the element to be displayed.

The system searches the database for the specified named item. If the system cannot find the specified item it displays the message Named Item Not Found.

2. Select View by placing a data point to identify the screen view in which the component, pipeline, or equipment is to be centered. You can select multiple views if desired.

The system updates the selected view(s) so that the specified element is centered and highlights the element.

Tech Tip: If the resulting window is for the end view of a piping segment, the system expands the volume to include the range of one piping or instrument component associated with that piping segment.

712

Reference Models (replaces 6.2) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 480-481 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Attach Area Volume command See the following text for details.

This command activates the Reference Model Attachments form containing a list of the current reference models attached to the active model. This form allows you to attach and detach models, and add, remove, and review reference model categories.

The description given in the Model Management Data Table of the Project Control Database for each reference model is displayed on the Reference Model Attachments form. Once you have selected a model, the following options are displayed.

Commands Display On/Display Off— Displays the reference model in all of the views.

Snap On/Snap Off and Locate On/Locate Off— Allows you to data point to any component including nozzles and snap to any segment in the reference model.

Apply to Active— Defines the settings for the Display On/Display Off, Snap On/Snap Off, or Locate On/Locate Off toggles for only the active model.

Apply to Discipline — Defines the settings for the Display On/Display Off, Snap On/Snap Off, or Locate On/Locate Off toggles for the all attached models in the discipline of the selected model.

713


Apply to All — Defines the settings for the Display On/Display Off, Snap On/SnaOff, or Locate On/Locate Off toggles for the all attached models in all disciplines.

Attach Model — Attaches refere

p

nce models to the active model.

attached.

to

tation cache

r — Manually overrides the default reference model

he reference model symbology back to

Automatic Attach & Verify — Automatically attaches reference files to the model. It displays a list of models in the project that have elements within the range of the active model and highlights any reference models that are currently

Attach Area Volume — Attaches models that intersect the selected area volume.

Detach Model — Detaches the reference file from the active model.

Reference Model Categories— Adds, removes, or review/revise model categoriesthe selected reference model.

Reload Reference Model — Reloads reference models in the MicroSand updates graphics for the selected model.

Reference Symbology by Usesymbology as defined in the Project Control Database.

Reference Symbology by System— Resets twhat is defined in the Project Control Database.

714

Attach Model (replaces 6.2.1) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (p 482 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Operating sequence and updated screen shots See the following text for details.

This option allows you to attach reference models to the active model.

For structural models, a toggle is provided that allows you to specify that the sparse or propagated version of the reference model be attached. If both the sparse and propagated are included in the same model, the toggle should be set to Propagated Model and both will be attached. You can also use this toggle to re-define attached models.

You must load the model management data of the Project Control database for the sparse structural models through the Project Environment Manager in order for this option to work.

Note: When you attach the first electrical raceway model to the active piping model, the system initializes the Electrical Raceway Database.

Operating Sequence 1. Click Attach Model.

The Discipline form displays.

715


2. Select a discipline and click Confirm.

The Area form displays.

3. Select an area.

4. To attach all models in the selected area, set the Attach by Area / Select Models toggle to Attach by Area. To select individual models in the selected area, set the toggle to Select Models.

716

5. Click Confirm.

If you set the Attach by Area / Select Models toggle to Attach by Area, the system attaches all the models in the selected area. In this case, skip step 6.

If you set the toggle to Select Models, the Model form displays.

6. Select the models to attach and click Confirm.

The system attaches the selected models.

717


Attach Area Volume This option allows you to attach reference models that intersect a particular interference area volume.

Operating Sequence 1. Click Attach Area Volume.

The Discipline form displays.

718

2. Select a discipline and click Confirm.

The Area form displays.

3. Select the interference area volumes for which you want to attach models.

4. Click Confirm.

The system determines which models intersect the selected volumes and attaches the models.

719


Detach Model (replaces 6.2.3) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (p 484 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Apply to Active, Apply to Discipline, and Apply to All commands

• Operating Sequence See the following text for details.

This option is used to detach selected reference model attachments from the active model.

Commands Apply to Active — Detaches only the selected models.

Apply to Discipline — Detaches all attached models in the same discipline as the selected models.

Apply to All — Detaches all attached models.

720

Operating Sequence 1. Click Detach Model.

2. Select the models you want to detach.

Tip: You can use the Apply to Discipline and Apply to All commands to select multiple models at once.

3. Click Confirm.

The system detaches the selected models.

721


Weld Numbering (replaces 10.9) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 554-556 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Delete Unused Weld IDs command See the following text for details.

These commands allow you to create, apply, or delete user-defined weld numbers for welds in the project.

Commands Revise Weld Numbering Settings — Provides options for how user-defined weld

numbers are created and assigned. See Revise Weld Numbering Settings, page 557, for more information.

Load Weld IDs on Segments — Scans each piping model in the active project and loads each weld ID number into pdtable_171. Refer to Load Weld IDs on Segments, page 559, for more information.

Load Weld Numbers — Generates weld numbers at each welded connect point by project, selected areas, models, or individually. For more information, refer to Load Weld Numbers, page 561.

Delete Weld Numbers — Removes weld numbers from each welded connect point for all piping models in the selected group: by project, areas, models, or weld ID. For more information, refer to Delete Weld Numbers, page 563.

722

Delete Unused Weld IDs — Deletes any unused weld ID numbers. For more information, refer to Delete Unused Weld IDs, page 727

Mechanics User-defined weld numbering uses a Weld ID Label (355) to define the search criterion that determines a line break for weld numbering. The label has two purposes:

Defines the weld number prefix for the generated weld number. The combination of the weld ID and the weld sequence number should be unique within the project.


The weld ID Label is user-definable and can include attributes from the Piping Segment Data table. For example, a Weld Number label might be defined as Area (dd_schema.pdtable_12.design_area_number) - Unit Code (dd_schema.pdtable_12.unit_code) Line Sequence No (dd_schema.pdtable_12.line_sequence_no) - Distiller-380105-1

The value formatted by the Weld ID label is stored in the piping segment data in a new column named weld_id (ddschema.pdtable_12.weld_id). This column is populated automatically when any of the values associated with the Weld ID label are modified. That is, it behaves in the same manner as the line_id and line_number_label columns.

Numbering Scheme You can maintain a single sequence for all welds or maintain individual sequences for each weld category (shop, field, or offshore). The weld categories are determined by the range of weld type code list values from codelist 1100.

0 - 19 shop welds 20 - 29 field welds 30 - 39 offshore welds

The highest weld numbers assigned for each Weld ID are stored in the Project Control Database (pdtable_171.weld_id_data) for later use by the Load Weld Numbers command.

Weld Number Assignment For user-defined welds, the Load Weld Numbers command provides the following functionality:

Run as a batch job outside the piping model so that weld numbers can be assigned at model boundaries. In traversing the Weld ID, the command will process across all piping models required to finish the weld number search criteria request.

For each Weld ID, weld numbers are assigned to the line in sequence starting from 1 or from the highest existing weld number on the line. The weld numbers are inserted into the weld_no column for each welded connect point of a pipe, component, or instrument as the items are found.

723


The combination of the weld ID and the weld sequence number will result in unique weld numbers based on user-defined search criteria.

Weld number assignments will use a traversal algorithm controlled by a toggle with the following options:

— Topology (default) - start from the point on the line with the lowest easting, northing, and elevation coordinate value and work along the line.

— Reverse Topology - start from the point on the line with the highest easting, northing, and elevation coordinate value and work back along the line.

The following rules apply when running Load Weld Numbers after weld numbers have already been loaded for some of the pipelines:

If the weld number is undefined, the software will assign the next available weld number, as determined from the highest weld number used for that Weld ID.

New weld numbers will be assigned only to connect points that do not already have a value for weld number.

The setting for Remodel Revision Control will determine how the system assigns weld numbers if there is a mismatch, by having a weld number at one side of a welded mating and a blank on the other side. The software will assign the weld number from the intact half to the blank end or assign a new weld number to both the mating end.

Weld ownership determines the sequence number assignment. If the user has assigned weld ownership to a particular component at the joint, the weld will be numbered in the sequence belonging to the category based on the Weld Type of the owning component. Otherwise, the mating end with the highest coordinate value will own the weld and determine the sequence number assignment.

Weld Number Deletion The Delete Weld Numbers command can be used to delete any existing weld numbers. You can delete weld numbers based on search criteria: Project, Area, Model, or Weld ID(s). This command will delete any loaded PDS weld number (system or user-defined) for the selected entries.

724

Revise Weld Numbering Settings (replaces 10.9.1) Note: The information in this section supersedes the information in the corresponding section of previous versions of the Piping Design Graphics Reference Guide (pp 557-558 in the PDS 7.1 version of the document).


• Model Status Exclusion Range See the following text for details.

These commands allow you to choose from user- or system-defined weld numbers. If you are generating user-defined weld numbers, you can select the traversal and sequencing methods. These settings are stored in pdtable_171 in the Project Control Database.

Field Descriptions Weld Numbering Type — Indicates the method for generating the PDS weld

numbers.

— System Weld Numbers - Weld numbers can be generated using the Load Weld Numbers Command in Piping Designer. Refer to Load Weld Numbers, page 337 for more information.

— User Defined Weld Numbers - Weld numbers can be generated using the Load Weld Numbers command in Piping Design Data Manager. Refer to Load Weld Numbers, page 561 . The other fields on this dialog are available only when this toggle is set to User Defined Weld Numbers.

Weld Number Sequencing Type — Indicates the method for sequencing user-defined weld numbers.

725


— Single Sequence for all Weld Categories - Welds will be numbered sequentially per weld ID.

— Separate Sequence for each Weld Categories - Welds will be numbered sequentially per weld ID and weld category (shop, field, or off-shore).

Remodel Revision Control — Indicates how to handle weld numbers in the situation where one side of a welded connection has been deleted after weld numbers were loaded.

— Assign New Weld Numbers - Delete the weld number from the intact half and assign a new weld number at the mating.

— Reassign from intact half - Assign the existing weld number from the intact half to the new item at the mating.

Line Traversal — Indicates how the pipelies will be scanned for weld numbering. The Topology option indicates that the welds will be numbered from the lowest coordinate, along the main line, and then along any branches. The Reverse Topology option indicates that weld numbers will start with the highest coordinate and move toward the lowest, also moving first along the main line and then along the branches.

Model Status Exclusion Range — Indicates a range of model statuses from codelist 1605 for which the system will not load or delete weld numbers. The system will ignore models with a model status in this range when loading or deleting weld numbers. This exclusion range allows you, for instance, to exclude test models or temporary models by specifying a range that includes those model statuses. The default values of 0 and 0 specify that no models will be excluded when loading or deleting weld numbers.

— Low – Specifies the lower limit of the exclusion range.

— High – Specifies the upper limit of the exclusion range.

726

Delete Unused Weld IDs This command allows you to remove weld IDs that have not been processed for weld numbering, such as IDs for welds that have been deleted or renamed.

Operating Sequence 1. Select the weld IDs to delete.

2. Click Confirm.

The selected weld IDs are deleted from pdtable_171.

727


Index deleting

weld IDs, 727 weld IDs

deleting, 727

weld numbering, 722 deleting IDs, 727 settings, 725

728

design

Documents

trademarks intergraph

assistance intergraph

intergraph logo

reliability of software

commercial computer

copyright copyright

contractor rights

license clause